Introduction To Pali

INTRODUCTION TO
PALl
THIRO E OITION
A.K. Warder
Published by
The Pnli Tex t Society . Oxford
INTRODUCTION TO PALl
INTRODUCTION
TO PALl
Third Edition
A.K. Warder, B.A., Ph.D.

Professor in the Department of East Asian Studies,
University of Toronto
yogad riidhir balfyasf

- Prabhakara
Published by
The Pali Text Society
Oxford
2001
First published 19 63
Second edition 1974
Reprinted as a paperback I9 84
Third edition I99 1
Reprinted I994
Reprinted I995
Reprinted I999
Reprinted 200I
Reprinted 200 5
© Pali Text Society 2005
Hardback
ISBN 0 860I3 40I 6
Paperback
ISBN 0 860I3 I97 I
All rights reserved. Subject to statutory exceptions, no part of this

publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
. means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or
any information storage and retrieval system, without prior permission in
writing from the Pali Text Society, 73 Lime Walk, Headington, Oxford,
OX3 7AD, U.K.
Printed in Great Britain by

Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham, Wiltshire
1'0
I. B. HORNER
dhammakathika vinayadhnra mnhapniiiin
who ill2.,strates, organ£zes and encourages the sttjdy of Pali
dhiraya mahnpannuya khippabhinnaya dhammakathikaya

mettavihariya vinayadharaya bnhussutaya mUditaya
anukampikaya bhagavatiya tassa savako nharp asmi
'I
PREFACE
The purpose of this book is to introduce thc student, by the
most direct path, to the language of the PaH Canon. Existing
primers and rcaders for the study of Pali teach the later
language of the Commcntaries and other medieval writings,
and indecd of the prcsent day-for this very copious and
flexible language is still in use. In Ceylon and other countries
where Pali is taught at school the mcthod is to begin with the
latcr language-in fact the language as the Buddhist monks
still use it-and the ancierit canonical language is taught only
to advanced pupils. To the heginner who knows no Indo-
Aryan language (except, perhaps, Sanskrit), however, the
ancicnt Pali is somewhat easier than the !llcdieval. I t is also
far more interesting. Our interpretation admittedly rests
largely on the exegesis of the Commentarics and the scholarly
works of mcdieval monks, but the beginner nced not at first
study the exegetical literature himself-he can be given the
rcsults of its study, without -the distractions and confusions
of later usages, through the medium of a language hc knows
already. Studying only the ancient texts he will soon become
familiar with the idioms and with the precise meanings of
expressions in those texts, instcad of with broader and vagucr
meanings based on texts ranging over more than two millennia
of usages changing against a changing social background. Our
grammatical analysis is based on the admirable science of the
medieval monks. Their terminology is given, to aid refcrence,
but may of course be ignored by the beginncr. The intention
here is to co\("er PaH grammar and syntax in a compnhensive
manner: in other words to provide a grammar of Pali in its
ancient phase within the framework of graded lessons and
exercises. This grammar differs from earlier grammars in being
a description of the Canonical language as a relatively homo-
- geneous and consistent form of speech, ignoring later usages
(which would confuse the description and sometimes confound
the interpretation). It is also" descriptive" in being an analysis
of Canonical usage as far as possible without historical
.. squinting" at other languages. The historical philologist is
Preface IX
heen chosen with idiomatic Pali versions-often to be found in

the Digha Niktiya--in view, especially the earlier exercises (at
(\ latcr stage the student may try translating idiomatic English
into Pali). By taking a single book (the D'igha Nikiiya), though
a sufficiently extensive one (900 pages in the PTS edition), it
was intended to produce a description ofa single phase of Pali.
as homogeneous as possible, without raising the question
whether all the Canonical texts are contemporary and homo-
geneous. In fact the D'igha langu:l{;e presented here appears to
be sufilciently representative of Canonical Pali as a whole to
provide an adequate introduction to any text, except possibly
the very latest additions to the Canon. The Digha usage
collected here should provide a standard with which future
students can check how far the language of other books may
diverge from it, an investigation of considerable interest.
The texts from which extracts are given expound the
philosophy of Buddhism fairly systematically, but in narrative
and dialogue style against a historical background of the
Buddha's wanderings and meetings with a variety of characters.
The poetical sections of the Canon appear to be in the main
later additions to the original corpus of Dhamma-Vinaya
discourses collected by the followers of the Buddha. They are
very heterogeneous, the work of many poets over several
centuries. No doubt the prose collections also were expanded
and rearranged during the same period, but their homogeneous
style seems to preserve that of the original collection.
The arrangement of the book is based on the experience that
extensive reading is the easiest way to learn a language. The
vocabulary and grammar are made familiar and meanings are
made explicit by sufficient numbers of encounters with t~e
various forms in the course of reading-not in monotonous and
sleep inducing repetition as forms to learn by heart but in
constantly varying contexts where the reader is stimulated
and entertained by the content of a dialogue or narrative.
Since language learning is desirable for the majority of people.
it is highly objectionable if text books are written only from
the viewpoint of the tiny minority of specialists interested in
linguistics for its own sake and able to pick up grammar from
bare paradigms.
x Introduction to Pali
The reader is recommended at first to hurry through the

early lessons and exercises, noting the main features (such as
3rd person singular of a given tense, form of active and passive
sentences, uses of cases, forms of pronouns, · the common
indeclinables, use of participles and other infinite verb forms),
in order to reach the more extensive reading passages which
follow. The grammar set out in the earlier lessons can of
course be consolidated as desired later. Though the lessons and
exercises are numbered, and the lessons arc of roughly com-
parable size (giving an idea of the total extent of grammar to
be studied), it is not intended that the work should be spread
evenly over a similar number of equal intervals of time, such
as weeks. On the contrary, progress should agree rather with
the number of pages to be covered, and the main objective
should be seen as the reading of the long passages in Pali in
the later exercises. Thus about half the lessons (by number)
should be read in the first few weeks in order to enter into the
reading passages as soon as possible. During the reading in
the months that follow the grammar and vocabulary may then
be consolidated at leisure. (If the work is to be distributed over
a three-term university course, for which it has in fact been
planned, it is desirable to reach Exercise r6 by the end of the
first term. The remaining terms might divide the rest of the
lessons and exercises evenly at about seven each.) The reading
passages are of course graded according to the exposition of
grammar in the preceding lessons, with a very few anticipations
explained in footnotes. The most essential grammar has been
covered by Lesson r6 (cases, tenses, participles, commonest
declension and common conjugations, basic syntax including
use of pronouns and adjectives, and an introduction to com-
pounds) and will form a solid basis for reading. Lessons 17-23
add the other declensions as they arc met with in the passages,
and other less common forms, and carry the study of the use
of compounds through the more difficult balmbbihi (completed
in Lesson 24). Lessons 24-30 cover the rarest forms, besides
treating the advanced branches of grammar which give greater
precision in interpretation (and which are important for
composition in Pali if this is required): auxiliary verbs,
derivation, survey of sentence construction.
Preface Xl
The study of early Buddhism will always be the objective of

the majority of those who take up Pali, though in addition to
the interest of the language itself we must stress the importance
of the texts for the study of the history of Indian litQrature,
especially secular literature (literature as literature, .. fine"
literature, Pali kaveyya1?Z: Sanskrit ktivya-the latter embracing
the prose novel and the drama as well as poetry). Buddhism
has been the subject of the most varied fantasies in the West.
The few reliable guides are overlooked in the mass of claptrap,
humbug, and pure fiction. Inevitably serious work is less
readable than journalistic antithesis and exoticism. Moreover
in the field of early Buddhism and Pali studies, at least, even
the most serious scholars have remained obstinately various in
their interpretations. It must still be said that the PaH texts
themselves are the only reliable authority as to their meaning.
The further advance of these studies depends on the deeper
analysis of these texts. Rather than add another volume to
the bewildering mass of books on .. Buddhism", it seems more
constructive to open a door directly on the Pali. The meanings
of the key terms cannot be guessed at, nor determined by
etymology (which in the study of philosophy especially is
utterly irrelevant and misleading) ; they must be elucidated by
a delicate judging of the contexts in which they occur, working
if possible from concrete everyday language (as in the stories
in our earlier reading passages) to the less obvious dialogues of
philosophers. This has been attempted here, and may show the
way for future studies of a more ambitious kind. It. is not to be
expected that all or even most of the meanings suggested in our
vocabularies will prove final, particularly as the present study
is a general survey of the language and not a deep penetration
at particular points. The aim here is rather a demonstration
of method, in which the student may see much of the evidence
used as well as the conclusions offered, and afterwards go his
own way. attadipa viharatha attasara1Ja anannaSara1Ja. The
object is to lay open before the reader the actual texts of
ancient Buddhism, if possible without adding explanations and
interpretations, and to let them speak for themselves in their
own language.
It rem~ins to acknowledge the help of all those (in addition
Preface
...
Xlll
specialized studies of other investigators. The merit of

specializing to establish detail is undeniable, but the significance
of the details appears only in the broad context grasped only
by such a wide-ranging mind as Rhys Davids'. Rhys Davids'
translation of the Digha, including his extensive comments and
introductions to its component dialogues, gave the original
impulse to the study of this text in preference to all others,
with its promise of varied interest and excellent style spiced
with humour.
Since I959 these lessons and exercises have been used in
typescript as the textbook for the first year's PaH Course in
Edinburgh, and those who have taken part in the discussions
(K. H. Albrow, B. Annan, B. B. Kachru, and T. Hill) must be
thanked for contributing greatly by their criticisms to the
elimination of errors and inconsistencies and the clarification
of explanations. Mr. Hill, of the Linguistic Survey of Scotland,
helped especially with the phonetic descriptions and made
many other useful suggestions. Mr. Albrow and the Ven.
Saddhatissa Mahathera have read the whole book in proof and
made a number of corrections, helping to keep the misprints
as few as is humanly possible.
Miss I. B. Homer, President of the Pali Text Society, has
encouraged the work from an early stage-already a major
factor in the completion of a project of daunting .proportions
and doubtful prospects-and has had the great kindness to read
all the lessons and vocabularies and to make many important
suggestions in the light of her unparalleled experience and
learning in this field. May the merit thus transferred to this
volume outweigh the original errors which have . escaped
detection. Finally, my wife has endured far more for this book
than anyone else by typing out the whole illegible and excep-
tionally tangled manuscript, and retyping many revised pages,
with a willing and cheerful heart. ii airyhna isyo rafa8rai
jantu . . . vayMus raf~Srii.i manavhii ya daenii vairim hand]
mizd~m ...
A. K. WARDER.
CONTENTS
PAGE
PREFACE vii
INTRODUCTION-The alphabet. The sentence and its analysis:
words, stems, roots, suffixes, inflections, the 4 .. parts of
speech ", number, person, gender, case 1
Lesson
1. First conjugation. Vowel gradation. Present tense.
Masculine nouns in a. Nominative case. Word
order ...... 10
2. Nominative plural. First conjugation verbs with
irregular stems. Accusative case. Transitive and
intransitive verbs. . 15
3. Nom. and Ace. of bhagavant, brahman, and raja,•.
Seventh conjugation. . . .. 20
4. Past (Aorist) tense. Agreement of verb and agent 23
5. Pronouns: personal and demonstrative. The verb as.
Negation. Aorist of vac. Vocative case . . 28
6. Imperative tense. Quotation (Ii). Sixth conjugation. 34
7. Past participle. Neuter nouns in a. Instrumental case.
Passive sentences 39
8. Further uses of the instrumental case. Present
participle. The pronoun bhavant. Gerund 44
9. Passive conjugation. Feminine nouns in a 51
10. Future tense. Genitive case. . . . 54
11. Adjectives. Third conjugation. Past participles in na.
Aorists of (d)dis and gam. . .. 60
12. Dative case. Aorist of (s)su. Relative pronoun.
Relative clause. Relative indeclinables. Interroga-
tive pronoun. .. Pronominal adjectives". 67
13. Compounds. Tappurisa compounds. Causative
conjugation . . . . . . .. 77
14. Indefinite pronoun. Optative tense. Ablative case.
Dependent words in tappurisa compounds. . 85
15. Fifth conjugation. Dvanda compounds. Negative and
other prefixes to nouns 96
16. Locative case. Future passive participle. Kamma-
dhtiraya compounds. Abbreviation .. 100
17. Declension of masculine and neuter nouns in a,
feminine nouns in ti and pronouns. Adverbial
accusative. Numerals eka, dvi, panca. sataft'.
sahassa1!' . Conjunctive indeclinables. . . 113
IH. Declension of masculine and neuter nouns in i and in.
Second conjugation. Comparison. Ordinal numerals 121
INTRODUCTION
The Alphabet
Pali (pnti) is written in a nnmber of scripts derived from the
ancient Indian Brahmi character, and in the romanized script
used in this book (sometimes with slight variations). The
Indian script was a phonetic one based on an approximately
phonemic analysis of the language, onc letter (akkhara) being
assigned to each significantly distinct sound (va~t~ta} ; l The
derivative scripts preserve this characteristic, and the roman
alphabet likewise has been adapted and enlarged so that one
roman letter is assigned to each Indian letter (counting the
aspirates kh, etc., written as digraphs, as single letters). The
ancient Indian grammarians classified the letters, or rather the
sounds they represent, as shown in the table (p. 2).
Pronunciation: roughly as in English except :-
the aspirate consonants are accompanied by a strong breath-
pulse from the chest, as when uttering E'nglish consonants very
emphatically (e.g. "tush ! " = th-, " pish ! " = ph-, etc.),
the non-aspirate consonants are accompanied by a much
weaker breath-pulse than any English consonants,
c is like ch in "choose" (so is ch, but with strong breath-
pulse). except that the middle of the tongue (jivhtimajiha) only,
not the tip, touches the palate (position as in English g),
the cerebrals are pronounced with the tip of the tongue rather
further behind the teeth than in the English t and d, giving
a somewhat hollow sound (this is the most characteristic sound
of Indian languages), .
the dentals are pronounced with the tip of the tongue
(jivhagga) touching the very tips of the teeth (position as in
I Since Pali probably represents a language spoken between the 5th and 3rd
centuries B .C . the precision of the script can now be checked only by inference
from historical linguistics, including comparison with the statements of
contemporary Indian phoneticians about San~krit, and partly by metrical
considerations (see Lesson 30). Purists might suggest that in analysing the
language of a text of the 5th-3rd centuries B .C . we should (despite the tradition
of spoken Pali and of reciting the ancient texts) take the precaution of speaking
only of " gl'aphctics " and of sub~tituting " graph" for" sound" or " phon- "
throughout-we are after all analysing the language of a written text. In !act
such caution seems unnecessary, since we can assert that the pronunciation
is approximately known.
1
N
·.
Manner of articulation (payaJana)
Consonants (flyanjana) Vowels (s/I,.a) Pure Xasal

(tliggahlfa)
Place of Stops (Plluy"" 1 or vacga)
articula- Semi-
tiOD. "oice- vowel I Sibilant Com- (nasal only.
less voice- voiced pound i.e. no release
(!luina) (fsaka (saka,./I) Short Long
(aghosa)
less (g/wsa-
voiced voiced (voice- (,.assa) (dfg1la) (asa- ill the mouth,
Pllu!-
nOD- aspirate flaftt)
aspirate nasal !1Ia)1 less) ",ana) at'ifla!e111/.
(d1la- nOD- (tUisiRa) .....
i;:-
aspirate (voiced) tnuklrena) ;;;
(sitlli",) nita) aspirate
Gutturals'
(kat#1Iaja) k Ifh g Ch
n
(I)J
11'
(IiJ a ii
e1
--.
<"l
<:)
~
Palatals ....
<:)
(Iiiluja) c ch j jll n y i f
Cerebrals ' ! !h i 411 ~ r, #, J?I .~...

-
(mudd1laja) (tJ 111 (l] [m]
Dentals
(dantaja) t lA tl dll I s
"
Labials o·
(~""j/J) P I'll b bll m v- II li
~- . - - - - _ .. - -_. --
(long vowels are sometimes written G, t,4, the pure nasal sometimes m or I).)
Footnotes on opposite page.
4 Introduction to Pali
o is like English 0 in "note ", "ode (or, before a double

11
consonant, more like 0 in " not", " odd "),

unlike the English vowels, all PaH vowels are free from
diphthongalization (English" sago" tends towards what might
in Pali be written seigou),
the pure nasal is the humming sound produced wheu the
mouth is closed but air escapes through the nose with voicing
(vibration of the vocal chords), it is m without release (con-
sequently without place of articulation except the nose) .1
The distinction of quantity (short and long vowels or syllables)
is very important in PaH, but distinctions of stress are insignifi-
cant. A syllable is long if its vowel is long or if the vowel,
though short, is followed by the pure nasal or by two or more
consonants. A long syllable is exactly equal to two short
syllables. (The total length of a long syllable being constant,
a double consonant tends to compress and shorten a long vowel
preceding it, and itself to be shortened by the long vowel.)
Double consonants are very frequent in PaH and must be
strictly pronounced as long consonants, thus nn is like English
nn in " unnecessary". a
The dictionary order of letters is a, a, i, i, U, U, e, 0, 1fI. (this
ma y also stand in the place of one of the other nasals, according
to the consonant which follows), stops: guttural (k, M, etc.), _
palatal .. . labial, y, r, I, t, th, v, s, h.
The Sentence
The analysis and the learning of any language should be
based on the study of sentences, that is of the language as it is
actually found in use. It is useful to study words in order to
understand the sentences, but, like roots and stems, isolated
words are in fact mere abstractions devised by grammarians
for the analysis of language. (In the Indian tradition of writing
.. words" are not separated and each sentence . appears as
a continuous piece, as in speech. Only by grammatical analysis
1 Consequently we might well follow the practice of some manuscripts, and
also of many ancient inscriptions In dialects close to Pali, of writing only '!I,
and not the lJagga nasals, as the first member of any conjunct, including '!Im
instead of mm (but this is not the practice of modern editors) .
• In English these double consonants are rare and the orthographies tt,
pp, etc., represent something quite different. Only when the English consonants
belong to separate words are they generally pronounced double; thus the Pali
word passa IS similar not to English .. pusser " but to .. pus, sir I ..
Introduction 5
can words be abstracted: marked by certain " inflections".)
It is the sentences which are the natural units of discourse and
which are the minimum units having precise, fully articulated
meaning. For purposes of study we have to assign approximate
meanings to words and · list these in vocabularies, but these
generalized meanings of words are extremely vague, whereas
sentences have exact meanings. In translation one may find
close equivalents for sentences. whilst it is often impossible to
give close equivalents for words.
Ideally one should learn a language as children pick up their
mother tongue, by learning a sufficiently large number of its
sentences, but this would take too long for most students.
Hence the study of words and inflections offers a short cut to
proficiency, though at the risk of lack of precision and of
idiomatic fluency.
The uninflected form of a Pali word, without an ending, is
called the stem. In dictionaries and vocabularies nouns (mima)
are usually listed in their stem forms, less often in the form of
the nominative singular. Verbs (akhyata), however, are usually
given under the form of the third person singular of the present
tense (indicative active), sometimes under the" root ". In this
book verbs are given in the root form (but with their prefixes
where these are used, hence in the alphabetical position of the
prefixes in these cases), nouns in the stem form except in the
case of stems in -a, where it is more convenient to learn them
in the form of the nominative singular since thereby one learns
the gender at the same time (-0 = masculine, -a1f£ = neuter).
The prefixes (upasagga) , of which there are about twenty,
are regarded as a separate part of speech in Pali (whose
characteristic is that it cannot stand alone, but only be prefixed
to another word). The various verbs, consisting of prefix
+ root, have all to be learned separately as regards meanings.
Although the separate prefixes and roots can be assigned
meanings-usually rather broad and vague ones-the meaning
of a prefix + root cannot usually be accounted for adequately
.as simply the product of the two separate meanings. A good
many roots are used also without prefixes, but prefixed forms
are very much more frequent in PalL A number of verbs have
two or three prefixes to their roots.
In theory (elaborated by the ancient Indian grammarians and

their Sinhalese and Burmese pupils) all words in PaH are
ff derived 1 from a limited number of" roots". In other words
11
all words are analysable into roots plus suffixes ( = any modifica-
tion). A root (dhtitu) is an element, not further analysable at the
grammatical or lexical levels, having a very vague and general
meaning. It is rarely, if ever, found in its pure state (without
suffix or prefix) except in grammar books and dictionaries. An
indefinite number of stems (i.e. words in their" stem forms ")
may be derived from any root by the addition of suffixes and
by certain changes to the root itself, such as lengthening the
vowel, substituting a compound vowel, inserting a nasal,
reduplicating the root or contracting a semivowel + a into the
vowel corresponding in place to the semivowel. For the
beginner it saves time in the case of nouns to neglect
the processes of derivation and learn the derived words and their
precise meanings as they are used in the language. In the case
of verbs the derivation has to be noticed since each verb has
a variety of stems for its different parts (tenses, participles,
etc.), all bearing the same meaning except for the grammatical'
distinctions of tense, etc. (a glance at the table of Roots and
Principal Parts will show the patterns of "derivation", or
rather it will show in most cases the linguistic material on the
basis of which a root has been set up as a common denominator).
After this derivation of word stems (linga) by the addition
of suffixes (Paccaya) to roots (and sometimes of secondary
suffixes to these suffixes), inflectional endings (vibhatti) are
added to form actual words (pada) as they occur in sentences
in different grammatical relations (the inftections corresponding
to .grammatical relations: the grammatical distinctions we
1 .. Derived" here must not be taken to imply a historical process of

derivation (such as is given, e.g., in the PaH Text Society's Pali-ElIglish
Dictionary, which., givell reconstructed Proto-lndo-European roots for PaH
verbs), but a synchronic grammatical system (strictly PaH roots).
• Thus the derivation of nouns may be regarded as non-grammatical (not
belonging to a finite sYlltem) and as lexical, and their forms may lIimpl) lJe
listed in a dictionary with their various meanings, whereas the derivation of
verb forms is purely srammatical (the forms belong to finite systems) and
non-lexical (the meanings of verb forms derived from one verb differ only
according to the grammatical system of tenses, persons, etc.). The definitions
of .. lexical" and" Ilrammatical .. are due to Dr. M. A. K. Halliday.
I ntroducti01t 7
make are so many descriptions of formal distinctions occurring
in Pali).
Thus far the analysis of sentences into words, roots, suffixes
and inflections. We have noticed also that words may be
classified as verbs (these are defined as taking the tensc-
inflections -ti, etc.). nouns (defined as taking the case inflections
si,l etc.) and prefixes (defined as prel1xcd to other words). There
is one other class, that of indeclinablcs (nipcUa), defined as not
taking any inflections. Examples of indeclinables are eva1Jt.
meaning" thus", "so," ti, meaning" cnd quote " and yena,
meaning " towards ".
In Pali these four" parts of speech" (Padajiiti: "classes of
words ") were recognized by the ancient Indian grammarians,
according to the types of inflection or lack of inflection or to
their dependepce as prefixes (as always in the Indian gram-
matical tradition. description proceeds by way of accounting
for the formal distinctions found in analysing a language in the
simplest way possible, and not by setting up conceptual
categories and attempting to fit the forms into them).
In Pali we find two numbers (" singular" and" plural ") in
both nouns and verbs, three persons in the verb and in pronouns
(" third .. = " he .. , etc., "second" = " you ", "first" =
" I It: pronouns are not regarded as a separate class of words
but as a kind of noun, although their inflections do not entirely
coincide with those of nouns). eight cases in the noun and three
genders (" masculine", " neuter", and " feminine It) in nouns.
As a rule "substantive" nouns have only one gender each,
whilst "adjectives" (and pronouns) have all three ge,n ders
according to the nouns with which they" agree" as attribute-
words: the inflections of adjectives are the same as those of
I Here" si " is a symbol for any inflection to be described as .. nominative

singular ", it is not itself one of these inflections (which are very varied, so that
no common denominator is apparent), It is as if one were to call it .. x ",
explaining: .. where ' x' = any inflection described as 'nominative sin-
gular'... In the case of -li this is the actual int1ection of the third person
singular present tense of all verbs. Thus in one sense there is only one" con-
jugation .. of the present tense of Pali verbs, since all take the same set of
inflections; the seven or eight conjugations distinguished by the grammarians
are based on the differences of present stem formation from the roots. On the
other hand there are several" declensions" of nouns, since their inflections
vary considerably according to their stems (in -a , -an, -alii, -i, -11, -aI', etc.).
I ntrodtection 9
Pali sentences do not all contain verbs. When it is asserted
simply that a thing is something (as epithet or attribute or
" predicate ") two nouns (one of them usually an adjective or
pronoun) may merely be juxtaposed. Usually the" subject"
stands first. In translating into English the verb" to be " must
be used. e.g.: eso sama~o, " this (is) the philosopher" (eso is
a pronoun, nominative singular masculine, meaning .. he ",
" this ", sama~o, meaning" philosopher", is a noun like loko).
This type of sentence is especially common in philosophical
discourse, e.g. : ida'l!' dukkha1fl., .. this is unhappiness" (ida1fl. is
a pronoun, nominative singular neuter, meaning" it ", .. ihis ",
dukkha1fl., meaning "unhappiness ", is a neuter noun in -a,
nominative singular).
LESSON I
First Conjugation
The inflection of the present tense (indicative active) of
a verb of the bhii- or first conjugation (bhuvtidi ga~a) ,is as
follows :-
0
Singlllar Plural
3rd person
(PalhanlaP!lri.~a) I U he HI bhalJati .. he is .. bhavallti
" it Ir. ff she", " they"
2nd person
(nlajjhimaPIlYisa) .. rou .. hhat'asi hhauatha
1st person
(utta-,napurisa) .. I "," wc " I1Ilavti mi bhaviill,a
(In the old Indian systems of grammar the order of persons is the reverse of
the European: this is followed here as the third person is the most frequent in
use and is the form given in most dictionaries. The European names of the
persons are used. It is worth noting also that in the Indian tradition students
learn person by person-and in nouns case by case-and not number by
number, thus we would read across the page: bhavati bhat1anli. bhavasi
bhavalha. bhalJiimi bhaviillla. This practice is recommended.)
The root of this verb is bMi, and the meaning" to be ". The
root appears more clearly in other forms derived from it, such
as the past participle Muta, " been." The theory of derivation
of the present tense stems of verbs of the first conjugation is
that within certain limits the vowel in the root is
" strengthened" by alteration into the compound vowel
nearest in place of articulation (see next section: "Vowel
Gradation "). Where the vowel is a, cl, e, or 0 no change is made;
where it is followed by a double consonant no change is made;
the long vowels i and ii are not changed when followed in the
root by any consonant. Thus the changes are: i becomes e and
tt becomes 0 unless two consonants follow; i becomes e and
I The literal meanings would be pa!hama = .. first". maJjhillla = .. middlc ".
u/lama = .. last "0 Inuian grammarians follow the reverse orucr to ', that
traditional in Europe. for very sound reasons. \Ve of course translate not
literally but into the actual English equivalents.
10
(hi' is in fact a weaker form of bM, and 0 here a " contraction "
of ava. In the present tense hoti is far commoner than bhavati,
which is probably used only for special effect: elevated or
poetic speech. On the other hand in certain tenses only the
forms from bh~, are used.)
Vowel Gradation
The Indian grammarians described the commonest (in the
old Indo-Aryan languages) processes of strengthening of roots,
or of syllables generally in morphology (derivation), as a pre-
fixing of a to the letter actually strengthened. There are then
three grades: zero or weak (av~uldhika: no a-), strong (gu~a :
a- prefixed), lengthened (vuddhi = " increase": a second
a- prefixed). In the case of vowels (which is the most important)
the three grades are seen for example in: bhuta (zero), bhavati
and hoti (strong), bhaveti (lengthened). The system of vowel
gradation may be set out as follows :-
Zero I Strong Lengthened

_I
I a if
i or f e or ay , I or Ily
fI or U o or all o I or ifll
Present Tense
The present (vattamdnd) tense (lakara) is used to express
present (paccuppanna) time (kala), the limits of which are
somewhat vague, or indefinite time (timeless statements such
as " eternal truths "), sometimes the immediate future (which
may include a shade of" imperative" sense; cf. Eqglish " I'm
going ") and sometimes the past (" historic present "). It is
used to express the duration of an action until", a fixed If
1 Roots such as (A) "a", and IIad could be given as (A)"", and lid (" zero grade
of", and d "). but these forms are never found. The convention is to give them
already in the strong grade form. then, as they are already strong they are
not further strengthened in the derivation of the first conjugation present
tense stem.
I The theoretical prefixed a- is merged in , or o.
14 I ntroduction to Pali
the masculine -a declension all are formally distinct; elsewhere

some are formally alike, but the colligations must still be
distinguished. )
The nominative (pathama, paccatta) case is used for the agent
(or" subject ") of an active sentence (or" subject" of an active
verb).l E.g. briihma1;to passati, .. the priest sees ".
The nominative case is used for any attribute of an agent in
the nominative, including one" predicated" 2 of it by means of
a verb meaning" to be " (sometimes there is no verb in PaH in
this type of sentence: see above, last paragraph of the Intro-
duction). The attribute usually follows the agent 3, E.g. (with
verb): briihmatJo mahiimatto hoti, "the priest is a minister".
Without verb: eso sama1;to, .. this is the philosopher." This
curious feature of verbs meaning "to be" (the .. copula "),
distinguishing them from all other verbs, must be firmly fixed in
mind. When there is a verb expressing an action as well, such
an attribute may still be applied to the agent (without any verb
meaning" to be "): briihma1;to mahiimatto passati, .. the priest
(who is) the minister sees". As far as possible in PaH words
referring to the same thing agree in case, number, gender, and
person (exception: cases of relative pronouns).
The nominative is used with (" governed by " in traditional
European terminology) certain indeclinables relating it to the
action, in place of another case related directly to the verb.
E.g. yena giimo ... upasa1Jtkamati = "he approaches ...
towards the village".
The nominative form is used when a word is quoted or cited
(to refer simply to itself). E.g. kiiyo ti = .. , body' ". (It is in
accordance with this convention that Indian dictionaries and
grammars cite words in the nominative, not in the stem form.)
1 See Lesson 7 for the nominative as patien,t of passive sentences.
• Logical terms sllch as .. subject" and .. predicate" are as a rule to be
eschewed in linguistic analysis. Their use in traditional European grammar is
unscientific and misleading, what is needed being terms suited to the descrip-
tion of a natural language, not of a few artificial propositions in traditional
European logic. Sometimes we can make a rough use of these words in our
descriptions, though not of their traditional definitions. It may be noted as
a general rule that in PaH a .. predicate", like an attribute or epithet. goes in
the same case as its" subject". In grammar we may distinguish" nexus"
(cf... predicate ") and" junction" (adjective and noun).
I It thus contrasts in position with adjectives, which usually precede the
nouns they qualify (except when several adjectives qualify a single noun,
cf. Lesson 11).
Lessolt 2 15
Word Order
The normal prose order of a sentence is : agcnt-attribute-
patient (Lesson 2)-action, thus the verb is usually at the end.
The order is very rardy of grammatical value (the agent will
still he the agent evCfl if it follows the patient or the verb), but
it is stylistically important.
EXERCISE 1
Translate into English :-
tathagato bhasati mahamatto nisidati
upasako pucchati samaQo tathligato hoti
puriso evatp vadati putto upasako passati
devo amanusso hoti brahmaQo upasatpkamati
evatp vadami manusso jivati
khattiyo pakkamati evatp vadanti
Translate into Pali :-
The man speaks The minister is a priest
The ascetic is " thus-gone .. The noble approaches
The priest goes away The god dies .
The god says so You say so (Sing.)
There is a time You say so (Plur.)
The son sits down We say so
LESSON 2
Nominative Plural
The nominative plural of masculine nouns in a has the
inflection d. E.g. giinta, " villages."
First Conjugation Verbs with Irregular Stems

Many verbs included in the first conjugation have irregulal'ly
formed present stems. Some show the root unchanged where
strengthening would be expected, others have the root enlarged
or altered in various ways. When a suffix beginning with
a consonant is added to a root eJ:).ding in a consonant the
preceding consonant is often "assimilated" to the following
one. E.g.: s + ch > eeh. (In a consonant cluster only the last
Lesson 2 19
(It despise ") and anu-bhu (It experience ") are transitive, whilst
piitu(r)-bhu (It appear") and (p)pa-hu (It be able") are in-
transitive. The roots bhu and hu are neither.
Vocabulary
Nouns inflected like loko :-
aggo top
attho prosperity. wealth, welfare. purpose, meaning.
subject-matter
dhammo (true, natural) doctrine. natural element, natural
substance. natural phenomenon 1
patto bowl
pamado negligence. pastime
pi1)~o alms
bhavo existence, good fortune
vddo debate, argument, statement
satto being, creature
saddo noise. report
sugato well-gone (title of the Buddha)
EXERCISE 2
sugato dhammarp bhasati brahmaQo purise pucchati
upasako pattarp aharati deva cavanti
manussa bhavaI11 icchanti vadaI11 vadanti
gamarp gacchama putta pabbajanti
samaQo agacchati satto titthati
tatbagato sugato hoti samaQe atthaI11 pucchanti
Translate into PaH :-
They go to the minister
The men see the ministers
The god. who is not a human being, approaches the" thus-
gone"
1 This word has several meanings, for some of which it is hard to find
English equivalents. The central idea is that of .. nature ", .. a nature ",
.. a naturally occurring phenomenon ", hence a (true) doctrine conforming to
nature, to reality. The universe, including imponderable and mental pheno-
mena as well as ponderable matter, is regarded as consisting of a finite number
(le88 than 100) of these substances and phenomena.
You ask the philosopher (about) the doctrine

We ask the philosopher who is .. well-gone"
The" thus-gone" gives up negligence
The lay disciples enter the village
The ascetics meditate
The substance remains
He reaches the tdp
Wc ask the philosopher the meaning
He gives alms
LESSON 3
D(~cle1l!iion
oj bhagavant, brahman, and l'ajan
A few masculine nouns in stems other than a are of common
occurrence. The usual title for the Buddha in PaH texts has
the stem form Magavant, meaning the fortunate", the 11 11
bountiful ", .. the Master" {translations vary: "the blessed

onc", "the exalted one", etc.}. The inflections in the
nominative and accusative are as follows :-
Singular Plural
Nom. /,hagcwii
!Jlmgavallln 1
Acc. bhagul'antal!1
1 J\·.n.-ExcC'pt in the masculine <leelenllion in a and in the present participle

the accusative })IIITal is always the same as the nominative.
The noun brahma", meaning" God" (the supreme being and

creator in the Brahmanical religion of the hereditary priesthood
of India), is inflected in the nominati\'e and accusative singular
as follows :-
Singular
Nom. ura/mlll
Ace. bYllhmiinalll
The noun rtijan! .. king ", is similarly inflected in these cases.

Lesson 4 23
upasakaq1 brahmaQaq1 dhareti

raja purise amanteti
brahmaQo brahmanarp. passati
raja khattiyo mah1imattaq1 pucchati
brahmaQa riijanaq1 vadanti
puriso bharaq1 chaQQeti
evaq1 kathcnti
kalaql paccayaQ1 paiiiiapenti
The lay disciples salute the fortunate onc
He binds the hands
I experience the result
The king addresses the priest _
The priest who is minister speaks thus to the fortunate one
Existence (is) the condition
He remembers the meaning
The fortunate one dresses
The gods discuss the matter
The fortunate one asks the king
He enters the dwelling
You rebut the argument
The king takes counsel
He renounces gain
LESSON 4:
Past (Aorist) Tense
The usual past tense, which is called the" aorist " (ajjatani)
tense, is generally formed directly from the root (more rarely
from the present stem) by adding special inflections. Sometimes
the vowel a is prefixed to the root as an indication of past time,
though the difference of inflections avoids ambiguity in most
cases. This a goes between the prefix (upasagga), if any, and
the root. It is called the" augment". The root is sometimes
changed to form a special aorist stem. There are three main
forms of aorist according to the stem used, having some
Introduction to Pali
differences in inflection also (they correspond only partially to

the conjugations of the present tense).
The first form of the aorist, followed by the majority of verbs,
simply adds a set of inflections beginning with the vowel i to
the root (sometimes to the present stem). It may be illustrated
from the root (k)kam with the prefixes ttpa and sa1ft. The
augment is not used with this root.
Singular Plural
3rd person IIPasa~kami. " he approached .. IIPasa~kami~su
2nd person flpasaftlkami llpaSaftlkamittha
1st person upasaftlkamiftl lIpasaftlkamimha

(or -imha 1)
1 The 1st person plural aorist is of infrequent occurrence in the texts and the
manuscript tradition is not consistent about the quantity of the final a.
The following verbs are inflected in the same way :-

as (to be) asi
he was, it was (note pres{lnce of
augment: a + a > a) (but 3rd pI.
is iisu1ft)
(p)pa-(k)kam pakkami he went away, pI. pakkami1ftsu (the
singular has irregular lengthening of
the root vowel in all three persons,
the plural is regular) .
(j)jhe jhiiyi he meditated (using the present stem)
pucch pucchi he asked
bandh bandhi he bound
bhiis abhiisi he said, he spoke (this root takes the
augment)
(p)pa-(v)vaj pabbaji he went forth
(p)pa-vis pavisi he entered, he went in (note presence
of augment between prefix and root,
forming a long vowel: pa + a >
pa)
ni-sid nisidi he sat down
Lesson 4
A second form of aorist is taken by verbs of the seventh

conjugation. Here an aorist stem is formed by adding s to the
present stem in e. The singular inflections are as in the first
form of aorist. The 3rd person plural inflection is U1!1-; the other
plural persons are not used (> first form on strong root).
Singular Plural
3rd person deses;, .. he taught .. desesu",
2nd person desesi dcsitf/ra
1st person dests;", desimha
(desesi coincides in form with the 2nd person singular present and has to be
distinguished by the context.)
Similarly inflected are :-

kalh kathesi he related, he told
I
dev (to lament) paridevesi he lamented, he grieved I
(with the prefix
pari, meaning
.. round ",
" around ")
a-mant · amantesi he addressed
A third form of aorist is taken by a small but important
group of verbs, mostly with roots ending in a. Like the second
form it has a stem in s and the usual singular inflections, but the
plural inflections begin with the vowel a. The root kaT, cc to
make," to do," "to work," takes this form of aodst after
It
changing irregularly to ka. Several verbs of this group take

the augment.
Singular Plural
3rd person aliasi, .. he made .. aliatfls u
2nd person akasi akaUha
1st person aliasi", akamhcl

I ntroduction to Pali
Similarly inflected are :-

(!)!hti althiisi he stood, he remained
dii adtisi he gave
(p)pa-hii pahtisi he renounced
The root ha is very irregular in the aorist. The singular takes
strengthening (gu~a) and s, the 3rd plural substitutes e for the
root vowel :-
Singular Plural
3rd person allosi, .. he was, .... there was .. allcstl/1t
2nd person ahosi ahlllJattha
1st person ahosi,!1 allllmha
(The root bha is seen in the aorist only with prefixes, when it usually follows
the above inflections: -bhosi, etc.)
The aorist is used for all kinds of past actions, including

besides the" historical" or " narrative" past particularly the
(present-) perfect: desesitJt = " I have taught (When more
H,
precise demarcations of time relations are needed, participles

are used in conjunction with the main verb, as will be illustrated
. below-Lesson 24.) The second and first persons plural are not
often found in the PaH texts. The third person is extremely
common, both singular and plural.
Agreement of Verb and Agent
When a verb has two or more agents it usually agrees with
the sum of the agents and is plural; more rarely it may agree
with the nearest agent only or with the agents taken as a collec-
tive, being singular. If the persons conflict, the second takes
precedence over the third and the first over both,
Vocabulary
Some indeclinables (nipata) :-
atha then (atha kho combined mean" then", "more-
over" "rather H)
ettha here
I have taught the doctrine

The nobles approached the prince
I spoke thus
The prince went forth
LESSON 5
Pronouns: Personal and Demonstrative
The personal pronouns are inflected as follows :-
FIRST PERSON (stem ma(d)) 1
Singular Plural
Nom. aha"., .. I " maya"., I I

wc "
Ace . ma'fl, ff me " anfhe, ,. us "
SECOND PERSON (stem ta(d))
Singular Plural
Nom . tva'?l, I f thou ", u you"
Ace. la'?l }"..""... you"

(or Iva'?l)" thee ", "you"
THIRD PERSON (stem la (d))
Singular Plural
Masculine Feminine Masculine Feminine
Nom.
Ace.
so, he
.
10
(sometimes sa)
tam , "him"
It sa, 11 she
la,!" ,. her I'

JI
}, ta
1 The declension of pronouns is very irregular. The forms given as .. stems"

are those which appear in compounds (Lesson 13). (In practice the 1st and
2nd person pronouns are hardly used in compounds.)
. ..... . _- _ ... _._._- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(stem cta(d))
Singular Plural
Masculine Femi- Mascu- Femi-

nine Neuter line nine Neuter
Nom. eso esa
Acc.
(sometimes esa)
eta,!, eta,!,
} elal!1 or elaci ele etil eliini
Another demonstrative pronoun, also .. deictic" or

" present" and translatable " he .. , " she", " it .. , or .. this"
and so hardly 1 distinguishable in meaning from eta(d), is
iniiccted as follows :-
(stem ieial!1-)
Singular Plural
Femi- Mascu- Femi-

Masculine nine Neuter line nine Neuter
NOIll.
--...-- -
ay"",
Acc. ~ma'.)t
} ida,!, ime illla imtilli
There being no " definite article" in Pali the demonstrative

pronouns are sometimes used where English would use the
definite article, and may sometimes be translated .. the"
rather than " he .. I " that", 11 this", etc.
Demonstrative pronouns must agree in number and gender
with the nouns to which they refer.
The Verb as
The verb as, .. to be .. , asserts with emphasis the existence of
something or somebody. (On the other hand hoti is not emphatic
and is used also to state attributes: the minister is a priest,
etc., and of something which happens or .. becomes": a man
I \Vhcre there is any distinction ida'7l- i.ndicates a nearer object or emphasizes
the nearness : this one, whilst eta (d) is simply indefinite.
32 Introduction to PaU
nUl with the third person appears regularly in polite

address (see next Lesson).
A double negation is equivalent to a strong affirmation :-
mti h' eva kilo Immaro na rajja1J1-kiircsi, " don't let the prince
not rule (ktiresi: aor. 3 sg.) the kingdom (rajja1J1-}",
i.e. let him rule, he must rule.
A orist of vac
The aorist of the verb vac, to say, is very irregular :-
Singular Plural
3rd person avoca, " he said " aVOCII~1
avor.a avocrtllha
2nd person (also at/ac/lttha)
(also avaca)
1st person atloca'?l avoclfllllla

(or -IIII/JII1)
Vocative Case
The vocative case, or " nominative of address", of masculine
nouns in a has in the singular merely the uninflected stem:
deva, ;' 0 king." The plural is the same as the nominative
plural. The vocative is used " enclitically ", i.e. it does not
stand at the beginning of a sentence.
Vocabulary
Verb of the first conjugation :-
apa-i apeti he goes from, he goes away (poetic)
Indeclinables :-
tlt~thi silent, silently
tena this way, that way
pi also, too (like ca this follows the word, or the
first word of the phrase, connected by it)
ha indeed
Lesson 5 33
Masculine nouns in a :-
usaro lord, god
nirodho cessation (of unhappiness and of perception,
sensation and mental states), peace of mind.
calm
paribbtijako wanderer
maM.raja great king, king (nom. sg. as riijan-, but rest
follows a declension on stem -raja-, e.g.:
ace. mahiiraja'1!'t. The nom. pI. may be
written either ",a or ",ano)!
EXERCISE 5
Translate into English ;-
ReQu rajaputto rajfmal11 Disampatil11 etad avoca. ma kho tvarp
dcva paridcvesi. atthi deva Jotipalo nama maQavoputto ti.
at ha kho raja Disampati purisam amantesi.
ahal11 ime dhamme desesil11 .
raja khattiyo tal11 purisal11 et ad avoca
ma samaQarp upasarrkami
aharp purohito brahmaQo ahosil11
ahal11 asmi brahma issaro
idal11 a voca bhaga va 2
te rajaputtarp avocul11
ma saddam akattha
so nirodharp phusati
samaQa amha
na tarp deva vaiicemi
eso maharaja bhagava
mayarp bhagavantarp upasal11kamimha
atthi kayo
upeti pi apeti pi
evam 3 ctarp brahmaQa
1 In compounds words sometiml's lose their characteristic stems, the new

compound-words being assimilated to the a declension .
• Rhetorical and emotive inversion of agent and verb, for emphasis. In their
context these words follow the utterance of an important statement.
~ '1' may change to III when a vowel follows in close junction.
end of any passage in direct speech. It is used also to mark

something thought. Anything quoted, whether a line of verse
or a single word (e.g. in giving a definition or in mentioning
a word or concept : kiiyo ti = " body' ", kusalan ti 1 = // the
I
word good ' ", // the good ", // the concept of the good "), is
I
marked in the same way. Indirect speech is exceedingly rare in

PaH, so that instead of such English constructions as // he said
(or thought) that so and so " or // when he asked so and so " we
find direct speech with ti: // so and so ti he said."
Any short vowel immediately preceding ti is lengthened. The
pure nasal 1Jt is changed to the dental nasal n.
eva1Jt devii ti; // (it is) so, 0 king" (end quote)
n' eso n' atthi ti vadami, // I don't say This doesn't exist '."
I
(Here the first na goes with vadami and the second with
atthi; the quotation starts after the first na, with
eso ...
fl ")
This indeclinable sometimes appears in a fuller form: iti,

which is emphatic and may generally be translated // this ",
If that", thus". It may refer to a statement (or a philo-
If
sophical view or conception) from a distance instead of marking

the end of the actual words. The two forms may be used
together for emphasis.
Sixth Conjugation
Verbs of the tan or sixth conjugation (tanadi ga~a) 2 form
present stems with the suffix o. The personal endings are the
same as for the first conjugation. From the root kar, " to do,"
// to make," // to work," the present tense is :-
Singular Plural
3rd person harot; haronti
2nd person haros; Aarotha
1st person haromi Itaroma
The imperative tense is karotu (3rd sing.), karontu (3rd piur.),

karohi (2nd sing.), etc. (rest as present).
I husa/at!' is a neuter word (nom. sing. in .at!') . Before ti. 'P > n.
• Some grammars reckon this as the seventh conjugation.
Lesson 6 37
Similarly conjugated are :-

(p)pa-ap(p) pappoti he attains, · he arrIves (a rare,
" poetic" verb; cf. in ordinary
speech phusati and upasm.nkamati)
vi-a-kar vyakaroti he explains
tlln tanoti it expands, it stretches
sak(k) sakkoti he can, he is able to (used with the
infinitive-Lesson 19)
(In the aorist this verb follows the third form, with s, but
k + s > kh, hence: asakkhi, he could)
kar is the only verb of this conjugation which is frequently
used. It'is found in many idioms, such as: take in the hand,
assume an appearance or expression, perform a feat, make
a reply; also to do an action which is specified by a patient-
noun, as sajjhaya1ft karoti, .. he does studying," i.e. "he
studies" .
Vocabulary
Verbs of the first conjugation :-
am-t-sas (to rule) anusasati he advises, he instructs (used
(the prefix anu especially of ministers of a
means" after .. , king, also figuratively of a
" following") ~ teacher)
abhi-(k)kam abhikkamati he goes forward, he advances
a-i eti he comes (the vowels coalesce:
only the context can decide
whether the meaning IS
goes " or .. comes ")
If
khad khiidati he eats, he bites, he chews

pa pivati he drinks (irregular stem)
(p)pa-hu pahoti he can (more emphatic than
sak(k)
Masculine nouns in a :-
okdso opportunity
tht1po monument, pagoda
pariyayo course (lit. and fig., including discourse and manner
of doing something) .
va~ttto colour, beauty, praise, class
sankho conch (trumpet)

sajjhiiyo learning, stUdying, study
Indeclinable :-
bhavatJ1- good fortune!, best wishes! (in greetings, with
imperative of as)
EXERCISE 6
ehi tval11 purisa. yena Jotipalo max;tavo ten' 1 upasal11kama.
J otipalal11 maQa val11 eval11 vadehi ... eval112 deva ti ... so
puriso jotipalal11 maQavarp etad avoca: bhavam a atthu
bhavantal11 jotipalal11 4 maQaval11. raja Disampati bhavan-
tal11 jotipalal11 maQaval11 amanteti ... jotipulo max;tavo
yena raja Disampati ten' upasal11kami. jotipalal11 maQaval11
raja Disampati etad avoca. anusasatu bhava11l jotipaio
max;tavo ... te atthe anusasati.
gaccha tva11l Ananda
idarp hara
etu bhagava
ayarp. samaQo Gotamo 5 agacchati
nibbethehi sace pahosi
desetu sugato dhamma11l
pivatha khadatha ti
abhikkama maharaja
thuparp. karonti
etha tumhe
Let the fortunate one sit down
Bring that!
That man must come
Let the priest not trouble
1 Elision of final a before another vowel.
I eva1/t with a vocative as here signifies assent. It may be translated" so (be
it) " or simply" yes".
3 'ft > m before a vowel.
• This greeting is idiomatic, using the accusative of the person greetE'd with
an indeclinable and the imperative of the verb as; cf. the "accusative of
specification of state ", Lesson 2.
6 Name of the clan (gotta) to which the Buddha belonged. Used like a
surname.
Lesso1l 7 39
He makes an opportunity
The king said this: "We must go "
I do not say this world doesn't exist
Give that up !
Let not the honourable Govinda go forth
Study I (plur.)
Ask the fortunate one (about) this subject-matter
This conch makes a noise
LESSON 7
Past Participle
The past participle is usually formed from the root with the
suffix ta or ita. Thus:-
(p)pa-(k)kam pakkanta gone away, left (assimilation
m + t > nt)
kar kata done (final r elided)
kilam kilanta tired
kup (to be kupita angered
angry)
gam gata gone (final m elided)
adhi-gam adhigata understood
(the prefix adhi
means" over ")
a-gam iigata come
S411'-anu-a-gam samannagata endowed, acquired (ame-a
> a1wii > annii by assimi-
lation)
ni-(g)gah (to niggahita refuted
seize, to grasp)
cha#, cha#,ita thrown away, abandoned
(p)pa-(ii)1iap paiiiiatta declared, prepared (p assimi-
lated to t)
(!)thii thita stood, stayed (final vowel
elided)
S4tl"-tuS (to be santuUha contented, satisfied
pleased)
dis desita taught (present stern is used)
(d)dis d#tha seen (irregular assimilation)

pucch ptt#ha asked (assimilation cch + la
> #h)
bandh baddha bound (nasal elided, t assimi-
lated to dh)
bhiis Mast'ta spoken
bhii bhitta been
ni(r)-ma (to nimmita created
measure)
vi-muc (to vimutta freed
become free)
ni-mdh (to niruddha stopped, ceased, ended
obstruct)
vac vutta said (irregular formation: a
form of weakening of the
Toot)
(p)pa-(v)vaj pabbajita gone forth
sam santa calmed
(s)s1l (to hear) suta heard
The past participle is normally passive (kammapada) in
meaning. but past participles of intransitive verbs (and even of
some transitive verbs used intransitively). especially of those
meaning " go ". "move". "go forth". are sometimes con-
structed as active. The past participle may be equivalent to
a (normally passive) finite verb in the past tense. It then
appears in the nominative case and agrees in number and
gender with the agent (if active) or the patient (if passive).
Usually it indicates the" present-perfect", as in conversation,
e.g. :-
maya1J1- . , , upasa1J1-kantii. " we have approached, , ,", " we
have come,. ," (announcing their arrival to see
someone),
Instead of standing alone as equivalent to a finite verb the
past participle may be accompanied (usually followed) by the
present tense of verbs meaning" to be ", stressing the .. present~ ·
perfect" sense,l
1 These constructions, which are called .. periphrastic ". will be discussed
further in Lesson 24.
case. A common construction is the past participle used as an

impersonal (bhdva) passive verb and inflected in the nominative
singular neuter as sentence-verb :-
eva1fl- me suta1fl-, "thus it was heard by me," or "thus
I have heard" (" present-perfect ").
If there is a patient, and the action is expressed by a past
participle, the patient will be in the nominative case and the
participle will agree with it in gender, case, and number, as if it
were an adjective :-
maya ime sattti nimmitti, " by me these beings were (lhave
been) created," " I (have) created these beings."
N.B.-The agent (kattar) may be expressed either by the
nominative or by the instrumental, and the patient (kamma)
either by the accusative or by the nominativc, according to the
active or passive construction of the sentencc.
The stems in consonants form instrumentals with the
inflection a :-
Stem Instrumental
bhagavant bhagavata
brahman brahmuna
f'ajan f'afHili (j + n
assimilated to 'in)
The other pronouns form instrumentals as follows :-
Instrumental Instrumental
. Nominative Singular Plural
tva'fl tayli, le tllmhehi

so and tal.n lena tehi
sa tiiya tiihi
imina (M. and N.) illlehi (M. and N.)
aya'!1 { imiiya (F.) ilt/ahi (F.)
Neuter nouns in a, nominative singular :-

iisana1Jt seat
kamma1Jt work
The wanderer is (hoti) contented

Death (is) misery
I have heard this
I did the work
He gives a donation
The body (is) tired
LESSON 8
F1Irther Uses of the Instrumental Case
The other more or less distinct uses of the instrumental case
may be noted here for reference.
Accompaniment: brahmat.tena saddhittt, " with the priest,"
Cl accompanied by the priest."
The indeclinable saddhittt, " with," is generally used in these
expressions, following the noun, and we may equally say that
saddhitp, requires the instrumental. .. Talking", "discussing"
(mant) with a person need not take saddhittt.
Possession (endowment): a past participle meaning "en- .
dowed with ", or the instrumental of the reflexive pronoun
aUan (see Lesson 22), is used with the word indicating the
virtue or vice in question in the instrumental: silehi samannii-
galo, " endowed with virtues."
Filled .. with water"; filled "with happiness"; filled
" with noise" (saddena).
Cause (but in scientific/philosophical discourse the ablative
case is used to express causal connections: · Lesson 14):
bhagavata vddena kuPito, " angry at (with) the fortunate one's
statement"; civarena sanlul,tho, "satisfied with the robe" ;
atlhena, "because of that business/matter"; karat.tiyena,
"(engaged in some) business"; iminii P' angena, .. (you
shouldn't go) for this reason" (anga1J' = " limb", .. charac-
teristic ", "factor", and so is used in expressions such as
" because of this": related to " endowment ").
Equality: samasamo va~'t.tena, .. quite equal in beauty."
In making a comparison the instrumental may be used only if
the act of comparison is first described generally and indefi-
nitely: purisena purisa1J', .. (comparing) a man with a man"
Lesson 8 45
(for a specific, conclusive comparison, this is better than that,"
If
the ablative case is used: see Lesson 14).

Price: sahassena, for a thousand" (Le. sell for 1,000
If
kahtipat;as, the standard silver coin).

Way (which way, direction): by one way"; by another
If If
way"; dVlirena, by the gate" (entering, leaving).

If
Direction, orientation : .. from West to East" (both in

instrumental) and each followed by the indeclinable ca; from It
North to South".
Manner: iminii, in this way"; iminii pariyiiyena,
If
.. through this course (procedure)". in this manner"; If
k(iyeua pa#sa~vedeti. he experiences through his body

If 11 ;
santena, calmly" (thus instrumentals may be used like

If
If adverbs of manner "); on his right side (manner of

If 11
lying); kicchena adhigata~. understood with difficulty" ;

If
.. he sat practising a certain kind of meditation" (instrumental,

as if .. manner" of sitting). This sense is in fact adjacent to the
ordinary instrument" sense, as we see in expressions such
If
as: serving with actions (kammena), whether physical or

mental, or with speech; honouring, entertaining, etc., with
music, dancing, garlands, etc.
Means of livelihood, means of explanation or description
(cf. instrument), means of acquiring goodness, pf4nnatfJ, such as
danena, by giving," or of expiating past deeds (kamma1!').
If
Vehicle: ytinena gacchati. he goes in (by) a carriage,"

If
1Jagena, byelephant."
It
'Motive: giiravena, through respect" (he did not speak).

If
Time by means of which (at the end of which) or particular

time at which: aparena samayena, " after some time," " in due
course" ; tena samayena, at that time" ; accayena, " through
If
(after) the passage/passing away" (of time or of a person:

specified in the genitive case).
Age at which.
Measure (cf. the ablative case, Lesson 14): dvadasayojanani
ahosi iiyiimena, it (a city) was twelve leagues in length" ;
If
sattayojaniini vitthiirena, .. seven leagues in breadth." Com-

pounds ending in the word matia-, meaning" measure ", are
also used in the instrumental case: jannumattena, " knee deep."
- - --- -- - - - -- -- - - - - - - - - -- - - --"-_.- - -
Classification: birth, clan, family, kind, and similar rela-

tions: Gotamo gottena, a Gotama by clan
If jativddena, in
11 ; If
respect of class (station by birth)."

Dissociation (cf. accompaniment: we find in a number of
words and expressions a tendency to associate opposite and
contradictory ideas; in the present case there is fortunately
no ambiguity): adatl-t!ena, .. without force" (negative prefix
a-); also instrumental used witq the indeclinable annatra,
.. except for," apart from": annatra brahmatl-ena, "except
If
for the priest."

Other idioms with the instrumental :-
dsanena nimanteti, he invites to sit down," .. he offers
If
a seat" ,.
ktilena ktilat!1-, from time to time," regularly" ;
If If
ldMena ldbhat!1-, " from gain to gain" (wishing always for

more gain, with one gain on to another) ;
annena annat!1- (" one with another", literally" other with
other "), .. irrelevantly" ;
sabbena sabbat!1- all with all", i.e.)
(If completely", II
.. absolutely thoroughly" (as in knowing some doctrine).
Present Participle
Present participles (missakiriyti), active in meaning, are
formed from the present stem of verbs by adding the suffixes
nt or mdna and declining like nouns. They indicate an action
which takes place simultaneously with (missa) the main action
of the sentence. From Mu are formed the stems Mavant and
Mavamtina, both meaning "being". The nt stem, which is
much more commonly used for almost all verbs, is inflected as
follows, for example from gam :-
Singular Plural
Nom. gacchalfJ or gacchanlo, gacchattta

.. going"
Ace. gacchanlatJI gacchanla
Instru. gacchata gacchanlBhi

Lesson 8 47
Note the weak form of stem (without nasal) in the ins. sg.
From other conjugations, masculine nominative singular:
karonto, " doing"; paii:iiapento, " declaring."
The forms in mana are inflected in exactly the same way as
other nouns in a. From as we have as stem samana, " being,"
masculine nominative singular samano, which is used quite
frequently-more frequently than sant, though the latter is also
current. Since the words bhavant (and bhava) and sant have
certain special meanings 1 as well as that of " being", samana,
which has not, avoids ambiguity.
Present participles are used like "adjectives" (as past
participles may be) " qualifying nouns, with which they agree
JJ
in gender, case, and number.
The Pronoun bhavant

Bhavant is inflected like gacchant when it means " being".
From the same stern is formed the honorific pronoun bhavant,
11you," "sir," "your honour," "his honour," which has
largely divergent inflections :-
Masculine
Singular Plural
Nom. bllava", bhava'nto or bhonto

(by contraction of ava > 0)
Ace. bhavantal!1 bhavante
Instru. bhota bhavantehi
Vocative singular: bho (plural as nominative: bhonto).

The nominative case of this pronoun is used for the 3rd person,
the vocative for the 2nd person: aya1f' bhavattJ. " this honour-
able"; tvattJ bho, " you, sir."
1 For bhavant, see below, though with special inflections. Bhavo means
.. existence", .. good fortune "; sant means" existing", hence" true ", more
rarely .. good ".
I ntroduetion to Pali
Gerund
The gerund (pubbakiriya). an indeclinable participle, is used
to express an action preceding (pubba) the action of the main
verb of a sentence. It may thus conclude a subordinate clause.
The agent of the gerund is the same as that of the main action.
Complex sentences are constructed with clauses concluded by
participles or gerunds preceding the main clause with the main
verb. In this way the agent is described as performing a group
or series of actions. Each clause may have its own patient
(i.e. gerunds may take patients in the accusative, like other
verb forms). The gerund is usually (but far from always)
formed from the same stem as the past participle by adding the
suffixes tva, itva, or ya :-
ttpa-satJ1--(k) kam f,(,pasatttkamitva having approached

kar katva ha ving done; karitva is
also used
gam gantva having gone
(g)gah gahetva having taken
ehid ehinditva having cut
tt( d) - 0) tha utthaya having stood up
(the prefix u(d)
means" up .. 1)
a-da adaya having taken (often
equivalent to simply
.. taking" in English)
(d)dis disva having seen
vac vatva having said
abhi-vad abhivadetva having greeted
ni-vas nivasetvli ha vingdressed
vi-vie (to vJVtcca having become separated
separate) from, having become
isolated (vie + ya ·
> vicca) .
(p)pa-vis pavisitva having entered
(s)su sutva ha ving heard
1 It is sometimes given as simply u, since the d rarely appears in practice,
but after this u any consonant is doubled (= assimilation of the d to it).
Lesson 9 51
Gentlemen! do not say thus
The honourable Jotipala went forth
(As he is) going he sees
I do not take counsel with God
He entered the house
He gives a drink
I do not get food
He sees the garment
He is (hoti) satisfied with the resting place
Living beings experience unhappiness
The lay disciples come to the place
LESSON 9
Passive Conjtlgation
Verbs form passive stems with the suffix ya or tya added to
the root. The root is usually unchanged, but some roots show
a weaker form. Normally the root has the same form as in the
past participle. Roots ending in a vowel often lose the vowel.
The inflections are the same as in the active. It is the stem which
shows whether a verb is active or passive.
Root (p)pa-Itii, present indicative passive (kammapada) : -
(Root vowel elided)
Singular Plural
3rd person pahfyati .. it is pahfyanti

~. given up"
2nd person pahfyasi pahfyatlla
1st person palifyami pallfy4ma
The simple verb ha (" to abandon", to diminish ") may

It
have the unweakened stem haya.

Frequently the ya suffix is assimilated to the final consonant
of a root, and sometimes its presence is inferred merely from the
apparent doubling of this consonant.
Lesson 9 53
devatri deity, divine being, spirit

paiiiia . understanding, wisdom
parisii assembly
miild garland
vdcli speech
v1jjd science, knowledge
vedanri sensation
saiUid perception
scild hall
Vocabulary
Verb of the first conjugation ;-
apa-(k)kam apakkamati he goes off, he withdraws
(the prefix apa
means" oH ",
" away ")
Noun :-
aJa goat
Indeclinables ;-
bhante sir! (polite address to a Buddhist monk)
vd or, either (enclitic, used like ca-Vocab. 4)
sacca~ it is true that, is it true that? (whether this is inter-
rogative can appear only from the context-and no
doubt from the intonation in speaking)
EXERCISE 9
uya hayanti
ayaJ11 kho sa brahmal)a pafliUi.
esa tal)ha pahiyati
bhojanal11 diyati
sacca111 Nigrodha bhasita. te esa vaca (interrogative)
saccal11 bhante bhasiHi me esa. viidi. (affirmative reply to the
preceding sentence)
idarp. vuccati cittan ti vii vifliUiQan ti va
ta devata marp etad avocul11
Nominative Genitive
katM kathaya (sing.: same as instru-
mental), kathiina1!f, (plur.)
bhagava bhagavato
raja raiiiio
brahma brahmuno
aha1Jt mama, l me (cnclitic form)
maya~ amMka.""
tva~ tava, te (enclitic form)
tumhe tumhiika.""
(e)so and tad (e)tassa
sa tassa
le andtiini tesa.""
ta tasa.""
aya1!f, assa or imassa (masc.),
assa or imassii (fern.)
~me imesa'lt
ima imasa1!1
bhava."" bholo
Usually the genitive word immediately precedes the word to
which it relates: raiiiio thiipo, ,. a king's monument."
A construction with a possessive genitive is very often
equivalent to an English construction with the verb" to have".
(In Pali ,. to have" is hardly ever expressed by a verb but
almost always by the genitive case.) The verb" to be " (hti)
is used if there is no other verb in the sentence: ida~ assa hoti,
literally "of him there is this", ,. he has this". A frequent
idiom of this type is tassa eva."" hoti ... (or ahosi, etc.) intro-
ducing direct speech which is thought by the agent, literally
.. of him thus it is ... " (or was, etc.), .. he has this thought ... ",
.. he thinks thus . . .".
As noted in Lesson 8, an idiom consisting of the genitive of
the word denoting the period + accayetta expresses the time
after which (or through the passage of which) something is
done :-
sattdhassa accayena ... pabbajissama, after a week ...
we will go forth
J Somr.times mama,!'.
The genitive is also regarded as a substitute for the instru-

mental when it is used in connection with filling" (cf . If
. Lesson 8). Example with the adjective (Lesson n) pura,

If full" (not a participle, but similar in meaning to a participle
as the translation suggests) :-
kumbhi"" 1 • • • pura"" . . . suva~~assa = " pot . . . full ...
of gold"
The genitive is also used with certain indeclinables, such as
P#!hito, "behind"; purato, "before," "in front of"; at~
tarena, " between": me purato, " in front of me "; kiiyiinam
antarena, between the bodies" (" body" here = ultimate
If
body, element, atom, and the context is cutting between

atomic particles). Others will be noted as they occur in later
exercises. With these three positional relations may be
compared the idiom uttara"" nagarassa, " north of the city."
A construction called the "genitive absolute" consists of
a noun (or pronoun) followed by a participle, both inflected in
the genitive. This nexus stands apart from the other words of
the sentence and means "while (the noun was doing the··
participle) f, • •• The agent in the absolute nexus is different
from the agent of the main sentence. Often the genitive
absolute has the special sense of disregarding: "despite (the
noun doing the participle) ", " under their very noses," as when
the participle means " seeing", "looking on ". E.g. telassa
jhiiyamiinassa, "as (while) the oil is burning" {(j)jhe, "to
burn," jhiiyati, a homonym of (j)jhe, "meditate "); miilii-
pitunna1Jl- 2 ••• rudantana1?' ... pabbajito, " though his parents
were weeping, he went forth" (Le. " despite their weeping ").
The genitive absolute is useful for constructing a sentence with
two agents, but the similarly constructed locative absolute
(Lesson 16) is much more frequently used, not being restricted
to special circumstances.
Vocabulary
Verbs of the first conjugation :-
arah arahati he deserves, he must, he ought
kilam kilamati he becomes tired
1 Accusative of lmmbhl, .. pot" (feminine noun in -f).
I Genitive plural, see Lesson 23.
Lesson 10 59
rud* rudati he weeps

vij vijati he fans
suM soMati he makes it clear (intransitive)
Verbs of the seventh conjugation :-
puj pitjeti he honours
ve/h ve/heti he wraps
Nouns :-
anto side, end, extreme
Jayo victory
daso slave
bhiigo share
yaiiiio sacrifice (ritual)
tela11" oil (sesame oil)
bhaya11" danger
ratana11" gem, precious thing
sarira~~ body (of a man or animal: kiiyo has this sense
but also the wider meanings of substance",
ft
.. particle "), the plural saririini is used to mean

.. (bodily) relics" (of the Buddha after his
cremation)
suva~~a11" gold
Indeclinables :-
antarena between (with genitive)
c~ra'11" for a long time, after a long time
pan a but, however
(enclitic)
Pitthito behind (with genitive)
purato before, in front of (with genitive)
Past participle :-
drop-ita disproved (from ropeti: Lesson 13)
EXERCISE 10
Translate into English :-"
na cirarp tathagatassa parinibbanarp bhavissati
imassa jayo bhavissati
60 I ntrodftction to Pali
hr1ihmal.\a. brahmuno putta

dukkhass' antal11 karissanti
aropito te v5.do
ayarp imassa bhasitassa attho
ma me purato atthasi
so mall1 pafihena, aharp veyyakaraI,lena sobhissami
tena kho pana samayena Anando bhagavato piHhito thito hoti
bhagavantarp vijamano 1 .
kammal'p kho pana me karontassa kayo kilamissati

tassa rGl.tanani bhavanti
Translate into Pali ;-
These people will have sons
I am his slave
There will be danger
He will teach the doctrine
I will be an ascetic
The priest has a son
They wrap the king's body in a garment (instrumental)
This is the pagoda of .that fortunate one
We deserve a share of the relics of the fortunate one
LESSON 11
Adjectives
Adjectives (gu~a1l(ltna) I are inflected in the same way as
other nouns, in the three genders according to the nouns they
qualify as attribute-words. Most adjectives in a form feminines
in ti. Adjectives also agree in case and number with the nouns
they qualify. When an adjective is common to two or more
I Notice how the last two words are tacked on after the main verb. An
additional clause of this sort is frequently so placed. as if it were an after-
thought. when its action (or state) is simultaneous with the main action. This
stylistic feature is very characteristic of old l'ali prose.
• The Pali term ndma includes all nouns and adjectives. As adjectives are
called glttla1ltima (" quality noun "). appadhillkllinga (" subordinate stem "),
or v(i"alinga (" qualifying stem ") so nouns in the narrower sense. that is
.. substantives". arc called gutlipada (" word for thing possessing a quality").
padhtinaliriga (" main stem "). or abhidhtyyaliriga (" name stem "). Adjectives
are also called vises411a, •• distinguishing".
Lesson 11 61
nouns it may agree with the sum of these (and be plural) or with
the nearest. Thirdly the qualified words may be taken as
collective and singular and the adjective be singular. Where
the genders conflict, the masculine takes precedence over the
feminine, the neuter over both. 1 An adjective usually precedes
the noun it qualifies (thus contrasting with attribute-nouns:
cf. Lesson I), but when there are several adjectives with one
noun very often only one adjective precedes and the rest follow
the noun. A demonstrative pronoun relating to the same noun
will precede the whole group. When an adjective, or (all the)
adjectives, follows its noun this usually indicates that it is
being · '.' predicated" of the noun, or in other words that the
attribute in question is being emphasized. Onc should then
translate " ... who is/which is ... ". If we use the terms
.. nexus" and .. junction" then the word order adjective
+ noun usually indicates junction and the order noun + adjec-
tive (or equally another noun in the same case) indicates nexus.
When there is no verb in the sentence, however, we understand
a nexus regardless of the order; then the placing of a nexus-
adjective first indicates emphasis of it (as in an argument).2
Adjectives in a : -
akttsala bad
atita past
ananta infinite
iddha powerful
kanta (p.p. kam (VII» agreeable, lovely
kalyutla beautiful, good
ktesala good
dakkMIJ-a right (hand), southern
dhuva fixed
mcca permanent
. pacchima last, western
pahiita much, many
piya dear
phita prosperous
I Cf. agreement of verb and agent: Lesson 4 (the principles ilrc similar).
S In Pali word order is important chictl}' for the sake of being able to deviate
from it for effect. This may explain why some severe philologists have refused
to countenance it.
vdma left
sassata eternal
sukara easy
sukha happy
Past participles may acquire special meanings when used as
adjectives: d#lha," visible."
The distinction between " substantives" and .. adjectives"
is not absolute, a good many words being used in both func-
tions. Thus kusalatf' = "the good" , kusala = " good ",
.. good at"; sukhatf' = " happiness", sukha = " happy" ;
likewise kalyd1Ja and other words which are usually adjectives
may appear in the neuter gender as abstract nouns.
Third Conjugation
Verbs of the div or third conjugation (divddi gatta) form
present stems with the suffix ya. In form they therefore
resemble passives in ya. The personal endings are the same as
for the first conjugation. From the root man. "to think"
(stem: man + ya > matbla) :-
Singular Plural
3rd person mannati mannanti
2nd person maililasi mt"li1atlla
1st person maflilami I maflilama
Similarly conjugated are ~-

chid chijjati he cuts (down)
.-jan jiiyati he is born (intransitive
verb; stem irregularly
formed)
a-da adiyati he takes (irregular elision of
rOQt vowel, cf. passive
conjugation; here i)
a-pad iipajjati he acquires, he produces, he
gets, he has (intransitive
in the latter meaning)
----~ ~-- -~
... -----,-------------- .~--
Past Participles in -na
Certain verbs form thdr past participles with the suffix na,
often there is assimilation of a final root consonant to the n :-
claid chimla cut off
dei dillna given
{i-pad iipanna possessing, having
1t(d)-pad lIppamta happC'lled, arisen
upa-pact upapa 1£ Ila transmigrated, reborn, arisen,
come into existence
(p)pali-pad pa#panna engaged in, following, practising
sallt-pa(/ sampanna endowed with, having
Mid bhinna divi(h'd, split
1ti-sid 1Itstnna seated
Iui !zina diminished, C'liminated
Auris/s of (d)dis and gam
The root (d)dis, " to sce," forms an aorist with inflections in
li, changing its root vowel to a :-
Singular Plnral
3rd person atldasii addaSa'!ISII
2nd person addasii adda.~atha
1st person adtlasal!1 addastillla
A few verbs may form an aorist with double inflection, taking

thc a inflection of addasti plus s and some of the inflections
found with s aorists. Some of these forms from gam are regu-
larly used, mixed with single forms corresponding to those of
(d)d£s : -
Singular Plnral
3rd person aga/llcisi .. he went .. agallIClI!'SI/ (with the

double inflection)
2nd person agamii (without the (agCll/lillha; following

double in!lection) the first aorist form)
1st person agamiisil.n agamamhti

---------------------------
Lesson 11 65
From (d)dis itself the double form addasasu1Jt (3rd plural) is

used alongside addasa1Jtsu.
Vocabulary
Verb of the first conjugation :-
abhi-tt(d)-kir· abbhukkirati he sprinkles (when a dis-
(to scatter) similar vowel follows it,
i sometimes changes to y ;
in the present case the y is
further assimilated to the
preceding consonant, hence
abhi-u > abhyu > abbhu)
Past participles :-
C1& euta fallen, passed away
vi-pari-~tam viPari~tata changed
Nouns :-
abiidho illness
kiirako doer
bltitikaro vase, ceremonial water vessel
rukkho tree
sa1Jlvaro restraint
cakka1Jl wheel
disii direction
sama1ifiii designation, agreed usage
Indeclinables :-
tivuso sir! (polite address between equals, also to juniors)
idha here, in this connection
kulo pana (whence then ?-rhetorical question): much less,
let alone
tata thence, then, from there, from that
miccha wrongly, badly }(these are sometimes written as
sammii rightly, perfectly compounds with verbs or
nouns, like the prefixes)
EXERCISE 11
na kho aha111 a vu so addasa111
aya111 tatha.gatassa pacchima vaca
pamujja111 bhavissati. sukho ca viharo
add as a 1 kho bhagava ta devatayo
imina kho eva111 bho pariyayena Jotipalassa maQavassa Maha-
govindo ti samanna udapadi
sassato loko
so gaccha~i dakkhiQarp disarp
kusalan ti pi 'na bhavissati. kuto pan a kusalassa karako
aharp kho maggarp agamasirp
kalyaQarp vuccati brahmaQa
atha kho raja Mahasudassano vamena hatthena bhiilkaram
gahetva dakkhiQena hatthena cakkaratanarp 2 abbhukkiri
idarp kusalarp
ayarp Jambudipo 3 iddho c' eva bhavissati phito ca
miccha patipanno tvam asi. aham asmi samma patipanno
so tato cuto idhiipapanno '
addasa paribbajako bhagavantarp agacchantarp
sanna uppajjanti pi nirujjhanti pi
bhagavato abadho uppajji
sarpvararp apajjati
aharp kho kamma111 akasirp. kammarp kho pana me karontassa
kayo kilanto. handaha111 5 nipajjami
imarp mayarp addasama idha upapannarp

The universe is infinite
This is not easy (use the neuter: impersonal statement)
I followed the road
The king saw the boy
The city was prosperous
1 addasli often stands at the beginning of its sentence.
S A compound word: "wheel-gem." a symbol of imperial power.
• India (as continent: see the first footnote in Exercise 30).
'When two vowels meet. sometimes the first is elided and the second is
lengthened (idha -+ upapanno).
a This combination may be regarded as an instance of that described in
footnote 4 above. or of a + a > 11 by coalescence of similar vowels.
= dative) and with the same verb when it means ;. to forgive 11
(someone = dative, something = accusative). The verb

(p)pa/i-(s)slt meaning "to assent to (someone) 11 takes the
dative. It is used with the verb upa-(t)lhil, meaning to serve,
attend on/to someone or something (dative), especially in the
causative conjugation (see Lesson I3): to cause nurses to
attend to the boy (dative); to cause the mind to attend to
knowledge. The verb dhar in the sense of .. hold for/over ..
takes the dative of the person sheltered, and in the sense of
.. owe it takes the dative of the person to whom something
11
is owed. The verb ci-ruc (" to inform ") takes the dative of the
person informed (whereas a-mant takes the accusative). Verbs
meaning to be angry at (kuP, etc.), to curse (sap), to long for
(Pih), and to be clear to ((p)pa-(k)khii: visible, apparent), to
appear to (patu(r)-bhft: manifest) take the dative.
The adjective (of verbal import) piya, .. dear ", takes the
dative of the person to whom.
" For the sake of (= dative of purpose, above) is expressed
11
by aUMya preceded by the genitive of the person or object of

the endeavour.
The indeclinable ala1J1- (" sufficient ", "enough", .. ade-
quate ", perfected ") takes the dative. Besides the ordinary
If
sense of " sufficient" (for any purpose) it has the idiomatic

meaning of a refusal or objection (" enough! " = " stop! ". " I
won't! ", etc.) with dative of the person for whom it is sufficient
or superfluous (" I won't" = ala1J1- me; .. it is sufficient for
you" = ala1J1- vol.
The negative participle (future passive: see Lesson I6)
abhabba, which functions as an adjective meaning " unable".
" incapable", takes the dative of the action which cannot be
done, if the latter is expressed by a noun (" action noun ").
When wishes (good wishes) are expressed, the dative is
used for the person for whom they are expressed: Ifmay
th~re be (hotu) long life for him "; "good luck to you 11
(bhadda1J1- bhavato hotu); "welcome to you" (sviigata~ bhavato

hotu). Like sviigata1Jl (" welcome! ") the indeclinables
sotthi "safety", "safely") and. namo (" hail! ") take the
dative.
Aorist of (s)su
The aorist of the verb (s)su is inflected as follows :-
Singular I Plural
3rd person lassos;," he heard" IISSOSlflll
2nd person assosi asmltha
1st person assosilt' I "ssumha

(cf. the second form of aorist given in Lesson 4, but note presence of the
augment here; cf. ha.)
From (p)Pa#-(s)su we have paccassosi. 1
Relative Pronoun
The relative pronoun has the stem ya(d), .. who," .. which,"
which is inflected in the three genders in the same way as the
demonstrative so, sa, ta."", or lad :-
.
Singular Plural
Neut.
-
Masc. Fern. Masc. Neut. Fern.
Nom. ,,0 yatt' or

"ii
"ad
Ace. yatt' yatt' or yatt'
"e ,,/lni
"ii
yad
}
Ins. yena y/lya yehi ,,4hi
Dat.}
-
yassa yassu yesatt' y4s"",
Gen.
Relative pronouns are used mostly in relative clauses, but

some of the case-forms are also used as indec1inables.
Relative Clause
The relative clause (aniyamuddesa) is the regular form of
"subordinate clause" in PaH (clauses with participles and
1 (p)pali + " > pacca in junction.
Lesson 12 71
gerunds are also freely used-cf. Lesson 8-but this is not the
same kind of " subordination "). Its use is extremely frequent.
The clear articulation of the sentence into a subordinate clause
introduced by a relative word (a pronoun or an indeclinable
such as yattha, where") and a main clause introduced by
/I
a demonstrative word (niyamato patittiddesa) is an outstanding

characteristic of Pali. Complex sentences or " periods" may
be built up by combinations of relative clauses and demonstra-
tive clauses, co-ordinate clauses (joined by conjunctive
particles such as ca), direct speech and so forth. The usages of
sentence. and period construction will be more extensively
surveyed in Lesson 27, when the main elements of construction
have been studied and can be reviewed together. A more
detailed review of relative clause construction with indeclinables
will also be found there.
The relative clause regularly precedes the main clause. The
relative word introduces the clause, but may be preceded by
indec1inables connecting the whole sentence to the narrative
of which it forms a part. E.g.:-
atha kho ye icchitft-su te akatft-su, " then · (indeed) those who
wished, worked" (literally: " ... who wished, they
worked.")
The relative pronoun must be in the same number and
gender as the noun or demonstrative pronoun it refers to, but
it may be in any case~onnecting it with the words in its own
relative clause or sentence. E.g.:-
yen a dvarena nikkhami tatJt GotamadvaratJt nama ahosi,
" the gate by which he left was called Gotama Gate"
(" by which (ins.) gate he left, that (nom.) Gotama Gate
named was "). .
Besides the demonstrative, other pronouns may serve as
correlatives, for example the personal pronouns and also the
" pronominal adjective" (see below) sabba, " all " :-
ye ... ahesutJt, ... sabbe ... bhakkhesi, "those ... who
were there, ... he devoured (bhakkh (VII}) them all."
Sometimes the main clause has no correlative word (this may
of course depend on its having a special form, such as direct
72 I nlroduction to Pali
speech), but as a rule the correlative demonstrative is used.

A proper name (with title) in the main clause is quite often
used without a demonstrative.
Repetition of a relative word emphasizes that the clause is
universal: yo yo = .. whoever". The correlative also is
repeated. E.g.:-
ya ya ... adiyissati tassa tassa ... amtppadass(imi,l" who-
ever will take ... to him I will grant ... "
A demonstrative pronoun immediately following a relative
pronoun is emphatic (cf. Lesson 5: so 'hattt): yo so = .. he
who ", " that which ". Thus we may have a more complex
sentence with emphatic and correlative demonstratives. The
example which follows has a direct speech clause at the end :-
yo so satto pathamattt 2 upapanno, tassa eva1JJ hoti .. aha1JJ asmi
brahmii, " that being who has come into existence first
(in the evolution of the universe) thinks he is God."
(" Who that being first is reborn, has this thought: I am
God.")
Relative I ndeclinables
Besides such indeclinables as yattha, yathd (" as "), yadd
(" when "), yadi (" if "), and yalo (" whence", "because",
" since H), certain forms of the relative pronoun have, besides
their ordinary uses, uses as indeclinables.
Thus the neuter forms of the nomihative-accusativ~ singular
(especially ya1!J) are used in the impersonal sense of " that H,
.. what H, covering a wide range of shades of meaning.
hoti kha so samayo yattl ... ayattl lako vivallati, "there is
indeed the (so) time that (Le. when) ... this world evolves."
(Here the relative clause follows the main clause = elevated
speech or emphasis of main clause. The main clause has samayo
as its subject/agent, the subordinate clause loko, the sub-
ordination of theloko clause is indicated by the ya1!J with which
it begins-the omitted words say "some time, after a long
time H.)
Future of dil.
1
pa!hama,!1 is here an indeclinable meaning" first", .. firstly". It is derived
I
from the ordinal numeral palflallla • .. lirst."
Lesson 12 73
yatp. frequently appears after the expression thanat!' etat!'

vijjati, introducing the statement of what is possible: thana'!'
etatp. vijjati yatp. . . . =" it is possible that . . ." (here of course
the yatfl- may be regarded as correlative with the demonstrative
etatp.).
yad is used in close combination with another indeclinable
word: the forms tad and yad of the neuter pronouns are
junction forms of tatp. and yatp. taken when following words are
closely associated with them syntactically (and hence in
utterance): yad idatp. (cf. masculine yo so with a different
demonstrative), "which that", is used as an indeclinable
emphatic demonstrative, .. that is," " i.e.," .. as for example,"
" as," " such as," " to wit."
The instrumental yena used with a verb of motion means
" where", "towards" (cf. the instrumental of the way by
which). It .. governs" the nominative case (Lesson I). When
doubled it means" wherever" : yena yena gacchati, " wherever
he goes." It is often used with the correlative tena preceding
the verb: yena giimo tena upasa~nkami, "he approached the
village."
Interrogative Pronoun
The interrogative pronoun has the stem kitp., "who?",
" which? ", .. what ? " :-
Singular Plural
Masc. Ncut. Fern. Masc. Neut. Fern.
Nom. ko ki,!1 ka
Ace. kat]1 killl kat?'

} ke klini kli
Ins. kena /raya kehi kah,
Dat.} kassa or kissa kassii kesat?' lIasa,l'

Gen.
There is no equivalent to the question mark in PaH (though

modern editors sometimes insert question marks in their texts
to assist students). As a general rule if a sentence contains an
interrogative word the whole sentence is interrogative, but

a few interrogative sentences contain no interrogative word and
must be understood from the context (sec the example in
Exercise 9). Sometimes inversion is used: khamati te ida1f1.,
" does this please you? ", " do you approve of this? " (ida1Jl me
khamati = "this pleases me ", "1 like this "). The neuter
singular form ki1f1. is sometimes used as an indeclinable, simply
making the sentence interrogative ( = inversion + " ?" in
English): ki1f1. sadda1Jl assosi = " Did he hear the noise?" As
PaH favours direct speech ki1Jl sadda1f1. assosi ti ... will trans-
late "( ... he asked) whether he heard the noise". The
interrogative usually stands at the beginning of its clause.
Cf. also the indeclinables nu (in Vocabulary below) and api
(Vocabulary 14).
" Pronominal Adjectives"
Certain pronouns (sometimes called "pronominal adjec-
tives" because they function as both pronouns and adjectives)
follow the declension of ya(d) and must be carefully distinguished
from adjectives on account of the difference of inflection in. the
nominative and genitive-dative plural masculine. Thus from
sabba, "all," we have: nominative singular sabbo (M.),
sabba1Jl (N. : only form), sabba (F.) ; nominative and aC,cusative
plural masculine sabbe, like ye and unlike kusala (masculine
nominative plural), kusale (masculine accusative plural);
genitive and dative plural masculine sabbesa1~ (cf. yesa1Jl,
kusalana1Jl).
Similar pronouns are ;-
anna other
annatara a certain, a
apara another
para other, another
sabba all, entire
Vocabulary
Verbs ;-
a-kankh (1) akankhati he wishes
(k)kham (I) khamati it pleases, it suits, he approves,
he likes (dative of person)
names I) the prior member is associated with the posterior by

a direct relation. The whole compound functions gram'matically
as a noun. The English example" madhouse" illustrates this ':
in Pali the relation .. for the mad" might be expressed by the
dative case (purpose). which would be the case in which the
prior word would appear if there were no compounding.. In
" grasshoppcr " the relation" in the grass" would be expressed
by the locative case (Lesson I6). In Pali any case-relation may
occur in a tappurisa, that of the genitive being the most frequent
as it is the usual case to express a relation between two nouns.
The" genitive" relation may be very general or vague; other
cases may express very specific relations, including those to
an action (whcn the second noun is more or less verbal).
Examples:- .
brahma~taparisa., "an assembly of priests (" priest-
assembly' ')
rajaputto, "son of a king" (" kingson "), "prince"
(stems in an lose the n in compounds)
The last word in a compound, when the compound is a noun, .
usually retains its original gender.
Participles likewise occur as the final members of tappurisas,
and it is in these tappurisas that the other case relations are
most often found, such as the accusative relation when the first
member is the patient (" direct object ") of the participle.
Compounds are very freely formed in Pali (much more freely
than in ;English, except perhaps in some modern styles which
many English speakers would regard as jargon). They are not
restricted. to two members, compounds of three or more
members, variously related, being quite common. . Thus
kii-/agarasala = " hall of the house with a gable (kuto) ".'
Causative Conjugation
A special conjugation of verbs has the meaning to cause
someone or something else to do the action of the root, to have
something done, and is called the "causative" (karita).
1 Most of these names are examples of the forms; thus tappurjsa = lad
+ p",isa (d + P > PP) = lassa p"risa, .. his man," .. his servant."
I kalo = point. peak (of a mountain). ridge (of a. roof). This refers to the
high ridged. overhanging barrel-vaulted roof characteristic of ancient India ,
- ,1
Lesson 13 79
Formally (in formation and inflection) it frequently coincides
with the seventh 'conjugation, just as the passive coincides with
the third conjugation. There is, however, a distinctive causative
suffix (ti)P which is sometimes added to roots. Roots conjugated
in any conjugation for the ordinary present indicative may .
appear in causative meanings with the stem in e or a " fuller"
form aya (or pe, ape, paya, iiPaya). As in the seventh conjuga-
tion the root vowel is usually strengthened or lengthened
(cf. Lesson 3). The meaning may be the straightforward
causative one or a more specialized and idiomatic one. Thus
from vac, "to speak," we have the causative vdceti, (" he
makes speak "), " he reads aloud," "he recites," whilst from
Md, " to say," we have the causative vadeti (" he makes say"),
.. he plays (a musical instrument}." Sometimes it is not easy
to decide whether to class a verb as an independent seventh
conjugation root or as the causative form of some other verb
of perhaps widely divergent meaning. There is a certain amount
of disagreement among grammarians over the proper classifica-
tion (e.g. of vadeti).
With (ii)P we have from chid chediiPayati (" he causes to
cut "); from U)thi'i tMpayati, in which the root vowel is usually
shortened (as opposed to most causatives) and which often has
the meaning " he leaves aside .. , " he excepts", instead of the
more literal meaning" makes stand", " erects". Besides the
possibility of a "double" formation with (a)p alongside
a causative form in e (which may have double meaning as well as
double form), "triple" forms are sometimes made by adding
(ti)P twice, thus from ruh " grow", we have a causative form
(with elision of h) ropeti, " he plants" (causes to grow), and
another causative form ropiipeti, meaning" he causes to cause
to grow", " he has planted".
As with ordinary verbs, the agent of a causative verb
(hetukattar) goes in the nominative case. The person or " instru-
ment " through whom the action is performed goes usually in
the accusative (the instrumental may be used instead, on
account of the sense of " instrument ") ; thus a causative verb
may take one patient more than the equivalent ordinary verb:
the causative of an intransitive verb may take one patient (the
verb may be said to " become transitive "), the causative of
Lesson 13 81
(i)jhe jhapeti he causes to burn, he sets
fire to
he causes to stand, he erects,
thapeti he makes stand up, he
Wtha tM.payati causes to remain, he
excepts
ni-pat nipateti he causes to fall down, he
drops, he puts down
pa payeti he causes to drink
bhU bhaveti he causes to be, he develops
a-mant amantapeti he causes to be addressed,
he has invited
muc muiicapeti he causes to be free, he sets
free
(p)pa#-yat (to pre- pa#yada- he causes to be prepared
pare) peti (irregular change of t
> d)
ya yiipeti he causes to go, he keeps
gomg
yuj ((VII) : yojeti) yojapeti he causes to be yoked
(carriage)
a-rue arociipeti he causes to be announced
ropeti he causes to grow, he plants
ruh
{
ropapeti he causes to cause to grow,
he has planted
d-ruh (climb, mount) aropeti he causes to mount, he puts
on top of, he shows, he
shows up, he disproves
(p )pa-vatt pavatteti he causes to go, he sets
gomg
ni(r)-vu nibbdpeti he causes to be extinct, he
extinguishes (e.g. fire)
(p)pa-vid (vid (1): pavedeti he makes known
" know" , but the
primary present
system is not used)
(p)pa-vis ' paveseti he causes to enter, he brings
.
m
Lesson 13
paeeatthiko enemy
pabbato mountain
pasado palace
punjo heap
balo fool
bhedo division, splitting up
mania prayer, hymn
m1go beast, deer
samudayo origin, origination
siho lion
aranna~ forest
indriya11' faculty
khiidaniya11' foods, dishes (collective singular)
paliila1!f. straw
bhatta11' meal
mUla1!f. root, base, capital (money)
samma (voc.) (my) dear I (familiar address: only the vocative
is used)
Adjectives :-
anuttara unsurpassed, supreme
abbhokasa open, free, out of doors, open air
ar1ya excellent, exalted, noble
uttrlna stretched out, lying down
gambhira profound
nava new
nit/hila completed, ready
patJita excellent, delightful, deliciQ"s
puratthima east
Past participle :-
vivitta (vi-vie) separated, isolated
Jndeclinables :-
ayonJso unmethodically, haphazardly, erratically, incon-
sequentially, unscientifically
uddha1!f. above, up
kaeei perhaps?, did?, I doubt whether?, I hope?
aren't you? (with na)
kathat!' how?, why?

tikkhattut!' thrice
dani now (enclitic: cannot stand at beginning of
sentence)
passena on its side (instrumental of passo, side, used
adverbially)
yava as far as, up to, as much, to what extent ,
EXERCISE 13
Passage for reading :-
te taJ!l sankhaJ!l uttanaJ!l nipatesuJ!l: vadehi bho sankha,
vadehi bho sankha ti. n' eva so sankho saddaJ!l akasi. te taJ!l
sankhaJ!l passena nipatesuJ!l ... uddhaJ!l thapesuJ!l ... dal).-
gena akotesuJ!l . . . sandhuniJ!lsu 1: vadehi bho sankha, vadehi
bho sal'lkha ti. n' eva so sankho saddaJ!l akasi. atha kho tassa
sankhadhamassa etad ahosi: yava bala ime paccantaja
manussa. kathaJ!l hi nama ayoniso sankhasaddaJ!l gavesis-
santi ti. tesam pekkhamananaJ!l a sal'lkhaJ!l gahetva tikkhat ...
tUJ!l sal'lkhaJ!l upalasitva sankhaJ!l adaya pakkami.

brahmal).o mante vacesi
so taJ!l cittaIll bhaveti
na taJ!l (2nd. person) deva paccatthikanaJ!l demi
ayaJ!l dukkhasamudayo
raja kumarassa (dative) pasade karapesi
so imina ca ariyena silakkhandhena samannagato imina
ariyena indriyasaJ!lvarena samannagato ... vivittaJ!l sena-
sanaJ!l bhajati: arannaJ!l, rukkhamiilaJ!l, pabbataJ!l, ...
abbhokasaJ!l palaiapunjaJ!l
idha tathagatena anuttara:rp dhammacakkarp. pavattitarp.
idaJ!l pal).itaJ!l
ye malaJ!l aropessanti, tesaJ!l ta:rpbhavissati sukhaya
tvaJ!l pana samma Jivaka kirp. tUl).hi
kacci marp. samma Jivaka na paccatthikanaJ!l desi
1 Aorist of SIJttt-dha (V: Lesson 15), " to shake."
• Genitive absolute. cf. Lesson 10.
-
Lesson 14 85
Translate into Pali, using compounds where indicated by

hyphens :-
This is the cessation-of-unhappiness
(It is) now the time-for-extinction of the fortunate one
Cunda the son-of-a-smith, having had delicious dishes prepared,
had the time announced to the fortunate one: "(it is)
time, sir, 1 the meal (is) ready" I
The lion, king-of-the-beasts, went out
There are (atthi: the singular verb may be used for the plural
also in this sense) other profound, delightful, doctrines which
the " thus-gone " makes known
He develops that thought
The king, having had the priests invited, said this: "let the
priests see the boy"
The king, having made the boy sit down, instructs (him)
The priest had a new house built to the east (instrumental or
accusative) of the city
Recite the prayers! (plural)
I set free the goats
LESSON 14
Indefinite Pronoun
The indeclinable particle ci(d) is added to inflected interroga-
tive pronouns to form indefinite pronouns :-
ko ci anyone, someone
kassa ci of anyone
kiii ci anything, some (~of ki1ft assimilated to c, becoming
the palatal nasal)
With relative :-
ya1ft kiii ci whatever
1 Use the form of address to a monk.

I Invert the order of the last two words (= emphasis or exclamation).
86 I tl/roduction to Pali
With the negative :-

na kin ci nothing, none at all
The junction form cid often appears when another word
follows closely.
Optative Tense
The optatiY,e (or" potential ") (sattami) tense is used for any
hypothetical action. It may be translated by " should",
.. would". " may". etc. It is formed from the present stem of
all conjugations with special inflections :-
Singnlar Plural
3rd person bhafleyya, .. he should be," hhafltyy"".

.. could be, .... may be."
2nd person bhuv'YY4Si hhavtyy,itlla
1st person bhaveyya,,. bhavtyy4ma

(allo bIIaveyylimi)
From other conjugations (all have the e stem) :-

man (Ill) mafttleyya he should think
kaT (VI) kaTeyya he should do
dis (VII) deseyya he may teach
The verb as, " to be," has two forms of optative tense, though
there is little distinction of meaning. The first type is much
more frequent, the second more elevated or " poetic", only
the 3rd person singular being used regularly :-
Singular Plural
3rd person assa, .. there would be .. assll
2nd person assa assatha
1st person as~al1l assama

Lesson .14
the cause or ongm from which something arises. Formally

the ablative may coincide with the instrumental except in the
singular of the a stems and the masculine and neuter demonstra-
tive and relative pronouns and other pronouns or pronominal 11
adjectives" inflected like them. There is also a special ablative

singular suffix, to, which may be added to any stem. Moreover
the pronominal inflection of the ablative singular, smii or mhii,
is sometimes added to various noun stems.
Nominative. Ablative.
janapado janapadii
asana1Jt iisana
so and tad tasma or tamhd
aYa1!f- imasmii or imamha
paccatthiko paccatthikato 11 from an
enemy" (suffix to)
Examples of the use of the ablative :-
utthay' tisana, having got up from (his) seat" (in this
11
phrase the usual order of words is always inverted)

gdmd giima1J1., from village to village"
11 .
agiirasmii pabbajito (noun with pronominal inflection),
gone forth from home "
11
dasahi ca lokadhatuhi 1 devata ... sannipatitd, and the 11
gods ... assembled from the ten universes"

ki1!~ karatta, "from what cause? ", for what reason? ",
11
why? "
11
The ablative of cause is very important, and is always used

in philosophical statements :-
'/JedantiPaccaya ta~thd, .. desire (is) from the sensation-
cause 2 ", desire is caused by sensation"
11
kimpaccaya bhavo, " from what cause 2 (is) existence? " .

kissa nirodha bhavanirodho, "from the cessation of what
(is there) cessation of existence? "
The ablatives of some pronouns in -asmd are used as indeclin-
abies with causal meaning: kasma = why? ", tasma = 11
Iftherefore ".
1 Instrumental-ablative plural of a stem in 11, dasahi of dasa, " ten."
I Or .. condition ".
Lesson 14 91
Java brahmalokd, " as far as the world of God (heaven) "
Java sattama, " up to the seventh"
-with the verb u(d)-(l)thti. "to rise up (from)," "come out
from" (literally and figuratively) :
patisalland vutlhito, "come out from seclusion (privacy,
withdrawing; sometimes spelt patio) "
jhana vullhahitvd, "having risen up (come out) from
a meditation (trance)" (and passing into a higher or
lower trance)
-" with reference to ", " from the standpoint of" = -to:
tathagato atite buddhe ... gottato pi anf4ssarati, " the thus-
gone recollects past enlightened ones (Buddhas) with
reference to (their) clan(s) also"
With indeclinables :-
-annatra :
annatra phassa, "except for contact," "without touch"
(annatra often takes the instrumental, cf. Lesson 8, and
this d inflection with it is sometimes regarded as a form
of instrumental, cf. the instrumentals in a: bhagavatd,
rannii 1)
-adho, " below " :
adho kesamatthaka, " below the top (matthako) of the hair"
-araka, " far from" :
iirakii siimaiiiid, " far from asceticism (samannat,n)
araka ... vijjacara1;tasampadaya, " far from success (sam-
padii: feminine) in knowledge and practice (cara1;tat,n) "
--uddhat,n, " above," " after," " beyond" :
uddhat,n padatalii, " above the soles (talat,n, ' surface') of
the feet"
kiiyassa bhedii ~tddhat,n, " after the splitting up (death) of
the body"
--parat,n, " after" :
param mara1;tii, " after death"
-yiiva, " up to," " as far as " (see above, under" limit ")
1 We find also saha pal'inibbana = .. (simultaneously) with the extinction ".

1II11ess it should be regarded as meaning caused by the extinction, in which case
Ulha would seem superfluous.
Lesson 14 93
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
lItlIai-gam (I) adhigacchati acquires
_u-(s)sar (I) anussarati recollects
.(d)-{I}lha (I) uUhati or ullhahati rises up, gets up, arises,
or vu/lhati (with comes out from, emi-
v as junction grates
consonant -see
Lesson 2S-be-
tween u and a
preceding vowel)
,"-mant (VII) nimanteti invites (asanena,....:::,....
to sit down, offers a
seat)
pari-pucch (I) paripucchati asks about, asks advice
ti-yti (I) ayati comes, approaches
Nouns :-
asavo influx, influence 1
deso point (topic)
padoso anger
plsasso contact, touch
Sllhayako friend
.padanatfJ attachment
tamapadatfJ site of a village
asavya1f' slavery
Nndhanat!' bond, fetter
wdayita1f' sensation, experience
SIi"t'41f' hemp
Indeclinables :-
.pi or app (stands at (with optative) perhaps, (with
beginning of sentence indicative) does? , do? • did?
or clause; app is a (i.e. makes sentence inter-
junction form before rogative : polite form of
a vowel) question)
I They are. in Buddhist doctrine. passion. existence. opinion. and ignorance;
freedom from these is equivalent to the attainment of nibb4fUJ'1'. to absolute
peace.
etarahi now, at present

eUha here, (also means) in this case
tattha there. in that/this connection
tena hi now I (admonitory)
pubbe before. formerly
yattha where
yan nuna what now if ? what if?, now if,
supposing?
sabbaso completely
Adjectives :-
pisu~a malicious
purii'IJa old
Numeral :-
ubho (nominative and both
accusative, all gen-
ders)
. Past participle :-
khi'IJa «k)khi (Ill)) exhausted, wasted, perished
(irregular ~~ for n)
EXERCISE 14
bhiitapubbaf!l anfiataro janapado vuHhasi. atha kho
sahayako sahayakaf!l amantesi: ayama samma. yena so
janapado ten' upasaf!lkamissama. app eva nam' ettha kin ci
dhanaf!l adhigaccheyyama ti. evaf!l samma ti kho sahlyako
sahayakassa paccassosi. te yena so janapado yen' aiiiiatararp
gamapadaf!l ten' upasaf!lkamiqlsu. tatth' addasaf!lsu pahiitaIp
saQaf!l cha!;l!;lntaf!l. disva sahayako sahayakaf!l amantesi: idaqt
kho samma pahiitaf!l saQaf!l cha!;l!;litaf!l. tena hi samma tvaft 1
ca saQabharaf!l bandha, ahaft ca saQabharaf!l bandhissami. .
ubho sat:.abharaf!l adaya gamissama ti. evaf!l samma ti kho
sahayako :;ahayakassa patissutvl saQabharaf!l bandhi.
1 ftI palatalized to 11 before c.
Lesson 14 95
puccheyyam' aharp bhante kaii cid. eva desarp
deva tamha kaya cavanti
upadanapaccaya bhavo
yan nuna mayarp kusalarp kareyyama
na hi bhagava evarp vadeyya
na dan' ime imamha abadha vutthahissanti
te kalena kalarp upasarpkamitva paripuccheyyasi (=
" should": exhortation)
tassa evam assa: aha1ll kho pubbe daso ahosirp. so 1 'mhi
etarahi tamha dasavya mutto
yattha pan' avuso sabbaso vedayitarp n' atthi, api nu kho
tattha " asmi .. ti siya
khiI).a me asa va
na marp ko ci asanena pi nimantesi
ayantu bhonto
idha samaI).o va brahmaI).o va kusalarp dhammarp adhigac-
cheyya. kusalarp dhammatp adhigantva na parassa aroceyya.
kitp hi paro parassa karissati. 2 seyyatha pi nama puraI).arp
bandhanatp chinditva aiiiiatp navarp bandhanarp kareyya.

I got up from my seat and left
If the philosopher Gotama should come to this assembly we will
ask (optative) him this question
What should we do ?
I should do meritorious actions
Sensation is caused by (It from the condition of ") contact
You should explain it as it pleases you (te; both verbs optative)
We would invite him to sit down
There will be an eclipse of the moon
There is nothing here
The priests would banish the priest from the city
I so used with 1st person verb as emphatic pronoun (1st person), cf. Lesson S.
I kil?' .•. karissali = .. what will/can he/it do ? " means much the same as
•• what's the use of ? ..
Lesson 15 97
With prefixes :-
u(d)-(g)gah uggat,J.htiti he learns, he memorizes
(p)pa#-(g)gah pa!1'ggat,J.hiiti he accepts
Other tenses are formed as follows :-
Imperative: jiiniitH (3rd sing.},jiintihi (2nd sing.: always with
-hi), etc.
Optative: jtineyya, etc. (also a rarer form, jaiiiiti, of the 3rd
person sing.)
Present participle: jiina1?t or jananto (masc. nom. sing.),
jiinatii (ins.), etc.
Aorist: aiiiiiisi ((ii)11ii and ti-(ii)iiti),1 jiini1?tsu (for aorist of
(s)su, see Lesson 12)
Future: jiinissati, etc.
Gerund: aiiiiiiya (from ii-(ii}iiii, ti shortened before the doubled
consonant; iiatvti from (ii)iiti itself is not often used);
abhiiiiiiiya; sutvti; gahetva
Past participle: iitita (aiiiiata is usually the negative: "un-
known "); sllia; gahUa (sometimes gahita)
Passi ve: paiiii(iyati
Causative: stiveti
Dvanda CompoHnds
Two or more nouns forming a list can be made into a com-
pound ins~ead of being connected by the particle ca. (cf. in
English" fourteen" = .. four and ten "). This type of com-
pound is called dvanda (" twin "). It may be used as a collective
noun, neuter (regardless of the gender of the members) and
inflected in the singular number, or (retaining the gender),
inflected in the plural as meaning two or more items. The
component words may signify one or more than one item. The
more important or leading object, if any, sometimes occupies
the second position, which is normally the dominant position in
Pali (cf. the tappurisa compound). In English the order may
then be reversed :-
candimasuriya (plural), " the sun and the moon"
samat,J.abrtihma~!a (plural), " priests and ascetics"
1 As a rule. when in close junction a long vowel may not stand before a
double consonant: here a is shortened (cf. Introduction. pronunciation of ,
and o. and such verbs as Ii-(k}khli-Vocabu\ary 17).
Lesson 15 99
vilepanatfl. ointment, cosmetic
sucaritatfl. good conduct
suttat!' thread
kankha doubt
seyya bed
Pronoun :-
ekacca someone
Indeclinables :-
eva (enclitic; in junction sometimes va or yeva)
only, alone, just, surely
khippatfl. quickly
tathii thus, true
1W not (emphatic form of na)
yadi whether
EXERCISE 15
te ubho saQabhararp adaya yen' aftftatararp gamapadarp ten'
upasarpkamirpsu. tatth' addasarpsu pahiitaql s~Qasuttarp
chaQQitaql. disva sahayako sahayakaITl amantesi: -yassa kho
sarnma atthaya iccheyyama saQaITl, idaITl pahiitaql sal)asuttaITl
chaQQitarp. tena hi samma tvaft ca saQabhararp chac;lc;lehi,
ahaft ca saQabharaql chaQQessami. ubho sal)asuttabharaql
adaya gamissama ti. ayarp kho me samma sal)abb1iro durabhato
ca susannaddho ca. alam 1 me; tvarp pajanahi ti. at ha kho so
sab1iyako saQabhararp chac;lc;letva saQasuttabb1iraql adiyi.
tena hi brahmal)a sUI)1iH
na tvaITl imaql dhammavinayaITl ajanasi. ahaql imaql dhamma-
vinayaql a j anami '
idha tathagato jato
1 A final JtI may be assimilated to a following labial when the words are
closely connected grammatically. It may become m also when a vowel follows.
under the same conditions (in verse under stress of metre too , since JtI make.
the preceding syllable long whilst"' does not).
ko imarp dhammarp khippam eva ajanissati

ekacco danarp deti samal)assa vii brahmal)assa va annarp
piinarp vattharp yiinarp miiliigandhavilepanarp seyyavasa-
thapadipeyyarp
ko nu kho pana bho janati,1 madaniya kiima
janiihi yadi va tarp bhavantarp Gotamarp tatha santatp I yeva
saddo abbhuggato, yadivii no tathii
tassa evatp janato evatp passato kamasava pi cittatp vimuccati
bhavasava pi cittarp vimuccati avijjasava pi cittatp vimuccati
yarp kin ci samudayadhammatp, sabban tarp nirodhadhammatp
n' atthi jatassa amaral)atp
What I know, you know; what you know, I know
I learn the saying of the fortunate one
He will grasp what I explain (fut.) quickly
After some time he hears the excellent doctrine
The fortunate one, taking robe-and-bowl, entered Rajagaha'
for alms
Stop! Ananda, don't grieve
He understands that (use direct speech) these beings (are)
endowed with bad-conduct-of-the-body
Not-memorizing that speech, I left
Why (is) this unexplained by the philosopher Gotama ?
You (plur.) have gone forth from house to homelessness
LESSON 16
Locative Case
The seventh or locative (sattami, bhumma, adhikara1;la,
okasa) case expresses the place where, the time when or the
situation in which an action takes place. The plural is used to
express the society in which the action takes place.
The locative is also used in the senses of " about", " in the
1 This is an idiom and may be translated" who knows? :', "you never
know", .. you never can tell ...
t Present participle of as, cf. Lesson 8.
I Capital of Magadha.
.
-." .;
vassiina.", pacchime miise, .. in the last month of the rainy

season"
. Situation :
tasmi.", yaiHfe ... na rl,Ikkhii chijjif/Jsu, .. in that sacri-
fice ... no trees were cut down "
iipaddsu na vijahati, .. he does not abandon (him) in
misfortune "
Society:
M iigadhesu viharati, .. he lives in Magadha" (literally
.. among the Magadhans ")
Reference, etc. :
idam pi 'ssa hoti silasmif/J, .. hehas this as regards (moral)
character "
citte cittdnupassi viharati, " with reference to the mind, he
lives observing the mind "
dhammesu ... nti~af/J, .. knowledge of (about) pheno-
mena ..
kankhii ... dhamme, .. doubt about the doctrine"
jivite apekhaf/J, .. hope for life"
(the locative may also be used after yall idattt)
Establishment:
pettike thiine thapesi, .. appointed (him) in his father's
place ..
satipallhtinesu supatilthitacitta, "(whose) mind is well
established in the conditions of self-possession" (sati is
variously translated, usually by " mindfulness ")
Confidence :
pasanno ahafJ' bhagavati, .. I have confidence .in the
fortunate one" (Loc. Sg. of bhagavant)
dhamme pasannii, " she has confidence in the doctrine"
bhagavati brahmacariyafJ' c,aritvii, .. having lived the God-
like life under the fortunate one"
Disappearing :
brahmaloke antarahito, .. vanished from God's world" (and
appeared on Earth)
Lesson 16 103
(this is by supernatural power-iddhi~f a monk or

deity: ordinary mortals can move away only gradually
as expressed by the ablative case).
The locative absolute consists (like the genitive absolute,
d. Lesson 10) of a nexus of noun (or pronoun) + participle.
Both are in the locative case. The noun is agent to the participle,
which is often but not necessarily passive, and this agent
cannot be the same as the agent of the main sentence within
which the absolute construction forms a subordinate clause.
Further words inflected in the locative in · concord with the
10cative agent, such as adjectives, pronouns, and predicate
nouns, may be included in the absolute construction. If the
participle has a patient, instrument, etc., this will be in its
proper case (accusative, etc.). There may also be indecIinables
included in the absolute phrase. A sentence may contain several
locative absolutes, each with its own agent, indicating a number
of distinct subordinate actions. E.g.: "Though it is raining,
it is' pouring down, lightning is flashing, a thunderbolt
cracking-that he should not see (;mything), nor hear a
sound I" (four locative absolutes in the Pali). The locative
absolute is used much more frequently than the genitive, not
being restricted to a special type of relation between the sub-
ordinate and main actions. The subordinate action may precede
the main action or be simultaneous with it. Any kind of sub-
ordinate action may be expressed. The absolute phrase usually
precedes the main clause of the sentence, but is sometimes
inserted parenthetically.
Examples :-
parinibbute bhagavati ... Sakko ... imattt giUhattt abhdsi,
"when the fortunate one was "liberated" ...
Sakko 1••• spoke this verse "
imasmittt ca pana veyyakarattasmittt bhaiiiiamcine Sakkassa
... dhammacakkhu1'J1. 2 udapadi, " and moreover as this
explanation was being spoken... the f eye of the
doctrine' arose in (' of ') Sakka "
1 The king of the gods.
1 u stenl," eye."
Lesson 16 105
jivitabba to be lived
janitabba to be known
diitabba to be given, must be
given, should be
.
glven
(d)dis da!/habba to be seen, must be seen
(as), should be
viewed, must be en-
visaged, should be
considered (in such
and such a way)
pajjitabba (on (used with vanous
present stem) prefixes In the
corresponding mean-
ings)
patabba to be drunk
pucchitabba to be asked
bhasitabba to be spoken, should be
spoken
.u vattabba to be spoken
Pid (II) veditabba to be known, to be
found out, to be dis-
covered, to be ascer-
tained
(s)su so~abba to be heard
sev sevitabba to be indulged in, to be
pursued
lan hantabba to be killed
Causative:
kat karetabba must be caused to be
made, should be
caused to be made
Ihiipetabba to be established
bhavetabba to be developed
With suffix aniya :

kam kamaniya to be loved, lovely
Lesson 16 10 7
Examples of the use of the future passive participle :-

As impersonal (neuter or agreeing with patient, if expressed)
passive, with agent in instrumental :-'
te vo bhavetabba, " they must be developed by you"
thupo kdtabbo, .. a pagoda should be built"
imina ... pariyayena veditabbatp, "it should be ascer-
tained in this way (' by this course ') ..
katha11' palipajjitabba11', " how should one proceed (behave,
conduct oneself) ? ..
The active use of future passive participles of intransitive

verbs meaning" go ", .. move ", go forth ", etc., is rare. They
If
are much more frequently constructed passively.

Sometimes the future passive participle is accompanied
(followed) by the present or future tense of a verb meaning" to
be .. (" periphrastic construction": Lesson 24) :-
, , , maggo gantabbo hoti, ", , , the road has to be travelled"
maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, " the road will have to be
travelled by me," " I shall have to travel along the road"
n' amhi kena ci upasa11'kamitabbo, .. I am not to be
approached (visited) by anyone."
The future passive participle is used with man (Ill:
" think ") to express what one thinks (present). thought
(aorist) or might think (optative) of doing or suitable to be
done:-
upasa11'kamitabbat!l- ma1'Hieyya. "he may think it (an
assembly) is to be approached," " he might consider it
worth approaching."
As adjective (see also rajaniyo, etc" in the passage in
Exercise I2) : -
ramat'iyo pabbato. " the mountain is delightful,"
As noun:-
pUTe vacaniyat!l- paccha avaca • .. you said last (after) what
ought to be said first (before),"
Kammadharaya Compounds
A class of compound somewhat similar to the tappurisa
(and sometimes included in it as a sub-variety) is the kamma-
dhdraya. 1 Like the tappurisa, the kammadhdraya compound
functions as a noun, but in this class the two component words
refer to the same locus or object (cf. in English" blackbird ").
In place of relation we have identity of locus, the first member
being an attribute of the second. If they were not compounded,
the members would have to be in the same case, since they
would be noun and attribute or two nouns in apposition. If
a tappurisa were divided, the first member would show the case
relation inherent in the compound, the second member the same
case as the original compound, determined by its function in
the sentence. If a kammadhdraya were divided, the second
member would again retain the same case as the original'
compound, but so would the first, since it would have to agree
with the second in case.
Examples :-
akalamegho, an untimely cloud": megho = cloud" ;
Cl Cl
akala = Cluntimely": i.e. out of the usual season.

rajisi, .. king-sage": rajan + isi with elision of the -an of
the stem rajan.
adhammakaro, unlawful acting"; (for -kiiro see Lesson
Cl
14). adhamma = non-law "--dhamma here in the ancient

Cl
sense of religion-custom-Iaw, not in the restricted sense of the

Buddhist doctrine, though the latter represents the two as
ultimately one and based on the immutable natural law of the
universe, varying only in their degree of nearness and fidelity
to the truth.
The word adhammo in itself and other similar negative
formations are regarded as kammadharaya compounds (a +
dhammo) of a perhaps looser kind. A further, rather rare, group
of kammadharayas expresses a comparison between the mem-
bers, which are nouns in apposition.
cakkaratanatff., wheel jewel", might be interpreted as a
Cl '1
1 The name is obscure: .. character bearing" ? (taking ""mm" in the ethical

sense of the character or habit or tendencies resulting from action, which is
held to determine destiny. and hence as character or attribute in general).
Lesson 16 I09
simple apposition or as a comparison: a jewel shaped like

a wheel. (The wheel-jewel is one of seven symbolic gems
supposed to appear when there is a " universal emperor" in the
world.)
Abbreviation
Frequently in Pali texts a passage is repeated verbatim or
with only one or two words changed. This is often indicated by
giving only the opening words of the passage followed by the
word pe, "and so on," "etc.," itself an abbreviation of the
word peyyiila, " etcetera."
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
tl{d)-(g)ghar (I) (to uggharati it oozes
make wet)
(p)pa-(g)ghar (I) paggharati it trickles, it drips
UU' (I) carati he proceeds, lives, con-
ducts, carries on (it is
difficult to give a general
equivalent, car means
following a particular
way of life, as animals
grazing, monks begging,
etc.)
fP)pa-(t)thar (I) (to pattharati he spreads out
spread)
pari-bhu (I) paribhavati he despises
.akkh (VII) makkheti he smears
i-Yddh (VII) iiriidheti he satisfies
(p)pa-vass (I) pavassati it rains heavily
(to rain)
,,(d)-vah (I) (to ubbahati he carries off
carry)
vi-har (I) viharati he dwells, he lives
Lesson 16 III
Indedinables :-
ward within, between, meanwhile, whilst
~ and so on, etc. (as abbreviation)
Ma~e I say!
yagghe hear!
yoniso methodically, consequently
EXERCISE 16
Passages for reading ;-
I. te yen' annataral11 gamapadarp ten' upasarpkamirpsu.
tatth' addasarpsu pahiitarp khomarp chaQQitatp. disvi. pe.
pahiitatp khomasuttatp chaQQitarp. disva.. pe. [a whole range of
commodities of increasing value is enumerated] pe. pahiitatp
suvaQQaIp chaQQitatp. disvi sahayako sahayakarp amantesi :
yassa kho samma atthliya iccheyya.ma saQal11 va. sal)asuttarp
vi ... sisatp va sajjhutp va, idatp pahiitatp suvaQl)atp chaQQi-
tarp. tena hi samma tvan ca sil)abharal11 chaQQehi, ahaft ca
sajjhubbararp chaQQessami. ubho suvaQQabharatp adaya
gamissama ti. ayatp kho me samma sal)abha.ro duribhato ca
susannaddho ca. alam me; tvatp pajanahi ti ...
2. bhiitapubb~ aftftataro siikaraposako puriso sakamha

gama annatp gamatp agamasi. tatth' addasa. pahiitatp suk-
kbagiitharp chac;ic;iitatp. disvan' 1 assa etad ahosi: ayatp me
bahuko sukkhagiitho chac;ic;iito, mamaft ca siikarabhattatp. yan
niinihatp ito sukkhagiithatp hareyyan ti. so uttarisangaJl1
pattharitva pahiitatp sukkhagiithatp aharitva bhaQc;iikatp
bandhitva sise ubbahetvi I agamasL tassa antara magge maha
akalamegho pavassi. so uggharantatp paggharantal11 yava
agganakha giithena makkhito giithabharatp idaya agamasi.
.
tarn enam. 3 manussa disva evam ihamsu.: kacci no tvam.
I disvtlll4 is an archaic form of d.svtl used mostly in verse; sometimes the
form disvt!,,' is used in prose, when a vowel follows,
t Causative in same meaning as simple verb; the double form of causative
ofthis verb is used in the meaning" to have someone carry oft ",
t ma'fJ = .. him "-accusative singular masculine of a pronoun of the 3rd
person, used only in accusative as enclitic form,
= ..
a t!ha'fJsu they said "-Lesson 21.
II2 Introduction to Pali
bhar,e ummatto, kacci veceto. katharp hi nama uggharantaqt

paggharantaI11 yava agganakhii giithena makkhito gutha-
bharaq1 harissasi ti. tumhe kho ettha bha~e ummatta tumhe
veceta tatha hi pana me sukarabhattan ti.
Bhagava Rajagahe viharati
ime candimasuriya parasmiq1 loke na imasmirp
kismirp vo viggaho, kismirp vivado
evarp vutte annataro rajamacco rajanaq1 etad avoca
na dani ten a cirarp jivitabbarp bhavissati
so bhota ranna vippatisaro na karar,iyo
na kho pan' etarp PoHhapada evarp daHhabbarp
kin cid eva kara~iyaq1 uppajji
idarp sevitabbarp, idaI11 na sevitabbarp
Translate into PaH (this is a Pali passage for retranslation,
given as literally as possible to show the construction of long
sentences with conjunctive particles and direct speeches, as
well as the repetitive and ponderous style of debating priests
and philosophers in which much of the PaH Canon is written) :-
If (ee) now (va kho pana) I (put first) were to ask (optative)
the philosopher Gotama a question, if (ee) in that connection
the philosopher Gotama were to aslune thus: "Priest,1 this
question, now (ca), should not be asked (future passive
participle) thus, but (nama) thus, priest, this question should
be asked," this assembly would despise me for that (tena-
place at beginning of clause): "The priest So~ada~Qa is a fool
(put first), unintelligent, he could (sak(k), aorist) not ask
(Pucchitutf'-infinitive of pucch, Lesson I9; place at end of
clause) the philosopher Gotama a question consequently
(precedes' question ')."
If now (as before) the philosopher Gotama were to ask me
(put first) a question, and I were not to satisfy (optative) (his:
omit) mind (accusative) with (my) explanation of his question,
if in that connection the philosopher Gotama were to say to me
(accusative) thus: "Priest, this question, now, should not be
I Word order: .. Not now this, priest, question thus should be asked."
Lesson 17 II3
explained thus, but thus, priest, this question should be

explained," this assembly would despise me for that; "The
piest SOI).adaI).Qa is a fool, unintelligent, he couldn't satisfy
(hadhettt'lft-infinitive) (his) mind with (his) explanation of the
philosopher Gotama's question."
LESSON 17
Declension of Masculine and Neuter Nouns in -a and Feminine
Nouns in-a
As all the cases of the nouns in a have been given we can now
recapitulate the whole declension, adding the various pro-
nominal inflections (such as the ablatives in asma and amha)
which are sometimes used with these nouns ;-
Masculine stem in a, laka ;
I Singular
I Plural
I. {Nom.
Vac.
loko
loka }/Okti
2. Acc. loka11l loke
3. Instr. lokena lokehi
4. Dative lokaya. lokassa lokanalfl
5. Ab!. lokil. 10kaslHil. lokeh'

lokamlla (/ollalo)
6. I Gen. lokassa lokana11l
-,.--, Lac. loke. lokasmi~ lokesu
Neuters in a :
-have the special forms nominative singular in a'l' and nomina-
tive and accusative plural in iini: citta1f', cittiini; otherwise
they are inflected in the same way as the masculines.
II4 Introduction to Pali
Declension of feminine stems in ti :
Singular Plural
Nom . hatha.
Voc. lIathe (katM) or ka/laayo
Ace. lIatha,?,
Ins.
Dat.
Ab\. }."'''~.
{.......
lIathiJna'.n
lIatMhi
Gcn. lIathiJna,?,
Loc. lIathdya or lIathitsu

katMya,?,
.-
Declension of Pronouns
Recapitulation of the pronominal declension :-
Stem ya(d) (relative pronoun) :
Singular Plural
- Masc:-I Ncut. Fcrn. Masc. Neut. Fern .
Nom. yo yam or ycl

-
yad
ye yani yd '
Ace. ya,?, ya,?, or ,)'a,?,
yad
, , , ,
• •
Ins. ycna yllya yehi yllhi
Dat. yassa yassti yesa,?, }'asa,?,
Ab!. YII .<ma or yliya ychi ydhi

yall/ha
Gcn .
-
yassa I
yassa .. yesa,?,
- yasa,?,
Loe. yasllli,.n or yaya(,?,) 0' YUII yetsu

yamhi yassa,?,
Lesson 17 lIS
Personal pronouns :
------
FIRST-ma(d) or mam- SECoND-ta(d)
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Nom. aha,!1 mayat!! Ival!, tf/mlle
Ace. ma17l amhe tva17l or tat!! tumlie

or no 1 or vo 1
-
Ins. maya or 1118 I amhehi laya or te I tlllnhehi
or no or vo
3
Dat. mama('!,) or IIIe, om/ui/f.ol.n lava or le lumhcikat!! I
sometimes mayhat!! or 110 or vo
Ab!. maya amhehi laya tumhehi

3
Gen. mama(171) or me, amhlikam lava or te tllmhakat!! I
sometimes mayhat!! or 110 or VD
Loe. mayi alllhesu

I
tayi I
tumhesu
I me, no, le, and vo are unemphatie forms used as enelities.

• Occasionally t/(1IIIIa/!'. 3
Oe(;usionullyasmlikal.n.
TIIIRD-ta(d)
Nominative singular: so (sometimes sa), tat!! or tad, sa; rest as ya(d).
Demonstrative 1'datJ't-: singular masculine and feminine

nominative ayatrt, accusative imatrt; neuter idatJ't; instru-
mental masculine and neuter imina, feminine imaya; genitive/
dative masculine and neuter assa, feminine assli; ablative
masculine and neuter imamha or imasmii, feminine imaya;
Iocative masculine and neuter asmitJ't or imasmitrt, feminine
maya(trt).
Plural follows the declension of ya(d) , in all genders, on the
stem ima.
Interrogative kitrt as ya(d) (stem ka) except: neuter nomina-
tive accusative singular kitJ't; masculine and neuter dative and
genitive singular either kassa or kissa; masculine and neuter
locative singular kismitJ't or kimhi.
A demonstrative pronoun with the stem na is inflected in the
Lesson 17 117
The numerals dvi,l two" and paiica, five," which are

11 It
IISed like adjectives, are inflected as follows for all genders : -
Nom. } dv~ pail ca

Ace.
Ins . dlifhi paiicahi
Dat. dvitlna", paiicanna",
Ab!. dvfhi paiicahi
Gen. dvintla", paiicanna",
Loc. dvfsu pancasu
The numerals satattt, " hundred" and sahassattt, " thousand"

are neuter nouns, inflected like neuters in a and used in
apposition with other nouns (i.e. not agreeing in gender but only
in case) or with nouns in the genitive. They are used in both
singular and plural: satattt purisattt or satani purisa or sata'IJI-
purisa or satani purisattt or satattt purisanattt, all meaning
.. a hundred men". Alternatively a compound may be
formed: purisasatatJ'Z (genitive tappurisa).
Conjunctive I ndeclinables
Phrases or sentences may be joined to make a continuous
.. period" or paragraph by" conjunctive" (also" disjunctive" I
etc.) indeclinables, several of which have been met already.
Here we may recapitulate these in a synopsis of the main
indeclinables of this type, grouped according to function (with
references to passages for reading in previous exercises in which
some of them have occurred) .
.. Conjunctive " (sam~,ccaya) in the literal sense ;-
ca (enclitic) " and", " now" (see Exercises 14, I6-second
passage and translation into Pali)
Pi (enclitic) " also ", "too" (see Exercise 15, sentence for
translation)
atha (initial) " then" (see Exercise 12).
1 In derivatives and compounds the stems dvi, du, dve, and dvii are used.
118 I ntrodzlction to Pali
tI Disjunctive (vikappana) :_
JJ
va (enclitic) "or", "either" (see Exercise IS, sentence

for translation)
udiihu (initial) "or?" (used in interrogative disjunctions)
(see Exercises 17, 18, sentences for translation).
11 Adversative" (visesa) :_
pan a (enclitic) " but ", "however" (see Exercises Il, 17) .
• ' Causal .. (kara~a) :-
hi (enclitic) " for", .. because" (see Exercises 13, 14)
tas1ltc? " thereforc ..
ten a "therefore" (see Exercise 16, translation into PaH)
(" conclusive ")
lad, ta'tt " then", " so " (" illative ").
" Emphatic" (eka'ttsa) :-
kho (enclitic) "indeed" (see Exercises
12, 14) (emphasize the
khalle (enclitic) " indeed" whole sentence)
ha " indeed", " truly"
" Hypothetical" (sa'ttk(i) : -
ce (enclitic) " if" (see Exercise 16, translation into PaH)
s(~ce (initial) " if .. (examples in Lessons 10, 14 illustrating
use of future and optative) .
.. Interrogative" (pucchana) :-
nu (enclitic) " ? ", .. now? .. (see Exercise 12)
nanu " isn't it ? "
udtilm " or ? " (introduces second member of a disjunction,
cf. aboyc).
(Some of thesc indeclinables have other uses besides the
connecting of phrases or sentences: cf. Vocabulary.)
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
anll-pa l -(k)khalld (I) anupakkhandati he goes over to, he is
converted to, he
)OlllS
'/,(1 here not> ppa (cf. aml-pa-gam in Vocabulary 28: here too we might
resture -Pi-I .
Lesson 17 119
a-(k)khd (I) akkhati 1 he tells, he reports

(especially tradi-
tion)
a-(s)sas (I) assasati 1 he breathes in
pari-a-da (Ill) pariyadiyati he uses up, he ex-
hausts
vi-bhaj (I) vibhajati he divides
apa-vad (I) apavadati he disparages
Nouns ;-
bhagineyyo nephew (sister'S son)
SIlkato (also neuter) cart
SIlttho caravan
satthavaho caravan-merchant
tUlakattJ water
kattham
.. .. firewood
ti1;lfl1Jl grass
,,"ccha wrong, misconduct
SIlbhii assembly hall
Adjectives :-
tUtara northern
iaritaka green, fresh
Pronoun:-
katama which ?, which one ?
Indec1inables ;-
eka1Jlsena for certain, certainly, definitely
ekato on one side, together, on either side
tlvidha twofold, twice, in two
ya1Jl (as nipata) since, if, that ... (with optative)
SIlha along with, according to (usually with
instrumental)
I Ct. footnote in Lesson 15.

Examples :-
garu heavy"
If garutara " heavier"
dassaniya .. beautiful " dassaniyatara more beautiful",
If
.. most beautiful"
pa~l.ita delightful"
If pattitatara more delightful ",
If
most delightful ..
If
vattttavant .. handsome .. , vatt~tavantatara .. more handsome "

.. beautiful"
(consonant stem)
Comparatives are constructed with the ablative of the word
denoting that with which comparison is made: imamha, ..
phala1J1. ... pa1;litatarattt, .. a fruit more delightful than this."
The indeclinable ita, from this," .. than this," is sometimes
If
used in comparisons. When the meaning is superlative, the

ablative (= If from", than") is replaced by the genitive
If
(= partitive genitive, the meaning being best of", .. best If
among "): nesa1J1. ... dassa1tiyataro, to the most beautiful

among them."
Some comparatives use other suffixes. Whereas tara i~ added
to any stem, two special suffixes, one usually comparative and
the other usually superlative, are used when the derivation is
made directly from a root (" primary derivation": cf. Lesson
25). They are (f)(y)ya (comparative) and it.tha (superlative),
inflected as adjectives in a (fern. a). Only a few of these are
commonly used :-
ka~t (khudda
(If decrease ") .. small", .. younger ",
.. minor ") .. youngest "
ja (If increase ") (vu#ha jettha .. elder" ,
.. old ", .. eldest",
" elder ") .. (most)
senior"
_1
pap papa bad" piipiya
If
.. worse"
bhii (bahu bhiyya
.. much ") " more"
1 The rare f>iipi!!ha, .. worst," is not found in the Dfgha (it has a remarkable
form with superlative and comparative suffixes: papillhatara).
Lesson 18 125
(siri) (kalya~a seyya settha" best ..

" good ") .. better ..
Some of these are used in certain forms as indec1inables
(adverbs): bhiyyo, " more"; seyyo," better."
A superlative suffix tama is rarely seen except in the pronoun
katama, .. which one?" (used in plural also). The sense is
.. which of these things? ", or "which of all possible things
[mdefinite) ? ..
Ordinal Numerals
The first six ordinal numerals are as follows :-
pathama first
dutiya second
tatiya third
catuttha fourth
paiicama fifth
cha/#ha sixth
They are declined like adjectives in a, the feminine being
usually in ii except in the case of pancami (catutthi and challhi
are occasionally used also).
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
anu-(p)pa-da (I) anuppadeti grant
anu-yuj (II) anuyuiijati submit (p.p. anu-
yutta)
antara-dha (Ill) antaradhdyati disappear (p.p. an-
(the prefix antara tarahita with dhd
means " within ") > hi as weak
form of the root)
abhi-ni-vajj (VII) abhinivajje# avoid
ii-(c)chad (VII) acchiideti dress
o-sakk (1) (to go) osakkati draw back, retire
(the prefix 0 means
" down" off ")
I "
o-har (I) causative: ohdreti = shave off

gil (le) gilati swa.llow
div (Ill) dibba# play, gamble

(p)pa# l-(t)thii (I) pat#thahati set up, station it-
self
(p)pa#-vi-ram (I) pa/iviramati abstain (p. p. pa/i-
virata)
(p)pa-da (1) padeti give to, hand over
(aorist padiisi)
pari-kujj (I) (to palikujjati (in a squat down
bend, to fold) few words pari (gerund pali-
is changed to kujjitva)
pali)
pari-bhit (1) paribhavati despise (causative
paribhiiveti treat
with, penetrate
with, fill with)
(p)pa-vatt (1) pavattati go on, continue,
proceed, set
going, start
patu(r)-bhit (I) patubhavati become manifest,
(the prefix patu{r) (r dropped in the appear
means " mani- present tense)
fest ")
budh (Ill) bujjhati know, be aware of
man (VII) maneti honour, respect
liP (Il) limpati smear (p.p. litta)
vatt (I) vattati proceed, conduct
oneself, go on
(doing) (imp.
2nd sing. vattiihi)
vi-ati-sar (VII) vUisareti 2 converse, make
(the prefix ati (conversation:
means "over", kathii)
" very", " ex-
ceedingly ")
sa1?1--anu-sas (I) samanusasati install, appoint (as
ruler)
1 Before a root beginning with (!)Ih, and occasionally elsewhere. (pjpali i.s
chal1ged to patio
• Sometimes when two vowels meet the second is elided and the first
lengthened. .
Lesson 18 127
saflt-a-dii (Ill) samiidiyati conform (to a rule

or way of life)
(p. p. samiidi~tJa)
saflt-mud (1) sammodati greet, exchange
greetings with
(saddhiflt and
instrumental)
(aorist sammodi)
Nouns :-
akkhadhutto gambler
akkho die (in dice: but played by drawing
several dice of different values)
acelo naked ascetic
abhisamparayv future state
akappo deportment, style
odano boiled rice
kukkuravatiko canine (ascetic) (dog-vower)
kukkuro dog
kummaso barley bread
keso hair (of the head)
govatiko bovine (ascetic)
janapado country dweller
negamo town dweller
padeso place, locality, region
pa1J,o life (breath, animal life), living being
mado drink (intoxicating), excess
(v)vataflt 1 vow
vaso dwelling place, camp
ahitaflt disadvantage, hardship
iivara1,l-aflt shelter
katukaflt bitterness
dayajjaflt inheritance
dukkaraflt hard task
maJJaflt intoxicant, liquor, drink
raJJaflt kingdom
vattattt conduct, duty, government
1 The initial is doubled in some compounds but not in others: sflabblda'1' but
kulllluralJata/fl, although an occasional variant would substitute kukhuralJatla'fl

for the latter.
vijita,!, realm, kingdom

vJSa'!' pOIson
sattha,!, sword
hila,!, benefit, welfare
anattama1fatii worry, disquiet, anxiety
chamii earth, ground
disa direction, region
11£USa falsehood
rakkhii safety
sahavyatii association, condition, union (with geni-
. tivc)
pa#riijan- hostile king (declined like rajan-)
Masculine nouns declined like pii1Ji :-
JS~ sage, seer
kali unlucky die, bad luck, the iron age (the
present decadent period of civiliza-
tion, which began c. rooos.c. with the
discovery of iron and · consequent
increased horrors of warfare)
gahapati householder
cakkavatti emperor
1nll.tJhi fist
samiidhi concentration
s(irathi charioteer
Adjectives decl~d like saiiiii1t :-
iitiipin energetic (with ascetic energy)
-k'riri1t doing
-ciirin living, behaving, carrying on, going on
brahmacririn celibate (living like God)
-viharin living, dwelling, being
Noun: pakkhin bird (" winged ")
Adjectives :-
adhana poor
anattamana disturbed, worried
abhiiiiia learned
kasaya brown, orange, saffron (colour of the
robes of Buddhist monks and of some
Lesson 18
other ascetics: original shade un-

certain, now saffron)
.ibba divine, heavenly
~mmika just
jlarama most, highest
papa evil
pdtika paternal
flClinusaka human
S4mmodaniya agreeable, pleasant
Slirtit'iya polite
ana inferior
Indeclinables :-
.adha certainly
.nvad after (behind) (this word is always
followed by eva)
.pica nevertheless
.pubba11' acarima11' simultaneously
igatagataf!' each time it came
iffgha here!
ekantikena finally, conclusively
tata my son I (affectionate address)
digharatta11' long (time)
paccha afterwards, back, behind, west
re damn you !, hey! (contemptuous
address)
114 (enclitic) like
(s)sudaf!' even
Gerund :-
nissaya depending on, leaning on (ni-(s)si (I))
EXERCISE 18
Passages for reading :-
I. bhutapubbaJTl dve akkhadhutta akkhehi dibbiJTlsu. eko
akkhadhuttoagatagataJTl kaliJTl gilati. addasa kho dutiyo
akkhadhutto taI1l akkhadhuttaI1l agatagataI1l kalirp gilantarp.
disva akkhadhuttaI1l et ad avoca: tvarp kho samma ekantikena
Lesson 19 135
gam gantutft to go
'-
JW jivitu1ft to live
(j)jhe jhayitu1ft to meditate
(n)na natutft to know
tar taritu1f1. to cross
dd d(it1ttft to give
dis (VII) desetutft to teach
(n)na1' pantlapetu1f1. to declare
is (I) 1 pariyesitutft 2 to seek .
V1S pavisitutft to enter
1'ucch pucchitutft to ask
bhU bhavitutft to be
bhas bhiisitutft to speak
bhuj (II) bhuiijitutft to eat
muc (Il) muiicitu1f1. to free
(I)!hti vullhdtutft to rise, to get up
(ii)iiti saiiiitipetutft (caus.) to make perceive
(s)su sotUtft to hear
The infinitive is neutral as regards active and passive and
hence is used in passive as well as active sentences. Thus in
a passive sentence with the agent in the instrumental: kula-
puttena upasatftkamit-utft, literally "to be approached by
a respectable person". In an active sentence: na sakkoti
iisanii pi vutthatu1!t, .. he can't even get up from his seat."
The infinitive may be made negative by compounding with
the prefix a-: adtltutft. " not to give."
Among the more or less idiomatic constructions with the
infinitive we may note the following :-
evatft arahati bhavitutft = " it should be so " (" deserves to
be "), "it must be so" (expressing probability, not
certainty, concerning facts)
iccheyyama mayatft... sotUtft = .. we would like to
hear ... "
I There are two roots is of the first conjugation, the (regular) one, traditionally
called is(a), present tense esati, past participle i!!ha, and the one traditionally
called· is(u) which takes the suffix cha: present tense icch(lti, past participle
icchita. In this book we have omitted the exponents (anllbandha) such as (a),
(11), with which almost all roots are traditionally given .
t Before a root beginning with a vowel the prefix pari becomes pariy.
Lesson 19 137
Bahubbihi Compounds (I)

The bahttbbihi 1 class of compounds consists of those whose
meanings are subordinate to the meanings of words other than
the members of the compounds themselves (cf. in English
.. whitewashed "). Unlike tappurisas, dvandas, and kamma-
j,harayas they thus function as adjectives. In explaining a
bahubbihi it is necessary to ascertain to whom or to what the
compound pertains. Bahubbihis are inflected in the three
genders like adjectives, according to the gender of the domi-
nating noun. A bah~,bbihi compound is always equivalent to
a relative (subordinate) clause; It who has/was ... ", It which
has/was ... ".
From pahuta and jivhti (It tongue ") we may form a compound
pahutajivha- as an epithet of, say, kumara- (hence with mascu-
line inflections), meaning It a boy who has a large tongue".
From lohita (tI red ") and akkhi, lohitakkhi (P1lYiso) = " (a man)
having red eyes". From kaddamo (It mud ") and makkhita,
kaddamamakkhitatJI- (cakkatJI-) = "(a wheel) smeared with
mua ". From sa- (" with", "possessing ") and dhaiiiiatJI-
(" grain", " crops ") we have the bahubbihi sadhaiiita, It grain-
bearing," as the epithet of a place. Frequently other classes of
compound are enclosed within bahttbbihis, thus satit:taka#hodaka
means It possessing grass, firewood, and water" (dvanda within
a bah1,bbihi). It may be noted that sa in these compounds is not
used as an independent word (the equivalent independent word
is saha): a number of such substitute or secondary words are
used in compounds in place of independent forms. The form
sa- is used also for saka, " own."
Bahubbihis may be subdivided into several distinct groups, of
which the ordinary two-member compounds and those begin-
ning with sa- (= saha) form two. Those beginning with the
negative a-/an- (= 1ta), such as asama (bhagavant) , "un-
equalled (fortunate one) " form another group, some of which
have occurred in earlier exercises. 2 Compounds which formally
resemble tappurisas, kammadharayas, or dvandas may be used
1 bahltbblhi = bahlt+ (v)Vlhi (" rice ")-IIV > bb-an example of the class:
bahubbfhi (deso) = " (a country) having much rice" (i.e. a fertile, Frosperous
country).
2 With sa- and a- contrasting pairs are formed : sadhalla/adhana .
as bahubbihis. Thus most of the ordinary two-member bahubbihis

have a case relation between the members, whilst the negative
bahubbihis resemble negative kammadharayas, In a two-member
bahubbihi the order of the members may be reversed (as com-
pared with the strict order of the tappurisa) : -
katapuiiiia (purisa) = " (a man) who has done' good "
chinnapapaiica (Buddha) = (a Buddha) who has cut
Cl
through obstacles ..
vajirapd1,ti (yakkha) = " (a god) who has a thunderbolt in
his hand ",
Very often the sense of compounds is spontaneously evident,
but at times it is obscure, hence the need to consider their usage,
Other groups of bahubbihis will be indicated in sUbsequent
lessons.
Action Nouns
Nouns expressing an action, such as those ending in -ana
(e.g. dassana, "seeing ") sometimes take a patient (" direct
object" of the action) in the accusative or genitive (" objective
genitive J1) case. These" action nouns m~y also take a .. sub-
JI
jective .. (agent) in the genitive or in the instrumental. In these

constructions the action noun often (though not always)
appears in the dative case, expressing purpose, and may be
compared with the infinitive. It may also appear in the accusa-
tive as representing the objective of the main action (with its
own objective in the genitive).
Examples of action nouns with patients in the accusative :-
mayaft' bhavantaft' Gotamaft' dassanaya idh' upasa~kantd,
"we have come here to see (for seeing) the honourable
Gotama."
dura vat' amhd agata tathdgatattt dassanaya, "we have
indeed come from far to see the thus-gone."
katha1?J savanaya, " to hear (some) talk."
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
adhi-a-vas (I) ajjkdvasati live on, exploit
anu-bhu (I) anubhavati experience, enjoy, observe
atithi masc. guest

adhammo false doctrine, bad nature, bad
custom, injustice, bad mental
object, bad idea
anayo misfortune, misery
apdra11' hither, this world
arahant- masc. (declined worthy one, perfected one
like bhagavant- or like a
present participle)
avasesako one who remains, survivor
dsanka apprehension, doubt, fear
upakarat;l-a11' resources
upapila oppressio(l, trouble
upamd simile
ussado abundance
katJ!aka11' (" thorn "), subversive element,
rebel, bandit
kaddamo mud
kantaro wilderness, semi-desert
kalapo bundle, quiver
kicca11' what should be done
kumuda"" white water-lily
kulo tribe
kullo raft
ko##hagara"" granary, storehouse
koso treasury
khattar- masc. (irregular steward
noun: nom. sing. khat-
td, acc. sing. khatta11',
voc. sing. khatte)
khilo stake (boundary)
khetta"" field, territory, land
gatJo group, aggregate
gadrabho donkey
gamana11' going
garahd blame, reproof, threat
gahat;l-a11' seizing. keeping
gahapatiko householder
gutJa11' (sometimes masc.) string, strand, quality
Lesson 19 145
kuhif!' where (to) ?

tatra there
tava so much. so long, first, now
tv eva (enclitic) but (emphatic)
diva by day
pag eva how much more so, let alone, still
more, still less
the opposite way, in the opposite
direction
manne I think, no doubt
yatra where
yada when
sighaf!' fast (repeated = very fast)
seyyathii as, just like (introducing a simile)
sotthina safely
EXERCISE 19
1. te tarp sattharp dvidha vibhajirpsu ekato panca sakatasa-
tlini ekato pafica sakatasatani. eko tiiva satthavaho bahurp
tiQan ca katthan ca udakan ca ll.ropetva sattharp payapesi. dvi-
hatihapayato 1 kho pana so sattho addasll. purisarp kalarp lohi-
takkhirp apanaddhakalaparp 2 kumudamalarp allavattharp alla-
kesarp kaddamamakkhitehi cakkehi gadrabharathena pati-
patharp ll.gacchantarp. disvll. et ad avoca: kuto bho agacchasi ti.
amukamha janapadll. ti. kuhirp gamissasi ti. amukarp nama
janapadan ti. kacci bho purato kanlare mahamegho abhippa-
vatto ti. evarp kho bho purato kantare mahlimegho abhippa-
vaHo, asittodakani vatumani, bahurp tiQan ca . kaHhaii ca
udakan ca. cha<;1<;1etha bho puraQani tiQiini kaHhani udakani,
lahubharehi sakatehi sigharp sigharp gacchatha, mll. yoggll.1'\i
kilametha. ti.
atha kho so satthavaho satthike ll.mantesi: ayal11 bho puriso
evam aha: purato kantare mahamegho abhippavaHo, asitto-
dakani vatumll.ni, bahurp tiQafi ca katthafi ca udakafi ca,
cha<;1<;1etha bho purll.Qll.ni tiQll.ni katthlini udakll.ni. lahubbarehi
I " when it was two or three days since it had set out" (bahubbflli).
I bahubbfhi; .. with quiver tied behind"(Commentary) ... with hair untied"
(meaning suggested by Critical Pali Dictionat'y).
yan nilnaha'11 mahftyafifial11 yajeyyal11, yal11 mama assa

digharattal11 hiHiya sukha.ya. ti. iccham' ahal11 brahmaQa
mahayannal11 yajitul11. anusasatu mal11 bhaval11 yal11 mama
assa digharattal11 hitaya sukhaya ti.
eval11 vutte brahmarya purohito brahmaQo rajanal11 Mahaviji-
tal11 etad avoca: bhoto kho rafifio janapado sakaQtako
saupapilo,gamaghata pi dissanti nigamaghata pi dissanti
nagaraghiita pi dissanti panthaduhana pi dissanti. bhavafi
cc kho pana raja eval11 sakal)take janapade saupapiJe balim
uddhareyya, akiccakari assa tena bhaval11 raja. siyfl kho pan a
bhoto rafifio evam assa: aham etal11 dassukhilal11 vadhena vii.
bandhena va janiyii. 1 vii. garahaya vii pabbajanaya va samil-
hunissami ti, na kho pan' etassa dassukhilassa eval11 samma
samuggh5to hoti. ye te hata.vasesaka bhavissanti, te pacchii.
rafifio janapadul11 vihethessanti. api ca kho idal11 sa'11Vidhanal11
,igammll cvam ctassa dassllkhilassa samma sall1l1gghato
hoti. tcna hi bhavarp raja ye bhoto ranno janapade ussahanti
kasigorakkhe 2 tesam bhaval11 raja bijabhattal11 anuppadetu,
ye bhoto rafifio janapade ussahanti vaQijjaya tesam bhaval11
raja pa.bhata'11 anuppadetu, ye bhoto rafifio janapade ussahanti
r1ijaporise tesam bhaval11 raja bhattavetanal11 pakappetu, te
ca manussa sakammapasutii raono janapadal11 na vihethessanti,
maha ca ranno rasiko bhavissati, khcmaHhita janapada
akaDtak1i anupapi!ii. manussa ca mud a modamana ure putte
naccenta aparutaghara mafine viharissanti ti.
3. jate kho pana bhikkhave Vipassimhi S kumare, Bandhu-

mato 4 raofio pa1ivedesul11: putto te deva jato, tal11 devo
passatil ti. addasa. kho bhikkhave Bandhuma raja Vipassiku-
maral11, disva ncmitte brahmaQe amantapetva etad avoca:
passantu bhonto nemitta brahmaDa kumaran ti.' addasasul11 kho
bhikkhave ncmittfr brahmaQa Vipassikumaral11, disva Band-
humantal11 rajanal11 etad avocul11: attamano deva hohi,
mahesakkho te deva putto uppanno. sace agaral11 ajjhavasati,
I jeilli (fem .), inst., .. confiscation."
2 I/aS; (fem.), .. cultivation," .. agriculture."
3 Vipassill: a prince who lived millions of years ago (when human life was
immensely long) and became a Buddha, one of the predecessors of .. our ..
Buddha.
~ iJalldJIIIIlIlWi : father of l'ipassill .
Lesson 19 15 1
raja hoti cakkavatti dhammiko dhammaraja. sace kho pana

agarasma anagariyaf!l pabbajati, arahaf!l ~oti samma sam-
buddho ti. atha kho bhikkhave Bandhuma rajii nemitte bnih-
maQe ahatehi vatthehi accha.dapetva sabbakamehi santappesi.
atha kho bhikkhave Bandhuma raja Vipassissa kumarassa
tayo 1 pasade karapesi, ekaf!l vassikaf!l ekaf!l hemantikaf!l ekaf!l
gimhikaf!l, paftca kamaguQani upatthapesi.

" 0 monks, I will teach you the doctrine having-a-raft-as-
simile (bahubbihi: raft-simile; this word stands first, for
emphasis), for-the-purpose-of-crossing-over 2, not (emphatic: no)
for-the-purpose-of-keeping. Just like a man who-had-followed-
a-road: he might see a great flood-of-water, the nearer shore
with-fear, with-danger, the further shore secure, without-
danger (a-), and there might not be a boat or a causeway for
going from hither across,-he would have (the thought) thus:
" Indeed this flood of water (is) great, and the nearer shore (is)
with-fear, with-danger, the further shore secure, without-danger,
and there isn't a boat or a causeway for going from hither
across. What now if I, having collected grass-firewood-branches-
and-foliage, having bound a raft, depending on that raft, shollld
cross thither safely?" Then, indeed (kho), ~hat man, having
collected grass-firewood-branches-and-foliage, having bound
a raft, depending on that raft would cross thither safely.
Crossed, gone thither (past participles), he might have (the
thought) thus: "Indeed this raft (is) very useful. What now
if, having put (" mounted ") this raft on my head, I should go
away?" What do you think (of) that, monks? Perhaps (api)
that man thus-doing (-karin, bahubbihi) (with reference) to that
raft (loc.) would be doing-what-should-be-done? (nu)" .
.. Indeed not (no h') this, sir' (bhante)" . .. " In this connection,
monks, that man, crossed, gone thither, might have (the
thought) thus: " ... What now (if), having lifted this raft on to
(dry) land, I should go away (?)" Thus-doing, indeed, that
man would be doing-what-should-be-done with (loc.) that raft.
1 " three" (cf. Lesson 26).

I" + a > a > d before a double consonant in close junction.
Likewise, indeed, monks, the doctrine is taught by me having-

a-raft-as-simile, for-the-purpose-of-crossing-over, not for-the-
purpose-ot-keeping. By your (vo) learning (present participle,
instrumental plural) the raft-simile, monks, even good mental
phenomena (are) to be given up by you (vo), how much more so
bad ment;:!.! phenomena."
LESSON 20
Declension of Feminine Nouns in -i and -i

Feminines in i and i (nouns and adjectives) are declined as
follows:- .
jati, " birth ..
Singular Plural
Nom.} jilti }
Voc. jiIliyo
Acc. jiitiJ?l
Ins. f jiitlhi
Dat . jiitlnall'
Ab!. jiiliyii jiillhi
~!~ . 11 · 1i · jatltllJJ?I
~ (loc. also jtitiya'll) \ jtitlsu
delJl, " q lIcen ..
Singulnr Plural
Nom. drill
Voc. delli } delliyo
Ace. deviJ?l
rest as jilti ...
(Within a compound the stem vowel is often shortened.)
A few words, among them ittM, woman," may have either

If
the long or the short vowel in the nominative singular.

Occasionally some of these words are written with assimila-
tion. For example from nadi, " river," genitive singular najja.
Lesson 20 153
Numeral catu(r)
The numeral stem calu(r), " four," is inflected in three genders
as follows. It is used like an adjective.
MafiC. Ncut. Fern.
Nom. and Ace. caJlaro caltari ca lasso

\ J
v
Ins. and Ab!. catuhi
Dat. and Gcn. calunnat/t
Loc. calilsu
Declension of bhagavant and Adjectives in -ant, rajan, addhan,

muddhan and puman
Among the nouns having stems ending in consonants,
bhagavant, "the fortunate," and rajan, king ", are inflected as
Of
follows (both are masculine) :-
Singular Plural Singular Plural
Nom. bhagava } raja }

bhagavanlo riijano
Ace. bhagavantat/t riijanatt'
Inst. bhagavala bhagavanlehi ranna 1 "ajuM
Dat. bhagavato bhagavantanatt' ranno "'11; ila',l
All!. bhagavata bhagavantehi rannti riijlfhi
Gcn. bhagavato bhagavantiinatt' raiino rmi iiatt' nr
riijuna'.n
Loc. bhagavati bhagavantesII riijillj or rajzi.\!(
ranne
1 Assimilation of raj + n > rann: note that the vowel is shortened beforl!
the double consonant.
The vocatives of these words are not used: the bhagavant

is addressed as bhante, etc., according to the speaker, and a king
as maharaja or deva. Stem in compounds: bhagavat-, raja-.
A number of adjectives in ant are inflected in the same way as
bhagavant (vocative same as nominative or with -a in singular).
Lesson 20 155
Except in the nominative singular and nominative and accusa-
tive plural they are inflected like masculines in U. From vititiu
« vi-(ti)na, " discern ")' " discerning person," we have :-
Singular Plural
Nom. lIitiilu } .,, __ ( .•.•• )

.,," Vlnnu or VlnnuHO
Ace. 1l1''''"111
Bahubbihi Compounds (2)

In a bahubbihi compound the members may refer to the same
thing (as in lohitakkhi puriso) or to different things (as in
vajirapa1Ji yakkho). All kinds of relations are possible: cf.
other kinds of compounds used as bahubbihis or within
bahubbihis, as mentioned in the preceding Lesson. As examples
of more complex bahubbihis,. with three members, we have :-
bhagava onitapattapa1Ji (on ita from o-ni = " withdrawn",
" removed"; explained as ... onito pattato pii.1Ji yena).
ft the fortunate one who had removed (his) hand from the
bowl" (" ... by whom the hand was removed from the
bowl ") (compound equivalent to a passive subordinate
clause)
mahapuriso sihapubbaddhakayo (pubbaddhaf!1. = " front
half", "fore-part", from addho, "half," and could
itself be regarded as a compound; explained as ...
sihassa pubbaddhaf!1. viya kayo assa,-viya = "like "), " a
great man whose body (is like) the front half of a lion."
In the latter example we have a comparison (metaphor)
expressed in a bahubbihi, other examples of which are :-
bhagava suva1J1Java1J1JO, "the fortunate one whose colour
is like gold ..
bhagava brahmassaro, ((s)saro = "voice "), "the fortunate
one whose voice is like God's" (?-or .. having the best
voice", having the supreme voice ").
ft
Aorist Passive Formed Directly from a Root

An aorist passive, having a 3rd person singular only, may be
formed directly from a root. The root has the vuddhi (> a)
lengthening, the augment is prefixed, and the inflection is -i.

The meaning is the same as that of the ordinary aorist passive
(Lesson 9). The form is exceedingly rare and may be regarded
as poetic. Since it differs from the ordinary aorist (active)
only in having the lengthening of the root vowel it may some-
times be difficult to distinguish between the two forms (a few
verbs, e.g. (k)kam, have this lengthening in the aorist active).
From tan (VI), stretch," we have : -
If
(3rd sing.) atani, it was stretched ..

If
From u(d)-pad (Ill). .. arise," .. happen," wc have, if in fact it

belongs here : -
(3 rd sing.) udaplidi, it was arisen," it arose ..
If If
(Cf. Lesson 11: in this case the meaning does not tell us
whether the form should be regarded as active or passive, and it
is often taken as an ordinary active aorist, a merely formal
alternative to lIppajji. Moreover we find from the same root,
without augment, upapiidi, .. he transmigrated," he was
If
reborn" (passive ??) and 1st person upapiidittt, .. I was reborn. ").
Nouns and Adjectives Compollllded with Verbs

A numbrr of nouns and adjectives are sometimes combined
with verbs in the same way as prefixes, and take an indeclinable
form when so combined. The verbs usually conccrned are har
and bllli, and the meaning is that of the noun/adjective trans-
formed into a verb with more or less idiomatic divergence. We
have already met garu-kar = give respect to
If J/ make ("
heavy") and sat-kar = .. entertain" (" make well", from the

weak stem of sant-). The adverbial form is often derived by
substituting i for a final a: ttdaki·bhi"t = " consist of water ".
Resides the past participle bhiiia, which may be used as a noun,
the noun derivative (from bllii) bhtivo, " nature", " state of,"
may be used in the same combinatioll, thus eki-bhiivo = .. one-
nature", .. unity" (lit.: "only-nature," .. oneish-nature. ")
Feminine nOUJls in i, inflected like j(iti :-
anguli flllger, toe
anugati following, imitation
iddhi power (marvellous)
Nouns (sterns) inflected like manas : -

iipas water
eetas mind
tejas heat, energy, potency
divas day
payas milk
yasas reputation .
rajas dust
vayas age
vtl)'as aIr
siras head
Adjectives inflected like bhagavant :-
eakkhumant having eyes, having insight, intelligent
mahant great
va~t~avant beautiful, handsome
vusitavant having lived (properly), having (truly) lived (as
a monk)
satimant self-possessed, mindful
The feminines are formed by adding i to the weak stern, as
mahati, etc., inflected like devi.
A masculine noun, nominative singular eandima (in com-
pounds eandima-; no other cases are used), "moon," is also
assigned to this declension by some grammarians.
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
adhi-upa-gam (I) ajjM'tPagaeehati join, adhere to
a1tU-(n)nti (V) anujaniiti allow
abhi-ii-cikkh (I) abbhiicikkhati slander, calumniate
abhi-ruh (I·) abhirahati mount, get into, board
ii-(k)kus (I) akkosati abuse, scold
(to cry out)
only causative: order, command
a~apeti
upa-(k)kam (I) upakkamati attack, fall upon, go into
upa-subh (I) upasobhati appear beautiful, shine
o-(k)kam (I) okkamati descend into, arise within
Lesson 20 159
o-dM (I) odahati put down (p.p. ohita)

o-run (I) orohati descend
(k)khi (Ill) khiyati exhaust, waste, perish
(p.p. khi~a)
garah (I) garahati blame (p.p. garahita)
chad (VII) chtideti be pleased
jir (1) jirati become old, age (p. p.
ji~~a)
ni(r)-ya (I) niyyati go out to
ni(r)-va (Ill) nibbiiyati become cool
(p)pa-(j)jhe (I) pajjhayati be consumed with regret
(p)pa-(n)ita in passive, paititayati = be discerned .
(p)pa/i-a-gam (I) paccagacchati return
(p)pa#-a-ni(r)-ya pacciiniyyati go back, return
(I)
pari-(k)khi (Ill) parikkhiyati exhaust, eliminate (p.p.
parikkhi~a)
pari-bhas (I) paribhiisati defame, slander
pari-bhuj (11) paribhuiijati eat, enjoy
pari-vas (I) parivasati live among
pari-ha in passive, parihayati = .be eliminated, come
to an end
(p)pa-vedh (I) pavedhati tremble
(p)pa-sa1fls (I) pasa1flsati praise (p.p. pasattha)
vi-jan (Ill) vijiiyati give birth (aorist : vijayi)
sa1fl-vatt (I) sa1Jlvattati involve, dissolve
sa1fl-tan (VI) sa1Jltanoti stretch out, spread out
(s)sar (I) sarati remember
sa (Ill) sayati taste
sudh (Ill) sujjhati become pure
Nouns :-
aitita knowledge, insight
atipato slaying, killing
antalikkha1fl sky
antepura1fl citadel, palace
andhakaro darkness, obscurity
apacco offspring
apuitita1fl demerit, evil
Lesson 20 161
vadita", instrumental music

vesso husbandman, farmer, merchant, bour-
geois (member of the hereditary
agricultural-mercantile class 1)
5a11'yo}ana11' connection, union
sa11'vacchara11' year
sa11'khya (also enumeration, calculation, denomina-
spelt sa11'khii) tion, classification
(The idiom sankh(y)a11' gacchati means counts as ", is con-
tI tI
ceived of as rI, is considered as ".)

tI
sakkiiro entertainment
sadattho the true (good) purpose, the true (good)
objective (cf. attho)
santdnaka11' film, skin
sappi n. ghee
sampha", frivolity, chatter
savana", hearing
sayat1ho evening
suddo helot (member of the servile or working
class 1)
sttbha", lustre, glory
Adjectives :-
atipiitin slaying, killing
attarttpa personal (following the Commentary;
contra CPD: full, complete)
atthika aspiring, wishful, desirous
a11atita not-passing, not escaping
aneJaka pure
abhi;jhalu (fem. -uni ; covetous
sometimes mase. -ii
and plur. -uno)
amaniipa displeasing
1 The vessas were originally "t he third. most numerous. and only productive
class among the three classes of Aryan society. After their conquests of the
2nd millennium B.C. the Aryans. adopting the ways of civilization (presumably
from the Indus people they had conquered). instituted the fourth class, the
slItldas. as a servile and sometimes enslaved class of sllbjectedpeople serving.
working for. the Aryan classes. {or example as labourers and artisans. The
lIessa in the D,gha Nikiiya may thus be a farmer using slIdda labourers or a
merchant using slIdda craftsmen.
Lesson 20
Pronoun :-
ubhaya both
Dependent words :.:.....

-cara (car) living
-ja' (jan: cf. Lesson born (of)
25)
-bhakkha (bhakkh) eating, feeding on
Gerund :-
litva (ha) having abandoned
Indec1inables :-
Ilyye (voc.) lady!
tttavata so far, to that extent
kada when?
kada ci at any time, at some time, ever
karaha ci at some time
taggha certainly, assuredly
Iv eva (or t' eva) (also = ti + eva with exceptional junc-
tion i + e > ve:) end quote + em-
phasis (usually marking and stressing
a single word or expression, which
may be repeated), that is its designa-
tion ; or simply = " indeed",
.. definitely" (Le. the preceding word
is correct, as after at/hi = it is " :
/C
somewhat similar to the use of italics)

dhi(r) fie I, confound (him/it) !
na cirass' eva soon
puna(d) again
bhiyyoso still more (so), still greater
bhiyyoso mattaya to a still greater extent/degree (abl.)
yato whence, because, since
yatra hi nama in as much as (may express wonder,
etc.)
yatha kathattt in what way?
yebhllyyena mostly, the majority of
Lesson 20
rasasampanna, seyyatha pi nama sampannatp va sappi,

sampannatp va navanitatp evatpva1)1)a 1 ahosi; seyyatha pi
nama khuddatp madhu aneJakatp evamassada ahosi.
atha kho Vasettha aiiiiataro satto lolajatiko, ambho kim ev'
idatp bhavissati ti, rasapathavitp anguliya sayi. tassa rasa-
pathavitp anguliya sayato acchadesi, tat).ha c' assa okkami.
aiiiiatare pi kho Vlisettha sattli tassa sattassa ditthanugatitp
apajjamana rasapathavitp anguliya sayirpsu. tesatp rasapa-
thavitp anguliya sayatatp acchadesi, ta1)ha ca tesatp okkami.
atha kho te Vasettha satta rasapathavitp hatthehi alumpakli-
rakatp a upakkamitpsu paribhuiijitmp. yato kho Vasettha
saWi rasapathavitp hatthehi lilumpakarakatp upakkamitpsu
paribhuiijitutp atha tesarp sattanarp sayampabha antaradhayi.
sayampabhaya antarahitaya candimasuriya paturahesuI11.
candimasuriyesupatubhiitesu, nakkhattani tarakariipani patur-
ahesuI11. nakkhattesu tarakariipesu patubhutesu, rattindiva
paiiiiliyitpsu. rattindivesu paiiiiayamanesu, masa(i(ihamasa
paiiiiliyirpsu. masa(i(ihamasesu paiiiiayamanesu, utusatp-
vacchara paiiiiayirpsu. eWivata kho VliseHha ayatp loko puna
vivatto hoti.
At that time Veslili 3 (was) powerful and prosperous. The
geisha Ambapali was (hoti) beautiful, lovely, endowed with the
highest beauty-of-complexion. (She was) skilled in dancing and
singing and instrumental music. Visited by (use genitive)
aspiring men (she) went (present time) for a night for fifty
(kahiipattas); and through her Vesali appeared (present tense)
beautiful in still greater measure (ablative). Then (add kho)
a burgher of Rajagaha went (aorist) to Vesali on (ins.) some
business. He saw Vesali powerful and prosperous, and the
geisha Ambapali, and through her Vesali appearing beautiful
in still greater measure. Then (+ kho) the burgher returned to
Rajagaha. He approached the king, Magadha Seniya Bimbi-
sara, and having approached he said this to the king: "Vesali,
o king, (is) powerful and prosperous, etc., and through her
1 baht,bbJhi, .. of such a colour."
• Comp'lUnd used as adverb.
3 Capital of the Vajj! Republic, which was north of the kingdom of Magadha
(the Ganges forming the boundary).
Declensiott of the Pronoun bhavant

The full declension of the pronoun bhavant, It you," It sir"
,
It his honour," is as follows :-
MASCULINE FEMININE
Singular Plural
Nom. bhavalfl bhavanlo (or Motl

Monlo) (inflected like dell')
Ace. bhavantalfl Mallante
Ins. bhota bhavantehi
Dat. Molo bhavalalfl
Ab!. bhola bhallanlehi
Gen. bholo bhavala1tt
Loe. bholi . bhavanleslI
Voc. Mo bhonlo
The form bhante is an indeclinable particle which is used

alone as a polite vocative or in association with another
vocative or with a word in any other case. Its use is generally
restricted to addressing Buddhist monks.
It Perfect" Tense of ah
Another form of past tense, the so-called perfect (parokkha)
fs extremely rare except for the 3rd persons of the" defective"
verb ah, "to say," which are favoured in narrative. The
meaning is indefinite time-often present (cf. Lesson 24).
Singular Plural
3rd person l!ha," he said," iihalflSU . (sometimes

"he says" l!hll in verse)
No other forms or tenses from the root ah are used.

The perfect tense is distinguished in form by reduplication
of the initial part of the root (here a - ah > ilk) and the inflec-
tions, particularly the 3rd singular in a. Perfect forms from
various verbs are occasionally affected in later Pali poetry.
Lesson 21
Repetition
In Pali repetition (ame1;l{iita) of a word or expression is quite
frequent. The meaning may be emphasis (=" very"), as
iMadddni bhaddani (yanani) , .. very fine (carriages)." Often,
particularly with pronouns and indeclinables, the meaning is
•• distributive" : yo yo, .. whoever," yathii yathii, .. in whatever
way," .. just as," .. however" (with answering tathii tatha, .. so ").
Repetition also expresses strong emotion of any kind, in which
case a whole phrase may be repeated.
Further examples ;-
sighat}1 sighatJ1, .. very fast"
sQ1;lejasa1;l{ia saiiyo, .. rice plants in thick clusters" (com-
pound)
abhikkantatJ1 bhante abhikkantatJ1 Mante, .. very fine indeed,
sir! ", expressing great praise or admiration
aho rasa1?" aho rasa"!" • .. ah ! what piquancy! ". expressing
wonder
dil!hd Mo satta jivasi dillha bho satta jivasi, ..... it's
wonderful to see you alive! ", expressing happiness
ayami dvttso ayami dvuso, .. I'm coming, sir! ", expressing
assurance
abhikkamatha Vasettha abhikkamatha V iiseUhii, "hurry
forward, 0 VaseHhas ! ", enjoins haste
ma bhavatJ1 S01J.ada1;ltjo eva1!J avaca ma bhavat}1 S01;ladatt4o
evat}1 avaca, .. let not the honourable SOQadaQ<;ia speak
thus I ", expresses anger or blame
nassa as~"i nassa asuci. .. perish, vile one! ", expresses
anger, contempt, and disgust
tuvat}1 tHVat}1, .. you, you I" (in a quaITel), expresses
disrespect and contempt (t~wat}1 is a form of tva1!l, here
presumably emphatic).
Vocabulary
Verbs ;-
d-(g)gah (V) agga1;lhiiti
.
seIze
ati-pat causative: atipiiteti slay, kill
ati-man (Ill) atimaiiiiati despise
anu-(t)tlae (V) · anutthuniiti lament. complain

anu-pat (I) anupatati follow, chase after
abki-ni(r)-vatt (I) abhinibbaUati be produced
a-har (I) iiharati bring. fetch (aorist : 3rd
sing. iihiisi, but Ist
plur. iihariima; cf.
addasiima; p.p. ahata)
ii-hi1J4 (I) (to iihitl4ati wander
wander)
upa-jiv (I) upajivati live by, live upon
ttpa-ni-(j)jhe (I) upanijjhii.yati observe, think about
upa-ni(r)-vatt (I) upanibbattati derive (p.p. upanibbatta)
(k)khiP (1*) khipati throw (gerund khipitvii)
(k)khi (Ill) khiyati means also" become in-
dignant"
nas (Ill) nassati perish
ni(r)-vak (1) nibbakati lead out (passive: nib-
buyhati)
ni(r)-har (I) niharati take out, take away
(irk> ih)
(p)pa-iip (V) (this (cf. (p)pa-ap(p) (VI) in Lesson 6) used
root is some- in the figurative sense of "attain":
times given as PiiPU~liiti (this use is very restricted in
ap) Canonical PalL aorist paPtt~ti; p. p.
patta)
(p)pa-(k)khiP (1*) pakkhipati put into
pac (I) pacati cook, torture, torment
(p)pa/i-vi-ruh (1*) pa/'iviruhati grow agam (p.p. pati-
viruJha)
(p)pa#-sev (I) pa.tisevati indulge in
pari(y)-o-nah (II) pariyonandhati . cover over. envelop
pari-rakkh (I) parirakkhati guard
(p)pa-har (I) paharati hit. beat
pus (VII) poseti rear. look after (p.p. of
caus. : posapita)
pkand (I) pkandati throb, quiver
bkatJ (I) bhatJati say
ranj (I) ranjati be excited, be glad, be
delighted
Lesson 21 173
vi-han (I) vihanati distress, trouble
sa"".-a-pad (II I) samapajjati attain
sa"".-man (VI) sammannati agree on, elect (p.p. sam-
(to consider) (mano/manva/ mata)
manna by
substitution
of va for 0)
sikkh (I) sikkhati train, study, learn (p.p.
sikkhita)
sue (1) soeati grieve, sorrow
han (I) hanati kill (caus. : ghateti)
Feminine nouns in u :-
dhiitu element
natthu nose
rajju rope
hanu jaw(s)
Feminine noun in u:-
vadhu bride
Nouns :-
akiriyat.n inaction
akkhara", expreSSiOn
althiiha", eight days
atimano arrogance, contempt
apadiina"". reaping, harvest
abhinibbatti production, origin
(fern.)
'l.lJi (masc.) snake
ahieehattako mushroom, toadstool
tigamo commg
iieariyo teacher
iihiiro food (in the most general sense, sometimes
figurative), gathering
upaHhanattt serving, attending on, audience
ekiigiiriko burglar, burglary
ka1J.o the fine red powder between the grain and husk
of rice (Childers)
Past Participles :-
luna (lu (V)) reaped, mown
samahita concentrated
(sa",-a-dhd)
sampariki1J1Ja surrounded by, covered with
(sa",-pari-
kir)
Gerunds :-
anvaya (anu-i) following, in consequence of (ace.)
netva (ni) having led
Indeclinables :-
agge since (tad agge = since' then)
ativela1J' too long, excessively
anupubbena in due course, in succession
ako ah I : expresses surprise (approving) and delight
ittka1J' thus, in this way
kattha where ?
je(enclitic) you! (form of address by a master/mistress to
a slave woman; preceded by handa, kin,
etc., or by gaccha)
neva = eva (junction form sometimes used after "')
pato in the morning
saki(d) (eva) once
(or saki",)
samantd on all sides, all round
sdya1J' in the evening
{s)su even, isn't it ? (or ulerely emphatic)
seyyathida1J' as, to wit
handaje you there! (cf. je above)
EXERCISE 21
1. evarp vutte bhante Pilrat;lo Kassapo 1 marp etad avoca:
1 Died c. 503 B.C. A samalSO. one of the leaders of the Ajlvaka movement,
which W,lS amalgamated in 489 B.C. and was for a time probably the most
important non-orthodox sect. Their fundamental doctrine was that of fatalism
(niyati) as propounded by their supreme leader Makkhali Gosalo. It will be
seen that the doctrine expounded here can be harmonized with this. For
Gosila's doctrine see Exercise 28 (English into PaUl.
Lesson 21 179
puriso ca itthiq1. tesaq1 ativelaq1 afifiam afifiaq1 upanijjhaya-
tarp sadigo udapadi, parilaho kayasmiq1 okkami. te pari!aha-
paccaya methunaq1 dhammaq1 patiseviq1su. yc kho pan a te
Vasettha ten a samayena satta passanti methunal11 dhammal11
patisevante, afifie parpsuq1 khipanti, afifie setthil11 khipanti,
afifie gomayal11 khipanti. nassa asuci, nassa asuci ti. kathal11
hi nama satto sattassa evariipal11 karissati ti. tad ctarahi pi
manussa ekaccesu janapadesu vadhuya nibbuyhamanaya afifie
pal11sul11 khipanti, afifie setthil11 khipanti, afifie gomayal11
khipanti. tad eva poral)al11 aggafifial11 akkharaq1 anupatanti,
na tv ev' ass a atthaq1 ajananti.
adhammasammatal11 kho pana Vasettha tena samayena hoti,
tad etarahi dhammasammatal11. ye kho pana VaseHha ten a
samayena satta methunal11 dhammaql patisevanti, te masam pi
dvemasam pi na labhanti giimaql vii nigamal11 va pavisituql.
yato kho Vasettha te satta tasmiq1 samaye asaddhamme
ativelal11 patavyataq1 apajjil11su, atha agarani upakkamiq1su
katul11 tass' eva asaddhammassa paticchadanatthal11.
atha kho VaseHha annatarassa sattassa alasajatikassa etad
ahosi: ambho kim evahal11 vihafinami saliq1 aharanto sayal11
sayamasaya pato patarasaya. yan niinahaql salil11 ahareyyal11
sakid eva sayapatarasaya ti. atha kho so VaseHha satto salil11
ahasi sakid eva sayapatarasaya. atha kho VaseHhaanfiataro
satto yena so satto ten' upasal11kami, upasal11kamitva tal11 sat-
tal11 etad avoca: ehi bho satta siiliihararp gamissiima ti. alal11
bho satta ahato me sali sakid eva sayapatarasaya ti. atha kho so
VaseHha satto tassa sattassa diHhanugatirp apajjamano saliql
ahasi sakid eva dvihiiya, evam pi kira bho sadhii ti. atha kho
ViiseHha afifiataro satto yena so satto ten' upasal11kami,
upasal11kamitva tal11 sattal11 etad avoca: chi bho satta
salahiiral11 gamissama ti. alal11 bho satta ahato me sali sakid
eva dvihiiya ti. atha kho so VaseHha satto tassa sattassa
ditthiinugatil11 apajjamano siilil11 ahiisi sakid cva catuhaya,
evam pi kira bho sadhii ti. atha kho Vasetthii annataro satto
yena so satto ten' upasarpkami, upasal11kamitva tal11 sattal11
etad avoca: chi bho satta saHihiiral11 gamissama ti. alal11 bho
satta ahato me sali sakid eva catuhiiya ti. atha kho so VaseHha
satto tassa sattassa ditthanugatiql apajjamano salil11 ahiisi
sakid eva atthiihiiya, evam pi kira bho siidhii ti. yato kho te
Lesson 21 181
mayarp akatthapakarp salirp paribhunjanta tambhakkha

tudahiira cirarp digham addhiinarp aHhamhii. tesarp no
papakanarp neva akusalanarp dhammanarp patubhava kaJ)o
pi taJ)Qulam pariyonandhi, thuso pi taJ)Qulam pariyonandhi,
lunam pi na pativirulharp, apadanarp pafifiayittha, saQQasaQQa
saliyo thita. yan nuna mayarp salirp vibhajeyyama, mariyadarp
thapeyyama ti. atha kho te Vasetthii saWi. salirp vibhajirpsu,
mariyadarp thapesurp. atha kho VaseHha annataro satto
lolajatiko sakarp bhagarp parirakkhanto annatararp hhligarp
adinnarp adiyitva paribhunji. tam enarp aggahesurp, gahetva
et ad avocurp: papakarp vata bho satta karosi, yatra. hi
nama sakaI11 bhagarp parirakkhanto annatararp bhfigarp
adinnarp adiyitva paribhufijasi. ma ssu bho satta. puna pi
evarupam akasi ti. cvarp bho ti kho Vasettha so satto tesarp
sattanarp paccassosi. dutiyam pi kho VaseHha so satto ...
pe ... tatiyam pi kho Vasettha so satto sakarp bh1i.garn pari-
rakkhanto afiiiatararp bhagarp adinnarp adiyitva paribhuiiji.
tarn cnarp aggahesurp, aggahetva etad avocurp: papakarp
vata bho satta karosi, yatra hi nama sakarp bhagarp parirak-
khanto aiinatararp bhagarp adinnarp adiyitva paribhuiijasi.
ma ssu bho satta puna pi evarupam aka si ti. anne pliQina
paharirpsu, aiiiie le<:lQuna paharirnsu, aiiiie daJ)Qena paharirpsu.
tad agge kho pana Vasettha adinnadanarp paniiayati, garaha
pannayati, musaviido paiifiiiyati, daQQiidiinarp pafiiiayati.
atha kho te Vasetthii. sattasannipatirnsu, sannipatitva
anutthunif!1su, papaka vata bho dhamma sattesu patubhuta,
yatra hi nama adinniidiinarp pafiiiayissati, garaha. paiiiiayissati,
musavado paiifiiiyissati, daJ)dadanaf!1 pafinayissati, yan nuna
mayarp ekarp sattaf!1 sammanneyyiima. so no sammakhiyitab-
barp khiyeyya, sammagarahitabbarp garaheyya, sammiipabbaje-
tabbarp pabbajeyya. mayaf!1 pan' assa salinaf!1 bhagarp
anuppadassama 1 ti. at ha kho te VaseHhii. satta yo ncsarn satto
abhirupataro ca dassaniyataro ca piisadikataro ca mahesakkha-
taro ca, tarp sattaf!1 upasarpkamitva etad avocurp: chi bho
satta, sammakhiyitabbaf!1 khiya, sammagarahitabbarn garaha,
sammapabbajctabbarp pabbajehi. mayarp pan a te salinarp
bhagaI11 anuppadassama ti. evarp bho ti kho Vasetthii so satto
tesaf!1 sattanaq1 patissutva, sammakhiyitabbal11 khiyi, samma-
I Future of -dii.
Lesson 22 193
viveko separation, seclusion, discrimination

vtipasamo calming
vedhin shooter, archer
sat!fvattat!f dissolution, involution
sattattat!f existence
samatikkamo passing beyond, transcending
sampasiidanat!f serenity
sambhavo origin, production
sassati (fern.) eternal thing, eternity
soko grief, sorrow
somanassat!f joy, elation
Adjectives ;-
ajjhatta mner
adhicca spontaneous, causeless
anudilthin contemplating, theorizing
anta finite
antavant finite
apariya11ta unlimited
appama~~a immeasurable
appesakkha inferior
arupin formless, immaterial
asaiiiia insentient
-upaga going to
upe(k)khaka detached
ekaka alone
eka1lta extreme
esikatthliyin firm as a pillar
opapiitika transmigrating
oJarika coarse, gross, material
ktitattha (or kala-) immovable as a peak
gambhira profound
takkin deducing (as masc. noun = deducer,
logician)
-dasa seeing
nipu~La. subtle
paccatta individual, personal, independent
paJisat!fvedin feeling, experiencing
paritta small, restricted
Lesson 22 197
dutiye ca bhonto samaI)abrahmaI).a kim arabbha kim agamma

sassataviidfl sassatarp attanafi ca lokail ca panfiflpcnti .
itlha bhikkha vc ekacco samal)o va briihmaI).o va i"ttappam
anvaya . . . pubbe nivasarp anussarati - seyyathidarp ekam pi
saqwattavivattarp dve pi sarpvaHavivatiani ... cattari pi
sal1wattavivatFmi panca pi sarpvattavivatFini dasa pi sarp-
vattavivaWini. amutrasirp evarp namo ... anussarami. imina
p' aharp etarp janami : yatha sassato atta ca loko ca vanjho
kutaHho csikaHhayitthito, te ca saWi. sandhavanti sarpsaranti
cavanti upapajjanti, atthi tv eva sassatisaman ti.
idarp bhikkhave dutiyarp thanarp yam flgamma yam arabbha
cke samaI).ubrahmaI).a sassatavada sassataql attanan ca lokan
ca paniHipcnti.
tatiye ca ... caWi.risam pi sarpvattavivattani ... pafifiapenti.
catutthe ca. bhonto samaI)abriihmaI)ii kim agamma kim
arabbha sassatavada sassatarp attanafi ca lokan ca pafifiapenti .
idha bhikkhavc ekacco samaI)O va brahmaI).o va takki hoti
vimarpsi. so takkapariyahatarp. vimarpsanucaritarp sayarp-
patibhanarp evam aha : sassato aWi. ca loko ca vanjho kutaHho
esikatth5.yitthito, te ca saWi sandhavanti sarpsaranti cavanti
upapajjanti, atthi tv eva sassatisaman ti.
idarp bhikkhave catutthaI11 thanal11 yam agamma yam
arabbha eke samal)abrahmaI).a sassatav5.da sassatarp aWi.nan
ca lokafi ca pafifiapenti.
ime kho te bhikkha ve samal)abrflhmaI)a sassata vada sassatarp
aWinafi ca lokan ca pannapenti catuhi vatthilhi. ye hi ke ci,
bhikkhave, samal)a va brahmal)a va sassatavada sassatarp
attanafi ca lokan ca pannapenti, sabbe te imeh' eva catuhi
vatthuhi etesarp va annatarena, n' atthi ita bahiddha.
tayidarp bhikkhave tathagato pajanati: imc ditthitthiina
evarpgahitii evarpparamaHha evarpgatikfl bhavissanti evama-
bhisamparaya ti. tan ca tathagato pajanati, tato ca uttaritararp
pajanati, tan ca pajananarp na paramasati, aparamasato c' assa
paccattarp yeva nibbuti vidita, vcdananarp samudayaii ca
atthagamaii ca ass5.dan ca 5.dinavaii ca nissaraI).anca yath5.-
bhutaI11 viditva anupada vimutto, bhikkhave, tathagato.
ime kho te bhikkhave dhamma gambhira duddasa duranu-
bodha santa paI).ita atakk5.vacara nipuI).a pal.l<;iitavedaniya ye
Lesson 22 201
catutthe ca bhonto samal)abrahmal)a kim agamma kim

arabbha anHinantika antanantaf!1lokassa paiiiiapenti.
idha, bhikkhave, ckacco samal)o va brahmal)o va takki hoti
vimaf!1si. so takkapariyahataf!1 vimaf!1sanucaritaf!1 sayaf!1-
patibhanaf!1 evam aha: n' evayaf!110ko antava na panananto.
ye te samal)abrahmal)a evam ahaf!1su: antava ayaf!1 loko
parivlJ.tumo ti tesaf!1 musa. ye pi te samal)ahrahmal)a evam
ahaf!1su: ananto ayaf!11oko apariyanto ti tesam pi musa.. ye pi
tc samal)abrahmal)a evam ahaf!1su: antava ca ayaf!1 loko
ananto ca ti tesam pi musa. n' evayarp. loko antava na
panananto ti.
idarp., bhikkhave, catutthaf!1 thanarp. yam agamma yam
arabbha eke samal)abrahmaQa antanantika antanantaf!1lokassa
paiiiiapenti ...
santi, bhikkhave, eke samaQabrahmaQa amaravikkhepika,
tattha tattha paiiharp. puttha samana vacavikkhepaf!1 apajjanti
amaravikkheparp. catuhi vatthiihi. te ca bhonto samaQa-
brahmaQa kim agamma kim arabbha amaravikkhepika tattha
tattha paflhaf!1 puHha samana vacavikkhepaf!1 apajjanti
amaravikkhepaf!1 catuhi vatthiihi.
idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaQo va brahmaQo va idaf!1
kusalan ti yathabhiitaf!1 na ppajanati, idarp. akusalan ti yatha-
bhiitaf!1 na ppajanati. tassa evarp. hoti: ahaf!1 kho idarp.
kusalan ti yathabhiitaf!1 na ppajanami, idaf!1 akusalan ti
yathabhiitaf!1 na ppajanaJrti. ahaii c' eva kho pana idarp.
kusalan ti yathabhiitarp. appajananto, idarp. akusalan ti
yathabhiitarp. appajananto, idaf!1 kusalan ti va vyakareyyarp.
idaf!1 akusalan ti va vyakareyyaf!1, tattha me ass a chando va
rago va doso va patigho va. yattha me assa chando va rago va
doso va patigho va taf!1 mam' ass a musa. yaf!1 mam' assa musa
so mam' assa vighato. yo mam' assa vighato so mam' assa
antarayo ti. iti so musavadabhaya musavadaparijeguccha n'
ev' idaf!1 kusalan ti vyakaroti, na pana idarp. akusalan ti
vyakaroti, tattha tattha paiihaf!1 puttho samano vadivik-
khepaf!1 apajjati amaravikkhepaf!1: evam pi me no. tatha ti
pi me no. aiiiiatha ti pi me no. no ti pi me no. no no ti pi me
no ti.
idaf!1, bhikkhave, pathamarp. thanaf!1 yam agamma yam
arabbha eke samaQabrahmaQa amaravikkhepika tattha tattha
pafiharp puttha samana vacavikkheparp apajjanti amaravik-

kheparp.
dutiye ca ... upadanabhaya ...
tatiye ca ... ahafi c' eva kho pana idarp kusalan ti yatha-
bhiitarp appajananto, idarp akusalan ti yathabhiitarp appa-
jananto, idarp kusalan ti va vyakareyyarp idarp akusalan ti
va vyakareyyarp - santi hi kho pana sama1)abrahma1)a
pa1)c,lita nipul)a kataparappavada valavedhiriipa vobhindanta.
mafifie caranti pafifiagatena ditthigatani - te marp tattha
samanuyufijeyyurp samanuggaheyyurp samanubhaseyyurp. ye
marp tattha samanuyufijeyyuf!1 samanuggaheyYUf!1 samanu-
bhaseyyurp tesaharp na sampayeyyarp. yesaharp na sam-
payeyyarp so mam' assa vighiito. yo mam' assa vighato so
mam' ass a antarayo ti. iti so anuyogabhaya anuyogaparije-
guccha n' ev' idarp kusalan ti vyakaroti, na pan' idarp akusalan
ti vyakaroti, tattha tattha pafiharp puttho samano vacavik-
kheparp apajjati amaravikkheparp: evam pi me no. tatha
ti pi me no. afifiatha. ti pi me no. no ti pi me no. no no ti
pi me no ti.
idarp, bhikkhave, tatiyaf!1 thanarp yarp agamma yam arabbha
eke samal).abrahmal).a amaravikkhepika tattha tatth.a pafiharp
puttha samana vacavikkheparp apajjanti amaravikkheparp.
catutthe ca bhonto samal)abrahmal)a kim agamma kim
arabbha amara vikkhepika tattha tattha pafiharp puttha samana.
vacavikkheparp apajjanti amaravikkheparp.
idha, bhikkhave, ekacco sama1)o va brahmaI).o va mando hoti
momiiho. so mandatta momiihatta tattha tattha pafiharp
puttho samano vacavikkheparp apajjati amaravikkheparp:
atthi paro loko ti iti ce marp pucchasi, atthi paro loko ti iti ce
me assa, atthi paro loko ti iti te narp vyakareyyarp. evam pi
me no. tathii ti pi me no. afifiathii ti pi me no. no ti pi me no.
no no ti pi me no. n' atthi paro loko ti ... pe ... atthi ca n'
atthi ca paro loko. n' ev' atthi na n' atthi paro loko - atthi
satta opapatika. n' atthi satta opapatika. atthi ca n' atthi ca
satta opapatika. n' ev' atthi na n' atthi satta opapatika - attl1i .
sukatadukkatanarp kammanarp phalarp vipako. n' atthi
sukatadukkatanarp kammanarp phalarp vipako. atthi ca n'
atthi ca sukatadukkatanarp kammanarp phalarp vipako. n' ev'
atthi na n' atthi sukatadukkatanarp kammanarp phalarp
Lesson 22 203
vipako - hoti tathiigato param maraJ:la. na hoti tathiigato

param maraJ:la. hoti ca na hoti ca tathagato param maraJ:la.
n' eva hoti na na hoti tathiigato param maraJ:la ti iti ee matp.
pueehasi, n' eva hoti na na hoti tathiigato param marat)a ti iti
ce me assa, n' eva hoti na na hoti tatha.gato param marat)a ti iti
te narr vyakareyyarr. evam pi me no. tatha ti pi me no.
afifiatha ti pi me no. no ti pi me no. no no ti pi me no ti.
idarr, bhikkhave, eatuttharr thanarr yam agamma yam
arabbha eke samaJ:labrahmaJ:la amaravikkhepika tattha tattha
panhatp. puHhii samana vacavikkhepatp. apajjanti amaravik-
khepatp. ....
santi, bhikkhave, eke samaJ:labrahmat)a adhiccasamup-
pannika, adhiceasamuppannarr attanafi ca lokafi ca pafifiapenti
dvihi vatthflhi. te ca bhonto samaJ:labrahmaJ:la kim agamma
kim arabbha adhieeasamuppannika adhiccasamuppannatp.
attanafi ca lokafi ca pafifiapenti.
santi, bhikkhave, asafifiasatta nama deva, sanfiuppada ca
pana te deva tamha kiiya eavanti. thanarr kho l?an' etarr,
bhikkhave, vijjati yatp. afifiataro satto tamhii kaya cavitva
itthattarr agaechati, itthattatp. agato samano agarasma
anagariyatp. pabbajati. agarasma anagariyarr pabbajito
samano atappam anvaya padhiinam anvaya anuyogam anvaya
appamadam anvaya sammamanasikaram anvaya tathariipatp.
cetosamadhirr phusati yatha samahite citte safifiuppadam
anussarati, tato pararr nanussarati. so evam aha: adhie-
casamuppanno atta ca loko ca. tatp. kissa hetu. ahatp. hi pubbe
nahosirr, so 'mhi etarahi ahutva sattaWiya pariJ:lato ti.
idarr, bhikkhave, pathamarr thanarr yam agamma yam
arabbha eke samaJ:labrahmaJ:la adhieeasamuppannikii ad~ie
casamuppannarr attanaii ca lokaii ca pafiiiapenti.
dutiye ca bhonto samat)abrahmaJ:la kim agamma kim arabbha
adhiceasamuppannika adhiceasamuppannam attanafi ca lokaii
ca paiiiiapenti.
idha, bhikkhave, ekaeco samat;lo va brahmaJ:lo va takki hoti
vimatp.si. so takkapariyahatarr vimatp.sanucaritarr sayatp.-
patibhanarr evam aha: adhiccasamuppanno atta ca loko
ca ti ...
ime kho te, bhikkhave, samaJ:labrahmaJ:la pubbantakappika
pubbantanudiHhino pubbantatp. arabbha anekavihitani
Lesson 22 20 5
antava nanantava atta hoti arogo param maraQa asafifiI ti narp

pannapenti.
ime kho te, bhikkhave, samal)abr1ihmaQii. uddhamaghatanik1i
asannivada uddham aghatana asannilp attfmaI11 paniliipcnti
aHhahi vatthiihi ...
santi, bhikkhave, eke samal)abrahmal).u uddhamaghatanika.
nevasafininasannivada, uddham aghatana n' eva safifiirp
nasafiniJ11 attanaJ11 pafinapenti aHhahi vatthiihi. te ca bhonto
samaQabrahmaQa kim agamma kim arabbha uddhamaghatanika
nevasafininasafinivuda uddham aghatana n' eva safifiirp
nasannirp attanaJ11 panfiapenti aHhahi vatthiihi.
riipi atta hoti arogo param maraQ5. n' eva sanfii nasafifii ti
narp pafifiapenti. arupi ... riipi ca ariipi ca .. . n' eva riipi
nariipi ... antava ... anantavii. ... antava ca anantava. ca ...
n' cv' antava nanantava aWi hoti arogo param maraQa n' eva
safifii nasanfiI ti naJ11 pafiiUipenti.
ime kho te, bhikkhave, samaQabrahmaQa uddhamaghatanika .
nevasafifiinasafifiivada uddham aghatana n' eva safifiiJ11
nasanniJ11 attanaJ11 pannapenti atthahi vatthiihi ...
santi, bhikkhave, eke samaQabrahmaQa ucchedavada, sato
sattassa ucchedaJ11 vinasaJ11 vibhavaJ11 pafinapenti sattahi
vatthGhi. te ca bhonto samaQabrahmaQu kim agamma kim
arabbha ucchcdavada sattassa ucchedarp vinasarp vibhavarp
panfiapenti sattahi vatthGhi.
idha, bhikkhavc, ckacco samaQo va brfthmaQo va evaJ11vadi
hoti evaJ11diHhi: yato kho bho ayarp atta riipi catum-
mahabhiitiko maHipettikasambhavO,l kayassa bhcda ucchij-
jati vinassati, na hoti param maraQa, ettavata kho bho ayarp
atta samma samucc.hinno hoU ti. itth' 2 eke sato sattassa
ucchedarp vinasaJ11 vibhavaJ11 pafifiapenti.
taJ11 afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso aWi yarp tvarp
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayaJ11 atta
ettavata samma samucchinno hoti. atthi kho bho anfio atta
dibbo riipi kamavacaro kabalinkaraha.rabhakkho. taJ11 tvarp
na janasi na passasi. tarn ahaJ11 janami passami. so kho bho
atta yato kayassa bheda ucchijjati vinassati na hoti param
rnaraQa, eWivata kho bho ayaJ11 aWi. samma samucchinno hoti
I ""ilay- = .. mother" , see next Lesson .
• Elision of 'at" before a vowel.
ti. itth' eke sato sattassa ucchedal11 vinasal11 vibhaval11

paooapenti.
tal11 aooo evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yal11 tval11
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayal11 attli.
eWivata samma samucchinno hotL atthi kho bho afifio atta
dibbo Iiipi manomayo sabbangapaccangi ahinindriyo. tal11
tval11 na janasi na passasi. tal11 ahal11 janami passami. so kho
bho atta yato kayassa bheda ucchijjati vinassati na hoti param
maraQa, ettavata kho bho ay am atta samma samucchinno hoti
ti. itth' eke sato sattassa ucchedal11 vinasal11 vibhavarp
pafifiapenti.
tal11 afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yal11 tval11
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayul11 atta
ettavata samma samucchinno hoti. atthi kho bho afioo atta
sabbaso Iiipasafifianal11 samatikkama patighasafifianal11 attha-
gama nanattasafifianal11 amanasikara ananto akaso ti akasanao-
cayataniipago. tal11 tval11 na janasi na passasi. tal11 ahal11
janami passami. so kho bho atta yato kayassa bheda ucchijjati
vinassati na hoti param maraQa, ettavata kho bho ayarp atta
samma samucchinno hoti ti. itth' eke sato sattassa ucchedal11
vinasal11 vibhaval11 pafifiapenti.
tarp afioo evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yarp tvarp
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayal11 atta
ettiivatii samma samucchinno hoti. atthi kho bho aofio attii
sabbaso akasanaocayatanal11 samatikkamma anantarp vio-
oaQan ti vififia!)anaficayatanupago. tal11 tval11 na janasi na
passasi. tal11 ahaI11 janami passami. so kho bho atta yato
kayassa bhedii ucchijjati vinassati na hoti param maraQa,
ettiivatii kho bho ayal11 atta samma samucchinno hoti ti. itth'
eke sato sattassa ucchedaI11 vinasaI11 vibhavaI11 pai'ii'iapenti.
tal11 afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yal11 tval11
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayal11 atta
ettiivata samma samucchinno hoti. atthi kho bho anoo aWi
sabbaso vii'ifia!)ai'icayatanaI11 1 samatikkamma n' atthi kii'i ci ti
iikiocaoi'iayatanupago. taI11 tval11 na janasi na passasi. tarp
ahaI11 janami passami. so kho bho atta yato kayassa bhedii
ucchijjati vinassati na hoti param mara!)a, eWivata kho bho
1 This word is usually written with haplology of -an- as here. The meaning
is unchanged.
Lesson 22 207
ayalll aWi samma samucchinno hoti ti. itth' eke sato sattassa
ucchedalll vinasarp vibhavarp. pafifiapenti.
talll afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yarp tvarp
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayarp atta
ettavata samma samucchinno hoti. atthi kho bho affiio atta
sabbaso akificafinayatanarp samatikkamma santarp etarp
p~Qitam etan ti nevasafifianasafifiayatanfipago. talll tvarp na
janasi na passasi. tarp aharp janami passami. so kho bho atta
yato kayassa bheda ucchijjati vinassati na hoti param maraQa,
ettavata kho bho ayalll atta samma samucchinno hoti ti. itth'
eke sato sattassa ucchedarp vinasarp vibhavarp paiinapenti.
ime kho te, bhikkhave, samaQabrahmaQa ucchedavada sato
sattassa ucchedarp vinasarp vibhavarp pafifiapenti sattahi
vatthfihi ...
santi, bhikkhave, eke samaQabrahmal).a diHhadhammanib-
banavada, sato sattassa paramaditthadhammanibbanarp paii-
iiapenti paficahi vatthiihi. te ca bhonto samaQabrahmaQa kim
agamma kirn arabbha diHhadhammanibbanavada sato sattassa
ditthadhammanibbanarp pafinapenti paficahi vatthiihi.
idha, bhikkhave, ekacco samaQo va brahmaI)o va evalllvadi
hoti evarp.diHhi: yato kho bho ayarp atta pancahi kamagul).~hi
samappito samangibhiito paricareti, ettavata kho bho ayarp
atta paramadiHhadhammanibbanarp patto hoti ti. itth' eke
sato sattassa paramadiHhadhammanibbanarp pafinapenti.
tarp afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yarp tvarp
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayalll atta
eWi.vata paramadiHhadhammanibbanappatto hoti. tarp kissa
hetu. kama hi bho anicca dukkha vipariQamadhamma, tesarp
vipariQamafifiathabhava uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhado-
manassupayasa. yato kho bho ayarp aWi vivicc' eva kamehi
vivicca akusaladhammehi savitakkarp savicararp vivekajarp
pitisukharp pathamajjhanarp upasampajja viharati, ettlivata
kho bho ayarp aWi. paramaditthadhammanibbanalll patto hoti
ti. itth' eke sato sattassa paramadiHhadhammanibblinarp
paiinapenti.
tarp. afifio evam aha: atthi kho bho eso atta yarp tvarp
vadesi. n' eso n' atthi ti vadami. no ca kho bho ayarp atta
ettlivatli paramadiHhadhammanibbanappatto hotL tarp kissa
hetu. yad eva tattha vitakkitarp vicaritarp etena etarp olarikarp
Lesson 23 2II
The agent noun may be used in the nominative case as

attribute of the nominative agent, agreeing with it in number,
and its patient (" object ") may be in either the accusative or
the genitive case (" objective genitive "). It may express the
main action of a sentence, with the verb "to be" either
understood or expressed (hoti) , it may express the action of a
subordinate clause, or it may express merely an attribute of
the agent.
Examples :-
tathiigato ... vlicattt bhiisitii ahosi = "the thus-gone .. , was
the speaker of the speech (ace.) "
ahaf!1- assa . mante viicetii = "I am his teacher (' causer to
speak ') (of) sacred texts 1 (ace.) "
ahattt ... mantanattt datii, tvattt mantanaf!1- pa/iggahetii,
.. I am .. . the giver (imparter) of sacred texts, you are
the receiver (recipient) of sacred texts (gen.) "
iti bhinniinattt va sandhiitii = "thus (he is) a peacemaker to
(gen.) those who are divided"
taUha n' atthi hantii vii ghiitetli vii sotli vii siivetii vii = " there
there is no killer nor causer of killing nor hearer nor
reciter " .
bhavissanti vattaro = " there will be speakers"
ita sutvii na amutra akkhiitli imesaf!1- bhediiya, amutra vii
sutvii na imesattt akkhiitii amusaf!1- bhediiya = .. hearing
(something) from here he doesn't report it there in order
to divide these (people), or, hearing from there he
doesn't report it tQ (gen.) these in order to divide those
(people)" (amusattt is genitive plural of the pronoun
(deictic) amu- .. he ", .. that ", .. yon" (more remote),
which stands to idaf!1- as amutra stands to idha or ettha ;
see next Lesson)
ahan tena samayena purohito hriihma1}o ahosittt tassa yaii-
iiassa yii;'etii = " at that time I was the high priest who
performed that sacrifice (gen.) "
tatr' assa doviiriko pa1}q,ito viyatto 2 medhiiv'i aiiiiiitiinaf!1-
1 Especially of the Vedic tradition of hymns, prayers, descriptions of divine
beings, etc.
• viya/ta is an alternative spelling of vyatta: in certain words the orthography
hesitates between taking vya-, tva-, etc., as one syllable or as two (the
pronunciation is always viya-. but t(H)va· is variable).
niviiretii niitiina~ pavesetii = "there there might be an

astute, intelligent, wise porter (who) kept away strangers
(and) showed in friends (' known ') "
siyii kho pana bhoto ranno mahayanna~ yajamiinassa ko cid
eva vattii =" but someone may say of his majesty the king
sacrificing a great sacrifice ... "
abhijiiniim' aha~ bhante ima~ panha~ anne sama~a
briihmatJe pucchitii =" I am aware of having asked this
question of other priests and philosophers"
Bahubbihi Compou1tds (4)
A bahubbihi containing two numerals (or numeral expres-
sions) is usually disjunctive. We have met an example in
Exercise 19, where the expressions (themselves compounds)
dviha~, " two days," and tiha~, " three days," are compounded
in dVihatihapayiita (sattha) , meaning " (when it was) two or
three days (since it) had set out (caravan) ", i.e. dVihatJt va
tiha~ vii . .. Some grammarians very artificially would regard
even dvihamta~ by itself as a bahubbihi, in which the word to
which the compound is subordinate (being other than a member
of the compound itself, hence implying a bahubbihi) is vii,
" or."
[When two cardinal directions (disci) are combined in a
bahubbihi the meaning is the intermediate direction (vidisii or
anudisa) .' pubbadakkhi~tii (vidisii) = "the south-east direction" ;
pacchimuttara . .. =" north-west ... " These expressions do not
seem to have been used in the Pali Canon, but they are found
in later Pali literature.]
A word may be repeated to form a bahubbihi, the stem final
of the first member being lengthened and the suffix -in being
added (cf. Lesson 21 for repetition, and Lesson 22 for -in added
to bahubbihis). The meaning may be distributive, or intensifying
or emphasizing that of the single word, the whole being used
as an adjective or, usually, as an adverb. 1 We have already met
sa~ghiisatJtghin (Exercise 19). used adverbially in a compound
with the past participle ga~tibhiUa (gatJi-bhu =" to cluster "),
1 Like adjectives, compounds otherwise used as bahttbbfhis may be used in
the accusative singular neuter as adverbs or in the neuter as nouns (hence as
ItJppu,isas or liammadharayas).
Lesson 23 21 7
A consonant is usually doubled after the prefixes u(d) and

du(r), similarly the r of ni(r) is assimilated :-
u(d) + pajjati > uppaJiati
ni(r) + pitika > nippitika
ni(r) + ya > niyya-
du(r) + carita1?£ > duccarita1?£.
But r + k > kkh, r + t > tth and d + h > ddh :-
ni(r) + (k)kam > nikkham-
ni(r) + tar> nitthar-
u(d) + har > uddhar- (but u(d) + han > uhan- and ni(r)
+ har > nihar-).
The finals -ti and -ti, -dhi, may be changed to cc, jjh, and
-bhi may be changed to bbh, when followed by vowels :-
iti + ala1?£ > iccala1?£ (also written iccala1?£)
(p)pa# + assosi > paccassosi
adhi + a > ajjha
abhi + u(d) + kir > abbhukkir-.
Final niggahita may be written as assimilated to the same
place of articulation as a following consonant, becoming
n, ft, ~, n, or m :-
sa1?£ + (k)kam > sankam- (sa1?£kam- is probably more usual)
dhamma1?£ + ca > dhammaiica
ala1?£ + dani > alandani
sam + ni > sanni
ala1?£ + me > alamme.
1?l- is always assimilated to ti :-
kusalat!' + ti > kusalanti.
Final niggahita followed by a vowel may become m :-
bhava1?£ + atthu > bhavamatthu
. ida1?£ + asana1?£ > idamasana1?£.
Very rarely a final niggahita may be elided :-
idat!' + aha1?£ > idtihat!'.
obhaso radiance
kammanto work, undertaking, business
Iwrisa1ft excrement
klira~la1ft cause
khit!4ci play
ga1Jako mathematician, treasurer
galako goer
ghacca destruction
tiato friend (" known ")
theyya1!/- theft
dakllhi~ui. gift, donation
daliddiya1ft poverty
nimilto sign, omen, portent
nisedho prohibition, prevention
patJavo drum
pariyetthi (fern.) seeking. looking for, search
pavuttclt!t recitation
patubhiivo appearance, manifestation
piirisajjo councillor. member of an assembly
bcihci arm
mala1!/-
..
0pullon
mttUattt urme
rathiyii street
vt'i 1Jijo merchant
vclsi hatchet
vep 1/ lllH!t prevalence
vytidhi(masc. ) disease
salmtlO bird
saggo heaven
samiitita1!t collection
samuddo ocean
(s)saro sound. voice
sakitant kindling block
stisalla1!t instruction, doctrine
si1ighlltako crossroads. square
Agent Nouns (masc.) :-
akkhiilar reporter
aiiiiiitar learner, grasper
Lesson 23 225
pariyesamano imassa paflhassa veyyakaraQarp najjhaga,l atha

marp yeva santike paccagato. na kho eso bhikkhu paflho evaIp
pucchitabbo: kattha nu kho bhante ime cattaro mahabhiita
aparisesa nirujjhanti, seyyathidarp pathavidhatu apodhatu
~ejodhiitu vayodhiitii ti. evafl ca kho eso bhikkhu pafiho
pucchitabbo :-
kattha apo ca pathavi tejo vayo na gadhati,
kattha dighafl ca rassafi ca aQurp thiilarp subhasubhalp,
kattha namafi ca riipafi ca asesarp uparujjhati ti.
tatra veyyakararyarp bhavati :-
viflfiaQarp anidassanarp anantarp sabbatopabharp, 2
ettha apo ca pathavi tejo vayo na gadhati,
ettha dighafi ca rassail ca aQurp thiilarp subhiisubharp,
ettha namafi ca riipafl ca asesarp uparujjhati,
viflfiaQassa nirodhena ctth' ctarp uparujjhati ti.
atha kho bhikkhave Bandhuma raja sarathirp amantapetva

2.
et ad avoca:-
kacci samma sarathi kumaro uyyanabhiimiya abhiramittha,3
kacci samma sarathi kumaro uyyanabhiimiya attamano ahosi ti.
na kho deva kumaro uyyanabhiimiya abhiramittha, na kho
dcva kumaro uyyanabhiimiya attamano ahosi ti.
kim pana samma sarathi addasa kumaro uyyanabhiimirp
niyyanto ti.
addasa kho deva kumaro uyyanabhiimirp niyyanto purisarp
jiQQarl1 ... so kho deva kumaro antepuragato dukkhi dummano
pajjhayati: dhir atthu kira bho jati nama, yatra hi nama
jatassa jara paflflayissati ti.
atha kho bhikkhave Bandhumassa rafifio etad ahosi: ma h'
1 " Root" aorist (see Lesson 30) of lIdhi-gam, 2nd singular.

I Several meanings are suggested in the Commentaries for this difficult word:
pabha =" ford ", " crossing place" (over the ocean of existence to nibbana,,s) ;
pa(b)ha(va)>rI =" able ", "prevailing" (present participle of pa-(b)hil);
pabhti = .. brilliance ". The Dfgha Commentary (SlImangalavilasinf) here
prefers the first.
• abM-yam, " enjoy," .. take pleasure in"; 3rd singular aorist .. middle"
(Lesson 28).
Introduction to Pati
eva kho Vipassi kumaro na rajjarp karesi, ma h' eva Vipassi

kumaro agarasma anagariyarp pabbaji, ma h' eva nemittanarp
brahmananam
' .
saccam. ass a vacanan ti.
at ha kho bhikkhave Bandhuma raja Vipassissa kumarassa
bhiyyoso mattaya pafica kamaguQani upaHhapesi yatha
Vipassi kumaro rajjarp kareyya, yatha Vipassi kumaro na
agarasma anagariyarp pabbajeyya, yatha nemittanarp brah-
mananam miccba ass a vacanam. tatra sudam bhikkhave
• • • 4
Vipassi kumaro paficahi kamagu:Q.ehi samappito samangibhiito

paricareti.
atha kho bhikkhave Vipassi kumaro bahunnarp vassanaql ...
pe ...
addasa kho bhikkhave Vipassi ku.maro uyyanabhiimirp
niyyanto purisarp abadhikarp dukkhitarp balhagilanaql mut-
takarise palipannarp semanarp afifiehi vuHhapiyamanarp
afifiehi sarpvesiyamanarp. disva sarathirp amantesi: ayam
pan a samma sarathi puriso kirp kato, akkhini pi 'ssa na yatha
afifiesarp, saro pi 'ssa na yatha afifiesan ti.
eso kho devli. vyadhito nama ti.
kim pana eso samma sarathi vyadhito nama ti.
eso kho deva vyadhito nama: app eva nama tamha aMdha
vutthaheyya ti.
kim pana samma sarathi aham pi vyadhidhammo vyadhirp
anatito ti.
tvafi ca deva mayafi c' amha sabbe vyadhidhamma vyadhirp
anatita ti.
tena hi samma sarathi alan dan' ajja uyyanabhumiya, ito va
antepuraql paccaniyyahi ti.
3. atha kho bhikkhave afifiataro puriso yena raja khattiyo

muddhavasitto ten' upasarpkami, upasarpkamitva rajanarp
khattiyarp muddhavasittaql etad avoca :-
yagghe deva janeyyasi dibbaql cakkaratanarp antarahitan ti.
atha kho bhikkhave raja khattiyo muddhavasitto dibbe
cakkaratane antarahite anattamano ahosi, anattamanatafi ca
patisarpvedesi. no ca kho rajisirp upasaqlkamitva ariyaql
cakkavattivattarp pucchi. so samaten' eva sudarp janapadarp
pasasati, tassa samatena janapadarp pasasato na pubbe
Lesson 24 233
Very rarely a suffix h (or iJt) appears in place of ss (or iss).

The inflections then begin with i instead of a,' hohisi 2nd
singular: "you will be " (in prose but perhaps poetic-porten-
tous speech; bhavissati is the usual form).
(d)dis has the very irregular dakkhiti (s + ss > kkh). and
more rarely the double form dakkhissati (for irregularity of root
vowel cf. the aorist).
A uxiliary Verbs
Sometimes a verb meaning" to be or a verb implying
11
duration is used more or less ns an auxiliary with a form

(usually a participle) of another verb. A construction in which
two verb forms are thus used as equivalent to a single verb is
called" periphrastic ". The usual definition of " periphrastic".
according to European philologists, is that two verb forms
" express a single verbal idea ".1 This seems imprecise, if only
because it is hard to define a " single verbal idea" (which varies
from language to language):· PaH has a "desiderative"
conjugation and can express the" idea" wish-to-do-the-action-
of-the-verb in a single verb form and apparently as one" idea ",
hence the alternative constructions is + infmitive or bahubbihi
in -kiimo + hoti, etc., would be "periphrastic ". If, again,
some periphrastic constructions are supposed to have a meaning
such as " continuous action" which would not belong to the
alternative single verb, then we seem to have two "verbal
ideas" after all. It is this latter possibility of expressing
nuances of meaning not given by a single verb which is of
most interest here, however we define" periphrastic". It may
suffice to speak of the use of certain verbs as " auxiliaries ".
The verbs concerned include, besides .as and hu (bhU) , car, (mhii,
vatt, and vi-har. We may compare with them also ni-sid and
ni-pad.
as with a past participle emphasizes the meaning of " present
perfect" of the latter. The 3rd person of the present tense,
however, is not used in this way, except for the emphatic
atthi or santi at the beginning of a sentence, being omitted as
1 Alternatively it is said that one verb is a mere auxiliary expressing
" aspect ", etc. This again is relative, varying from language to language, and
it is extremely difficult in Pali to distinguish the uses of certain verbs as mere
auxiliaries from parallel constructions where they retain their proper meanings.
tena kho pana samayena Payiisissa ... ditthigatam uppan-

na1?t hoti, " at that time Payasi . .. had had/had been of
the opinion (literally: of P... the opinion had
arisen) "-" pluperfect ..
tena kho pena samayena Nigattlho Niilaputto adhunii
kiilakato hoti, "at that time the Nigal)tha (= Jaina)
Nataputta 1 had just died" (adhunii = "now", " just
now").
Aorist of hit (in all these cases the expression tena ... sama-
yena is absent) :-
dvare ... talo Ihito ahosi. "a ... palm tree stood by the
gate". " there was a ... palm tree near the gate"
attamanii ahesut,n, " they were a'ssured "
anuyuttii ahesuttt, " they submitted" (probably = they all
went on submitting: continuous)
ta (lotus pools) ... citii ahesuttt, " ... were built (of
bricks)" (continuous condition, not the action of
building, which is expressed by a different verb in the
preceding sentence: miipesi)
Imperative of hit :--
upasamena . . . kumaro samannagato hotu, " may the prince
be endowed ... with calm" (again the durative aspect
seems implied)
Future of hit (bhit) with the future passive participle of the
main verb:-
?la diini ten a cirattt jivitabbattt bhavissati, " he hasn't long
to live now," " he won't live much longer" (perfective
aspect)
maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, " the road will have to
be travelled by me," " I shall have had to travel along
the road" (the latter version is probably more correct:
in the context the speaker envisages that he will have
become tIred by the journey)
kamma1?1 kho me katabba1?t bhavissati, " I shall have had to
do some work "
I Presumably Mahil.vlra, the founder of Jainism.
Lesson 24 239
vi-har again has a durative meaning liable to combine with

other actions. Its meaning, however, may fade into mere
duration in certain combinations, making it then much more
like a pure auxiliary than the above verbs. This use of vi-har is
fairly frequent in all its tenses, usually with the gerund, but
also with the present or past participle, of another verb :-
so ... pathamajjhii.natJI- upasampajja viharati, "he ...
dwells having entered into the first meditation," "he
remains in the first meditation" (here we may on the
other hand regarp the gerund upasampajja as a mere
post position meaning" in ")
cetasa ... pharitva viharati, "he dwells pervading ...
with his mind"
anuyutto viharati, " he lives practising (fasting and other
forms of asceticism) "
api pana tumhe . .. ekantasukha1JZ loka1JZ jana1JZ passa1J1.
viharatha, "but do you ... live knowing, seeing the
world as extremely happy? "
bhikkhii, RajagahatJI- upanissaya viharanti, .. monks live
depending on Rajagaha (for support) " (here as in the
first example the gerund of upa-ni-(s)si resembles
a post posit ion)
yathii aha1JZ subha1J1. vimokkha'?t upasampajja vihareyya1JZ,
" that I may live entered into/in glorious freedom"
upasampajja viharissati, " he will live in "
subhatJI- vimokkha1JZ upasampajja viharitu1JZ, .. to live in
glorious freedom"
ni-sid, being durative, may enter into periphrastic construc-
tions, as in the example given above :-
tut,thibMtto nisinno hoti, .. was sitting silently," - which,
since tut,thibhuta is p.p. of tut,thi-bhu, " to be silent," may
be regarded as a combination of three verb forms,
a double periphrastic. Another example is :-
puriso ... vatthena sasisa1JZ parupitva nisinno assa, "a
man ... might be seated covered with a garment right
over his head" ((p)pa-a-rup (1*) = .. to cover", "to .
wear ")
Lesson 24 243
EXERCISE 24
1. evam me sutal1l. ekal1l samayal1l bhagava Rajagahe viharati
Gijjhakiite pabbate. tena kho pan a samayena raja Magadho
Ajatasattu Vedehiputto 1 Vajji abhiyatukamo hoti. so evam
aha: ahafich' ime Vajji cval1lmahiddhike eval1lmaMnubMve,
ucchecchami Vajji vinasessami Vajji anayavyasanalll
apadessami Vajji ti.
atha kho raja Magadho Ajatasattu Vedehiputto VassakaraJTl
brahmaQal1l Magadhamahamattal1l amantesi: ehi tval1l brah-
maQa yena bhagava ten' upasal!lkama, upasaJTlkamitva mama
vacanena bhagavato pade sirasa vandahi, appabadham appa-
tailkal1l lahuHhanal1l balal1l phasuviharal1l puccha: raja
bhante Magadho Ajatasattu Vedehiputto bhagavato pade
sirasa vandati, appabadharp appatailkarp lahutthanarp balarp
phasuviharal1l pucchati ti, evafi ca vadehi: raja bhante
Magadho Ajatasattu Vedchiputto Vajji abhiyatukamo. so
evam aha; ahafich' ime Vajji eval1lmahiddhike evarpmahanu-
bhave, ucchecchami Vajji vinasessami Vajji anayavyasanaJTl
apadessami Vajji ti; yatha ca te bhagava vyakaroti tarp
sadhukal1l uggahetva mamarp aroceyyasi, na hi tathagata
. .
vitatham bhananti ti.
evarp bho ti kho Vassakaro brflhmaQo Magadhamahamatto
rafino Magadhassa Ajatasattussa Vedehiputtassa patissutva,
bhaddani bhaddani yanani yojapetva, bhaddal1l y1lnarp
abhirfihitva, bhaddehi bhaddehi yanehi Rajagahamha niyyasi,
yen a Gijjhakiito pabbato tena payasi, yavatika yanassa bhiimi
yanena gantva yiina paccorohitva pattiko va yena bhagava
ten' upasarpkami, upasal1lkamitva bhagavata saddhiJTl sam-
modi, sammodaniyarp kathaJTl saraQiyarp vitisaretva eka-
mantam" nisidi. ekamantam nisinno kho Vassakaro brahmano .
Magadhamahamatto bhagavantaJTl et ad avoca; raja bho
Gotama Magadho Ajatasattu Vedehiputto bhoto Gotamassa
pade sirasa vandati, appabadham applitailkarp lahuHhanarp
balal1l phasuviharal1l pucchati. raja bho Gotama Magadho
1 Son of Bimbisara. reigned - 494 to - 469. Started Magadha decisively
on its imperial career by his conquest of the VajjI republic in - 483. about three
years after the events of the present narrative. The Vajjr republic lay to the
north of the Ganges. which formed the frontier between it and Magadha.
I ntrodftction to Pali
approached the house of the moneylender, who was a house-

holder, (and) having approached ordered the porter: "Go,
I say, 0 porter, tell the moneylender's wife: A doctor, lady,
(has) come; he wishes to sce you." (Saying:)" Yes, teacher,"
the porter, having assented to Jivaka Komarabhacca,
approached the moneylender's wife, (and) having approached
said this to the moneylender's wife: "A doctor, lady, (has)
come; he wishes to see you." " What sort, I say, porter, (of)
doctor?" "Young, lady." " Enough! I say, porter; what
use is a young doctor to me? 1 Many great, intemationally-
leading doctors have come (and) could not make (me) well.
They went taking much gold."
Then the porter (returned to Jivaka for further instruc-
tions) ... said this to the moneylender's wife: "The doctor,
lady, has spoken (aha) thus: Don't now (kira) lady give any-
thing in advance. When you have become (aorist) well (fern.),
then (you) may give me what you wish." " Now I say, porter,
let the doctor come."
LESSON 25
Derivation
It was iilentioned on p. 6 above that in theory all words are
" derived" from roots, the roots being irreducible meaningful
elements of the language. It may be noted here that the
Buddhist theory of language (accepted by all Schools of
Buddhism, though they differ on details) is that it is con-
ventional (vohara). Sounds in themselves are meaningless, but
meanings are arbitrarily assigned to groups of sounds by social
convention. Quite often these meanings change through usage
(ru/hi). The Brahmanical (MimaJ1lsa) tradition on the other
hand holds that language (the Vedic language) is eternal and
existed before men made ust' of it. It is clear that on the
Buddhist view analysis iild the setting up of roots, suffixes,
1 hilt' . . . harissali, .. what will/can he/it do ? " means much the same as
.. what's the use of ? ..
The words thus formed cannot stand alone, but only as the
second members of compounds. When ~a is added a root must
be strengthened (lengthened) as for the seventh conjugation
(vuddhi: a > d, i > e, u > 0); if the root ends in il, y is
inserted between the root and the suffix. Thus from flar we have
-kiira, .. maker," " doer" (as in kumbhakaro, .. potter "); from
dii -diiya, "giver." (Compare the action noun suffix a-no
exponent-yielding, e.g., -kara-no root strengthening.) The
suffix called ra requires the elision of the final consonant and
proceeding vowel of the root. It is used, e.g., with gam and jan,
yielding the words -ga and -ja. (The zero suffix which is added
for example to the root bkii. in forming abhibMi is called kvi (all
of which is thus exponent). When kvi is added to a root ending
in a consonant (e.g. gam, han) the final consonant is dropped:
ura-ga (urago = " snake "), satf'-gha (sa1Jlgho).)
Secondary Derivation
If a new word is derived not directly from a root but secon-
darily from another word-stem the derivation is called
" secondary" (taddhita). Nouns thus derived are called
secondary nouns (taddhitaniima). The suffixes used are dis-
tinguish(!d from the primary suffixes, though sometimes they
coincide in form with these. Among the secondary nouns
(or adjectives) are some possessives (some of those in in and all
of those in mattt and vant 1), various numeral forms (ordinals,
etc.), comparatives in tara, abstract nouns and a miscellaneous
group. (A number of suffixes forming indedinables also belong to
secondary derivation.) Abstract and other secondary nouns
are formed freely in Pali, in principle from any noun or adjec-
tive, and their derivation is an important feature of the grammar
of the language as well as a useful source of vocabulary.
Abstract N Duns
Abstract nouns are formed by the addition of the suffixes
-tii (always feminine) or -tta(tf') (almost always neuter) to
existing stems.
1 These suffixes are known as f (taddhita) or ~I (hila), man/It, and vall/".
where ~ and" are exponents (the feminine suffix -I is also known as I by some
grammarians, but others label it tif; the feminine possessive is given as in').
Lesson 25 253
devata (If deity", .. any divine being "-whether god" If
or .. goddess ") < devo .

vepullatd (" abundance ") < vepullat!'
itthattat!' (" this world", lit. " thus-ne ss ") < itthat!'
nanattat!' (" variety " , diversity") < nand
If
mandattat!' (If ineptitude ") < manda

sattattat!' (" existence", If being-hood ") double abstract
+
< sant -tta -tta +
Various Secondary Nouns (including Adjectives)
Other secondary nouns are formed by the suffixes ~a (i.e. -a,
which if the stem already ends in a makes no change), ~eyya
(i.e. -eyya) , (~)ika,l (~)iya, (~)aka, (~)ya, ima, ssa, and others,
with strengthening (lengthening. vuddhi) of the first vowel
of the word. They are extremely common and a good many
have occurred already in the exercises, being listed in the
vocabularies as independent words. They may be nouns or
adjectives. In the latter case the feminine form usually has its
stem in i.
akiilika (If timeless ") < a + kalo + (~)ika
atthangika (If having eight factors ") < altha + angat!' +
(~)ika
iikiiicaiiiiat!' (" nothingness ") < a + kit!' + cana (= ci)
+ (~)ya
anaiicat!' (" infinity ") < a + anto + (~)ya
dnupubba (feminine anupubbi) (If systematic ") < anu-
pubba + (tt)a
abddhika (If ill ") < abddho + (~)ika
iiraiiiiaka (If living in the forest ") < araniia1!' + (~l)aka
iirogyat!' (If health ") < a + rogo + (tt)ya
asabha (feminine: asabhi) (" bold", lit.: If bull-like If)
+
< usabho (If bull ") (~)a (irregular vuddhi)
ehipassika (If verifiable ") < ehi (If come! ") + passa
(If see! ") + (~)ika
opanayika (" fruitful", lit.: If leading to ") < upanayo
+~ (tt)ika
kiiveyyat!' (" poetry") < kavi + (~)eyya
1 From here the exponents are enclosed in brackets.
compound functions as an indeclinablc (cf. in English" along-

sidc "). Whcreas in a tappurisa or kammadhiiraya the second
mcmber may be said to predominate, and the first to be sub-
ordinated to it, in an avyayibhiiva it is the first member which
predominates. The second (final) member regularly has the
inflexion of the neuter nominative/accusative singular as
indeclinable form.
With a prefix as first member we have for example :-
ajjhattattt- "internally" (adhi + atean, transferred to -a
stem)
atibtiJha1J£ " too much"
a1U~lo11lat.n " in natural order", " in normal order" (lit. :
If along the hair "-loma1!' = hair (of the body) ")
If
paccattattt- individually", " personally"

If
pa#patha1Jt" in thc opposite direction ", " the other way"

pa#loma1Jt " in reverse order"
With an indeclinablc as first member we have :-
tiropabbata1Jt " through a mountain" (tiro = " through" :
rarely uscd as a separate word)
pacchtibltattattt- after the mcal ", .. after eating"
If
yathiibalm.n " according to onc's ability"

yathabhitta1J' " as it really is ", according to nature"
If
yatltiimittatt' with onc's friends"

If
yiivajivattt- " as long as one lives all one's lifc

If, " If
yiivadatthattt- "as much as onc wants" (d is junction

consonant).
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
adhi-vas (I) causative adlziviiseti = agree to stay
(i.e. reside, put up, in = ace.), accept
an invitation
anu-(k)kam (I) anukkamati walk along
anu-(s)su (V) anussu~uiti hear of
abhi-sa1Jt-budh (Ill) abhisambujjhati become enlightened,
attain enlighten-
ment
Lesson 25
tarp bhante avasathagararp, asanani pannattani, udakamaJ)iko

patitthapito, telappadipo aropito, yassa dani bhante bhagava
kalarp mannati ti.
atha kho bhagava nivasetva pattacivararp adaya saddhirp
bhikkhusarpghena yena avasathagararp ten' upasarpkami,
upasarpkamitva pade pakkhaletva avasathagararp pavisitva
majjhimatp thambharp nissaya puratthabhimukho nisidi.
bhikkhusarpgho pi kho pade pakkhaletva avasathagararp
pavisitva pacchimatp bhittirp nissaya puratthabhimukho
nisidi bhagavantarp yeva purakkhatva. Pataligamiya pi kho
upasaka pade pakkh1l1etva avasathagararp pavisitva puratthi-
marp bhittiJ!l nissaya pacchabhimukha nisidirpsu bhagavantatp
yeva purakkhatva. atha kho bhagava Pataligamiye upasake
amantesi: pane' ime gahapatayoadinava dussilassa silavi-
pattiya. katame panca. idha gahapatayo dussilo silavipanno
pamadadhikaraJ)atp mahatirp bhogajanirp nigacchati. ayarp
pathamo iidinavo dussilassa silavipattiya. puna ca paraJ!l
gahapatayo dussIlassa silavipannassa papako kittisaddo abbhug-
gaeehati. ayarp dutiyo adinavo dussilassa silavipattiya. puna
ca pararp gahapatayo dussilo silavipanno yaJ!l yad eva parisarp
upasarpkamati, yadi khattiyaparisarp yadi brahmaJ)aparisarp
yadi gahapatiparisarp yadi samaJ)aparisarp, avisarado upasarp-
kamati mat'lkubhiito. ayarp tatiyo iidinavo dussUassa silavi-
pattiya. puna ca pararpgahapatayo dussilo silavipanno
sammiilho kalatp karoti. ayarp catuttho adinavo dussilassa
silavipattiya. puna ca paratp gahapatayo dussilo silavipanno
kayassa bheda param maraJ)a apayarp duggatiJ!l vinipataJ!l
nirayatp upapajjati. ayatp pancamo iidinavo dussilassa
silavipattiya. ime kho gahapatayo panca adinava dussIlassa
sila vipattiya. .
pane' ime gahapatayo anisatpsa sIlavato silasampadaya.
katame panca. idha gahapatayo sUava silasampanno appama-
diidhikaraJ)arp mahantarp bhogakkhandhaf!l adhigacchati.
ayaf!l pathamo anisaf!lso silavato silasampadaya. puna ca
paraJ!l gahapatayo silavato silasampannassa kalyaJ)o kittisaddo
abbhuggacchati. ayatp dutiyo anisarpso silavato silasampadaya.
puna ea pararp gahapatayo silava silasampanno yarp yad eva
parisaf!l upasatpkamati, yadi khattiyaparisaf!l yadi brahmaJ)a-
parisatp yadi gahapatiparisarp yadi samaJ)aparisaf!l, visarado
Lesson 25
Ananda ariyarp ayatanarp yavata vaI)ippatho idarp aggana-

gararp bhavissati Pataliputtarp putabhedanarp. Pataliputtassa
kho Ananda tayo 1 antaraya bhavissanti, aggito va udakato va
mithubheda va ti.
atha kho Sunidha-Vassakara Magadhamahamatta yena
bhagava ten' upasarpkamirpsu, upasarpkamitva bhagavata
saddhirp' sammodirpsu sammodaniyarp katharp saraI)iyarp
vitisaretva ekamantarp attharpsu. ekamantarp thita kho
Sunidha-Vassakara Magadhamahamatta bhaga vantarp et ad
avocurp: adhivasetu no bhavarp Gotamo ajjatanaya bhattarp
saddhiql bhikkhusaqlghena ti. adhivasesi bhagava tUI)hi-
bh1ivena.
atha kho Sunidha-Vassakara MagadhamahamaWi. bhagavato
adhivasanarp viditva yena sako avasatho ten' upasarpkamirpsu
upasarpkamitva sake avasathe paI)itarp khadaniyarp bhoja-
niyarp patiyadapetva bhagavato kalarp arocapesuql kalo bho
Gotama niHhitarp bhattan ti.
2. atha kho bhikkhave Vipassi bodhisatto aparena samayena

eko gaI)asma vupakaHho vihasi. annen' eva !ani caturasiti-
pabbajitasahassani agamarpsu, annena Vipassi bodhisatto.
atha kho bhikkhave Vipassissa bodhisattassa vasupagatassa
rahogatassa patisallinassa evz,ql cetaso parivitakko udapadi:
kiccharp vatayarp loko apanno, jayati ca jiyati ca miyati ca
cavati ca upapajjati ca. atha ca pan' imassa dukkhassa
nissaraI)arp na ppajanati jariimaraI)assa, kuda ssu nama imassa
dukkhassa nissaraI)arp pannayissati jaramaraI)assa ti.
atha kho bhikkhave Vipassissa bodhisattassa etad ahosi:
kimhi nu kho sati jaramaraI)arp hoti, kimpaccaya jaramaraI)an
ti . . atha kho bhikkhave Vipassissa bodhisattassa yonisomana-
sikara ahu 2 pannaya abhisamayo: jatiya kho sati jaramara-
I)arp hoti, jatipaccaya jaramaraI)an ti. atha kho bhikkhave
Vipassissa bodhisattassa etad ahosi: kimhi nu kho sati jati
hoti, kimpaccaya jati ti. atha kho bhikkhave Vipassissa
bodhisattassa yonisomanasikara ahu pafinaya abhisamayo:
bhave kho sati j:Hi hoti, bhavapaccaya jati ti. atha kho
bhikkhave Vipassissa bodhisattassa etad ahosi: kimhi nu kho
1" Three "-see next Lesson.
I " There was": "root" aorist of ha, sec Lesson 30.
having approached and observed the disorder of king Pajjota

said this to king Pajjota: 0 king (place second), I will
If
concoct ghee, the king (devo) will drink it." " (1) won't, I say,
Jlvaka. If (yatJt) it is possible for you to make (me) well without
ghee, do it. Disgusting to me (is) ghee, distasteful."
Then Jlvaka thought: This sort (of) illness of this king (it)
If
is not possible to make well without ghee. Suppose I concoct

ghee (so that it has) astringent-colour, astringent-odour,
astringent-taste." Then JIvaka concocted ghee with-various-
drugs (so that it was) astringent-colour, astringent-odour,
astringent-taste. Then Jivaka thought: "To this king ghee.
when drunk (and) digesting, will give vomiting. This king (is)
irascible (put first), he may have me killed. Suppose I ask for
leave as a precaution." Then Jivaka approached king Pajjota
and having approached said this to king Pajjota: "0 king,
we doctors, you know (nama), at this sort (of) moment dig up
roots, gather medicines. 0 king, please command at (loc.) the
stables and gates: let Jivaka go by any mount he likes, let him
go by any gate he likes, let him go any time (ace.) he likes, let
him enter any time he likes."
LESSON 26
Numerals 1
The numeral stem ti, " three," is inflected in three genders as

follows, and used like an adjective :-
Masculine Neuter Feminine
Nom. } layo 111;" I,sso

Ace.
Ins. I,ll, Ifll,
Dat. li~~a'1' tissanna'1'
Ab!.
Gen.
"11,
ti~~a'1'
t'"'
lissanna'tl
Loc. IIsu Ifsu
1 See also Lessons 17, 18. and 20.

Lesson 26
Of the remaining numerals, the following are inflected and

used in the same way as paiica, .. five" (see Lesson 17) : -
cham
.
SIX (the final I appears only in close
junction as in compounds, e.g.
chaJanga-; it is assimilated to
a following consonant ; in certain
compounds the form sa(1) is
current)
saUa seven
attha eight
nava nine
dasa ten
ekiidasa eleven
dviidasa twelve
tela sa thirteen
cuddasa fourteen
pat,1.t,1.arasa fifteen
sola sa sixteen
sattarasa seventeen
atJhiidasa eighteen
The following numerals are used as nouns, they are feminine

singular and are inflected like jati (Lesson 20) : -
visati twenty
sal/hi sixty
sattati seventy
asiti eighty
navuti ninety
The following are neuter nouns, they are usually inflected

(in the singular) like other neuters in a, but may also be used
undeclined in the stem form :-
(t) ti11J sa thirty (usually tt in compounds)
cattarisa forty (also found in a feminine form cattarisa
inflected like katha: Lesson 17)
paiiiiasa fifty (also -a feminine).
The remaining intermediate numbers are compounds having

the usual inflections of the last member :-
ekunavisati 19 (ekuna = one less than-) (ekiinapannasa
49)
ekavisati 21 (ekanavuti 91, and ekati~sa against the
usual doubling)
dvavisati 22 (dvasallhi 62, but dvatlitttsa 32 and
dvecattarisa~ 42)
tevisati 23 (tetti~sa 33)
catuvisati 24 (caturasiti 84, catucattarisa 44)
pancavisati 25
chavisati 26 (chatti~sa 36 with doubling of the t)
sattavisati 27
a/thavisati 28 (atthasat/hi 68)
ekunati~sa 29
Numerals which are nouns are generally used appositionally
in the same case (but singular) as the noun they refer to (cf.sata
and sahassa, Lesson 17). They may also form compounds with
these nouns.
Fractions :-
aif4ho (masc. or adjective, also spelt addho) half" :-
If
aif4hayojanattt, " half a league "

upaif4ha (adjective or neuter) half" :-
If
upa#ha~ divasa~, half a day"

If
upaif4hapatha~, " halfway" (adverb)
_If and a half" is expressed by prefixing a44ha- to the next

higher numeral :-
(diyaif4ho, " one and a half," not found in Digha)
a44hateyya, " two and a half "
(aif4huif4ha, "three and a half," only in later texts)
. (the rest are regular)
a44hate/asa, " twelve and a half "
-for other fractions the ordinals are used, and they may be
compounded with bhago, " part" :-
catuttha, a quarter"
If
catutthabhago, " one fourth," .. a quarter 11

Lesson 26 275
The less infrequent suffix is tavin, which is inflected like other
stems in in :-
bhuj bhuttavin having eaten, who has eaten
V~-J~ vijitavin who has conquered, who had conquered
The suffix tavant(u) may be considered as the possessive
suffix vant(u) (whose declension it follows) added to the past
participle in ta 1 : -
vas vusitavant who has lived (well)
(this appears to be the only example in regular use; it has
a special meaning, applying to the life of monks; it is always
an adjective).
Example of construction with patient :-
gahapatissa . . . bhojanam bhuttavissa..., "of · a house-
holder ... who has eaten a meal ... "
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
anu-kamp (I) anukampati be compassionate, have
compassion (ace.)
anu-bandh (I) anubandhati follow
anu-budh (Ill) anubujjhati understand
apa-lok (VII) apaloketi tqke leave, give notice
from the noun udiineti sp~ak with exaltation,
udiina1Jt, cf. speak with joy
Lesson 28 on
denomina-
tives
u(d)-a-har (1) udaharati spe~J<:, say, promulgate
upa-nam (I) causative upanameti = offer, serve (dat. of
person and acc. of thing)
upa-sa1Jf--har (1) upasa1Jtharati visualize as, imagine as
(2 ace's.)
o-lup (11) causative olumpeti = scrape off
o-lok (VII) oloketi look at
ni(r)-pat (I) nippatati flee
ni-vatt (I) causative nivatteti = turn back (transitive)
1 The past participle suffix is sometimes labelled Ma, or in our notation
(k}ta.
27 6 I ntroduction to Pali
(p)pa-kas (I) (pakrisati, shine: poetic only, and not in the

Digha)
causative pakiiseti = show
(P )pati-ii-sis 1 paccasirrtsati hope for, expect
(II)
(P )pa#-(g)gah causative pa/iggaheti = make receive, accept
(V)
(P )pafi-(P )pa- patiPpa1Jamati abate (causative =
nam (1) check)
(p)pa/i-(p)pa- patiPpassambhati abate, be allayed
(s)sambh (I)
(p)pa/i-bhii (1) patibhati be clear
(p)pa#-va!! (1) pa,tivat!ati turn back
(p)pa#-vidh pa#viJihati penetrate, comprehend
(Ill)
(p)pa-bandh (I) pabandhati bind
pari-ni (r)-vii parinibbiiti attain extinction, attain
(1) (or Ill) liberation
pari-har (I) pariharati watch over, protect
po!h (VII) potheti snap (fmgers)
vi-ci (V) vicinciti investigate, search out
sa1.n-tapfi (VII) santappeti (also) satisfy
sarrt-(p )pa-var sampavareti feast (transitive)'
(VII)
sarrt-bMi, (VII) sambhiiveli catch up with (acc.)
Nouns :-
akkho axle
abhijjluI desire (with loco of object)
ambakii mango woman
ayyaptttto master, Mr., (plur:) gentlemen (espedally
when addressed by ladies, including their
wives)
alatikiiro ornament, adornment
assaso reassurance
iimalaka1J~ emblic myrobalan (a medicinal fruit)
aramo park
iihriro district
1 Or (p)pafi-asis s ince sis never appears by itself and a may not be a prefix
here (but part of the root),
Lesson 26 279
bhojetva (bhuj having fed
(11) causative)
vatva (vac) having said
vineyya (vi-ni) having eliminated, having disciplined
visaJja (vi-saJj) getting over, leaving behind
Indeclinables :-
anantara", without omission
apara", further
aparapara", successively
abdhira", without exclusion, without excluding anyone
durato in the distance
yatha.sand#!ha", with one's acquaintances
yathasambhatta", with one's comrades
yava (also means) until, as long as
vtya like (enclitic: this is the usual prose form;
in verse we find also va)
sada always
svatanaya for tomorrow
EXERCISE 26
Passages for reading : -

I. atha kho bhagava pubbaQhasamayal11 nivasetva pattaci-
varam adaya saddhirp. bhikkhusarp.ghena ycna Sunidha-
Vassakaranarp. Magadhamahamattanarr avasatho ti'n'
upasal!lkami, upasal11kamitva pafinatte asane nisidi. atha kho
Sunidha-Vassakara Magadhamahamatta Buddhapamukharr
bhikkhusarp.ghal11 pal)itena khadaniyena bhojaniyena sahattha
santappesurp. sampavaresurp.. atha kho Sunidha-Vassakara
Magadhamahamatta bhagavantarl1 bhuttavil11 onitapattapal)i'11
afiiiataral11 nicarp. asanal11 gahetva ekamantal11 nisidirp.su.
ekamantarp. nisinne kho Sunidha-Vassakare Magadhamaha-
matte bhagava imahi gatMhi anumodi :-
yasmil11 padese kappeti vasal11 paQc;litajatiko
silavant' ettha bhojetva safifiate brahmadirino,
yfi tattha devaUi. assu tasarp dakkhiQam adise,l

ta piijita piijayanti 2 manitu mfmayanti 2 narp . .
tato narp anukampanti mutii puttarl1 va orasarp
dev1i.nukampito poso 3 sada bhadrfUli 3 passati ti.
atha kho bhagava Sunidha-Vassakflrc Magadhamah:i.matte
imahi gathahi anumoditva utthay' ftsanft pakkami.
ten a kho pana sama yena Sunidha-Vassakar1i Magadha-
mahamatta bhagavanta'11 pitthito pitthito anubaddha honti,
yen' ajja samaQo Gotamo dvarena nikkhamissati tarp Gota-
madvararp nama bhavissati, ycna titthcna Gangarp nadirp
tarissati tarp Gotamatittharp bhavissati ti. atha kho bhagava
yena dvarena nikkhami tarp GotamadVaral11 nama ahosi.
atha kho bhagava yena Ganga nadi ten' upasarpkami. ten a
kho pana samaycna Gai'lga nadi piira hoti samatitthika kaka-
peyya. app ckacce manussa navarp pariycsanti app ekacce
ulumparp pariyesanti app ekacce kullarp bandhanti aparapara111
gantukama. atha kho bhagava seyyatha pi nama balava puriso
sammifijitarp va baharp pasareyya pasarita111 va bftha111
sammifijeyya, c\'am evaTJ1 Gangaya nadiya orimatire antarahito
parimatire paccuttbasi saddhirp bhikkhusarpghena. addasa
kho bhagava te manusse app ckaccc nava111 pariyesarite app
ekacce ulumpa111 pariycsante app ekaccc kulla111 bandhante
aparapararp gantukame. atha kho bhagava etam attharp
viditva, tayarp velaya111 imarp udanarp udancsi :-
ye taranti aQQavarp sararp ; seturp katva 4 visajja pallalani,
kullarp hi jano pabandhati, nittiQQa medhavino jana ti.
at ha kho bhagava ayasmantarp A.nandarp amantesi: ayam'
A.nanda yen a Kotigamo ten' upasa111kamissama ti. evarp
bhante ti kho ayasma A.nando bhagavato paccassosi. atha kho
bhagava mahata bhikkhusarpghena saddhirp yena Kotigamo
tad avasari. tatra sudarp bhagava Kotigame viharati. tatra
kho bhagava bhikkhu amantesi: catunnarp bhikkhave
ariyasaccanarp ananubodha appativedha evam idarp digham .
1 Poetic form of optative of ii-dis (I) .. dedicate ", 3rd singular.
t In verse frequently e > aya .
I Poetic forms, poso = p",iso and bhadrtini = bhaddilni.
• Poetic form of ha/vd.
bhikkhusarpghena ti. adhivasesi bhagava tUlJ.hibhavena. atha

kho AmbapaligalJ.ik1i. bhagavato adhivasanarp viditva uHhay'
asana bhagavantarp abhivadetva padakkhilJ.arp katva pakkami.
assosurp kho Vesalika Licchavi bhagava kira Vesalirp
anuppatto Vesaliyarp viharati Ambapalivane ti. atha kho te
Licchavi bhaddani bhaddani yanani yojapetva bhaddarp
yanaJTl abhiriihitva bhaddehi bhaddehi yanehi Vesaliya
niyyiJTlsu. tatr' ekacce Licchavi nila honti nilavalJ.lJ.a nilavattha
nilalankarii, ekacce Licchavi pita honti pitavalJ.l}a pitavattha.
pitalankara, ekacce Licchavi lohitaka honti lohitavalJ.lJ.a
lohitavattha lohitalankara, ekacce Licchavi odata honti
odataval}l}a odatavattha odatalankara.
atha kho AmbapaligalJ.ika daharanaJTl daharanaJTl Liccha-
vinaJTl akkhena akkhaJTl cakkcna cakkaJTl yugena yugaJTl
pativaHesi. atha kho Licchavi AmbapaliJTl galJ.ikaJTl et ad
avocuJTl: kiii je Ambapali dahadinaJTl daharanaJTl LicchavinaJTl
akkhena akkhaJTl cakkena cakkall1 yugena yugarp pativaHesi
ti. tatha hi pana me ayyaputta bhagava nimantito svatanaya
bhattaJTl saddhiJTl bhikkhusarpghcna ti. dehi je Ambap1i.li etaJTl
bhattarp satasahassena ti. sace pi me ayyaputtfl VesaliJTl
saharam. dassatha cvammahantam
' "
bhattam na dassami ti.
atha kho te Licchavi angUli pothesul11 jit' amha vat a bho
ambakaya, vandt' amha vata bho ambakaya ti. atha kho te
Licchavi yena AmbapalivanaJTl tena payil11su.1
addasa kho bhagava te Licchavi diirato va agacchante,
disva bhikkhii amantesi: yesaJTl bhikkhave bhikkhiinal11 deva
Tavatiqlsa adiHha, oloketha bhikkhave Licchaviparisarp,
avaloketha 2 bhikkhave Licchaviparisal11 upasaJTlharatha bhik-
khave Licchaviparisarp Tavatil11saparisan ti. atha kho te
Licchavi yavatika yanassa bhiimi yanena gantva yana
paccorohitv1i., pattika va yena bhagava ten' upasal11kamil11su,
upasaJTlkamitva bhagavantaJTl abhivadetva ekamantaJTl nisi-
diJTlsu. ekamantaJTl nisinne kho te Licchavi bhagava dharnrniya
kathaya sandassesi samadapesi sarnuttejesi sampahaJTlsesi.
atha kho te Licchavi bhagavata dharnmiya kathaya sandassita .
samadapita sarnuttejiHi. sarnpahaJTlsita bhagavantarp etad
avocuJTl: adhivasetu no bhante bhagava svatan1i.ya bhattarp
1 Irregular 3rd plural aorist of ya.
Java is poetic form of o.
Lesson 26
saddhiJ1l bhikkhusaJ1lghena ti. adhivuttharp kho me Licchavi

svatanaya AmbapaligaQikaya bhattan ti. atha kho te Licchavi
anguli pothesuJ1l: jit' am ha vata bho ambakaya, vaikit' amhfr
vata bho ambakaya ti. atha kho tc Licchavi bhagavato
bhasitaJ1l abhinanditva anumoditva uHhay' asana bhagavan-
taJ1l abhivadetva padakkhiQaJ1l katva pakkamiJ1lsu.
at ha kho AmbapaligaQika tassa rattiya accaycna sake arflmc
paQitaJ1l khadaniyaJ1l bhojaniyaJ1l patiyadapetva bhagavato
kalaJ1l arocapesi: kalo bhante nitthitarp bhattan ti. atha kho
bhagava pubbaQhasamayaJ1l nivasetva pattacivaratp adflya
saddhiJ1l bhikkhusuJ1lghena ycna Ambapaligal)ikiiya parivl's<llli"t
ten' upasarpkami, upasaJ1lkamitva pafifiattc asanc nisidi. atha
kho AmbapaligaQika Buddhapamukhal11 bhikkhusarpghall1
pal)itena khadaniyena bhojaniyena sahattha santappcsi sam-
pavarcsi. atha kho AmbapaligaI)ikfi. bhagavantaJ1l bhuWiviJl1
onitapattapaQiJ1l annatararp nicarp asanarp gahctva ekaman-
taJ1l nisidi. ckamantaJ1l nisinna kho Ambapa.ligaI)ika bhaga-
vantal11 ctad avoca: imahaJ1l bhantc aramarp Buddhapamu-
khassa bhikkhusarpghassa dammi 1 ti. patiggahcsi bhagavfl
aramarp. atha kho bhagava Ambapliligal)ikarp dhammiyfl
kathiiya sandassctva samadapetva samuttcjctva sampaharp-
sctva utthfly' asana pakkami.
tatra pi SUdUl11 bhagava Vcsaliyarp viharanto Ambapalivanc
ctad cva bahulaTTl bhikkhunaTTl dhammiql katha'11 karoti:
iti silarp iti samadhi iti panna, silaparibhft vito samfldhi
mahapphalo hoti mahanisarpso, samfldhiparihhfl vita pannii
mahapphala hoti mahftnisarpsa, pani'iaparihbftvitaTTl cittm]1
sammad cva asavchi vimuccati scyyatlliuaTTl kam£isava
bhavasava diHhasava avijjasava ti.
atha kho bhagava Ambapa.li\'anc yathflhhirantul]1 viharit"a
ayasmantaTTl Anandarp amantcsi: ftyam' Ananda ycna
Beluvagamako ten' upasarpkamissflmfl ti. evaql bhante ti kho
ayasma Anando bhagavato paccassosi. atha kho hlragavfl
mahata bhikkhusaJTlghena saddhirp ycna Ucluvagamako tad
avasari. tatra sudaJ1l bhagava Beluvagamakc viharali.
tatra kho bhagava bhikkhu amantcsi: ctha tumhe bhik-
khave, samanta Vesalirp yathamittafl1 yathiisandittharp yatha-
1 " J give," elevated form of demi .

sambhattarp vassarpl upetha, aharp pan a idh ' eva Bcluvagii-

make vassa'11 upagacch~lmI ti. eva'11 bhante ti kho tc hhikkhi.i
bhagavato patissutva samantii VeSali'11 yathfunittarp yathft-
sanditthall1 yath~lsambhattar!1 vassarp upagaiicllU'11, bhagava
puna tatth' eva Belllvagiimake vassarp upagaiichi.
atha kho bhagavato vassi.ipagatassa kharo i'lbiidho uppajji,
ba!hii vedana vattanti maraDantikii. tii sudull1 bhagava sato
sampajano adhivftseti avihaiHlamano. at ha kho bhagavato et ad
ahosi: na kho me tarp patiruparp 2 yo 'haql aniimantetva
upatthii.ke anapaioketva bhikkhusarpgharp parinibbayeyyarp .
yan nun;lha'11 imarp iibiidharp viriyena patippaD;lrndv[t jIvi-
tasarpkhftra'11 adhitthftya viharcyyan ti. at ha kho bhagav;l tal11
[lhfldharp viriyena patippaDamctvii jIvitasarpkharall1 adhitthiiya
vihasi. atha kho bhagavato so 5.bfldho patippassambhi.
atha kho bhagava giliinli vutthito aciravutthito gelaililfl
vihiirft nikkhamma viharapacchiiy[tyal11 pannattc ;lsanc nisldi.
atha kho ~lyasmrt Anando ycna bhagavii ten' upasall1kami,
upasalpkamit\,[t bhagavantal11 abhiviidetv[l ckamanta111 nisidi.
ckamantarp nisinl10 kho ayasma Anando bhagavantatl1 dad .
uvoca: diHh[l me bhante bhagavato phasu, dittha111 me bhantc
bhagavato khamaniyal11. api hi me bhantc madhurakajato viya
kflyO, disa pi me na pakkhayanti, dhammi'l pi maI11 !la pati-
bhanti bhagavato gclani1ena, api ca me bhante ahosi kli cid c\'a
assasamaWi., !la tava bhagavfl parinibbflyissati na yava
bhagava bhikkhusarpghaql arabbha kin cid eva udaharati ti.
kim pan' Ananda bhikkhus:lI11gho mayi pacc;lsiqlsati. dcsito
Ananda mayii dhammo <In:lntararp abahiral11 karitvii; na
tatth' Ananda tathiigatassa dhammcsu acariyamuHhi. yassa
nuna Ananda cvam assa ahaIfl bhikkhusa'11gharp pariharissami
ti va mamucldcsiko bhikkhusa'11gho ti vii so ni.ina Ananda
bhikkhusal11gharp arabbha kin cid eva udaharcyya. tathagatassa
kho Ananda na evall1 hoti aharp bhikkhusarpgharp pa.riharissami
ti va mamuddesiko bhikkhusarpgho ti vii. kirp Ananda tatha-
gato bhikkhusall1gharp arabbha kin cid cva udaharissati. aharp
kho pan' Ananda etarahi jiDDo vuddho mahallako aclc1hagato
vayo alluppatto, asitiko me varo vattati. scyyathft pi i\nanda
1 \\'anderers put up for the rainy season when travel was impossible. The
word VaSSIII!' came t o be used for this putting up .
t In some words pati- is sometimes found instead of pa!i-.
Lesson 26 285
jarasakatarp vcghamissakena 1 yapcti, evam eva kho Ananda
veghamissakcna maiiile tathagatassa kayo y~lpCti. yasmirp
Ananda samayc tathagato sabbanimiWi.narp arnanasik5.ra
ekaccanaql vedananarp nirodha animittarp cctosarnadhirp
upasampajja viharati, phasukato Ananda tasmirp samayc
tathagatassa kayo hoti.
tasmat ih' Allanda attadip5. viharatha attasaraQa ananna-
saraI)a, dhammadipa dharnmasaraQa anaiHiasaraI)a. kathafi c'
Ananda bhikkhu attadipo viharati attasaraI)o anafifiasaraI)o,
dhammadlpo dhammasara1.lo anafifiasaral:lO. idh' Ananda
bhikkhu kaye kayanupassi viharati at1i.pi sampajano satima,
vincyya loke abhijjhadomanassarp, vedanasu vedananupassi
viharati atiipi sampajano satima, vincyya loke abhijjhado-
manassaJTI, citte cittanupassi viharati aUipi sampajano satima,
vineyya lake abhijjhii.uomanassarp, dharnrnesu dhammanu-
passi viharati iiU'lpi sampajiino satima, vineyya loke abhij-
jhfrdomanassaql, evarp kho Ananda bhikkhu attadipo viharati
attasaraI)o ananiiasaraI)o, dhammadipo dharnmasaraI)o anafifia-
saraI)o. ye hi kcci Ananda etarahi vii mamarp va accayena
attadipfl viharissanti' attasaral)a anafifiasaraI)ii, dhammadipa
dhammasara~la anailiiasarar.11i, tamatagge Z me te Ananda
bhikkhil bhavissanti ye keci sikkhaldima ti.·
2. tcsarp Vipassi bhagava arahalp sammasambuddho anu-
pubbikatharp kathcsi, scyyathiclarp dfmakathaql silakathaql
saggakathar!1 kamiinarp iidina valp ok~lrarp sarpkilcsaI1l nck-
khammc fmisarps<l111 pakiiscsi. yada te bhagava annasi kallacitte
muclucitte vinivaraIfacittc udaggacittc pasannacittc, atha ya
BuddhanaJTI samukkaJTIsika dhammadcsana tam pakasesi, duk-
khaJTI samudayalp nirodhaJTI maggarp. scyyatha pi nama sud-
dhaJTI vattharp apagatakiqakaJTI sammad cva rajanaJTI
patiggaI)hcyya, evam eva KhaI)Qassa ca rajaputtassa Tissa~sa
ca purohitaputtassa tasmirp ycva asanc virajarp vitamalarp
dhammacakkhuJ11 udapadi: yarp kinci samudayadhammaI1l,
sabban taJTI nirodhadhamman ti.
I "held together with straps," "bound up with bands" (?)-the precise
meaning of vegha, which occurs only in this expression, seems to be unknown;
missaka = .. mixed with," " combined with."
• .. Highest of all ": according to the Commentary this is lama = .. most ..
+ agge joined by a junction consonant; another explanation is that we have
here lamalii. .. mostncss."

Now at that time king Pajjota had a she-elephant called
Bhaddavatika, a fifty-league-er (per day). Then Jivaka offered
ghee to king Pajjota (saying:) "Let the king (devo) drink
astringent (put first)." Then Jivaka having made king Pajjota
drink ghee went to the elephant-hall and fled from the city on
the she-elephant Bhaddavatika. Then to king Pajjota that
ghee (which was) drunk (and) digesting gave vomiting. Then
king Pajjota said this to people: "I say, I have been made to
drink ghee by the vile Jivaka. Now! I say, search out doctor
JIvaka I " " 0 king, (he has) fled from the city on Bhaddavatika
the she-elephant."
At that time king Pajjota had a slave called Kaka, a sixty-
league-er, born of 1 non-human beings. Then king Pajjota
ordered Kaka the slave: "Go, I say, Kaka, turn back doctor
Jivaka (saying:) 'Teacher, the king has you turned back
(double causative).' These doctors now (ntima) I say, Kiika,
have-many-tricks, don't accept anything of him (gen.)."
Then Kaka the slave caught up with Jivaka whilst on the road,
at Kosambi,· having (kar, present participle) breakfast. Then
the slave Kaka said this to Jivaka: "Teacher, the king has you
turned back." "Wait, I say, Kaka, until I have eaten (present
tense). Well I I say, Kaka, have-something-to-eat-yourself I 8 "
" Enough, teacher I I am ordered by (gen.) the king: 'These
doctors now, Kaka, I say, have many tricks, don't accept any-
thing from him.'" At that time Jivaka Komarabhacca was
eating (present tense) an emblic myrobalan (after) scraping off
the medicine (medicinal part) with (his) nail, and was drinking
water. Then Jivaka said this to the slave Kiika: "Well I
I say, Kaka, eat (some) emblic myrobalan and drink (some)
water yourself I " •
1 P4Iir.ca.
• On thc Yamunlncar its confluence with the Ganges; capital of Vatsa, a
kingdom situated centrally between AvantI, Magadha. and Kosala.
• bllulJjassu. 2nd singular imperative " middle" or reflexive of bhuj (11)
(cf. Lesson 28).
, Pff/(I$SU.
Lesson 27
LESSON 27
Text, Sentence, and Clause
The doctrine that what is given in language consists of
sentences (vakya or vyanjana), and that smaller pieces such as
words are grammatical abstractions, has been noted in earlier
lessons. It will have been noticed in the earlier exercises that
the sentence itself, though in a sense complete, is often obscure
in the absence of any context: . that is to sC'y a genuine sentence,
especially a short sentence, taken from the texts at our disposal
has a strongly prehensive and dependent quality, the meaning
being only vaguely given by the sentence alone. The precise
meaning with which a sentence is charged in its context drains
out of it when it is detached . The wholeness of a sentence is at
best a grammatical independence (with certain reservations)
and a more or less vague meaning cohering in this grammatical
complex. We have to begin from a much larger piece of text
in order to discover the precise meaning of a sentence. In our
exercises the longer reading passages are fairly adequate for
this, but some of the shorter ones are for example stories told
in a wider context which is not given, in order to enforce some
point, or parts of discourses in which the protagonist is unknown
or the general trend of argument not given.
The actual textual units of the Dighanikaya are its thirty-four
suttantas or dialogues (or pariyiiyas, discourses), which are
independent in their contexts (though interlocking as regards
the Buddhist doctrines enunciated, to the exposition of which all
the arguments and narratives tend, and having many passages
in common). These are of varying length, the longer ones being
subdivided into chapters (bhattaviira) as convenient portions for
reading at a stretch. A bhiittat'iira is said to contain 8,000
syllables. Each suttanta begins with the statement evam me
suta1JZ, which is traditionally ascribed to Ananda as the first
reciter of the Nikiiyas when they were compiled (orally at first)
after the Parinibbana. This is followed by an introductory
narrative (nidana) ekatJ1 samaya1JZ ... giving the situation, and
this by the dialogue (sutta). The main dialogue usually develops
from a leading question (panha or pucchii). The elaborate
exposition (niddesa) of a question of doctrine is a unit of
discourse intermediate between the S~tttanta and the sentence,

which is prominent in the traditional exegesis of Pali texts.
Sometimes we can distinguish sections of text intermrdiate in
length between the niddesa and the sentence, marked hy a
uniformity of tenses (e.g. the " historical present", etc.) and
other elements. (Lesson 24 on the use of auxiliary verbs
contains some indications of "aspect", etc., running
through sections of text.) These sections are usually much
longer than the conventional modern paragraph, and may
run to as much as ten pagcs.
Such larger units relate to broad trends in meaning and the
wider contexts in which the texts have to be interpreted.
Whatever concerns grammatical structure is dealt with in terms
of the sentence. In Pali this may extend to a " period" of some
complexity and of the length of a " paragraph ". No higher
grammatical unit than the sentence being distinguished in our
grammars, we may regard a series of" sentences "separated by
the conventional punctuation, if linked by conjunctive
indcclinables, anaphoric pronouns, etc., as a single" sentence"
for our purposes, though a distinct term such as .. period" may
be useful to distinguish it from the minimal grammatically
independent unit. The traditional punctuation is light! some-
what fluid, and not highly articulated: there is .simply a half
stop and a full stop. Modern editors have often disregarded it
and introduced conventions of their own, the passages in this
book being taken from such an edition, with some moderation
in the direction of the tradition. The punctuation is thus not
decisive in determining sentences, and grammatical consider-
ations override it .
.. A sentence (vakya or vyanjana) is a group of words (pada-
samuha) which is unified in meaning (atthasambaddha) and of
limited extent (padesapariyosana) "-Aggavarpsa. The
" meaning" intended here is primarily grammatical meaning:
the words in the sentence prehend one another syntactically,
the full grammatical explanation of one word relates it to other
words and all those words which are thus interlocked constitute
one sentence. The object of adding " of limited extent" is
presumably to indicate that we should distinguish as sentences
the smallest units which can be separated without breaking any
Lesson 27
syntactical connection, disregarding the looser connections with

the wider context. The simple sentence is unified by gram-
matical relations and concord, e.g. between a verb and its agent
and nouns in other cases relating to the action, between nouns
b¥ the genitive case relation or by compounding, between
nouns and attributes by concord of case, sometimes gender, and
number or by compounding, and so on. It may be affirmative
or negative, interrogative, etc., as shown by indeclinables. A
sentence may have a verb or be nominal, it may also have
more than one verb (e.g. a string of verbs grammatically
parallel to one another).
More complex sentences or " periods" may be organized in a
number of ways. \Ne can perhaps distinguish seven main
elements of period construction as follows :-
(1) conjunction (connection by conjunctive indeclinables:
Lesson 17),
(2) "paratax" (connection by the anaphoric pronoun:
Lesson 5),
(3) subordination (" hypotax ", connection of a relative-
" bound "-clause to a main-" free" --clause by a relative
pronoun or indeclinable: Lesson 12),
(4) compounding (a compound, especially a bahubbihi,
equivalent to a subordinate clause: Lesson 19),
(5) the infinite verb (participles, including absolute con-
structions, the gerund and the infinitive may be used to
connect a subordinate action to the main action: Lessons 8,
10, 16, and 19; it should be noted that the distinction between
participles and adjectives is not absolute and that some words
listed as adjectives may function as participle" predicates "),
(6) direct speech (concluded by the indeclinable marker ti,
sometimes iti: Lesson 6),
(7) chaining (by a repeated word, see examples below; other
forms of parallelism also are used).
All these elements can be repeated and combined. With the
exception of subordination and chaining they have been
described above. Here we may note a few examples of them
in the Passages for Reading : -
(1) conjunction: Exercise 19, first Passage, towards the end
of the second paragraph-pi (repeated several times, but with
abbreviation) ;-Exercise 23, third Passage, sixth paragraph,

towards the end-ca (repeated) ;-Exercise 25, first Passage,
first paragraph--na ca repeated,
(2) paratax: Exercise 19, first Passage-{)pens with te
referring to the characters already introduced (see Exercise 17),
(3) subordination: Exercise 19, first Passage, last sentence
of second paragraph-ye (pronoun) ;-third paragraph-yada
(indeclinable) ,
(4) compounding: Exercise 19. first Passage. first para-
graph-dvihatihapayato = .. when ... ". series of bahubbihis in
the middle of the same sentence = " who ... ".
(5) infinite verbs: Exercise 19, first Passage, second para-
graph-gerunds: pa#ssutva. cha#etva ;-second.Passage. near
beginning-present participle: caramano ;-fourth paragraph.
towards the end-past participle: adhigato ;-third Passage.
near beginning-past participle: jiito ;-Exercise 24. first
Passage. sixth paragraph-gerunds and past participles;
Exercise 19. third Passage-opens with locative absolute;
Exercise 18. second Passage. about two-thirds down-past
participle bhutta and infinitive pariyesitutfl.; Exercise 24. first
Passage. fourth paragraph-adjective equivalent to a participle:
pii#kankha (in this case in the main clause),
(6) direct speech: Exercise 19, first Passage-numerous ti
clauses ;-also Exercise 23. third Passage. sixth and following
paragraphs.
(7) chaining: Exercise 24. first Passage-ydvakivatfl. repeated
many times in parallel sentences ;-Exercise 26. first Passage.
end of fourth paragraph after the break-1it' amha vata Mo
ambakaya. vaiicit' amha vala Mo ambakaya ;-Exercise 18.
second Passage, in the sentence bhuttd ... referred to just
above. the words kdmii ... kiime link the two clauses. A detailed
investigation of chaining, including repeated (or contrasted)
fonns (e.g. Exercise 23. third Passage. end of sixth paragraph
from the end. three "asyndetic aorists: nisedhesutlf. ...
11
akatlf.su ... chinditfl.su-{)f contrasting fonns-the · following

paragraph closing with the three corresponding futures). would
take us further into the field of stylistics and poetics than would
be convenient here.
Lesson 27 291
Relative Clauses
The subordinate or relative clause, or "bound clause"
(terminology varies). is the most important and most frequent
of all the elements in PaH period bUilding. It is also the most
complex and varied in structure and meaning and requires
careful study. The formal indication of such clauses is that they
open with a relative pronoun or indeclinable, that is the
pronouns and indeclinables in ya- and certain other indeclinables
which may be classed as relatives: sace, ce (enclitic), hi (enclitic),
seyyathii. Similarly the relative adjective yavataka (/-ika) may
open a relative clause. The usages governing the relative
pronoun (concord) have been briefly stated in Lesson 12. The
doubled relative expressing a generalization should be noted.
The subordinate clauses with indeclinables, classified according
to the indeclinables which introduce them, are as follows (the
use of correlative demonstratives is fairly free, and quite
frequently they are omitted altogether) :--
ya1J1- is the most general or " empty" relative, and may serve
simply as marker of a relative clause (in which case it may be
translated" that ") much as ti marks direct speech. It may also
introduce indirect speech (which, however, is extremely rare
compared with direct). a supposition (parikappa). a concession
(anumati), a cause, or merely a qualification_ (araha, satti)-
cf. the relative pronoun. The optative tense appears as usual
in hypothetical cases (cf. Lesson 14). Examples:-
anacchariya1J1- kho pan' eta1J1- Ananda, ya1J1- manussabhuto
kiila1J1- kareyya = " but this is not surprising, Ananda-
that a human being should die"
ya1J1- passanti ... briihma1Jii candimasuriye ... , pahonti
candimasuriyana1J1- !iahavyataya magga1J1- desetu1J1-
= " whereas priests see the sun and moon , , "
can they teach the way to union with the sun and
moon? "
ya1J1- ta1J1- jtita1J1- ... ta1J1- vata mii palujji ti, n' eta1J1- thana1J1-
viJiati = " that that (which is) born ... it should not
decay (lit.: 'indeed let it not decay! '-direct speech)
is impossible ..
thana1J1- kho pan' eta1J1- Kassapa vijjati, ya1J1- viiiiiu ... eva1J1-
29 2 Introduction to Pali
vadeyyu1Jt ... = "but there exists the case, Kassapa,

that discerning persons ... may say thus .....
ya1Jt pi bho sama~o Gotamo Campatt' a1tUppatto . .. atitk'
amhiika1Jt sama~w Gotamo = " and since, sir, the philo-
sopher Gotama has arrived at Campa ... the philosopher
Gotama is our guest "
. ya1Jt sukho bhavatJI- tatJI- sukhii mayatJI- = " if his honour is
happy we are happy"
Some combinations of yattt (= yad) with other indeclinables
may be exemplified briefly :-
yad agge (= " since ", " since the day that/when ") : yad
agge ahatJI- M ahali Magavantatt' upanissaya vihariimi, na
ciratJI- ti1;t-i vassiini, dibbiini hi kilo rt"ipiini passiimi ... no
ca kho dibbdni saddiini su1;t-dmi ... = "Mahali, since
I have lived depending on (as pupil) the fortunate one,
nearly three years, though I have seen divine forms
(sights: rupatJI- is applied to any object of vision) ...
. I have not heard divine sounds ... "
yad idatJI- (=" such as," "as," .. to wit," .. i.e.," ·
.. namely" -identification or specification): akara1;t-iyd
va . . . Vayji raiiiid ... yad idattt yuddhassa = the f f
Vajjis ... are quite invincible (' impossible ') by the

king ... i.e. by war"; cirassatJI- 1 kho bhante bhaga'/Jd
imatJI- pariyayam akiisi yad iaatJI- idh' agamanaya =
.. after a long time/at last, sir, the fortunate one has
taken (' made ') this course, namely (for) coming here ..
yathii is the next most general or empty relative after yattt,
but with consecutive sense and that of manner, or sometimes of
comparison, reason, or purpose :-
yathd te khameyya tatha nattt vydkareyyasi = .. as it may
please you (as you like) so you may explain it ", .. you
may explain it as you please ..
yatha bhanie devatdnattt adhippayo, tatha hotu = " let it be
as the gods wish, sir! ..
yatha ... vyakaroti tatJI- ... aroceyyasi = " you must inform
(me) ... how he explains it ..
I Indeclinable: .. at last," " after a long time."
Lessot£ 27 293
atthi pa#pada yathii patipatmo samatp, yeva iiassati there

= 11
is a way following which one will find out oneself "

ya/ilii va pan' eke bhonto sama~abrahma~/{i .. . evarttpatp,
bijaglimabMitagiimasamllrambhm.n anuyutta viharati ...
iti evariipii bijagamabhiitagamasamiirambha palivirato
sama~/O Gotamo = "but (where)as, sirs, some priests
and philosophers ... live practising such destroying
(samarambho = undertaking "
I falling upon ') of
I
living beings (bhutagamo) and plants (bijagllmo) ...

so the philosopher Gotama is abstaining from such
destroying of living beings and plants" (evar/IPa
= evatp,rt"ipa = "of such a kind", bahubbihi--cf.
Lesson 22)
yatlui nit klw imani bhal/te puthusippayataniini ... sallkii
nu kilo bhante evam evaJ?t di!!he va dhamme sandi/!hikaJ?t
sama1'iiiaPhalm!tPaiiiitiPetu~n = Ifsir, as/like these many
(puthu = many, various) craft-circles (men of various
trades) ... is it possible, sir, in the same way to declare a
visible fruit of the profession of philosophy in the visible
world (dhammo) ? "
tena hi bho mama pi su~atlta, yathii mayam eva arahama ta1.n
bhavantatp, Gotama1!t dassanaya upasatp,hamitu1Jt = now If
listen to mc, how/why we ought to (eva = it is we who .

ought to) go to see the honourable Gotama "
pahoti me sama~tO Gotamo tatha dhamma1f!, desetutp, yathii
ahatp, imatp, kankhadhammatp, pajaheyyatp, = " the philo-
sopher Gotama can teach me the doctrine so that
(or: 'in sucb a way that ') I may renounce this element/
idea of doubt (kankha) "
The remaining relatives are more specialized in meaning ;.-
seyyatha introduces a simile :-
atha kilo bhagava seyyatha pi ntima balava puriso ... baha'1t
pasareyya ... evatp, evatp, ... piirimat-tre paccutthiisi
= " then the fortunate one, just as a strong man ...
might stretch out his arm, just so ... he arose on the
further shore" (for a more complex example see the fIrst
Passage of Exercise 25, third paragraph).
sace introduces a condition, concession, or hypothesis (observe

use of tenses: cf. Lesson 14 and the notes below) :-
sace te agaru, bhasassu = " if (it is) not troublesome (garu)
to you, speak ..
sace ... yaceyyasi ... afha ... adhivaseyya = " If you were
to ask (request, yac (I)) . then. he might accept ..
0 0 0 0
sace kilo ahatp. yo yo iidiyissati tassa tassa dhanam

0 0 •
anuppadassami, evam idatp. adinnadanatJt pavar/4hissati

= " if I grant money to whoever takes. in that way 0 0,
this stealing will increase ..

sace na vyakarissasi, annma vii annatp. pa!icarissasi, tu1;thi
vii bhavissasi, pakkamissasi vii; etth' eva te sattadhii
muddhci phalissati = " if you don't explain, or evade
(pa/i-car (I)) irrelevantly, or are silent, or go away;-
your head will split in seven right here ..
sace pana tumhiika1!t ... evatp. hoti . tittkalka tumhe = .. if 0 0
you ... think thus ... don't trouble ..

sace agaratp. ajjhavasati, rajii hoti ... sace kho pana . ..
pabbajati, arahatp. hoti ... = " if he lives at home he will .
be a king ... but if he goes forth he will be a perfected
one .....
ce (enc1itic) is similar :-
ita ce Pi so 0 0 yojanasate viharati, alam eva
• upasatp.- 0 ••
kamitutJt = .. even if he . lives a hundred leagues from

0 •
here, it is proper .. to approach ..

0
te ce me evatp. p1tttha amo ti paMananti = " if they are so

questioned by me they admit ' yes' ..
tatp. ce te pu't'isa evam aroceyyutp. api nu tvatJt evatJt 0 0 0
vadeyyasi ... = " then if men were to inform you .. 0
would you perhaps say thus .. ? .. 0
ahan ce va kho pana .. abhivadeyya;"" tena matJt sa parisa

0
paribhaveyya = .. but if I ... were to salute, that

assembly might despise me for it (therefore) ..
yadi, " whether," is associated in meaning with sace ;-
tattt kim maniiasi maharaja, yadi evatJt sante hoti vii
sanditthikatJt samaiinaphalatJt no vti = "then what do
you think, great king-whether, that being so, it is a
visible fruit of the profession of philosophy or not ? ..
h'
yadii bhagava tamhii samiidimlui vu!!Mto hoti, atha mama

vacanena bhagavallta1'J1- abhiviidehi = "when the for-
tunate one has come out from that concentration,
then greet the fortunate onc with my words (' speech ') "
yadii ... nikkhamati ... patubhavanti = " when . . . he
lea ves ... they appear"
yadti ... nillkhamati. tadii ... kampati = " when ... he
leaves, then ... it quakes"
(the above are similar constructions with and without the
correlative tadd, which evidently is optional)
yadii ... passeyyiisi ... atlta me iiroceyyiisi = " if/when ...
you should see ... then you should inform me."
yato usually introduces a cause, sometimes the place of

ongm ;-
yata kho V iiseUha sattii ... upakkami'f!'tsu paribhuiijitu'f!'t,

alha . iesatJI- sattiinatJI- sayampabha antaradhiiyi
= " because, VaseHhas, beings fell upon- ... to eat, then
the self-luminosity of those beings disappeared"
yata kha bha ayatJI- attii ... vinassati, na haN param mara1;ui,
ettiivatii kha Mo aya1'J1- attii sammii samucchinno hoti
= " since, sir, this soul ... perishes utterly, is not after
death, so far, sir, this soul has been completely
annihilated"
yato ... brdhma1;o silava ca hali ... sammii vadeyya
= " because ... a priest is well conducted ... he may
rightly say"
yato ... bhikkhu avera'f!'t avyiipaJjha'f!'t mettacitta'f!'t bhiiveti ...
ayatJI- vuccati K assapa bhikkhu sama~to iti...
= " because ... a monk develops a benevolent mind;
without hatred, non-violent ... this monk, Kassapa, is
called a philosopher ... "
yato kho bho aya1'J1- aUti ... pariciireti, etiiivata . .. patio
hoti = "since, sir, this soul ... enjoys itself, to that
extent it has attained ... "
yata ca candimasttriyii uggacchanti yattha ca ogacchanti ...
anuparivattanti = " whence the sun and moon rise ano
where they set ... they (priests) turn towards"
Lesson 27 297
yasmii, because," .. since," is a rarely used synonym of
If
yato. It is used with the correlative tasma :-

yasmii ca kho Kassapa aiiiiatr' eva imiiya maUiiya ...
samaiiiia1t~ va hoti brahmaiiiia1JZ vii dukkara1!t sudukkara~n,
tasma eta1tt kalla1JZ vacanaya,' dukkara1JZ siimaiiiial?t. ... ti
= and because, Kassapa, apart from this merely
If
(' this measure ') ... the profession of philosophy or the

profession of priesthood (is) a hard task, a very hard
task, therefore it is proper to say: The profession of
f
philosophy is a hard task ... ' "
hi also usually introduces a cause or reason (but is enclitic),

though this sense is sometimes imprecise, extending to the
adducing of a relevant factor; hi clauses generally follow their
main clauses, and a series of such hi clauses may be adduced :-
s1tppatipann' attha miirisa 1 ••• mayam pi hi 11uirisa evam
pi patipanmi ekantasukha1JZ loka1JZ upapannii = be ff
practising good, dear sirs, ... for we, dear sirs, thus
practising have been reborn in a world of extreme
happiness"
iiroceyyasi, na hi tathagata vitatha1tt bha1;tanti = you should
If
inform (me-of what he says), for thus-gone ones do not

speak untruth"
acchariya1JZ vata bho abbhuta1tt vata bho puiiiiiina1tt gati
puii11ti,na1tt vipiiko; aya1tt hi raja . .. manusso, aham Pi
manusso; aya1JZ hi raja . .. paricareti devo maiiiie, aham
pan' amhi 'ssa daso . .. = surprising, methinks (this
If
is a soliloquy), wonderful, methinks, is the destiny of

merits, the result of merits; for this king ... is a man,
I too am a man ;-for this king. , . enjoys himself as if
a god, but I am his slave ... "
... sabbapa1;tabhutahitanukampi viharati ti; iti vii hi ...
va1;t1;ta1tt vadamano vadeyya = If ,he lives com-
f ••
passionate for the welfare of all living beings' ; or thus,

for example, ... he may speak, speaking praise."
1 tIliirisa (only vocative, singular and plural) polite and affectionate
address customary among the gods, used also by gods addressing men (as
bere): sir/'" dear sir,"
fI If my friend," dear boy,"
If
;,1)
yava (the yava clause often follows its main clause) :-

yav' assa M.yo thassati tava na1ft- dakkhinti devamanussa
= .. as long as his body remains, so long gods and men
will see him "
tasnuit iha Cunda ya1f1. vo maya civara1ft- anunnata1ft-, ala1f1. VD
ta1ft- yiivad eva sitassa pa#ghritaya ... = therefore, in
If
this case, Cunda, the robe which is allowed you by me is

sufficient for you just as long as it keeps off the cold ... "
(lit.: for the keeping off, pa#ghato, of cold, sita1ft-)
na lava bltagava parinibbiiyissati na yava bhagava bhik-
khusa1!1gha'!t arabbha kin cid eva udiiharati = the If
fortunate one will not attain nibbana'!t as long as the

fortunate one has something to promulgate about the
community of monks JI
na tava . .. pajjalissati yava ... na vandissati = .. it will

not light as long as ... he has not paid respect ... "
yiivakiva1?t : -
YClvakiva'!t . . . samagga sannipatissanti . . . vuddhi yeva
if nanda VaJjina'!t patikankha . . . = .. as kmg as ... they
assemble united .. . only increase of the Vajjis (is)
probable, Ananda, . , ,"
yavata : -
yavata if nanda ariya1ft- ayatana1ft-". ida1ft- agganagara'!t
bhavissati = .. Ananda, as far as the Aryan sphere
(extends) ... this will be the supreme city."
yattha:-
yattha Himavantapasse . , . tattha vdsa1ft- kappesf('!t
= .. where on the side of the Himalaya ... there they
arranged a dwelling place "
yattha silattJ taltha panna, yaUha panna tattha silattJ
= .. where there is virtue there is wisdom, where
wisdom, virtue"
le ... Ja1teyyuttJ yatth' ime cattciro mahabhiUa aparisesa
nirujjhanti = they ... may know where these four
If
elements absolutely end"

yattha pan' tivuso sabbaso vedayitattt n' atthi, api nu kho
...-I.,
Lesson 27 299
taUha asmi ti siyil = "but where, sir, experience is
completely absent (" not "), would there be there the
thought ' I am ' ? "
mayam ... na jti1liima yattha vii brahma yena vti brahmii
yahitJI. va brahmii = •• we ... do not know where God is
or which way God is or whereabouts God is "
yena (cf. last example) :-
yena Nii/anda tad avasari = "he went down to (wards)
Nalanda"
Relative adjective :-
yavataka (feminine -ikii) :-
yiivalikti yiinassa bki'lmi yiinena gantva, yanii paccorohitvti, ...
upasatJI.kami = "having gone by carriage as far as
(there was) ground for a carriage, having alighted from
the carriage, ... approached"
Examples of Complex Sentences
Examples of the combination of various elements in a larger
sentence or period :-
yatha katha1Jt pana le mahariija vyiika1Jtsu, sace le agaru,
bhasasste (two subordinate clauses; the whole connected
to its wider, dialogue, context by pana)
kin me Sariputta ye le ahesu1Jt atitam addhtina'1Jt arahanlo
sammasambuddha, sabbe le bhagavanto cetasti ceto paricca
vidita, eva1Jtsila le bhagavanto aheste1Jt iti pi, eva1Jtdhammii
eva'1Jtpannii eva1Jtvihiiri eva1Jtvimuttii te bhagavanto alzesu1Jt
iti pi ti (subordinate clause and two direct speech clauses
with iti; the whole is interrogative direct speech)
yadii anniisi dutiyo satthavtiho bahun·ikkhanto kho dtini so
sattho ti bahu'1Jtti~an ca ka!!han ca udakan ca iiropetvii
sattha1Jt piiyiipesi (subordinate clause containing a direct
speech clause, followed by infinite clause with gerund
and main clause: the clauses here, as frequently in
manuscripts and printed editions, are not separated by
punctuation)
yadii bhagavii antiiisi K u!adanta1Jl briihma1;la1Jl kallacitta'1Jt
mUd1tCittatJI. vinivara~acitta'1Jt udaggacittatJI. pasamlacitta1Jt.
Lesson 27 30 !
In connection with word order 1 (#hana, .. position ") we may

add here two rules.
Vocatives are usually placed second, like enc1itiCs, except
when following one or more enclitics (as in the two examples
just quoted). They are never sentence or clause initials, but may
'be displaced to the end of a clause, as in the sentence quoted
earlier in this lesson : -
anacchariya1Jl kho pan' eta1Jl Ananda, yatrl manussabhUto
kiila1Jl kareyya
which is also an example of rhetorical inversion of both
clause order and word order stressing the word anacchariyatrl.
Here perhaps the close link between etatrl and allacchariyatrl
(= .. this is not surprising "), or more probably the fact that
etatJ1- as correlative (with yatJ1-) would normally be initial,
displaces Ana1lda to the end (the two enclitics occupy the
second position in the inverted clause).
The length 'of words (number of syllables) may decide the
order of words where this is not otherwise determined (as in a
string of grammatically parallel words) ;-
tatrl jata1.n bhiUa1Jl sankhatatrl palokadhamma1Jl = " that
which is born, become, synthesised, subject to the law
of decay"
atitiinagatapacwppanna = .. past, future and present".
Vocabulary
Verbs ;-
aiich (I) aiichati turn (on a lathe)
antt-rakkh (1) anurakkhati look after, retain
a-Muj (1*) abhujati fold the legs
a-sev (1) iisevati practice
upa-a-dii (Ill) upadiyati be attached
ni(r)-car (VII) nicchiireti bring up
ni(r)-yat (VII) niyyadeti hand over, give in
charge of
ni-vatt (1) nivattati go back
(p)pa-(g)gah (V) pagga~lhiiti apply
(p)pati-a-vam (1) paccavamati swallow back
1 Cf. Lessons 1,6,10, 11, and 12 (interrogation).
vikkhitta diffuse, vain

vyiivata concerned, busy, worried
satffkhitta limited, narrow (instrumental = briefly,
in short)
siimisa sensual
Past Participles :-
ossaltha dispelled
(o-(s)saj (I, to pour out))
1
catta (caj) abandoned, thrown away

pacc1.patthita set up
((p )pati-upa-(t)thii)
pa#nissattha rejected, renounced
((p)pa#-ni(r)-(s)saj ')
pafJihita ((p)pa-ni- held
dha)
vanta (vam) vomited
satffkhata (satff-kar) synthesized (cf. satffkharo)
Present Participle ;-
sayiina (si) lying down
Gerund :-
pat;idhtiya ((p)pa-ni-
dha) having held
Indeclinables :-
ayatitff in future
cirassatff at last, after a long time
parimukhatff in front
bhadante sir I (polite address by Buddhist monks
to the Buddha)
labbha. possible, conceivable, is it conceivable? .
(usually in the idiom tatff kut' ettha
labbhii, therefore how (whence) could
this be possible?, so how could one
expect this?, what is surprising in
this?: which may bEJ used as affirma-
tive or negative) /
sutthu well (done)
Lesson 27
2. evam me sutarp. ckarp samayarp bhagava Kuriisu 1

viharati. Kammassadhammarp nama KurGnarp nigamo. tatra
kho bhagava bhikkhii amantcsi bhikkhavo ti. bhadante ti te
bhikkhii bhagavato paccassosUJ!l. bhagava etad avoca:
ekayano ayarp bhikkhave maggo sattanarp visuddhiya soka-
paridevanarp samatikkamaya dukkhadomanassanarp attha-
gamaya fiayassa adhigamaya nibbanassa sacchikiriyaya, yadi-
dal11 cattaro satipatthanii.. katamc caWiro. idha bhikkhave
bhikkhu kaye kiiyanupassi viharati iitii.pi sampajfmo satima,
vineyya loke abhijjhfidomanassarp - vedanasu vedananupassi
viharati atapi sampajano satima, vineyya loke abhijjhado-
manassarp - citte ciWinupassi viharati atiipi sampajano
satima, vineyya lok~ abhijjhadomanassarp - dhammcsu dham-
manupassi viharati atapi sampajano satima, vineyya loke
abhi jjhadomanassarp.
kathafi ca bhikkhave bhikkhu kaye kayiinupassi viharati.
idha bhikkhave hhikkhu arafifiagato va rukkhamGlagato vii
sufifiagaragato va nisidati pallankarp abhujitva ujurp kayarp
pal)idhaya parimukharp satirp upatthapetvii. so sato va
assasati, sato passasati. digharp va assasanto digharp assasami
ti pajiinati, digharp vii passasanto digharp passasiimi ti pajiinati.
rassarp va assasanto rassarp assasami ti pajanati, rassarp vii
passasanto rassarp passasami ti pajiinati. sabbakayapatisarp-
vedi assasissiimi ti sikkhati sabbakayapatisalpvcdi passasissiimi
ti sikkhati. passambhayarp kiiyasalpkhiirarp assasissiimi ti
sikkhati, passambhayarp kiiyasarpkhararp passasissiimi ti
sikkhati.
seyyath1i. pi bhikkhave dakkho bhamakaro va bhamakarante-
vasi va digharp va afichanto digharp afichiimi ti pajanati,
rassarp vii afichanto rassarp afichami ti pajiiniiti, evam cva kho /
[
bhikkhave bhikkhu digharp vii assasanto ... sikkhati. iti

ajjhattarp va kiiye kiiyiinupassi viharati, bahiddhii vii kuyc
kayanupassi viharati, ajjhattabahiddha vii kaye kiiyanupassi
viharati. samudayadhammanupassi vii kuyasmirp viharati,
vayadhammiinupassi vii kayasmirp viharati, samudayavaya-
dhammanupassi vii kayasmirp viharati. atthi kayo ti vapan'
assa sati paccupatthita hoti yavad eva fiaDamaWiya patis-
,
1Kuru, a small kingdom to the west of the upper Yamuna; about half way
between Vatsa and Gandhara.
1·1"
satimattaya. anissito ca viharati na ca kin ci loke up5.diyati.

evam pi bhikkhavc bhikkhu kaye ){ayfmupassi viharati.
puna ca pararr bhikkhave bhikkhu gacchanto va gacch[lmi ti
pajanati, thito va thito 'mhi ti pajanati, nisinno ,'5. nisinno 'mhi
ti pajanati, sayano va sayano 'mhi ti pajanati. yathfL yatha vii
pan' assa kayo paQihito hoti, tathii tatha narp pajanati. iti
ajjhattarr va kaye kayanupassi viharati .. . na ca kin ci lake
upadiyati. cvam pi bhikkhave bhikkhu kayc kayfmupassi
viharati. ...
kathaii ca bhikkhave bhikkhu vedanasu vedananupassi
viharati. idha bhikkhavc bhikkhu sukhaJTl vedanarp vcdaya-
mano sukhaJ!l vedanarp vcdayami ti pajiiniiti, dukkharp
vedanaJTl vedayamano dukkharr vedanaJ!l vcdayami ti pajanati.
adukkhamasukharp vedanaTJl vedayamfmo adukkhamasukharp
vedanarr vedayami ti pajanati. samisaJ!l va sukharp vedanarp
vedayamano samisaJ!l sukhaJ!l vcdanarp vedayami ti pajanati.
niramisaJ!l va sukhaJTl vedanaJ!l V<'dayamano niramisarp
sukhaJ!l vedanaJ!l vedayflmi ti pajanati. samisarp vii dukkharp
vcdanaJTl vedayamano samisaJTl dukkharp vedanarp ,'edayami
ti pajanati. niramisaJ!l va dukkharp vedanarp vcdayamallo ·
niramisaTJ1 dukkhaTJ1 vedanarp vedayami ti pajanati. samisarp
va adukkhamasukhaJ!l vedanaJ!l vcdayamano samisalp aduk-
khamasukhaTJ1 vedanaJTl vcdayami ti pajanflti. niramisarp vii.
adukkhamasukhaJTl vedanuJ!l vedayamano niramisarp aduk-
khamasukhaJ!l vedanaJTl vedayami ti pajanati.
iti ajjhattaJ!l va vedanasu vedallanupassi viharati, bahiddha
va vedanasu vedananupassi viharati, ajjhaUabahiddha vii.
vedanasu vedananupassi viharati. samudayadhammanupassi
va vedanasu viharati, vayadhammfmupassi va vcdanasu
viharati, samudayavayadhammanupassi va vedanasu viharati.
atthi vedana ti vii pan' assa sati paccupaHhita hoti yavad eva·
iiaQamattiiya patissatimaWiya. anissito ca viharati na ca kin ci
loke upadiyati. evaJ!l kho bhikkhavc bhikkhu vedanasu
vcdananupassi viharati.
kathan ca bhikkhave bhikkhu citte ciWinupassi viharati.
idha bhikkha ve bhikkhu saragaTJ1 va cittaTJ1 saragaIp cittan ti
pajanati, vitaragaJTl vii cittaJ!l vitaragaJTl cittan ti pajanati,
sadosaTJ1 va cittaJ!l sadosaJ!l cittan ti pajanati, vitadosarp va
cittaJ!l vitadosaJ!l cittan ti pajanati, samohaJ!l va cittaJ!l
3I2 Introduction to Pali
samudayadhammanupassi va dhammesu viharati, vayadham-

manupassi va dhammesu viharati, samudayavayadhammanu-
passi va dhammesu viharati. atthi dhamma ti va pan' assa sati
paccupatthita hoti yavad eva fifu~amaWiya patissatimattaya.
anissito ca viharati na ca kifi ci loke upadiyati. evarp kho
bhikkhave bhikkhu dhammesu dhammanupassi viharati sattasu
sambojjhangesu.
puna ca pararp bhikkhave bhikkhu dhammesu dhammanu-
passi viharati catusu ariyasaccesu. kathafi ca bhikkhave
bhikkhu dhammesu dhammanupassi viharati catusu ariyasac-
cesu. idha bhikkhave bhikkhu idarp. dukkhan ti yathabhiitarp.
pajanati, ayarp dukkhasamudayo ti yathabhiitarp pajanati,
ayarp dukkhanirodho ti yathabhiitarp paj1inati, ayarp dukkhani-
rodhagamini patipada ti yathabhiitarp pajanati.
katamafi ca bhikkhave dukkharp ariyasaccarp.. jati pi
dukkha, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, maral)am pi
dukkharp.. sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupayasa pi dukkha,
yam p' iccharp. na labhati tarn pi dukkharp., sarp.khittena
paficupadanakkhandha dukkha ....
katamafi ca bhikkhave dukkhasamudayarp. ariyasaccarp.. ya
·yarp. tal)ha ponobhavika .... seyyathidarp. kamatal)ha bhava-
tal)ha vibhavatal)ha ...
katamafi ca bhikkhave dukkhanirodharp ariyasaccarp.. yo
tassa yeva taQhaya asesaviraganirodho cago patinissaggo mutti
analayo ...
katamafi ca bhikkhave dukkhanirodhagaminipatipada
ariyasaccaf11. ayam eva ariyo aHhangiko maggo, seyyathidaf11
sammaditthi sammasaf11kappo sammavaca sammakammanto
sammaajivo sammavayamo sammasati sammasamadhi.
katama ca bhikkhave sammaditthi. . yaf11 kho bhikkhave
dukkhe fiaQaf11 dukkhasamudaye fial)arp dukkhanirodhe iial)arp
dukkhanirodhagaminiya patipadaya fial)arp.. ayarp vuccati
bhikkhave sammadiHhi.
katamo ca bhikkhave sammasarpkappo. nekkhammasarp-
kappo avyapadasaf11kappo avihif11sasaf11kappo. ayarp vuccati
bhikkhave sammasarpkappo.
katama ca. bhikkhave sammavaca. musavada veramal)i,
pisuQaya vacaya veramal)i, pharusaya vacaya veramaQi,
samphappaHipa veramal)i, ayarp vuccati bhikkhave sammavaca.
Lesson 27 31 3
katamo ca bhikkhave sammakammanto. pat;tatipata vera-

mat;ti, adinnadana veramat;ti, kamesu micchacara veramat;ti,
ayarp vuccati bhikkhave sammakammanto.
katamo ca bhikkhave sammaajivo. idha bhikkhave ariya-
savako micchaajivaJ1l pahaya sammaajivena jivikarp kappeti,
ayarp vuccati bhikkhave sammaajivo.
katamo ca bhikkhave sammavayamo. id ha bhikkhave
bhikkhu anuppannanal1l papakanal11 akusalanaJ1l dhammanal11
anuppadaya chandal1l janeti vayamati, viriyal11 arabhati,
cittal11 paggat;thati padahati. uppannanal1l papakanal11
akusalanarp dhammanarp pah1inaya chandal11 janeti vayamati,
viriyaJ1l arabhati, cittaJ1l pagga1).hati padahati. anuppannanal11
kusalanarp dhammfmaJ1l uppadaya chandal11 janeti vayamati,
viriyaJ1l arabhati, cittaJ1l paggal',lhati padahati. uppannanaJ1l
kusaHi.nal1l dhammanal1l thitiya asammosaya bhiyyobhavaya
vepullaya bhavanaya paripiiriya chandal11 janeti vayamati,
viriyal11 arabhati, cittal11 paggaI,lhati padahati. ayal1l vuccati
bhikkhave sammavayamo.
katama ca bhikkhave sammasati. idha bhikkhave bhikkhu
kaye kayanupassi viharati atapi sampajano satima vineyya
loke abhijjhadomanassal1l, vedanasu ... pe ... citte . . . pe ...
dhammesu dhammanupassi viharati litlipi sampajano satima
vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassaJ1l. ayaJ1l vuccati bhikkhave
sammasati.
katamo ca bhikkhave sammasamadhi. idha bhikkhave
bhikkhu vivicc' eva kamehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi
savitakkal11 savicaral11 vivekajal1l pitisukhal1l pathamajjhiinal11
upasampajja viharati. vitakkavidiranal11 viipasama ajjhattarp
sampasadanal1l cetaso ekodibhavaJ1l avitakkai-p avicaral1l
samadhijal1l pitisukhal1l dutiyajjhanal1l upasampajja viharati.
pitiya ca viraga upekhako viharati sato ca sampajano, sukhaii (
. ,
ca kayena patisal1lvedeti yan taJ1l ariya acikkhanti: upekhako
satima sukhavihiiri ti tatiyajjhanal11 upasampajja viharati.
sukhassa ca pahana dukkhassa ca pahana pubb' eva somanas-
sadomanassanal1l atthagama adukkhal11 asukharp upekhasati-
parisuddhil11 catutthajjh1inal11 upasampajja viharati. ayal1l
vuccati bhikkhave sammasamadhi.
idal1l vuccati bhikkhave dukkhanirodhagaminipatipada
anyasaccal11.

I. Then the slave Kaka (thinking): "this doctor is eating
(present tense) emblic myrobalan and drinking water, there
shouldn't be (arah with infinitive) anything bad (in it)," ate half
an emblic myrobalan and drank water. (When he) had eaten
(khayita, the form is irregular) the half emblic myrobalan he
brought (it) up right there. Then the slave Kaka said this to
Jivaka Komarabhacca: "Shall I (atthi me) live (noun),
teacher?" "Don't be afraid, I say, Kaka, and you will be well.
The king is irascible, that king might have me killed, therefore
I don't go back." Having handed over Bhaddavatika the she-
elephant to Kaka he went to Rajagaha. In due course he
approached Rajagaha (and) king Magadha Seniya Bimbisara.
Having approached he informed this matter (ace.) to the king
(dat.). "You did well, I say, Jivaka, that (you have) not gone
back. Irascible (is) that king (and he) might have you killed."
Then king Pajjota, being well, sent a messenger into the
presence of Jivaka: "Let Jivaka come, I shall give a boon."
2. Whom, however (kho pana) , this assembly should despise,

his reputation also would be diminished; whose, however,
reputation were· diminished, his properties also would be
diminished. (In the Pali of this "his" follows "also",
" reputation" and "properties" being placed first for
emphasis.)
LESSON 28
" Middle" Conjugation
Special inflections of verbs, called" middle" or " reflexive ..
(attanopada), are occasionally used in place of the ordinary
inflections (which are called "active" or "transitive" 1 :
parassapada). They may be regarded as poetic forms rather
than as a regular reflexive, the name applying literally only to
the usage of cognate forms in other languages. They are very
1 This translation does not distinguish the term from" transitive" in the
narrower sense of " taking a patient" (sahammaha).
[The present participle in miina is sometimes called reflexive.

Its use, however, is hardly to be distinguished 1 from that of
the form in ant, and it is fairly frequent (far more so than the
above reflexive inflections).}
All the above are active. The passive reflexive is extremely
rare. Examples:-
abhihariyittha,2 it was brought," it was presented"
I< I<
paiiiiiiyittha, it was discerned"

I<
(the3rd plural used in exactly parallel sentences, however,

is paiiiitiyitJ1w).
A survey of the usage of reflexive" forms in Pali, and
It
particularly in the Dtgha, leads to the conclusion that the shade

of meaning they carry is simply a poetic, dramatic or elevated
one, adding emphasis or dignity: note especially bluisass'It and
the slightly pompous bha~te.
Denominative Conjugation
In principle any root can be used as a / yerb by adding
conjugational suffixes. Other stems, such as noun stems, and
even onomatopoeic elements, can- also be used as verbs if
required. The verbs thus derived are called dl'nominati,'c, or
more exactly" word used as a root" (dluitunipakasadda). They
are usually conjugated according to the seventh conjugation
(substituting the suffiX e/aya, or adding ya to the stem),
sometimes according to the first conjugation. They are rare
except in poetry or exaggerated speech.
Examples :-
Noun stem, etc. Denominative verb, 3rd singular
present
sukha sukheti, " he is happy"
tira tireti, Ithe accomplishes," he It
finishes" (e.g. business), lit.

I<(reaches) the shore (of) "
I It is favoured by certain verbs. some of which (labh, salld, bluis) are used
with reflexive inflections, and it is specially associated with the passive.
I Variant readings :--harlyillha. harayillha, alld -har- (latter causative).
Lesson 28 31 7
udthta udiineti, "he speaks with exalta.,.
tion," " he speaks joyfully"
ttSsukka (neuter: ussukllati, "he is eager," he is fI
" eagerness," impatient"

" impatience ")
gala-gala galagaldyati, "it pours down"
(rain) (onomatopoeic: ga-Ja-ga-
la imitating large drops of water
beating down on the earth,
repetition suggesting quantity)
Aorist of denominative
udana ud{lnesi
Causative of denominative
dukkha dukkhiipeti, he makes unhappy"
fI
Fourth Conjugation
The fourth or (s)su conjugation (svddi ga1;fa) includes only one
root at all frequently used. Moreover that root, (s)su, itself
usually follows the fifth conjugation (> sU1;fali, cf. Lesson IS).
The fourth conjugation has a present stem formed with the
suffix ~IO. From the root (s)su, " to hear," we. may have :-
Singular Plural
3rd person (slItloti) (SII'.lOlIti 1 1-

hypothetical) ,
2nd person (SlltloS i ) (slltJo1ha)
1st person (slltJomi) (sl/tJ oma )
The root sak may be classed here (sak + 1;fO > sakko by
assimilation), though it is equally convenient to regard it as
sixth conjugation: sak(k) + 0 > sakko (cf. Lesson 6). Likewise
the root ap or ap(p) may be classed here (ap + 1;fO > appo).
Of (s)su only the imperative 2nd singular sU1;fohi according to
the fourth conjugation is found in the Digha Nikaya, some
forms of the present tense being found only (and very rarely)
in other Canonical books.
3IB Introduction to Pali
Vocabulary
Verbs :-
ati-(k)kam (I) atikkamati pass over

anu-pa-gam (I) anupagacchati amalgamate with
(sic 1) (accusative)
anu-pa-i (I) anupeti (sic 1) coalesce with
(accusative)
adhi-o-gah (I) ajjhogahati
(also means) plunge into (Gerund:
-etva)
ava-(t)thci (I) avatitthati remam
ava-sis (Ill) avasissati remain, be left over
upa-dah (I) upadahati torment, worry
o-tar (I) otarati pass down, collate
(causative = check)
ci (V) (passive ciyati = be piled up, be built up)
ni-khat/- (I) nikhat/-ati bury
(p)pati-(k)kus (I) patikkosati decry, criticize (in bad
sense)
(p)pati-u(d)-tar (I) paccuttarati come (back) out (after
bathing)
(p)pati-labh (I) paJilabhati obtain, acquire
(p)pati-vi-ni (I) pativineti dispel
(p)pati-sattt-cikkh (I) pa#satttcikkhati reflect, consider
pari-vis'(I*) parivisati serve (with food)
vi-sudh (Ill) visuJjhati become purified
sattt-yam (1) satttyamati control oneself
sattt-vatt (I) satttvattati lead to (dative)
sattt-(k)kam (I) satttkamati pass into
sattt-kilis (Ill) satttkilissati become defiled
sand (I) sandati flow
sattt-(d)dis causative
(also means) review
sev (I) sevati indulge in, pursue
1 A variant reading anupiglUchali suggests anu-(a)pi-gam, also anu-(a)pi-i

(there is a prefix api or pi meaning" over ", " covered ").
320 Introduction to PaH
muditii sympathetic joy (joy at the well-being

of others), sympathy, gladness
mettii love (only in the spiritual and non-
sexual sense), kindness, loving-
kindness, benevolence, goodwill,
friendliness
yit!hatJ't (p.p. yaj (I» sacrifice, offering
lohitatJ't blood
vaJJatJ't fault
vidu (masc.) knower
vyanjana1ft expression (speech: contrasted with
meaning: attho) , sentence
satJ'tghii# (fern.) cloak
sabbattata non-discrimination (It all = self-ne ss "),
unselfishness
sampajannatJ't consciousness
sambodho enlightenment
sukhallika pleasure, enjoyment
sllttatJ't (also means) (a record of a) dialogue,
(eventually the entire) collection of
dialogues (of the Buddha made by his
followers)
sobbha1ft pit
hiri (fern.) modesty, self-respect, conscience
hutatJ't oblation
Adjectives :-
accha clear, bright, sparkling
acchariya surprising
anartya barbarian
anupiidisesa with no attachment remaining
anuyoga practising
abbhuta wonderful, marvellous
avasa powerless
iivila turbid, muddy
odaka (fern. -ikii) having water
-karatJa (fern. -i) making
damma trainable, educable
Lesson 28 32 I
dassiivin seeing, who would see

pabatha violent
pama~takata measurable, finite
pipasita thirsty
pothujjanika common (putku + jano + (~)ika)
maddava tender
yasassm reputable, respected
likhita polished
11liita stirred up
vippasanna very clear
vyapajjha violent, malevolent
sabbavant all-inclusive, whole
sambiidha confined
sahagata charged with, suffused with
sata sweet
sUa cool
supatittha having good beaches (stream: for
getting water to drink)
setaka clear, clean
Past Participles :-
abhisambuddha (abhi-
sa,!/--budh) illuminated (fig.)
.../
avasittha (ava-sis) left over, remaining
upacita (1~pa-ci (V)) accumulated
gutta (guP) protected, guarded
paccajata ((p)pa#-a-
jan (Ill)) reborn
parinibbuta (pari-
ni(r)-va) attained extinction, attained liberation
laddha (laM) got, obtained
sa,!/-vuta (sat!f-var (I)) controlled
sat!fhita (sattt-dha) joined, connected
Gerunds :-
accadhaya (ati-a-dha) putting on top of
nahatva (nka (Ill)) having bathed (also written nhatva)
Indec1inables :-
ativiya very much
avidure not far, near
majjhe in the middle
sabbadhi everywhere
EXERCISE 28

I. atha kho bhagava pubbaQhasamayarp nivasetva patta-
civaram adaya Vesalirp piQQaya pavisi, Vesaliyarp piQQaya
caritva pacchabhattarp piQQapatapatikkanto naga.palokitarp
Vesa.lim apaloketva ayasmantarp Anandarp am ante si : idarp
pacchimakarp Ananda tathagatassa Vesalidassanarp bhavissati,
ayam' Ananda yena BhaQQagamo ten' upasarpkamissama ti.
evarp bhante ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato paccassosi.
atha kho bhagava mahata bhikkhusarpghena saddhirp yena
BhaQQagamo tad avasari. tatra sudaQ'l bhagava BhaQQagame
viharati.
tatra kho bhagava. bhikkhii amantesi: catunnarp bhikkhave
dhammanarp ananubodha appativedha evam idaQ'l digham
addhanaQ'l sandhavitarp sarpsaritarp mamaft c' eva tumhakaft
ca: katamesarp catunnarp. ariyassa bhikkhave silassa ananu-
bodha. appativedha evam idaQ'l digham addhanarp sandhavitaQ'l
saQ'lsaritarp mamafi c' eva tumhakaft ca. ariyassa bhikkhave
samadhissa ananubodha appativedha evam idarp digham
addhanarp sandhavitaQ'l saQ'lsaritarp mamafi c' eva tumhakaft
ca. ariyaya bhikkhave pafifiaya ananubodha appativedha evam
idarp digham addhanarp sandhavitarp sarpsaritarp mamaft C'
eva tumhakafi ca. ariyaya bhikkhave vimuttiya ananubodha.
appativedha evam idaQ'l digham addhanarp sandhavitaQ'l
sarpsaritarp mamafi c' eva tumhakaft ca. tayidaQ'l bhikkhave
ariyaQ'l silam anubuddharp patividdhaQ'l, ariyo samadhi
anubuddho patividdho, ariya pafifia anubuddha patividdha,
ariya vimutti anubuddha patividdha, ucchinna. bhavataQhii
32 4 I ntrod~tction to Pali
addha idarp tassa bhagavato vacanalTl imas~a ca bhikkhuno

suggahItan ti. idalTl bhikkhavc pathamalTl· maha.padcsalTl
dhareyyatha. idha pana bhikkha vc bhikkhu evalTl vadeyya :
amukasmif!1 nama avase saf!1gho viharati satthcro sapamokkho.
tassa me saf!1ghassa sammukha sutalTl sammukha patiggahitarp,
ayarp dhammo ayarp vinayo ... addha idarp tassa bhagavato
vacanarp, tassa ca saf!1ghassa suggahitan ti. idalTl bhikkhave
dutiyaTJ1 mahapadesalTl dhareyyatha. idha pana bhikkhave
bhikkhu evalTl vadeyya: amukasmilTl nama aviise sambahulii
thera bhikkhii viharanti bahussuta agatagama dhammadhara
vinayadhara matikadhara. tesaIl1 me theranal11 sammukha.
sutalTl sammukha patiggahitaIl1, ayal11 dhammo ayarp
vinayo ... idalTl bhikkhave tatiyarp mahapadesarp dharey-
yatha. idha pana bhikkhave bhikkhu eval11 vadeyya: amukas-
milTl nama iivase eko thero bhikkhu viharati bahussuto
agatagamo dhammadharo vinayadharo matikadharo. tassa me
therassa sammukha sutal11 sammukha patiggahitarp ayal!l
dhammo ayalTl vinayo ... idalTl bhikkhave catutthalTl maha-
padesarp dbareyyatha ti. ime kho bhikkhave cattaro maha-
padese dhareyyatha ti ...
atha kho bhagava Bhoganagare yathabhirantalTl viharitva
ayasmantal11 Anandal11 amantesi: ayam' Ananda yena Pava 1
ten' upasalTlkamissama ti. evarp bhante ti kho ayasma Anando
bhagavato paccassosi. atha kho bhagavii mahata bhikkhusarp-
ghena saddhilTl yen a Pava tad avasari. tatra sudal11 bhagava
Pavayal1l viharati Cundassa kammaraputtassa ~mbavane.
assosi kho Cundo kammaraputto: bhagava kira Paval1l
anuppatto Pavayal1l viharati mayhalTl ambavane ti. atha kho
Cundo kammaraputto yena bhagava ten' upasal11kami, upasal!l-
kamitva bhagavantal1l abhivadetva ekamantalTl nisidi, ekaman-
tal1l nisinnal1l kho Cundal1l kammaraputtalTl bhagava dham-
miya kathaya sandassesi samadapesi samuttejesi sampahal11sesi.
atha kho Cundo kammaraputto bhaga vat a dhammiya kathiiya
sandassito sam1i.dapito samuttejito sampahal1lsito bhagavantarp
etad avoca: adhivasetu me bhante bhagava svatanaya bhattal!l
saddhiTJ1 bhikkhusal1lghena ti. adhivasesi bhagavii tUI:lhi-
bhavena. atha kho Cundo kammiiraputto bhagavato ad hi-
1 Capital of the southern Malla republic, about 30 leagues north-west of
Vesal! in the foothills of the Hima,laya.
eva~ bhante ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato patissutva

catuggUI;Ja~ sa~ghiiti~ pafifiapesi. nisidi bhagava pafifiatte
asanc, · nisajja kho bhagava ayasmanta~ Ananda~ amantesi,
it'lgha me tva~ Ananda paniya~ ahara,pipasito 'smi, Ananda,
pivissami ti. cva~ vutte ayasma Anando bhagavanta~ etad
avoca: idani bhante paficamattani sakatasatani atikkantani,
ta~ cakkacchinna~ udakal1J. parittatp. luJita~ avila~ sandati.
aya~ bhante Kakuttha nadi avidure acchodika satodika
sitodika setaka supatitthii. ramaQiya. ettha bhagava paniyafi
ca pivissati, gattani ca sita~ karissati ti. dutiyam pi kho
bhagava ayasmantarp Anandarp amantesi: iIigha me tvarp
Ananda paniya~ ahara, ... gattani ca sitarp karissati ti.
tatiyam pi kho bhagava ayasmantatp. Ananda~ amantesi:
ingha me tvatp. Ananda paniya~ ahara, pipasito 'smi Ananda,
pivissami ti. evarp bhante ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato
patissutva pattarp gahetva yena sa nadika ten' upasa~kami.
atha kho sa nadika cakkacchinna paritta luJitli avila sandamana
ayasmante Anande upasa~kamante accha vippasanna anavila
sandittha. atho kho ayasmato Anandassa et ad ahosi: acchari-
ya~ vata bho, abbhuta~ vata bho, tathagatassa mahiddhikata
mahanubhavata. ayarp hi sa nadika cakkacchinna paritta
luJita avilii sandamana, mayi upasa~kamante accha vip-
pasanna anaviIa sandati ti. pattena paniya~ adaya yena
bhagava ten' upasa~kami, upasa~kamitva bhagavanta~ et ad
avoca: acchariya~ bhante abbhuta~ bhante tathagatassa
mahiddhikata mahanubhavata. idani sa bhante nadika
cakkacchinna paritta luJita avila sandamana, mayi upasarp-
kamante accha vippasanna anavila sandittha. pivatu bhagava
paniya~, pivatu sugato paniyan ti. atha kho bhagava paniyarp
apayi.
• • •
atha kho bhagava mahata bhikkhusa~ghena saddhirp yena
Kakuttha nadi ten' upasa~kami, upasatp.kamitva Kakuttha~
nadi~ ajjhogahetva nahatva ca pivitva ca paccuttaritva yena
Ambavana~ ten' upasa~kami, upasarpkamitva ayasmantarp
Cundakarp amantesi: ingha me tvarp Cundaka catugguQa~
sa~ghati~ pafifiapehi, kiJanto 'smi Cundaka, nipajjissami ti.
eva~ bhantc ti kho ayasma Cundaka bhagavato patissutva
Lesson 28
catugguQal11 sal11ghatil11 paiiiiapesi. atha kho bhagava dak-

khiI)ena pass en a sihaseyyal11 kappesi, pade. padal11 accadhaya,
sato sampajano uHhanasaiiiial11 manasikaritva. ayasma pana
Cundako tatth' eva bhagavato purato nisidi.
atha kho bhagava ayasmantal11 Anandal11 amantesi: siya
kho pan' Ananda Cundassa kammaraputtassa ko ci vippatisaral11
upadaheyya: tassa te avuso Cunda alabha, tassa te dullad-
dhal11, yassa te tathagato pacchimal11 piQc;lapatal11 bhuiijitva
parinibbuto ti. Cundassa Ananda kammaraputtassa eval11
vippatisaro pativinetabbo: tassa te avuso labha, tassa te
suladdhaJ!1, yassa te tathagato pacchimal11 piQc;lapataJ!1 bhuii-
jitva parinibbuto. sammukha me tal11 avuso Cunda bhagavato
sutal11 sammukha patiggahital11, dye 'me piQc;lapata samasama-
phalli samasamavipaka ativiya aiiiiehi piQc;iapiitehi mahap-
phalatara ca mahanisal11satara ca. katame dye. yaii ca
piQc;iapatal11 bhuiijitva tathagato anuttaral11 sammasambodhil11
abhisambujjhati, yaii ca piQc;lapatal11 bhufijitva tathagato
anupadisesaya nibbanadhatuya parinibbayati. ime dye
piQc;lapata samasamaphalii samasamavipakii ativiya aiiiiehi
piQc;lapiitehi mahapphalatara ca mahanisal11satara ca. iiyusal11-
vattanikal11 ayasmata Cundena kammaraputtena kammalll
upacital11, vaQQasal11vattanikal11 ayasmata Cundena kam-
maraputtena kammal11 upacital11, sukhasal11vattanikal11 ayas-
mata Cundena kammaraputtena kammaJ!1 upacital11, yasasal11-
vattanikal11 ayasmata Cundena kammaraputtena kammal11
upacital11, saggasal11vattanikal11 ayasmata Cundena kam-
maraputtena kammal11 upacital11, adhipateyyasaJ!1vattanikal11
ayasmata Cundena kammaraputtena kammal11 upacitan ti.
Cundassa Ananda kammaraputtassa eval11 vippatisaro pat i-
vinetabbo ti. atha kho bhagava etam attharp viditva tayal11
velayal11 imam udanal11 udanesi :-
dadato puiiiial11 pavac;lc;lhati, sal11yamato verarp na ciyati,
kusalo ca jahati papakal11. raga<d>dosakhaya 1 sa
nibbuto ti.
2. cattaro iddhipada. idh' avuso bhikkhu chandasamiidhi-
padhanasaJTlkharasamannagataJTl iddhipadaJTl bhaveti. citta-
1 The metre requires that we give this word the rhythm - _ - v v -, henc·e
we may read (d)dosa- and khaya.
samadhi padhanasaI11kharasamannagat aI11 iddhi padaI11 bhayeti.

viriyasam1idhipadhanasaI11kharasamannagataI11 iddhip1idaI11
bhaveti. vimaI11sasamadhipadhanasaI11kharasamannagataI11
iddhipadaI11 bhaveti.
3. pane' indriyani. saddhindriyaI11, viriyindriyaI11, satindri-
yaIJ'l, samadhindriyaI11, pannindriyaI11.
4. eattari balani. viriyabalarp, satibalaI11, samadhibalaI11,
pafifiii balaI11.
5. satta balani. saddhabalaIJ'l, viriyabalaIJ'l, hiribalaI11, ottap-
pabalaI1l, satibalarp, samadhibalaI1l, pafinabalaI1l.
6. idha maharaja tathagato loke uppajjati, araharp samma-
sambuddho vijjacaraI)asampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro
purisadammasarathi sattha devamanussanarp buddho bhagava.
so imam . sadevakam. samarakam. sabrahmakam. sas-
.lokam
samaI)abrahmaI)irp pajaI1l sadevamanussarp sayarp abhiniHi 1
sacchikatva pavedeti. so dhammaI1l deseti adikalyaI)arp
ma jj hekalyaI)aI11 pari yosanakal yaI)aI11 satthaI1l sa vyafi janaI11,
kevalaparipuI)I)aI11 parisuddhaI11 brahmacariyaI11 pakaseti.
taIJ'l dhammarp sUI)iiti gahapati vii gahapatiputto vii
annatarasmirp va kule paccajato. so tarp dhammaIJ'l sutva
tathagate saddharp patilabhati. so tena saddhapatilabhena
samannagato iti pa1isaIJ'lcikkhati: sambadho gharavaso rajo-
patho, abbhokaso pabbajja. na idaIJ'l sukaraIJ'l agaraIJ'l
ajjhavasata ekantaparipuI)I)arp ekantaparisuddharp sarpkhali-
khitaIJ'l brahmacariyaI11 carituI11. yan nunahaIJ'l kesamassurp
oharetva kasayani vatthani acchadetva agarasma anagariyarp
pabbajeyyan ti. so aparena samayena apparp vii bhogak-
khandhaI11 pahaya mahantaI11 vii bhogakkhandhaI11 pahaya,
appaI11 va fiatiparivattaI11 pahaya mahantaI11 va natiparivaHarp
pahaya, kesamassuI11 oharetva kasayani vatthani acchadetva.
agarasma anagariyaI1l pabbajati.
evaI11 pabbajito samano patimokkhasarpvarasarpvuto
viharati acaragocarasampanno aI)umattesu vajjesu bhayadas-
savi samadaya sikkhati sikkhapadesu kayakammavaeikammena
samannagato kusalena parisuddhajivo silasampanno indriyesu
guttadvaro satisampajafifiena samannagato santuHho.
I Gerund, cf. footnote at beginning of Exercise 22.
Lesson 28
7. so mettasahagatena cetasa ekarp disarp pharitva viharati,

tathi dutiyarp, tatha tatiyarp, tatha catuttharp. iti uddham
adho tiriyarp sabbadhi sabbattataya sabbavantarp lokarp
mettasahagatena cetasa vipulena mahaggatena appamat.ena
avereI)a 1 avyapajjhena pharitva viharati. seyyathi pi VaseHha
balava sankhadhamo appakasiren' eva catud:l.isa vifinapeyya,
evaIp. bhavitaya kho VaseHha mettaya cetovimuttiya yarp
pamaI).akatarp kammarp na tarp tatravasissati na tarp tatra-
vatiHhati. ayam pi kho VaseHha brahmaI)arp 1 sahavyataya
maggo. puna ca pararp Vasettha bhikkhu karuI)asahagatena
cetasa ... pe ... muditasahagatena cetasa ... pe ... upekha-
sahagatena cetasa ekaIp. disarp pharitva viharati, ... evarp
bhivitaya kho VaseHha upekhiya cetovimuttiya yarp pamaI)a-
katarp kammarp na tarp tatravasissati na tarp tatravatiHhati.
ayampi kho Vasetiha brahmaI)arp sabavyataya maggo.

(Three Doctrines)
These two (put first, for emphasis) extremes, monks, should
not be pursued by one who has gone forth. Which two? This
(ayat,n), which (put relative first) (is) among passions practising
the-enjoyment-of-passions, inferior, vulgar, common, barbarian,
not-connected-with-welfare, and this, which (is) devoted-to-
weariness-of-oneself (attan), unhappy, barbarian, not-connected-
with-welfare. Monks, not having gone to (-gamma) both these
(put first) extremes, the intermediate way, illuminated by the
thus-gone, making-an-eye (-kara~a), making-knowledge, leads
to calm, to insight, to enlightenment, to liberation. And which,
monks, (is) that intermediate way illuminated by the thus-
gone .. . to liberation? It (ayaf!') (is) just the excellent way
having eight factors, as follows: right-theory,' right-intention,
right-speech, right-work, right-livelihood, right-exercise, right-
self-possession, right-concentration.
Makkhali Gosala a said this to me: "0 great king, there is
no cause, there is no condition, for the defilement of beings.
1 Sometimes when the stem of a word contains the letter r a following n in a
suffix or inflection is .. cerebralised .. to tI.
I samma = right(ly) is used as a prefix to nouns as well as to verbs.
I The Ajlvaka leader: see tirst footnote in Exercise 21.
33 0 I ntroductinn to Pali
From-no-cause-(and)-no-condition beings are defiled. There is .

no cause, there is no condition, for tlie purification of beings.
From-no-cause-(and)-no-condition beings are purified. There is
no self-making (-kdro) , there is no other-making, there is no
making-by-man. There is no strength, there is no energy, there
is no vigour-of-man, there is no courage-of-man. All beings, all
life (plural), all living beings, all souls, powerless, without-
strength, without-energy, changed-in-nature-by-the-combina-
tions-oi-Fate, experience happiness-and-unhappiness in the six
classes of birth."
Ajita Kesakambalin 1 said this to me: .. 0 great king, there

is no (merit in) giving (dinna~),~ there is no sacrifice, there is no
oblation. There is no fruit, result, of actions (which are) well-
done-(or)-ill-done. There is no other world. There is no mother,
there is no father, there are (use singular) no beings trans-
migrating. There are (singular) no priests and philosophers in
the world (who have) rightly-gone, (who are) rightly-practising,
who, having themselves known, observed this world and the
other world make (it) known. This man is-compounded-of-the-
four-elements. When he dies, the earth coalesces with,
amalgamates with, the earth-substance, the water. coalesces
with, amalgamates with, the water-substance, the heat
coalesces with, amalgamates with, the heat-substance, the air
coalesces with, amalgamates with, the · air-substance, the
faculties pass into space ... Fools and wise men (after
= ablative) the splitting up of the body are annihilated, perish
utterly, are not after death."
1 A Loklyata (" naturalism": materialism) philosopher contemporary
with the Buddha. His doctrine as given here agrees as far as it goes with that
of the classical Lok4yata satra of " Brhaspati ". but does not state the aim of
the school, which is " happiness" (sukha'1l). of course in this life. On this and
other philosophical schools of the time of the origin of Buddhism see the
essa.y: ., On the relationships between early Buddhism and other contemporary
systems." Brdletin of the School of Oriental and African Stlldies. London. 1956.
where an attempt is made to define the original doctrines of Buddhism in the
light of these relationships. .
• dinna'1l. given (thing). giving. almsgiving. is here used" pregnantly" (a kind
of metonymy not uncommon in Pali) to refer to the giving which is under-
stood. by the Brahmanical priests and the Buddhists. as a meritorious action
leading to well-being of the giver. not to the mere everyday action.
The 3rd singular conditional reflexive, or " middle", is also

occasionally used, and is identical in form with the 2nd plural
" active" or " transitive" :-
Singular
3rd person abilalliss(llha
The conditional" active" of verbs other than bhu is extremely

rare, but the conditional "middle" (3rd singular) may be
exemplified as follows :-
abhi-ni(r)-vatt (1) abhinibbattissatha if it were produced (no
augment) (in inter-
rogative sentence:
would it be pro-
duced ?)
u(d)-pad (Ill) uppajjissatha if it had arisen (no
augment)
labh (1) alabhissatha if it were obtained
vi-o-chid (Ill) vocchijjissatha 1 if it were cut off (no
augment) (passive)
With the conditional tense it is not usual to introduce the
subordinate (conditional) clause with a relative indeclinable.
The conditional tense often appears in the main clause as well,
otherwise the optative. The subordination of the conditional
clause is marked simply by the use of the conditional tense in
one or both clauses, the subordinate coming first. Sometimes
the main clause is interrogative (rhetorical, there being no
doubt as to the answer expected).
Examples of the use of the conditional :-
viitita1JafJ1- va hi ... vocchijjissatha ... api nu kho nama-
rupatJ1. . . . apajjissatha = "for if consciousness...
were cut off ... would a sentient body (' matter plus
mind ') ... be produced? "
by philologists on the grounds of comparative morphology. On the expression

of conditions in PaH cf. the" Notes on Tenses" in Lesson 27.
1 ch is regularly doubled to cch after a vowel in close junction.
Lesson 29 333
(tuimarlipa'!' is a technical term meaning the combination of

material and mental elements in a sentient body, nama1!J here
means not" name" but all aspects of mental activity: sensa-
tion, perception. volition, contact, attention. The context here
is the general one that the existence of sentient bodies depends
on the presence of "consciousness" and that in fact "con-
sciousness" continues after birth, hence the sentient body
continues. The supposition of the cutting off of " consciousness ..
whilst the sentient body continues is hence regarded as im-
possible.)
oJariko ca hi Potthapiida atta abhavissa rupi . . ., = " for if
your soul were gross, material"" PoHhapada, , ,"
(here PoHhapada had suggested that it was, but the
Buddha speaks of this as false and convinces him that it
is impossible by adducing a consequence).
A more complex case with two conjoined main clauses :-

imaya ca Kassapa mattaya. , . samanna1!J . , . abhavissa
, , , dukkara1!J . , . n' etam abhavissa kalla1!J vacanaya:
dukkaratp. samannatp. , .. ti. sakka ca pan' etaf!J abha-
vissa katu,!, gahapatina ... antamaso kumbhadasiya
pi . , . ti, = "if, Kassapa, (only) to this degree ...
asceticism were a hard task ... it would not be proper
to say this: • Asceticism is a hard task , .. '. Moreover
it would be possible for a householder , .. even a pot-
(carrying)-slave-girl to do this .. ."
The conditional is also used in speaking of a hypothetical

event which did not in fact take place.
The system of using the tenses is thus: if the condition and
its result are purely hypothetical the· optative is used; if
true, the indicative (present or future); if false, the con-
ditional. In simply denying the possibility of something,
however, without positing it as condition with a result, a
speaker may use n' etatp. thana,!, vijjati yatp. with the optative,
or sak(k) negated, or an infinite form such as akara1Jiya or
abhabba, or na sakka.
Aorist of labh
The root labh, .. to obtain," has besides a regular aorist of the
" first" form (Lesson 4). labhi, etc., an irregular and perhaps
.. elevated" aorist as follows :-
Singular Plural
3rd person alaltha alallhl1tlt
2nd person
.
(alalth,,) -
1st person "latthat?t (alallhamha)
The bracketed forms are not found in the Digha, but the
others are used quite regularly in prose, e.g. for obtaining an
interview with the Buddha or entrance to the Community-
sa1!'gho-of monks.
Declension of go and sakha
The stem go-, .. cow," .. bull," .. cattle," which is masculine
and feminine (cf. Sd. 207 ff. for a discussion on this tontroversial
point), has a somewhat irregular declension only sporadically
used (more specific words for" bull", " cow", and .. ox " are
commonly used). Before vowel inflections -0 becomes oaf) : -
Stem 10- (used in compounds)
Singular I . Plural
Nom. }
Voc.
Acc.
It·)
(tallat?t )
l 14110
Ins. (tallena) (t° lai )
Dat.
.
(tallassa) (tunnat?t)
Ab!. lallt! (to lli )
Gen. (gaI/IIssa) (Iullnat?t or, in

verse, lallllt?t)
Loc. (11111') (tos u )
(Bracketed forms not found in the Digha.)

pa,i-tas (Ill) paritassati long (for), desire

vat! (I) vattati turn, roll, circle
va, (VII) vareti prevent, hinder, obstruct,
stop
vi-va, (I) vivarati open
vi-o-(k)kam (I) vokkamati pass away, break away
vi-o-chid (Ill) vocchijjati cutoff, separate from
sa1f1.-anu-pass (I) samanupassati envisage
sa1f1.-u(d)-a-car (I) samudiicarati speak to, converse with
sa1f'-mucch (I) sammucchati coagulate, form (intransitive)
Nouns :-
adhivacana1f1. designation, name
ape(k)khii intention, expectation
abhiseko consecration
avabhiiso splendour, illumination
upasampadii entrance
kucchi (masc.) womb
kumiirikii girl
kumbho pot
catuppado quadruped
Wlhiti (fern.) (also means) station
tanta1f' loom
niima1f1. (also means) mind, mental being (in the
most general sense, as contrasted with
rupa1f1., matter, physical being)
pajjoto lamp
paif.if.apanattt preparation
pa#gho (also means) reaction, resistance (as property
of matter)
pa#if.if.a admission, assertion
pati#hti resting place, perch
patho road, way
payi,upiisana1f' attending on (action noun from pa,i-upa-as
(I), where payi,. is a junction form of
pari(y))
p"acariyo teacher's teacher
puggalo person
Lesson 29 337
babbaja1Jl. a coarse grass (used in making ropes and

slippers)
brahmacariya1Jl. God-like life, best life, celibate life
mancako bed
munja1Jl. a kind of rush (used for making ropes,
girdles, and slippers)
yamaka1Jl. paIr
yamo watch (of the night)
vat! a1Jl. rolling, circulation, cycle, cycling (of the
universe)
(v)vata1Jl. vow (in compound> -bbata1Jl-)
vinipatiko unhappy spirit (reborn in purgatory, or
as an animal, ghost, or demon)
vimati (fern.) perplexity
vir2t?hi (fern.) growth
vihesa trouble, harassing
vemattata difference, distinction
satJ1-s ii ro transmigration
samuppiido origination
samphasso contact, union
sallapo talk
siilo (a kind of tree: Shorea robusta)
siritJ1-sapo snake
Adjectives :-.
akalla unsound
adhimutta intent on
anu.esin seeking (from is(a) (I»
anukhuddaka
.
very mmor
appa/isatJ1-vedana not feeling, not experiencing
appamatta not-negligent
iikula confused, tangled
uUanaka shallow (and figuratively 1/ easily under-
stood", " simple ")
kalla sound, proper
niyata constant, certain
pa#cchanna covered, concealed
-vattin setting going, deploying, operating, con-
ducting, governing, developing
sa11'vejaniya emotional, inspiring, stirring (future passive

participle of sa11'-vij)
saddha trusting, believing
sotapanna in the stream, on the Way (from sotas,
" stream ")
Pronoun :-
aiiita . . . aflfla one . . . another, the ... is a different thing
from the ...
Past Participles :-
abhisitta consecrated
(aMi-sic (11))
araddha (ti-radh pleased, satisfied
(VII))
nikkujjita (ni(r)- overturned
kujj)
pahita (p)pa-dhii exerted
(I))
mu/ha (muh) lost
vuttha (vas (I)) spent (time) (cf. vusita from the same root
but with a different meaning, "lived
well")
Indeclinables :-
atha (is also used in introducing a deduction) :
thence, (if) so
ubhato in both ways, on both sides, both
evat?1- santat?1- in that case, in such case
kira (enclitic) (may be used to introduce, as enc1itic,
a report or rumour, and might then be
translated) it is said that, they say (and
also a discovery, meaning then) in fact,
actually
ca pana (enclitic) moreover
yatthicchaka11' . wherever one wishes
yadicchakat?1- whatever one wishes
yavaticchakat?1- as far as one wishes
sakkhi in person, personally
sabbathti in all ways
Lesson 29 339
EXERCISE 29
1. atha kho bhagava ayasmantarp Anandarp amantesi: ayam'
Ananda yena Hiraiiiiavatiya nadiya parimatirarp ycna Kusi-
nara-Upavattanarp 1 MaWinarp siilavanarp ten' upasarpkamis-
sama ti. evarp bhante ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato
paccassosi.
atha kho bhagava mahata bhikkhusarpghena saddhirp yena
Hiraiiiiavatiya nadiya parimatirarp yena Kusinara-Upa-
vattanarp Mallanarp salavanarp ten' upasarpkami, upasarp-
kamitva ayasmantarp Anandarp amantesi: ingha me tvarp
Ananda antarcna yamakasalanam uttarasisakarp maiicakarp
paiiiiapehi, kilanto 'smi Ananda, nipajjissami ti. evarp bhante
ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato paiissutva antarena yam aka-
salanarp uttarasisakarp maiicakarp paiiiiapesi. atha kho
bhagava dakkhiI,lena passena sihaseyyarp kappesi pade padarp
accadhaya sato sampajano.
• • •
pubbe bhante disasu vassarp vuttna bhikkhii agacchanti
tathagatarp dassanaya, te mayam, la.bhama manQbhavaniye
bhikkhii dassanaya labhama payirupas~naya. bhagavato pana
mayarp bhante accayena na labhissarna manobhavaniye
bhikkhii dassanaya na labhissama payirupasanaya ti. cattar'
imani Ananda saddhassa kUlaputtassa dassaniyani sarpvejani-
yani than ani. katamani cattari. idha ta.th1i.gato jato ti Ananda
saddhassa kulaputtassa dassaniyarp sarpvejaniyarp thanarp .
idha tathagato anuttararp sammasambodhiriI abhisambuddho
ti Ananda saddhassa kulaputtassa dassaniyarp sarpvejaniyarp
thanarp. idha tathagatena anuttararp dhammacakkarp
pavattitan ti Ananda saddhassa kulaputtassa dassaniyafll
sarpvejaniyarp thanaI1l. idha tathagato anupadisesaya nibbana-
dhatuya parinibbuto ti Ananda saddhassa kulaputtassa
dassaniyarp saI1lvejaniyaI1l thanaI1l. imani kho Ananda cattari
saddhassa kulaputtassa dassaniyani sarpvejaniyani than ani.
1 Kusiniirii: capital of the northern Malla republic, three quarters of a
league north-west of Pi!.va.; Upavattanalj1: a wood near the city.
agamissanti kho Ananda saddha bhikkhubhikkhuniyo upa-

sakaupasikayo idha tatha,gato jato ti pi, id ha tathagato
anuttararp sammasambodhirp abhisambuddho ti pi, idha
tathagatena anuttararp dhammacakkarp pavattitan ti pi,
idha tathagato anupadisesaya nibbanadhatuya parinibbuto ti
pi. ye hi ke ci Ananda cetiyadirikarp fthir:J9anta pasannaciWi
kalarp karissanti, sabbc te kayassa bheda param maral)a
sugatirp saggarp lokarp upapajjissanti ti.
• • •
tena kho pana samaycna Subhaddo nama paribbajako
Kusinarayarp pativasati. assosi kho Subhaddo paribbajako :
aJJ' eva kira rattiya pacchime yame samal)assa Gotamassa
parinibbanal11 bhavissati ti. at ha kho Subhaddassa paribb1i.-
jakassa etad ahosi. sutarp kho pana rn' etarp paribbajakanaJTl
vuddhanaJTl rnahallakanaJTl acariyapacariyanaJTl bhasamana-
narp: kada ci karaha ci tathagata loke uppajjanti arahanto
sarnrnasarnbuddha ti. ajja ca rattiya pacchimc yame samal)assa
Gotamassa parinibbanarp bhavissati. atthi ca me ayarp
kailkhadharnmo uppanno, evarp pasanno ahal11 samal)e
Gotame, pahoti me samal)o Gotamo tatha dhammaJTl dcsetuJTl
yathii ahaJTl imarp kailkhadhammaJTl pajaheyyan ti.
atha kho Subhaddo paribbajako yena Upavattanarp Malla-
narp' sftlavanal11 yen' ayasma Anando ten' upasarrkami.
upasaJTlkarnitva ayasmantal11 Anandal11 etad avoca: sutaJTl
rn' etarp bho Ananda paribhfljakanarp ... yatha aharp imarp
kat'lkhadharnmaJTl pajahcyyarp. svaharp bho Ananda labhey-
yarp sarnal)aJTl Gotamarp dassanaya ti. cval11 vutte ayasma
Anando Subhaddarp paribbajakarp etad avoca: alal11 avuso
Subhadda, rna tathagatarp vihefhesi. kilanto bhagava ti.
dutiyam pi kho Subhaddo paribbajako ... pe ... tatiyam pi
kho Subhaddo paribb1i.jako ... tatiyam pi kho ayasrna Anando
SubhaddaJTl paribbajakaJTl etad avoca: alarp avuso Subhadda,
ma tathagatarp vihethesi. kilanto bhagava ti. assosi kho
bhagava ayasrnato Anandassa Subhaddena paribbajakena
saddhiJTl imarp kathasallapilJTl. atha kho bhagava ayasmantaJTl
AnandaJTl amantesi: alarp Ananda, ma SUbhaddarp varesi,
labhataJTl Ananda Subhaddo tathagataTJ1 dassanaya. yaTJ1
Lesson 29 34 1
kind mal1l Subhaddo pucchissati, sabban taIl1 afifiapekho va
pucchissati no vihesapekho, yafi c' assahal1l puttho vyakarissami
tal11 khippam eva ajanissati ti. atha kho ayasma Anando
SubhaddaI1l paribbajakal11 etad avoca: gacch' avuso Subhadda,
karoti tc bhagava okasan ti.
atha kho Subhaddo paribbajako yena bhagavii ten' upasarp-
kami, upasarl1kamitvii bhagavatii saddhil11 sammodi, sammo-
daniyal11 kathaI1l sariiQiyalll vitisiiretvii ekamantalll nisidi.
ekamantalll nisinno kho Subhaddo paribbajako bhagavantul11
etad avoca: ye me bho Gotama samaQabrahmaQii saI1lghino
gat:lino gat:lacariya nata yasassino titthakara sadhusammata ca
.bahujanassa, seyyathidaI1l Piira1).o Kassapo,l Makkhali Gosalo, II
Ajitakesakambali,3 Pakudho Kaccayano,' Safijayo BelaHhi-
putto,6 NigaI)tho Nathaputto, e sabbe te sakiiya patififiaya
abbhanfiaI1lsu, sabbe va na abbhani'iaI1lsu, ekacce abbhai'iiiarpsu
ekacce na abbhaiifiaI1lsii ti. alarp Subhadda. tiHhat' etalll sabbe
te sakaya patififiaya abbhaiifialllsu, sabbe va na abbhafifialllsu,
udahu cka,cce abbhaiHialTlsu ekacce na abbhaiifialllsii ti.
dhammalTl te Subhadda desessami, talll sut:lahi, sadhukalll
manusikarohi, bbasissami ti. evalll bhante ti kho Subhaddo
paribbajuko bhagavato paccassosi. bhugava etad avoca :
yasmiI1l kho Subhadda dhammavinaye ariyo atthangiko maggo
na upalabbhati, samaI)o 1 pi tattha na upalabbhati, dutiyo pi
tattha samaI)o na upalabbhati, tatiyo pi tattha samaI)o na
upaJabbhati, catuttho pi tattha samaI)o na upaJabbhati.
yasmifi ca kho Subhadda dhammavinaye ariyo atthangiko
maggo upalabbhati, samaI)o pi tattha upaJabbhati, dutiyo pi
tattha samaI)o upaJabbhati, tatiyo pi tattha samaI)0 upaJab-
bhati, catuttho pi tattha samaQo upalabbhati. imasmilll kho
Subhadda dhammavi;laye ariyo aHhangiko maggo upalabbhati,
1 The Ajlvaka leader, see footnote in Exercise 21.
2 See 'footnotes in Exercises 21 and 28.
S The materialist, sce Exercise 28 (English into Pali) .
• An Ajlvaka leader. .
i A philosopher who followed the method of perpetual equivocation in
debate. which is 'exemplified in Exercise 22.
4 The founder of the] aina sect, which seceded from the Ajlvakas.
7 According to the Commentary, the sallUl'!lO here is onc who is soliipatma,
" on the Way," which is the first stage of the Buddhist \Vay; the second,
third and fourth sallUl11 0 S arc those in the remaining three stages, which are;
sakadiigcimin, " once-returning" (to the world) ; amigcillliIJ," non-returning" ;
and arallalll .
idh' eva Subhadda samaQo, idha dutiyo samaQo, idha tatiyo
samaQo, idha catuttho samaQo. suiiiUi. parappavada samaQehi
anfie, ime ca Subhadda bhikkhii samma vihareyyutp, asufino
loko arahantehi assa.
ekiinatitpso vayasa Subhadda
yatp pabbajitp kitpkusalanuesi.
vassani pafifiasasamadhikani 1
yato ahatp pabbajito Subhadda
iiayassa dhammassa padesavatti.
ita bahiddha samaQo pi n'· atthi.
dutiyo pi samaQo n' atthi, tatiyo pi samaQo n' atthi, catuttho
pi samat;lo n' atthi. sufiiUi. parappavada samaQehi aiiiie, ime ca
Subhadda bhikkhii samma vihareyyutp, asuiiiio loko arahantehi
assa ti.
evatp vutte Subhaddo paribbajako bhagavantatp etad avoca :
abhikkantatp bhante, abhikkantatp bhante. seyyatha pi bhante
nikkujjitatp vaukkujjeyya, paticchannatp va vivareyya,
miilhassa va maggatp acikkheyya, andhakare va telappajjotatp
dhareyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinti ti, evam eva bhaga-
vata anekapariyayena dhammo pakasito. esahatp bhante
bhagavantatp saraQatp gacchami dhammaii ca bhikkhusatpghaii
ca. labheyyahatp bhagavato santike pabbajjatp, labheyyatp
upasampadan ti. yo kho Subhadda aiiiiatitthiyapubbo
imasmitp dhammavinaye akankhati pabbajjatp, akankhati"
upasampadatp, so cattaro mase parivasati. catunnatp masanaq1
accayena araddhacitta bhikkhii pabbajenti upasampadenti
bhikkhubhavaya. api ca m' ettha puggalavemattata vidita ti.
sace bhante aiiiiatitthiyapubba imasmiq1 dhammavinaye
akankhanta pabbajjatp, akankhanta upasampadatp, cattaro
mase parivasanti, catunnaq1 masanatp accayena araddhacitta
bhikkhii pabbajenti upasampadenti bhikkhubhavaya, ahatp
cattari vassani parivasissami, catunnatp vassanatp accayena
araddhacitta bhikkhii pabbajentu upasampadentu bhikkhu-
bhavaya ti. atha kho bhagava ayasmantaIp AnandaIp aman-
tesi: tena h' Ananda SubhadJaq1 pabbajetha ti. evatp bhante
ti kho ayasma Anando bhagavato paccassosi.
J sam4dhika;" more than," is sam-adhika with metrical lengthening in the
junction.
Lesson 29 343
at ha kho Subhaddo paribbajako ayasmantarp. Anandarp. etad

avoca: Hibh1i vo avuso Ananda, suladdharp. vo avuso Ananda,
ye ettha satthara sammukha antevasabhisekena abhisitta ti.
alattha kho Subhaddo paribbajako bhagavato santike pabbaj-
jarp, alattha upasampadarp. aciriipasampanno kho pan'
ayasma Sub had do eko vupakaHho appamatto atapi pahitatto
viharanto. na drass' eva yass' atthaya kulaputta sammad eva
agarasma anagariyaJll pabbajanti, tad anuttaraJll brahmacari-
yapariyosanaJll diHhe va dhamme sayaJll abhiiiiia 1 sacchikatva
upasampajja vihasi: khiQa jati, vusitarp brahmacariyarp,
katal11 karaQiyal11, naparal11 itthattaya ti abbhafifiasi. afifiataro
kho pan' ayasma Subhaddo arahatarrl ahosi. so bhagavato
pacchimo sakkhisavako ahosi ti.
atha kho bhagava ayasmantal11 AnandaJll amantesi: siya
kho pan' Ananda tumhakam evam assa: atitasatthukaJll
pavacanarp, n' atthi no sattha ti. na kho pan' etarp. Ananda
eval11 datthabbal11. yo vo Ananda maya dhammo ca vinayo ca
desito paiiiiatto, so vo mam' accayena sattha. yatha kho pan'
Ananda etarahi bhikkhii aiiiiamaiiiiaJll livusovlidena samudli-
caranti, na vo mam' accayena evaQ'l samudacaritabbal11.
theratarena Ananda bhikkhuna navakataro bhikkhu namena
vli gottena vli avusovadena vli samudacaritabbo, navakatarena
bhikkhuna therataro bhikkhu bhante ti va ayasma ti va
samudacaritabbo. akailkhamano Ananda sarpgho mam' acca-
yena khuddanukhuddakani sikkhapadani samuhanatu. Chan-
nassa Ananda bhikkhuno mam' accayena brahmadaQc;lo
katabbo ti. katamo pan a bhante. brahmadaQc;lo ti. Channo
Ananda bhikkhu yarp iccheyya taQ'l vadeyya, so bhikkhuhi
n' eva vattabbo na ovaditabbo na anusasitabbo ti.
atha bhagava bhikkhu amantesi: siya kho pan a bhikkhave
ekabhikkhussa 2 pi kailkha va vimati vii Buddhe va dhamme va
saQ'lghe va magge vii patipadaya va. pucchatha bhikkhave. ma
paccha vippatisarino ahuvattha: sammukhibhuto no sattha
ahosi, na mayaJll sakkhimha bhagavantaJll sammukha pat i-
pucchitun ti. evarp vutte te bhikkhu tUl:thi ahesuQ'l. dutiyam
pi kho bhagava ... tatiyam pi kho bhagava bhikkhu amantesi :
siya kho pana bhikkhave ekabhikkhussa pi kailkha va vimati
1 Gerund of abhi-(iI)ila. cf. footnote at beginning of Exercise 22.
I Inflection of a declension.
vii Buddhe vii dhamme vii sarpghe vii magge vii patipadiiya vii.
pucchatha bhikkhave. ma paccha vippatisarino ahuvattha:
sammukhibhiito no sattha ahosi, na mayarp sakkhimha
bhagavantarp sammukha patipucchitun ti. tatiyam pi kho te
bhikkhii tUl)hi ahesurp. atha kho bhagavii bhikkhii amantesi :
siyii kho pana bhikkhave satthugiiravena pi na puccheyyiitha.
sahiiyako pi bhikkhave sahayakassa arocetii ti. evarp vutte te
bhikkhii tUl)hi ahesurp.
atha kho ayasmii Anando bhagavantarp etad avoca:
acchariyarp bhante abbhutarp bhante. evarp pasanno aharp
bhante imasmirp bhikkhusalpghe, n' atthi ekabhikkhussa pi
kankha va vimati vii Buddhe vii dhamme vii sarpghe va magge
vii patipadiiya va ti. pasiida kho tvarp Ananda vadesi. iiaQ.am
eva h' ettha Ananda tathagatassa: n' atthi imasmirp bhikkhu-
sarpghe, n' atthi ekabhikkhussa pi kankha va vimati vii Buddhe
vii dhamme va sarpghe vii magge va patipadiiya vii. imesarp
hi Ananda paiicannarp bhikkhusatanarp yo pacchimako
bhikkhu so sotapanno avinipiitadhammo niyato sambodhi-
pariiyano ti. atha kho bhagava bhikkhii iimantesi: handa diini
bhikkhave amantayami vo: vayadhamma sarpkhiira, appama-
dena sampiidetha ti. ayarp tathagatassa pacchima vaca.
atha kho bhagava pathamajjhanarp samapajji. pathamaj-
jh1ina vutthahitva dutiyajjh1inarp samapajji. dutiyajjh1ina
vUHhahitva tatiyajjh1inarp samapajji. tatiyajjh1ina vutthahitva.
catutthajjhanarp samiipajji. catutthajjhiinii vuHhahitva
akasanaiica yatanarp samapa jji. akasanaiica yatanasamapattiya
vutthahitva vififial)afidiyatanarp samapajji. vififial)ancaya-
tanasamapattiya vuHhahitva iikificafiiiayatanarp samapajji.
akiiicafifia yatanasamapattiya vu Hhahit vii nevasafifianasafifia-
yatanarp samapajji. nevasafifianasafifiayatanasamapattiya
vuHhahitvii safiiiavedayitanirodharp samapajji.
atha kho ayasma Anando ayasmantarp Anuruddharp etad
avoca: parinibbuto bhante Anuruddha bhagava ti. na avuso
Ananda bhagavii parinibbuto, saiiiiavedayitanirodharp sama-
panno ti. atha kho bhagavii safifiavedayitanirodhasamiipattiya
vUHhahitvii nevasafifianasafifiayatanarp samapajji. -nevasan-
iianasafifiayatanasamapattiya vutthahitva iikificafifiayata-
narp samiipajji. iikificafifiayatanasamapattiyii vutthahitvii
vififiiiQ.ancayatanarp samapaj ji. viiifiiiQ.aficii yatanasamiipattiya
Lesson 29 345
vuHhahitva akasanafieayatanaI11 samapajji. akasanafidi-
yatanasamapattiya vuHhahitva eatutthajjh1i.naI11 samapajji.
eatutthajjhfma vuHhahitva tatiyajjhanaI11 samapajji. tati-
yajjh1i.na vutthahitva dutiyajjh1i.naI11 samapajji. dutiyajjhana
vuHhahitva pathamajjhfmaI11 samapajji. pathamajjh1i.na
vutthahitva dutiyajjh1i.naI11 samapajji. dutiyajjhana vuHhahit-
va tatiyajjhanaI11 samapajji. tatiyajjh1i.na. vutthahitva
eatutthajjhanaTfl samapajji. eatutthajjhana vuHhahitva
samanantara bhagava parinibbayi.
2. evam me sutaTfl. ekaI11 samayaI11 bhagava Kurusu viharati,

KammassadhammaI11 nama KurunaTfl nigamo. atha kho
ayasma Anando yena bhagava. ten' upasarpkami. upasaI11-
kamitva bhagavantaTflabhivadetva ekamantaI11 nisidi. ekaman-
taI11 nisinno kho ayasma Anando bhagavantaIfl etad avoca:
acehariyaTfl bhante abbhutaTfl bhante yava gambhiro eayaTfl
bhante paticcasamuppado gambhiravabhaso ca. atha ca pan a
me uttanakuttanako viya khayati ti. ma h' evaTfl Ananda
avaea. ma h' evaTfl Ananda avaca. gambhiro cayaTfl Ananda
paticeasamuppado gambhiravabh1i.so ca. etassa Ananda
dhammassa ananubodha appativedha evam ayarp paja tanta-
kulakajata gulagut:lthikajata. 1 mufijababbajabhuta apayaI11
duggatiTfl vinipataTfl saI11saraI11 nativattati.
atthi idappaeeaya jaramarat:lan ti. iti putthena sat a Ananda,
atthi ti 'ssa vaeaniyaTfl. kim paeeaya jaramaralfan ti. iti ce
vadeyya. jatipaeeaya jaramarat:lan ti ice assa vaeaniyaI11.
atthi idappaeeaya jati ti. iti putthena sata Ananda, atthi ti 'ssa
vaeaniyarp. kim paecaya jati ti. iti ee vadeyya. bhavappaceaya
jati ti ice assa vaeaniyarp. atthi idappaeeaya. bhavo ti. Hi
putthena sata ... upadanapaeeaya bhavo ti ice ass a vaeani-
yaTfl. atthi idappaceaya upadanan ti. iti puHhena sata ...
tat:lh1i.paeeaya upadanan ti ice ass a vaeaniyaTfl. atthi idappae..
eaya talfh1i. ti. iti puHhena saHi ... vedanapaeeaya talfhii
ti ice ass a vaeaniyarp. atthi idappaccaya vedana ti. iti putthena
sata ... phassapaccaya vedana ti ice ass a vacaniyaI11. atthi
idappaeeaya phasso ti. iti putthena sata ... namarupapaecaya
phasso ti ice assa vacaniyaI11. atthi idappaceaya namariipan
I The meaning of gu!iigut:l!hika is uncertain . It refers probably to knotted or
twisted threads in weaving, or perhaps to a bird's nest of tangled construction.
Lesson 29 347
ditthiipadanarp va silabbatiipadanarp va attavadiipadanarp vi,
sabbaso upadane asati upadananirodhl api nu kho bhavo
pannayethli ti. no ... tal)ha va hi Ananda nabhavissa sabbena
sabbarp sabbatha sabbarp kassa ci kimhi ci, seyyathldarp
riipatal)ha saddata1)ha gandhata1)hli rasata1)ha photthabbatal)-
ha dhammatal)hii, sabbaso tal)haya asati tal)hanirodha api nu
kho upadlinarp pannayethli ti. no ... vedana va hi Ananda
nabhavissa sabbena sabbarp sabbatha sabbarp kassa ci kimhi
d, seyyathidarp cakkhusamphassaja vedana sotasamphassaja
vedana ghanasamphassaja -yedana jivhasamphassaja vedana
kayasamphassaja vedana manosamphassaja vedana, sabbaso
vedanaya asati vedananirodha api nu kho tal)hii paiinayethii
ti. no ...
• • •
. . . phasso va hi Ananda nabhavissa sabbena sabbarp
sabbatha sabbarp kassa d kimhi ci, seyyathidarp cakkhusam-
phasso sotasamphasso ghiinasamphasso jivhlisamphasso kaya-
samphasso manosamphasso, sabbaso phasse asati phassa-
nirodha api nu kho vedana pannayetha ti. no ...
namariipapaccaya phasso ti iti kho pan' etam vuttarp, tad
Ananda imina p'etarp pariyayena veditabbal11, yatha namarii-
papaccaya phasso. yehi Ananda akarehi yehi lingehi yehi <
nimittehi, yehi uddesehi namakayassa pannatti hoti, tesu

akaresu tesu lingesu tesu nimittesu tesu uddesesu asati, api nu
kho riipakaye adhivacanasamphasso paiiiiayetha ti. no h' etarp
bhante. yehi Ananda akarehi yehi lingehi yehi nimittehi yehi
uddesehi rupakayassa paiiiiatti hoti, tesu akaresu tesu liI\gesll
tesu nimittesu tesu uddesesu . asati, api nu kho nli.makaye
patighasamphasso pannayethli ti. no h' etarp ' bhante. yehi
Ananda akarehi yehi liIigehi yehi nimittehi yehi uddesehi
namakayassa ca rupakayassa ca paniiatti hoti, tesu akaresu
tesu lingesu tesu nimittesu tesu uddesesu asati, api nu kho
adhivacanasamphasso va patighasamphasso va paiiiiayethii
ti. no h' etarp bhante. yehi Ananda 1i.karehi yehi lingehi yehi
nimittehi yehi uddesehi namariipassa paiiiiatti hoti, tesu
akaresu tesu lingesu tesu nimittesu tesu uddesesu asati, api nu
kho phasso paiinayetha, ti. no h' etarp bhante. tasmat ih'
Ananda es' eva hetu etaJTl nidanarp esa samudayo esa paccayo
phassassa, yadidaJTl namariipaJTl.
vinnuI)apaccaya namariipan ti iti kho pan' etaJTl vuttayp, tad
Ananda imina p' etaJTl pariyayena vcditabbayp yatha vinnaQa-
paccaya niimarfipayp. vifiniiQayp va hi Ananda matu kucchiJTl
na okkamissatha, api nu kho namarfipal11 m1Hu kucchismiyp
sammucchissatha ti. no h' etaJTl bhante. vii\fiiil)Ull1 va hi Ananda
matu kucchiJTlokkamitva vokkamissatha, api nu kho nflmarfi-
payp itthattflya abhinibbattissatha ti. no h' etaJTl bhante.
vinnar;tarp va hi Ananda daharass' eva sate vocehijjissatha
kumarassa va kumarikaya vii, api nu kho namariiparp vuddhirp
virulhiJTl vepl111al11 npajjissathft ti. no h' ctaJ11 bhantc. tasmat
ih' Ananda cs' cva hetu ctaIT1 nidfuHlJl1 csasamudayo esa
paceayo namarfipassa, yadidaJTl vifinal)ull1.
namarfipapaccaya viiliU\l)an ti iti kho pan' etall1 vuttal11,
tad Ananda iminii p' ctaJTl pariyflycna vcditabharp, yatha
namarftpapaccaya vinniil)al11. viiliiiil)al11 va hi Ananda
namarupe patiHhal11 nalabhissatha, api nu · kho ayatiyp
jatijaramaral)adukkhasamudayasambhavo pafiflrlyethfl ti. no
h' etaJTl bhantc. tasmat ih' Ananda cs' cva hctu etal11 nidanaJTl
csa samudayo ('sa paccayo viiiiial)assa, yadidall1 namarfipaJTl.
cWivata kho Ananda F\yctha vft jiyctha vii. miy(·tha va ca\'ctha
vii upapajjctha vft, ettavatii. adhivacanapatho, cttftYatii.
niruttipatho, cttiivatii paiiiiattipatho, cttiivatii prlllllij.\'i\caraJ11,
cttiivata vattall1 vattati · itthattal11 pailiiapanflya, yadidaJTl
namariipal11 saha viniiaJ)cna.
... ... ...

yato kho Ananda bhikkhu n' eva vedanaJTl attftnal11 samanu-
passati, no pi appatisaJTlvcdanaJTl aWinaJTl samanupassati, no
pi atta me vedayati. vedanadhammo hi me atta ti samanu-
passati, so evaJTl asamanupassanto na kiii ci lokc upfldiyati,
anup1idiyaJTl na paritassati, aparitassaJTl paccattall1 yeva
parinibbiiyati, khil)a jati, vusital1l brahmacariyal11, katarp
karal)iya'11, niiparall1 itthaWiya ti pajfrllflti. cval11vimutta-
cittaTJl kho Ananda bhikkhurp yo cval'p vadeyya hoti tath1igato
param mara~a ti, iti 'ssa diHhi ti tad akallal1l. na hoti tatha-
gate ... tad akallaJ1l. taJ1l kissa hetu. yavat' Ananda adhi-
Lesson 29 349
vacanaJTl yavata adhivacanapatho, yavata nirutti yavata
niruttipatho, yavata paiiiiatti yavata. paiiiiattipatho, yavata
paiiiia yavata paiiiiiivacaraJTl, yavata vaHaJTl yavat1i vatta111
vaHati, tad abhifina 1 vimutto bhikkhu, tad abhinna vimutto
bhikkhu na j1inati na passati iti 'ssa diHhi ti tad akallaJTl.
satta kho ima Ananda vififiaQaHhitiyo, dye ca ayatanani.
kat am a satta. sant' Ananda saWi nanattakaya niinatta-
safiiiino, seyyatha pi manussa ekacce ca deva ekacce ca vini-
patika. ayaJTl pathamii viiinaQaHhiti. sant' Ananda satta
nanattakaya ekattasannino, seyyatha pi deva brahmakayika
pathamabhinibbaWi.. ayaJTl dutiya vififial)atthiti. sant'
Ananda satta ekattakaya niinattasafiiiino, seyyatha pi deva
5.bhassara. 2 ayaJTl tatiya viiinaQatthiti. sant' Ananda satta
ckattakaya ekattasafiiiino, seyyatha pi dcva subhakil)Qa. 3
ayaJTl catutthii viiifiuQatthiti. sant' Ananda saWi sabbaso
riipasafiiUinaJTl samatikkama patighasaniianaJTl atthagama
nanattasafiiianaJTl amanasikura ananto iikiiso tj akasfmaii-
cayataniipaga. ayaJTl paficami vififiuQaHhiti. sant' Ananda ·
satt1i sabbaso iikasanaficayatanaJTl samatikkamma anantaJ1l
viiiiiaQan ti viiifial)aficftyataniipaga. ayaJTl chatth5. vifiniil)at-
thiti. sant' Ananda satta sabbaso vifiniir:taiidiyatanaJTl samatik-
kamma n' atthi kin ci ti akiiicannayataniipaga. ayarp sattami
viiiiiiiQaHhiti.
asafifiasattayatanarp ncvasannanasafinayatanam eva duti-
yarp.
tatr' Ananda y' ayaJTl pathama vifiiial)aHhiti nanatta.kaya.
nanattasafifiino, seyyatha pi manussa ekaccc ca dcvfl ckacce ca
vinipatika, yo nu kho Ananda taii ca pajanati, tassft ca samu-
dayaJTl pajanati, tassa ca atthagamaJTl pajanati, tassii ca
assadarp pajanati, tassa ca adinavarp pajfmati, tassa ca
nissarar:taJ11 pajanati, kallarp nu kho tcna tad abhinanditun ti.
no h' etaJ11 bhante. '" pc ... tatr' Ananda y' ayarp sattam'i
vifii'iiiQaHhiti sabbaso viiinal)aiiciiyatanarp samatikkamma n'
atthi kifi ci ti akificaiiniiyataniipaga, yo nu kho Ananda tan ca
pajanati, ... tassa ca nissaral)aJTl pajfmati, kullaJTl nu kho ten a
I Gerund, cf. footnote at beginning of Exercise 22. .
, abhassara, .. the world of radiance," cl. second passage in Excrcise 20.
S sllhhakitltla • .. the lustrous world," the inhabitants of which enjoy the
highest, unalloycd happiness (thc sole defect of which is that it is temporary,
not eternal) .
tad abhinanditun ti. no h' ctaI1l bhante. tatr' Ananda yam

iduI1l asaiiiiasaWiyatanaI1l, yo nu kho Ananda taii ca paja-
nati, ... tassa ca nissaraQaI1l pajanati, kallaI1l nu kho tcna tad
abhinanditun ti. no h' etaI1l bhante. tatr' Ananda yam idaI1l
nevasaiiiifmasaiifiayatanaI1l, yo nu kho Ananda taii ca paja-
niiti, ... tassa ca nissaraQaI1l pajfmati, kullalp nu kho tena tad
ahhinanditun ti. 110 h' ctarp bhante. yato kho Ananda bhikkhu
imasaii ca sattannaI11 viiiiiaQatthitinaI1l imesaii en. dvinnaI11
flyutaniinalp samudayaii ca atthagamaii ca assiidaii ca 1idinavaii
ca nissar(1).uil ca yuthabhutaI1l viditva anupada vimutto hoti,
ayaJ1l vuccuti Ananda uhikkhn pafiIlflvimutto.
uttha kho ime l\l1anda vimokha. katamc aHha. riipi riipani
passati. 1 ayatl1 pathall10 vimokho. ajjhattal11 ariipasaiiiii
bahiddha rftpani passati. aya111 dutiyo vimokho. subhan l' eva
adhimutto hoti. ayaJ11 tatiyo vimokho. sabbaso rupasani'iiinaI11
samatikkama patighasafiiianafTl atthagama nfmattasaiiii5.naI1l
amanasikarfl ananto ukuso ti ukftsanailcftyatanaI1l upasampajja
viharati. ayafTl catuttho vimokho. sabbaso akasanaficiiyatanall1
samatikkamma anantall1 viiiiial)an ti viiiniiQaiidiyatanal11
upasampajja viharati. ayaI1l paficamo vimokho. sabbaso
vifififl1).ailcayatanuI11 samatikkamma u' atthi kiii ci ti iikificaiififl-
yatanatl1 upasampajja viharati. ayulp chattho vimokho.
sabbaso likiflcaflfiflyatanatl1 samatikkamma nevasailiiana-
saiifiayatanaI11 upasampajja dharati. ayarp sattamo vimokho.
sabbaso nevasafifianasafiiiayatana111 samatikkamma safinii-
vedayitanirodhaI11 upasampajja viharati.. ayatl1 aHhamo
vimokho. ime kho Ananda aHha vimokha.
yato kho Ananda bhikkhu ime aHha vimokhe anulomam pi
samapajjati, patilomam pi samapajjati, anulomapatilomam
pi samapajjati, yatthicchakaql yadicchakaI11 yavaticchakaI1l
samapajjati pi vutthati pi, iisaviinafi ca khaya anasavaI1l
cetovimuttil11 pafiiiavimuttiI11 diHhe vu dhamme sayaI1l abhiiiiia
sacchikatvfl upasampajja viharati, ayall1 vuccati Ananda
bhikkhu ubhatobhagavimutto, im1iya ca Ananda ubhato-
bhagavimuttiyu afifiii ubhatobhiigavimutti uttaritarii vii paQi-
tatarfl 'la n' atthi ti. id am avoca bhagavii. attamano ayasma
Anando bhagavato bhasita111 abhinandi ti.
1 These eight are stages in meditation. The first one is the simple con-
templation of some material object in order to compose the mind.
Lesson 29 35 1
(From the dialogue between the Buddha and the wanderer
Potthapada.)
.. Sir, does (nu) the fortunate one declare just one summit
(aggo)-of-perception, or (udiihu) (does he) declare many (puthu)
summits-of-perception ? " ,
If I declare one summit-of-perception, PoHhapada, and
I also declare many summits-of-perception."
"But in what way, sir, (c:ioes) the fortunate one declare
one summit-of-perception and also declare many summits-of-
perception ? "
" In whatever way, Potthapada, (one) reaches (Phus) peace
ol mind, just so I declare a summit-ol-perception, thus,
Potthapiida, I declare one summit-of-perception and also I
declare many summits-oI-perception."
If Sir, does (nu) perception occur first, afterwards knowledge,
or (does) knowledge occur first, afterwards perception, or (do)
perception and knowledge occur simultaneously? "
If Perception, Potthapada, occurs first, alterwards know-
ledge, moreover from-the-occurrence-of-perception is the-
occurrence-ol-knowledge (Le. results from, expressed simply
by the ablative and hoti) . He (Le. the person engaged in medita-
tion, who was being discussed) understands thus: .. In fact,
from-this-condition (stem of pronoun assimilated to following
p > PP) my knowledge occurred." Even (api) through this
course, Potthapada, it (eta1Jt) (is) to be ascertained (vid) how
perception occurs first, afterwards knowledge, from-the-
occurrence-of-perception, moreover, is the-occurrence-of-know-
ledge. "
If Is (nu) perception the soul of a man, sir, or (is) one (thing)
, perception, another the soul? "
"What now (kim pana) (do) you, Potthapada, assume a
soul? "
If I assume a gross soul, sir, material, which-is-(made)-of-the-
four-elements, which-is-feeding-on-solid-food."
"Yet (hi) if your soul were (conditional tense) gross,
Potthapada, material, of-the-four-elements, feeding-on-solid-
food, in that case, Potthapada, for you (le) perception would be
one thing, soul another. Then (tad) through this course.
Potthapada, it (is) to be ascertained how perception will be one

(thing), soul another. Just let this gross, material, four-element,
solid-food-feeding soul be (titthatu), Potthnpada: so (atha) this
man's perceptions occur (as) one (thing), (his) perceptions cease
(as) another. Through this course, PoHhapada, it (is) to be
ascertained how perception will be onc (thing), soul another."
LESSON 30
Desiderative Conjugation
A special conjugation and certain derivatives from it are
sometimes used to express the desire to do an action. This
conjugation is called the" desiderative "(t1t1nicchattha). The
root is reduplicated, the reduplicating syllable being in a weak
form, and the suffix sa is added to forma stem which is inflected
according to the first conjugation. An adjective (stem sa) and a
feminine abstract noun (stem sa) are also formed. Apart from
a few forms in ordinary use the desiderative may be regarded
as a " poetic" conjugation, being largely restricted to \'erse.
Examples :-
vi-kit (1) vicikicchati, vicikicchii (in common use),
(" to cure ") " be uncertain "
gup jig1lcchati, jegltccha (adj.) (in common
use), " be disgusted with"
ghas jighacchati (verse), desire to eat," be
11 11
hungry"
...
Vl-}l vijigisati (not in Digha) , desire to
11
conquer"
tij (1) titikkhd, " forbearance"
(" to sharpen ",
" to bear ")
pa pipasita (pp. in common use), pipasin .
(adj.), " desire to drink,"" be thirsty "
pipasa (adj., also common, has
pejorative meaning) " drunken",
" drunkard "
Lesson 30 353
man vima1ftsati, vima1ftsa, vima1ftsin (in com-

mon use), (" desire to think") "in-
vestigate "
vac vavakkhati (verse), " desire to speak"
(s)su SHssfisati, suss1:'isa (in common use),
" desire to hear"
har jigitttsamiino (irregular formation) (pre-
sent participle, verse), "desire to
take," " wish for"
ni-har nijigi1ftsitar (agent noun, in common
use), " coveter," " acquisitor"
(kit, " cure" > tikicchati may also be classed here; it is not
found in the Digha. The root has two
alternative reduplications, with ci- or
ti-, with different meanings.)
" Root" Aorist

The" root" aorist, which is rarely found except in verse, is
so called by historical philologists because the inflections are
added directly to the root, not to a stem (historically in the
ordinary -i aorist the -i is a stem suffix, not an inflection, likewise
in addasa, etc., we have an -a stem).
Examples :-
hu
Singular Plural
3rd person aMi, a}lIld (junction ahuttl or ahu

form) it was
If I), (both verse)
.. there was ..
2nd person (aMI) -

1st person (ahltttl) (ahuttl) (ah/lmh~ belongs
to the ordinary aorist
system: Lesson 4)
(In Dfgha prose the final -11 is short in the 3rd singular.)
gam
Singular Plural
3rd person agtS aga (verse)
2nd person (agl) (aguttha-Grammariaos)

--
1st person (aga'1l) (agamha)
(In DJgha prose only from adhj-gam > ajJ'AagiJ.)

ahu(d) is generally used impersonally: "there was" (e.g.
with possessive genitive).
Verse
So far we have restricted ourselves (except for a few incidental
verses in the reading passages) to the ordinary prose language of
the Digha Nikiiya. which is sufficiently typical of the PaH prose
in which most of the Canon is written. We must. however, to
complete this introductory survey of Pali, consider the main
features of PaH verse, which likewise are well exemplified in
the Digha. The Canon contains probably 15,000-20,000 verses.
These are mostly collected in books consisting entirely, or
almost entirely, of verse, but some are scattered about in the
prose texts as in the Digha Nikaya itself. The verses of the
Digha Nikiiya illustrate their most important linguistic and
metrical characteristics. The linguistic features to remark are
twofold: poetic licence and the use of archaic forms obsolete
in everyday speech. The main characteristic of the metres is
that they are quantitative, that is that the rhythm is deter-
mined purely by the lengths of the syllables, the effect of any
stress (" accent ") being negligible.
Poetic licence is most noticeable in the freedom of word order
in verse. . Since the inflections generally show the relations
between the words in a sentence almost any deviation from the
prose order is possible without serious change of meaning (the
emphasis will be different, and indeed the metrical form provides
special possihilities for emphasis by placing words in
rhythmically prominent positions), though for beginners it adds
poetic associations. They may also be felt to have greater

dignity and power than everyday forms. The obscurity which
may result is not always avoided by poets, on the contrary a
certain mystification and portentousness may be deliberately
sought. We thus meet in PaH verse with a residue of ancient
grammatical forms, among which we may note here some
characteristic or frequent ones :- .
Nominative plural in (ise: savakase (= savakti)
gatase (= gata)
Imperative 1st plural in mu instead of ma: janemu
Optative 3rd singular in e instead of eyya: tidise
(= iidiseyya; from ii-dis (I), "dedicate ")
Optative 1st plural in mu instead of yyiima: pucchemu
Use of root aorist, e.g. 3rd plural in u~: akaru~ (for
aka~sH), apadu~ (for apadi1f1,su)
Another unusual aorist: abhida (for abhindi)
Future of ha: hessati (= bhavissati)
Infinitive in taye: dakkhitaye (= dallhu~)
. Gerund in (t)vana rare in prose: caritvana,. disviina,
katvana, sutvana
Middle (attanopada) forms not current in prose :-
vande (= vandami)
amhiise (= amhii)
karomase (= karoma)
iirabkavho (= arabhatha, imperative)
vademase (= vadeyyiima)
asine (locative singular of the present participle middle
of the verb as, .. to sit," itself almost extinct-
replaced by ni-sid) .
We have noted in Lessons 28 and 29 and earlier in this lesson
that the denominative, intensive, desiderative, and It root"
aorist are more frequent in verse.
Where two parallel forms exist, one with assimilation and
consequent obscurity and one with a clear articulation through
a linking vowel between stem and suffix, the form with assimila-
tion will usually be more frequent in verse and sometimes
extinct in prose :-
of the semi-vowels y, r, and v in some combinations (more rarely

over the nasals). Some examples arc :-
-cariya = _u (*-carya)
iriyati = _uu (*iryati)
sirimant (" beautiful", "fortunate") = - - (*srimant)
(but sir!, " beauty, " fortune" = u.!!.)
vya- = u'" (viya-, as sometimes written)
veJuriyo (" lapis lazuli ") = - vu -
ariya = usually _ U (*arya), sometimes = _uu (*ariya)
vt'riya = sometimes _u (*'L'irya) but sometimes _vv
(viriya, which is sometimes so written)
suriyo = sometimes - - (*suryo) but sometimes _u_
(sliriyo, which is sometimes so written).
In the word brcihma1;to, br- does not function as two con-
sonants, hence a preceding syllable will be short if its vowel is
short (*bamha1;to ?). Occasionally other conjuncts also fail to
" make position" (make a preceding syllable long).
Though all PaH metres are quantitative, a new style of poetry
had come into fashion in the 5th or 4th century B.C. which may
be called the " musical" style. In the metres of this style the
opposition of long and short syllables, that one long equals two
shorts, is exact and inflexible in the same way as a note and
two notes of half its value in music. The new metres had in fact
taken their rhythms from music. In the older metres, which
remained in use, though not uninfluenced by the new, the
opposition of quantities is approximate only, ao that the number
of syllables in a line is still felt to be of decisive importance.
A "verse" usuaUy contains four lines (padas), being a
quatrain, much more rarely six lines. Rhyme is not used.
Most important metres :-
" Old" metres (number of syllables per line constant, with
only rare " resolution" of a long into two shorts, giving an
extra syllable, under the influence of the" new" metres) :-
vatla (epic narrative metre: only approximately quanti-
tative) eight syllables per line, the contrasting cadences
of alternate lines giving a verse of two dissimilar lines
repeated; in the epic style there is a tendency to use this
Lesson 30 359
as a line of sixteen syllables not organized in verses,

which is very appropriate and flexihle for continuous
narrative
_u _
vu
u _
u ....
v u vu
___u _
u ......
u __ u u u_u __
U I
X 2
(with U U "
these - U u
usually) _. vu -
- 11-
u_u_ UV _
__ u
anu!lhubha (the archaic form of vat/a, in which the alternate

lines are not contrasted)
~ !!. !!. ~ u - v~
x 4 Athe cadences of the prior valta line
are also admitted)
tutthubha-jagati, normally eleven (tu#hubha) or twelve
(jagati) syllables per line; these two metres, which have
different cadences, arc freely mixed, though they may
also be used separately; there is a caesura (slight pause)
after either the fourth or the fifth syllable
~ - u_, U I _II_~ X 4 (tu/lhubha) (caes. in one
U U
of the marked pos'itions)

u"u _v_v~
_ U _ , 41 t VV X 4 (jagati) (caes. in one of
the marked positions)
by mixture of an opening with caesura at the fifth with
a continuation as per caesura at the fourth we
occasionally find a tut/hubha of twelve syllables or a
jagati of thirteen:
-U _
- - _.
U __ , U U U _ U _ U (tu)
--
U _41 _ _ ,41 U v_v_vv (J·a.).
- - -
" New" metres (total quantity of each line constant, the
unit in counting being the mattd = quantity of one short
syllable; number of syllables variable) :-
mattCichandas (" measure-metre "), (cadence fixed, being
the last five or six syllables, rest widely variable provided
the total quantity is constant; there are always two

dissimilar lines repeated) :
vetiiliya (lines one and three contain fourteen mattiis, two
and four contain sixteen; cadence - U - u.!!. )
uu
__ uu _
u-u
vu_ v_vu
-
I uu uu vu uu_u_vu
- - -..... -
X 2
opacchandasaka (as vetdliya, but with two extra mattiis in

each line resulting from the longer cadence - " - U -.!. )
vu
- uu
__ uu _ u_,,_u
"- " .
I -- --- - . u X 2
uu uu uu uu_u_u_
......
-.. .", '-
(very rarely, vetaliya and opacchandasaka are mixed)
(another metre originally of this class is the svagata,
which being less flexible is usually classified under
akkharacchandas, see below)
gat;acchandas (" bar-metre") (not found in the Digha
Niktiya: strictly musical and exactly quantitative like
musical rhythms) :
giti (two or three lines of thirty mattas each, each only
theoretically divisible into two quarter verses ~ each of
the two lines is organized in eight bars, called gat;a, of
four mattas each, there being a .. rest" of two mattiis at
the end; the characteristic rhythm is I~ -I u- u t
= bars, though this is simply a base on which variation
2
is very freely made)
ariya (a line of thirty mattas, as in giti, followed by a line
of twenty-seven mattas, the cadence being syncopated).
Derived metres (these represent a third phase, which sub- i
sequently became the dominant style in the literature, along i
with a somewhat restricted form of the vatta for continuous "i
narrative; the tendency is for both the quantity and the number .
of syllables to be fixed. In the Pali Canon these metres still
retain a good deal of flexibility, whilst in later Indian literature
they are given forms absolutely fixed except for the last syllable
of each line) :-
Lesson 30
akkharacchandas (If syllable-metre ")
samavutta (four similar lines) :-

upajtiti (a form of tutthubha, fixed)
.!._v _ _ vv_u_~ x 4
rathoddhata (a form of vetaliya line, fixe,,)
_v_uvv_u_u~ x 4
va'fl-satlha (a form of jagati, fixed)
pamitakkhara (derived from ga~acchandas)

~_u_u uv_vu~ X 4
rucira (derived from jagati by resolution of fifth syllable)
~- u_uuuu_ v _u.!. x4
ar#hasamavutta (two dissimilar lines, repeated) :-

pupphitagga (a particular form of opacchandasaka, fixed)
uu vu vu _u_u_~ I
uu w - vv - u _v -~ X 2
svagatii
- u_u
uu_
uu
- - ..... u
-
I- u_u
vu.... - - --uu u
X 2
visamavutta (four dissimilar lines) :-

upatfhitappacupita (probably derived from mattachandas)
_ _ _ uu_u_u_vu _ _ 1~_uu ,",u_u_u_ •. _1
vu vu uv uv-l Uu uu uu vu uu_uu_~ X I
uggata (derived from ga~acchandas)
uu_u_u uu_u 1
u uu vu _u _u _I
_u uu
vu. _ u uu_ uv_1 uu_v _u vu_u_u ......
u X I
I ntroduetion to Pali
taeo skin
tanu (neut.) body
tapas asceticism
tut,t4ikiro gourd (used as a pot-Le. a natural pot, not
man-made)
tuttatf1- goad (for driving elephants or cattle)
tomaratJI- lance
thanatf1- breast
dat,t4amanavaka~ a kind of bird
dijo bird (" twice-born ")
divo sky, heaven
nangalo plough
nayanatJI- eye
nalini lotus pool
nasana"" destroying
nibhd lustre, brilliance
paritajjand threatening, intimidation
paligho bar (holding a door)
pekkhitar (masc.) looker on, watcher, observer
pokkharat,ti lotus pool
pokkharasiitako a kind of bird
maeeo mortal
manuJo human being
mamaUattf (" mirie-ness "), possessiveness, selfishness
mayiiro peacock
mahi the earth
miinuso man, human being
mudutd suppleness
muni (masc.) recluse
ret,tu (masc.) pollen
lakkhat,tattf mark, special quality, excellence, shape-
liness, definition
10eanatf1- eye
vankatf1- hook
viito wind
vari (neut.) water
salikii myna
suko parrot
sura god
Lesson 30
avydkata (vi-a-kar, unexplained, undetermined, in-

negative) determinate
gathita (gath (U)) tied
ghasta (ghas (I» devoured
danta (dam) tamed, restrained
pasa/a ((p)pa-sar) stretched out, frank, open
piyayita (denom.
from piya) held dear, beloved
purakkhata
(pflra(s)-kar) facing, in front
visa/a (vi-sar) spread, staring
Gerunds:
uhacca (u(d)-ha,.
or o-ha,.) having knocked out
caviya (cu) having passed away
patva ((p)pa-ap(p)
or (p)pa-ap) having attained
Future Passive Participle:
ramma (ram) delightful
Pronoun:
ta(d) •.• ta(d) . .. that/the ... (is) the same thing as that/
the ...
Indec1inables :
ahe ah I
iva (enclitic) like
u emphatic enclitic particle added to other
indeclinables, thus atha + u > atho
kasma why?, wherefore?
puratthti (also means) formerly
samattatf' completely, perfectly
Prefixes:
ati- very, exceedingly (prefixed to adjectives in
poetry)
du(r)- (also means) hard, difficult
su- (also means) very (prefixed to adjectives in
poetry)
EXERCISE 30
(vatta, or an'lf'lIhubha in transition to vatta)
yena UttarakurU 1 ramma, Maha-Neru 1 sudassano,
manussa tattha jayanti amama apariggaha.
na te bijarp pavapanti, na pi niyanti nangala,
akatthapakimarp salirp paribhuiijanti manusa.
akaI)arp athusarp suddharp sugafldharp talJQulapphalatp
tUlJc;1ikire pacitvana, tato bhuiijanti bhojanarp .
• • • • •
tattha niccaphala rukkha nanadijagalJayuta
mayiirakoiicabhiruda kokilabhi hi Z vaggubhi.
jivatpjivakasadd' ettha atho otthavacittaka
kukkutaka kuliraka vane pokkharasatak1i. (anu!!hubha)
sukasalikasadd' ettha dalJQamanavakani ca,
sobhati sabbakalarp sa Kuveranalini sada.
ito sa uttara disa iti narp acikkhati jano. (anullhubha)
yarp disarp abhipaleti, maharaja yasassi so -
yakkhanarp adhipati Kuvero iti nama so
ramati naccagitehi yakkhehi purakkhato. a
1 In ancient times it was believed that there were four continents, India,
called in Pali Jambudfpo, being the southern continent bordered on the north
by the HimiUaya. Deyond the impenetrable mountains lay the semi-mythical
northern continent, called Uttarakuru-normally inflected in the plural as
the name of the people living there. In Uttarakuru, or perhaps on its border,
was Mount Neru, standing at the centre of the land mass of the earth. This
was a mythical or cosmological conception, and the mountain was supposed to
be inhabited by gods. Later, as geographical knowledge extended, the Utopian
Uttarakuru receded to the antipodes and Neru was assimilated to the concept
of the North Pole as the Earth's axis. Thus the Commentary (SlImatigala
Viltlsinfl tells us that when it is midnight in Jambudfpo it is midday in
Uttarakuru, sunrise in the eastern continent and sunset in the western
continent. In the first line there is resolution of fourth syllable, or read yen' ..
• An easier variant is -,u.hi,'· etc." There is a rare use of aMi as indeclinable
with accusative, meaning" on ", ,. among" (the trees), but no accusative here.
• Two lines of this verse are a syllable short, add emphatic particles? There
are parallel verses with different gods, for the four directions, some of which
fit the metre, so this may be a clumsy substitution of names.
yatha pi muni nandeyya patva sambodhim uttamarp,

evarp nandeyyarp kalyaI)i missIbMvarp gato taya.
Sakko 1 ca me varaJl1 dajja TavatiJl1sanam 2 issaro,

tahaJl1 8 bhadde vareyyahe a evaJl1 kamo dalho mama.
salarp va na cirarp phullarp pitararp te sumedhase

vandamano namassami' yassa s' etadisi paja.
/ .
(tullhubha)
puecMmi brahmanaJl1 SanaJl1kumaraJl1 a
kankhi akankhiJl1 paravediyesu
kattha Hhito kimhi ca sikkhamfmo
pappoti maeeo amatarp brahmalokan ti.·
hitva mamattarp manujesu brahme 7

ekodibhiito karuQadhimutto
ettha Uhito ettha ca sikkhamano
pappoti maceo amatarp brahmalokan ti.
(opacchandasaka 8)
khanti paramaJl1 tapo titikkM, nibbanaJl1 paramaJl1 vadanti
Buddha;
na hi pabbajito pariipagMti samaI)O hoti paraJl1 vihethayanto.
(rathoddhata 8)
geham avasati ce tatMvidho
aggatarp vajati kamabhoginarp,
tena uttaritaro na vijjati,
JambudIpam abhibhuyya iriyati.
1 The king of the gods.
• Ttiuati'1ls4, the collective name (plural) of the traditional gods.
• Unusual junction of ta", + 1JlJa'1l, likewise of va'~yya", + ala~.
• Denominative from namas, the stem of the indeclinable ltamo.
I A name of Iwahman.
• This ti does not form part of the verse.
, bl'ahm6 here means bl'tilamatla (a priest is here questioning Iwahman, wbo
replies in this verse), perhaps as polite lIubstitute.
• For examples of vetalfra see ~xercises 18 and 28, ends of first Passages.
For an example of mixed vet41fya-opacchandasa"a see Exercise 26, fourth verw..
• For example of upajtili see the first verse in Exercise 29.
(upatjhitappacupita)
akkodhafi ca adhiHhahi adasi ca danal1l I
vatth1i.ni ca sukhumani succhavini I
purimatarabhavathito I
abhivisaji mahim iva sura abhivassal1l11
tal1l katvana ita cuto divall1 upapajja I

sukatal1l ca phalavipakam anubhotva. I
kanakatanunibhataco I
idha bhavati suravarataroriva 1 Indo 11
(uggatti)
na ca visatal1l na ca visaci I
na ca pana viceyyapekkhita I
ujju 2 tatha pasatam ujjumano I
piyacakkhuna bahujanal1l udikkhita 11
abhiyogino ca nipul}a ca I
bahu pana nimiUakovida I
sukhumanayanakusala. manuja I
piyadassano ti abhiniddisanti nal1l11
piyadassano gihi pi santo I

bhavati bahunal1l piyayito I
yadi ca na bhavati gihi, samaQo I
bhavati piyo bahfinc\l1l sokanasano 11
.. I assume a mental soul, sir, having-all-limbs-and-parts (use
suffix -in), (having-)not-inferior-faculties (i.e. its faculties are
perfect)."
.. Yet if your soul were mental, PoHhapada, ha ving-all-limbs-
anli-parts, having-not-inferior-faculties, in that case also,
PoHhapada, for you perception would be one thing, soul
another. Then through this course, PoHhapada, it is to be
ascertained how perception will be one thing, soul another.
1 The last r here is a junction consonant.
• In u(j)ju the quantity of the first syllable is variable.
Lesson 30 373
Just let this mental soul be, having-all-limbs-and-parts, having-
not-inferior-faculties, Potthapada: so this man's perceptions
occur as one thing, his ,perceptions cease as another. Through
this course, Potthapada; it is to be ascertained how perception
will be one thing, soul another."
" I assume an immaterial soul, sir; consisting-of-perception."
If Yet if your soul were consisting-of-perception ... perception
would be one thing, soul another ... "
If But is it possible, sir, for me (ins.) to know this: 'Percep-
tion (is) a man's soul,' or • Perception (is) one (thing), soul
another' ? "
If This (is) hard-knowing (present participle, and sentence ·
initial for emphasis), PoHhapada, by you (who-)have-other-
· . ... "
opmlOns
" If, sir, this is by me hard-knowing (not initial), (who-)have-
other-opinions ... however, sir, is (kif!') the universe eternal ?
Only this (is) true, the other false (7) "
If (It is) undetermined, Potthapada, by me: the universe (is)
eternal, only this (is) true, the other false."
" But, sir, is (kif!') the universe non-eternal ... "
" Undetermined ... "
· .. finite ... Undetermined .. . non-finite ... Undeter-
mined ...
If But, sir, is the life-principle (jivaf!' here is neuter) (the same
thing as: use ta(d) repeated) the body? Only this (is) true, the
other false (?) "
" Undetermined ... "
"But, sir, is the life-principle one (thing), the body
another? . .. "
" This also, Potthapada, (is) undetermined by me ... "
· .. is the thus-gone after death? . .. Undetermined ... is not
the thus-gone after death? ... Undetermined ... is and is not
the thus-gone after death? .. Undetermined ... neither is
nor is not the thus-gone after death? ...
" This also, Potthapada, (is) undetermined by me ... "
" Why, sir, (is it) undetermined by the fortunate one? "
"PoHhapada, this (is) not (na h' etaf!') connected-with-
welfare, not connected-with-the-doctrine ... does not lead to
liberation ...
374 1ntrotluction to Pali
.. But what, sir, is determined (explained) by the fortunate

one? "
" , This (is) unhappiness,' Potthapada, (is) determined by me,
'This (is) the-origin-of-unhappiness,' ... 'This (is) the-cessa-
tion-of-unhappiness,' ... 'This (is) the unhappiness-cessation-
going way,' PoHhapada, (is) determined by me."
PRINCIPAL PARTS OF VERBS
IlIItII ColI. ha. Jnl sWot. P.,. Aor.Jnls.,. FfIl.Jnl..,. c-sMiH /~ C'"'* F.p.p. P ....... Mi.-.JJ..-·
a6dl (1) a6d1ati
atlll (VII) attlaeti atUaita
ap (IV) appoti atta
aPlP) (VI~ appoti atta -aM
app (VI) appita
arab (I) araIaati
as (I) attbi bh:lta IIi bhavSati (rat from bhil GC hill pn:L part.. : sanlne , MIlt
opt.: _ l i y i
ab (substitute tor brii) perfeet: u.a 9rd IiDI-
lI).a (0lIl)' causative) ~ p.p. of caUl.: lI),atta
li .
Jp
Is
lisis
(V)
(I)
(U)
Jplll;l.iti
isati
isiJIIsati
atta
(lisita) (1:r lipeti
lisiJpslipeti
(lisituql)
-atri
(I) eti ita {~ya

-xca Ipv. 2Dd siq.: ehi
ikkh (1) ikkbati ikkhita
m
iriy
(I)
(III)
(10)
illjati
ijjlaati
iriyati
iIIjita
iddha ijjlli
il(a)
il(u)
ka6l<h
(1)
(l)
(I)
eoati
iocbati
kaaldaati
etCU
<Sita
ia:hita
kaOkbita
icchilsati
<Sitalp
(locIdtabba)
IwJ4h IradoJbati ~tri

kalll
IIapp
W 11)
(VII)
kaUaeti
ltappeti
(ltatbita)
kappita
ltatheli
kappai
(llatlleluti)
ltapplpeti
(lWhetu1ll)
ltappetvl
(k)kam (1) u-ti kaDta -k.iuai kam""U IluDitalp {kamitvI
-u- lraadtabba 1Dt&aIift: l":26.bmstf
kam (VII) IIimeti kaDta kamaIdya

kamp (1) kampati ltampita kampeti
{~peti ~ {=~
Jw- (VI) {lditabba 1pY. 2Ddsma.: karobI
karoti kata akisI ltarisati klitUIII e:!ya
(k)kass (VII) u.a
klis (1) (klisati) kliaeti
Id (V) ~ti ~M)
Idt (I) ct.Id.: 'Ii~
ItildcclllIti)
kir (10) kinei ~ -kid -kirlp
kilam (1) Idlamati kilaDta kiJamilllti IriIamed
kiIis (lll) Idlissati kilitCU
kujj (1) kujjati kujjita kajjltYl
InIt (VII) koteti IroteIi
kup (Ill) kuppati kupita kuppi (kG" ( =ti)
(k)ku$ (1) kosati -kaIi koAtvI IllDlltabba
IIhaJ;a (1) kha9ati ~M 1pY- 2D41iDc.: kIIaoDI1
~Idaam
kIIa1 W11) khamati
khliIeti !rh'! hi
.... nn"",.
-"
R_ C- Pr... 8", sittc. P.~. Attr.8,1I';"'. FMI. 8", ,;..,. c.wu. ,.,..._ G-.l F.~.~.
p...., JI~
(k)kbi
(k)kba
(I)
(IJI)
Wti
Wyati
Wta -1IIaioi kbit_ -Idol,.. W,...U
khid (1) kllldati W 'la kbSdi Icbldan',.
(k)ldIip (le1 IdIipa~ ldIiita . IdIipiaati kbipltvl
(k)kbI (Il ) lchlyatl IchIna kblyi kblyitabba
latlt (11) pnthati ptliila
pm (I) pccbati pla {apmjsi
-CacclJi pmiIIati pmetl "",tuJII {PDtn
-pmma
{PDtabba
pJI1I1I1l,...
{root ace.: ~
ipY~bj" siDe.:
'Callchi
{=
Rarah (1) prahati CU"alJila Carabi Canhitabba
pves (1) ,awsati cavosiDati
ipY. 2Dd 1iDc·: PI)ltIbI
(c)pb (V) ~ti phlta pbesi cIbeti
Pdh (1) ,Jdbatl plba
~
(1) glhati siIba (cibi) PJaetvl
(le) ciJati
CUP CUtla deIi4. : jicuccbati
i:, b ar In
(I)
clyan.
CbaratJ
cJtasati
ctt.a
pasla
,sJitabb&
deUd..: jipaa:!nti
~
(Ill) pi,...ti Iblyitvl
ca
ci W>
cuati
cilJiti
catla
carila
cita
acari carioaati d~ ~ ...... cmtn carilabba
(-ccrJ'&) dyaU
cikkIa (1) cilddJati -cikkhi cikkhiss:ati (cikldlitUlp)
cu (1) canU CUla c:ivetl cavitvl
ebadd dJa4~ta cbo44nnti ~
='
(VU) cha44eti
cbad (VU) cbJdeti (cIWlita) ~
chid (11) chiDdati} chiDditvl
chiJma chiDdi { : : ; t i } ched1peti chijjati
cbid
~an
1Ill)
111 ) chijjati
jiyat; jita -jlyi jaDeti
pr (IJI) jlyati
U)jal
)1 m jalati
jayati
jalila -jali jalisuti jiJeti jalitvl
jiya
ji (V) jiDiti jita -jil1i
f-jil1itvi { p.p. acti.... : litiYia.
(c!eIid.: jiclsati)
g~
(1) '!rati ji_
(1) ~nti jlvita IlvituJII jlvitabba IpY. 2Dd .me.: jIribl
g'jbe
6)6ap R/tI) jbi,..tl
Upeti
jbiyita
btta
jUyi
aipesi Uposaati
jhSpeti )biyitu1l1
tipetu1l1
(6)U (V) jlaltl 6lta {iiDi {iilUssati Upeti UtuJII {6atvl {llnitabba Uyati ipY. 2Dd 1iDc·: jhIhI
aatisi _ti -Illya ·6eyya
{tiUbatl {~ti
(tllhl (I) -lItiti
-\baIIati
~ al\hbi '\bahiaati
{Ihlpeti
tbapayatl IltitUJl1 {:=tvI p.p. of c:aas.: lltiplla
takk (VII) takketi takkila
taccb (I) taccbati taccbi
laD (VI) IaDOti aGr. pa& Sal siIJc.: atIAI
(Vt
tap
,.
...
taw I I)
lapeti
tappootJ
1_11
talta
~~
laP!*f
,1••1 IArIooaIl 1a.-tJ un'o"" larltva
"..,;;,'..,<-""',=-",,-'.......:.:....;.,...-" ._- n" ·~~~· _

1-"
~ · _____ ____c-'_-"'''''''= =:::·_· __ ·· ___·______ _--,.-. .. __ ".__ ______
tij (I) _ .: t.i~
tij (VII) tejeti tejita tejai tejetvi

tus (Ill) tuaati hiUba
(t)tbar (I) tlw-:lti tbata tbarlpetl ClwiM
(t)tbu (V) tbulLiti -tbuni
dam daDta
dab (I) dabati da\,l4lla cbhiluIII
d1 (1) {deti
dadlti
{diDD
(~) ad1si dusati d1peti cU.luIII {datd
-d1ya
{dltabba
deyya dlyali {p.p. of caus.: dapil!L
.pv. 2xId SUIC. : dehi
d1 (IIJ) diyati dia.Da -diyi diyillati diyipeti { diyil\"il.
-d1ya
cl.iy (Ill) dibbati dibbi di~ti
cI.is (l0) disati (disitwp) -dissa
dis (lII) dissati
(d)dis paeati di\tba addas1 {dalckhiti das$eti da\;!IuIII disYJ (danbabbo dissati {aor. of ca.... : daaesi
dakklrissali cbssaDlya p.p. of ca.... : dassita
dis (VII) deseti desita desesi desessati desetuIII
dev lVUI devesi
dhar VII) dhJreti dhlressati
dbi
dhl
(I)
(Ill)
dabati }
dhlyati hita {-dahi
-dbiiyi
-dahiturp
dhituIII
-dabitvi
-<lbaya
dhiv (I) dbivati dhivita dhi\~tvi
dbil
ut
nand
!ril)
(I)
dbulLiti
naccati
naadati
-dbU&i
-aaadi
nacc:eti
naaditUIJI IWldiM naaditabba
Dam (I) namati Data ILimeti
nas
Dab
(UI)
(II)
nassati
nandhati oa~~.
na -nandhi
n!seti
-DaDdhitvi
of (J) neti ofta -nayi (_ti) lLi,..,ti netuIII {netvi . netabba ofyati
-neyya
nh1 (Ill) n(a)hiyati nahipeti n(albM
P"" (I) pac:ati pakka -paci pacissati plceti paeitvl
pae (111) pac:cati
pat (J) patati patita -pati patissati plteti patitvi ipv. of caUS. 2nd oiDc". :
pltdU
pad (Ill) pajjatl panna {pajji pajjissati pldeti paijituIII -pajja pajiitabba
apiidi
pabb (I) pabbati
pass (1) passati (rest from (d)dis)
pl (I) pivati plta aply; pivissati plyetl pltuIII piYitvl ~~bo
{desid.: p;puati, tu. of
ca.... : plyetvi, p.p. of
caUL: plyita
pAy (1) parati
pi! (VII) pileti
pucch (I) pucchati pu\\ha pucchi plccbilsati pucchituIII pucchitabba
potb (VII) potbeli po\~
~ (VII) poseti poses' po&3petl posetUIII p.p_ of callS.: posipita
(VII) iijeti piijita pUjessatl pQjetabbo
~
pes
(I)
(VII)
fpiirati)
pesoti
~ (pilri)
pesesi
pilreti
RooI c-. Pra. Jrtl....,. P.p Aor. Wm.,- Fill. Jrtl,;.,. CM m... Ifljirtitill GmIM F.p.p. PIUriH II'-~"
nr (tit nrali 'VIlta -van variosatl YVitri
...
nr ( I) riml vkesi vlreaati
". (I) vasati {'''''ttba
Wlita -vasi vabsati vlleti (vasitwp) -v_~ pop. active: nsita. . .t
r
(I) vaaati 'ftt~ avassi nai-ati
vab vabati riheti vayhati
vi I) riti
ri III) riyali ""ta -riyi dylaati ripeti
vis VII) viscti wltU "fIIetvl
v;c (VII) vilta Yicca
Yid (1 0 ) (IlOt uoed) 9IOCIetI
Yid (11) (YiDdatil Yidita vediosatl vioditwp ..idity.l
{~
Yid
Yid ~I)
11) :t~ wdesi ftdiIsatl
YidA 11) 'rijjbati 'riddha Yljjbitwp
vis (1 0 ) visati .viIi ftIeti vilitwp {"~tvI
-....a
~
- nrre
'fijati
n~ ft1hetvl
vedh I) vedbati
I) _ti aattU
oak
oak(k)
IV)
sakkoti}
aakla>ti
uakkhi
Iakk aakkati sakkita
,s)saj 1 aajati attba 1aji
.)saj • I) sajati
-
sajj ajia
ADd
_bIl
rh)
I)
saDCbti
sambbati
santa
-sambbi umbbeti
sar (I) .anti
{=-
santa
-sari Weli sitv.l
~
,s/sar sarati santa
-)sas I) _li sasiuati
Ab
s.l
air
HI)I) aabati
olyali
sketi
,,",yila
-sabi
slyi
-uyba
sayitd
Welv.l
slyanlya
sb
si 11I)) s.isati
set!
si\lba
sayita
-sas; dsissati sUitvl olsitabba
pIU. part.: sayloa
~
sita
(11 sikkbat! sikkhita sikkMpeti sikkhitwp sikkhitabba
.c (11) sillcati sitta ·!illc.i siAcissati
~M/)
sidb sedheli
sis siJpsati siqas.ipeti
!lis sissati sitlha
sill ICIetI sit\ba sesesi
..
(1)If -olya
old (I) IIclati {Di-siDDa
pa1alll1a -sIdi sldissati {sId.lpeti
liddl -sajja
(I) ..... u
BIBLIOGRAPHY
A choice of authorities on the language, texts, and reference books for
further study.
LANGUAGE
Saddanfti (Sd., by Aggavatpsa, + twelfth century, in Pali. Beautifully and
exactly edited by H. Smith, Lund, Gleerup, . 1928 ... the last part of the
indices being in preparation by N. Simonsson, with exhaustive indices including
a concise dictionary not confined to Sd. itself and a synopsis of the grammatical
system): The finest and most comprehensive grammar, and standard authority
on all questions of grammatical analysis (usually followed in this book).
Palt Literatllre and Language (by W. Geiger, originally in German. English
translation by Ghosh, perfectly correct except when too literal, University of
Calcutta, 1943, and since reprinted): A historical phonology and morphology
with a brief survey of the literature.
A Critical Pali Dictionary (CPD, by Trenckner, Andersen, Smith, and others.
Vol. I = words beginning with a-, Copenhagen, 1924-48, in twelve parts;
Vol. H, Copenhagen, 1960, in progress): The only comprehensive dictionary.
but its scale and careful method have resulted in slow progress.
Pal; Tipi!akattl Concordance (F. L. Woodward and others, PTS 1952,
in progress): A basic tool for the study of the grammar and lexis of the
Canon.
AbAidhanappadfpika (by MoggalHina, + twelfth century, in PaiL Edited
by the Thera Subhoti with English equivalents, an index, and notes,
Colombo, fifth edition. 1938): A dictionary of the medieval rather than of the
Canonical language.
Pali-English Dictiotlary (PED, by T. W. Rhys Davids and W. Stede. PTS,
1921-25, since reprinted): The fullest dictionary yet completed. but concen-
trates on etymology rather than on actual usage.
A Diclionary of the Pali Language (by Childers, London, Kegan Paul.
Trench, Trubner, 1875): .A dictionary which is old but still important as it
gives some words and meanings (Canonical as well as medieval) missed by
PED; largely dependent on the AbhidhanappadrpikiJ.
EngUsII-Pa/i Dictionary (by A. P. Buddhadatta, PTS, 1955).: Modem Pali.
A Pali Reader (by Andersen, Copenhagen, 1901): An introduction to the
medieval language of the commentaries, about 1.000 years posterior to the
Drgha, consisting mainly of narratives from the Commentary on the la/aka
(sce below under Khllddaka Nikdya).
TEXTS
Tipilaka = th<l Canon of the Theravada School of Buddhism in Pali
(complete editio~~s: in romanized script mostly published by the PTS, in
Siamese script, Bangkok, which is more accurate but gives ' few variant
readings, in Sinhalese script, Colombo, in Burmese script, Rangoon; new ones
in Cambodian script, Pnompenh, and in the devandgarr script, Naland1i, now
in progress): Consists of the Vinaya, SlIllanla, and Abhidhamma Pi!akas.
Vinaya Pi/aka (ed. Oldenberg, London, 1879-83; translated by I. B.
Homer as the Book of th~ Disciplim, five volumes, PTS, 1936--52): After
Abhidhatllma Pifaka (ed., PTS, 1883-1923, also more correct and complete
editions from Bangkok); Seven systematic works on philosophy ,ela\;lorated
from the ancient lists of topics of the dhamllla called M atika (which were in
their original form common to all schools of Buddhism, whereas the Abhi-
dhamtlla was elaborated during the period of the great schisms of the - 4th
'to - 2nd century and maintains the strictly Theravilda doctrine): Dham,,,a-
satigavi, Vibhaliga, Dhiitukathli, Puggalapaiiliatti, Kalhiivatthu, l,'amalia and
Pa!!hiina.
Dhammasallgavi (PTS, 1885): Translated by C. A. F. Rhys Davids as
A · Buddhist Manual of Psychological Ethics (London, Royal Asiatic Society,
second ed. 1923).
Vibhatiga (PTS, 1904): The most ancient Abhidhamma text and closest
in content to the SlItlOIIIO. Translated by U Thittila, I'TS. 1969.
Kathdvatthll (ascribed to Moggaliputta Tissa, ft. - 250, cd. Taylor, PTS,
1894-97, two vols., best PTS edition of an Abhidhanrllla text): Translated by
S. Z. Aung and C. A. F . Rhys Davids as Points of Controversy (PTS, reprinted
1960), contains Theravlida refutations of the special doctrines of other schools
of Buddhism.
Mohavicchedalll (by Kassapa, + twelfth century, cd. A. P . Buddhadatta
and A. IC Warder, PTS, 1961): A detailed synopsis of the entire Abhidhamma
Pi/aka, together with Buddhaghosa's commentaries on it, in the guise of
a commentary on the Miitiliii .
Abhidhammatlhasatigaha (by Anuruddha, + twelfth century, published
JOl/rnal PTS, 1884): A very concise compendium of the Abhidhnmmll.
Translated rather freely as CompendiunI of ,Philosophy by S. Z. Aung and
C. A. F. Rhys Davids (pTS, reprint 1956).
Gllidc IhrouGh I"e Abhidhamma Pi/aka (by Nyanatiloka, in English, Colombo,
1938): A very useful survey.
Netti (PTS, 1902, cd. Hardy): An early post-canonical systematic work on
exegesis and methodology which also surveys the Canon. Translated by
N'auamoli as The Guide (PTS in the press).
Jlisllddllimagga (by Duddhaghosa, + fifth century, ed. Warren and D.
I{osambi, Harvard Oriental Series, 1950). A systematic and comprehensive
exposition of the Theravada Buddhist doctrine as understood in Ceylon in
Buddhaghosa's time, based on old comml'ntarics and the traditions of the
monks. It was Dnddhnghosa who prepared, in fact translated and edited in
Fali from the older Sinhalese materials, the standard commentaries on the
Canon which are now in use. These often refer to the Visllddhilllagga for
detailed explanations of doctrine, hence it is a necessary complement to them,
being originally part of the same ancient body of commentarial texts. It is,
however, complete in itself and may be read first as an introduction to the
study of the medieval phase of Theravllda. There is an excellent and exact
translation ' by ~a.l)amoli under the title The Path of Pm·lficatio,. (Colombo,
Semage, 1956).
LITERATURE AND REFERENCE

(Cf. Pali Lilna/llre ami Langllage, above, and also the EpilegomeQa to CPD
Yot. I, pp. 37· ft ., which gives a full bibliography of the literature in PaIL)
History of India" Litera/lire (by Winternitz, English edition published by
Bibliography
the University of Calcutta): Vol. II includes Pali literature. This is the best
modem work on Indian literature.
Jiayly Jlislory of Buddhism ill Ceylon (by Adiklram. Migoda. Ceylon. 1946) :
A "bailie work for thc history and chronology of the Theravlda School in
Ceylon. as well as a detailed piece of research on the nature and origins of the
old (pre-Duddhaghosa and no longer extant in its original form) commentarial
literature.
Pali Littrat'lr, of Cey/o" (G. P. l\Ialalasckcra. London. Royal Asiatic
Society. 1928).
Dir.tional'Y of Pali Proper Names (by G. P. Malalasckcra. PTS reprint
1960): Detailed information and references for the names in the whole field
of l'ali literature.
University of Ceyloll Review (1943 . . . a journal which frequently carries
articles on Pali literature and the history of Buddhism).
Hinduism and Buddhism (by C. Eliot. London. 1921. rnprinted 1954):
Includes in its first volume an interesting commentary on the doctrines of the
Pali Canon in their historical setting.
The Centt'al Conceptioll of nuddhism alia IlIe Meaning of the Wora" Dhal'ma ..
(by Stcherbatsky. London. Royal A!liatic Society. 1923: the Calcutta reprint
is seriollsly defective as the diacritical marks are omitted): Although based
on the Sanskrit texts of the Sarvlstivlda (Sabbatthivlda) School this book
contains the sOllndest introduction to the study of the philosophies of all
schools of Buddhism.
The WOllder that was India (by A. L. Basham. London. Sidgwick and
Jackson. 1954. since reprinted): General background to Indian studies.
Po/i M('("~ (hy A. K. Warder, rIS. 1967). A historical study of the develop·
ment of Pali Illctrl!S ill the !;ontext of Indian mctrks ~ellcrally; leading to
l'ondllsillns about thc histury of literature.
/mliol/ Buddhism (by A. K. WilrMr. Delhi. Mot ilal Jjanilrsidass. 1970).
A j!cllcral introduclion (0 Buddhism. its orij!inill dOl·lrilll'. the 'cighteen' carly
sehools. includin!! Th .. rav:i<la or Stllllviravuda. :lRd M:'h:iy:ina and Mantray:ina.
Jjllddhisl phill'Sl11)hy is systematically pre~entcd frolll the nrijlinal lexls. along
with ils clhks or s(ldill teachin!!.
/"diol/ A'4" ,1'U U(l'/'{/(I//'(' (by A. K. Warder. Delhi. Mutilal Uallarsidass. 1972 in
projlrl:ss). Volumc Il.t1974, indudes two ehuptcrs on the I'ali 010011 from the
literary poillt Ill' vkw.
/:'1II',1'dOllo('''in 0/ BllddhiIIII (edd. (;. 1'. Millalasckcru. O. 11. dc A. Wijl·sckera.
GOVCrIIllIl'J\1 Ill' ('cyluJ\. 1961 . in pro)!rcss). Artidcs by numerol" l'o"uibu\ors on
Buddhist namcs illIll tcrms.
PALl-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
Verbs are given as prefix + root. The prefixes are shown unmodified by
junction, but the verbs are placed as they would be after the junction of
prefix and root.
Nouns in -a/a are given in the form of the nominative singular to show the
gender, whereas the adjectives in -a are given In the stem form. Other nouns
are usually given in the stem form with the gender indicated, except those in
-I and -Il, which are feminine unless otherwise marked. All stems in -tJ$ are
nouns, masculine or neuter.
For the order, initial bracketed letters indicating the possibility of doubling
are not counted.
a ajo goat
a- not, non, un- ajja (ind.) today
allallha unCUltivated, unploughed ajjalan4ya (ind.) for today
alla~a without the red coating which ajjhatla inner
lies underneath the husk (of rice) ajj"altal1l (ind.) internally
aAara~'ya impossible, invincible adhi-4-1I11S (I) live on, exploit, suhllist
aAalla unsound by
akalilla timeless adhi-upa-gam (I) join, adhere to
alliccalfl what should not be done adhi-o-glJ" (I) put out to (sea), cross
alliriyalfl inaction over (ocean), plunge into
allusala bad aile" (I) turn (on a lathe)
4-(II)IIus (1) abuse, scold aRRa (pronoun) other (repeated -)
allkhadhullo gambler one , . ,another, the. • • ia a
allllha,al1l expression (word, locution) different thing from the . , .
4-(k)kha (I) tell, report (esp. tradition) aRnalara (pronoun) a certain, a
allkJililaf (masc.) reporter anRatfa (ind.) except for, apart from
allkhi (neut.) eye (ins., dat., abl.)
akkho die (dice) aR11atM (ind.) otherwise
akkho axle a1111adatthu (ind.) absolutely, uni-
agtJ,alfl house, home versally
aggalHla knowing the beginning, a11nll knowledge, insight
primeval, original a1111"'ar (mase.) learner, grasper
aggatli pre-eminence, supremacy a11114to stranger
a-(g)gah (V) seize a11Rena aRflalfl (ind.) irrelevantly
aggi (masc.) fire "I1"a eight
agge (ind.) since allhatlg'ka having eight faetora
aggo top, tip, the supreme allh4dasa eighteen
atlgal1l limb, characteristic, factor all"""a'1' eight da ya
atlg,rasa (fern. -I) radiant (poetic) al!lIikal1l bone
atlguli (fern.) finger, toe 1144"a rich
acelo naked ascetic 1144"amaso fortnight
accalflllusa beyond the hook, defying a#ho (or adj.) half,
the hook (elephant) a~u minute, atomic
aceayena (ind.) after, through (time a~u (mase.) atom
gen.) a~~avo fiood
acclJdJiliya (gerund ali-/J-dha) putting alj (prefix) over, very, exceedingly,
on top of (may be prefixed to adjectives in
accha clear, bright, sparkling poetry)
acehariya surprising ali-(II)kam (I) pass over
/f-(c)ehad (VII) dress al'kkanta surpassing
anu-bandh (I) follow aparanto the future, the end, a future

anu-budh (Ill) understand or final state
anilbodho understanding aparapara". (ind.) successively
anl/-bMs (I) say after ap"riyalll" unlimited
anu-Ma (1) experience, enjoy, observe aparisesQ without remainder, com-
anu-mud (I) approve, express plete, absolute
appreciation aparihiiniya imperishable, leading to
anll-yuj (I1) submit prosperity
anuyoga practiSing apa-loll (VU) take leave, give notice
anI/yoga practice, examination apa-vad (I) disparage
anu-rakkh (1) look after. retain aPho misery
anuloma". (ind.) in natural order, in apara'1l hither, this world
normal order apa,u /a open
anu-vac (1) (caus. = recite after) api (ind.) (sentence/clause initial)
anu-(s)sar (I) recollect with opt. = perhaps, with ind. Is
anu-sas (1) advise, instruct polite ioterrog. = does 1, do I, did 1
anu-(s)su (V) hear of (in junction also app and ap')
amka many api ca (ind.) nevertheless
aneja imperturbable apullila'1l demerit, evil
am/aka pure apubba'1l acarima'1l (ind.) simul-
anta finite taneously
antamaso (ind.) even apa-i (1) go from, go away (poetic)
antara (prefix) within ape(k)hh4 intention, expectation
antara-dhiJ (Ill) disappear app (= api)
ant/ml (ind.) within, between (ace.), ap(p) (VI) reach (=ap (IV»
meanwhile, whilst (loc.) appa little
antariJyo obstacle, danger, plague appaka little (poetic)
antarena (ind.) between (gen.) appalisa'1lvedana not feeling, not
antalikkha". sky experiencing
an/avant- finite appalta unobtained
antepura". citadel. palace appamatta not-negligent
anlevasin apprentice appamiJtla immeasurable
anto side, end, extreme appamildo diligence, care
andhalliJ,o darkness, obscurity appesakllha inferior
anna". food abiJhira'1l (ind.) without exclusion,
anvad (eva) (ind.) behind, after without excluding anyone
anvayo inference abbhantara internal, home
anvaya (ger. anu-i) following, in con- ablli-ll-cillllh (I) slander, calumniate
sequence of (acc.) ablli-u(d)-kir (1-) sprinkle .
anvtiyiko follower aMi-u(d)-gam (I) be disseminated
apa (prefix) oft, away abbhuta wonderful, marvellous
apa-(k)lIam (1) go off, withdraw iJbbho/lasa open, free, out of doors,
apagata- without, free from open air
apacco offspring abhabba unable, incapable (with dat . .
apadana'1l reaping, harvest of the action)
apa-nah (I1) tie back, untie abhj (prefix) towards, about
apa-nr (1) lead away abhi-(1Ilkam (I) go forward, advance ·
apanlldana". driving away, removing abhikllanta excellent
(poetic) abhij4/j (fern.) class of birth
apara (pronoun) another abhijjh4 desire (with loco of object)
apara". (ind.) further, afterwards abhljjhlUu (sometimes -a masc. ;
aparaddha failed, offended fem.: -un.) covetous
390 Imroauceion to Pali
lI$ammoso not-forgetting 11111\110 sickness, fever
asiJlIasa"i non-violence cJlappo energy (purifying ascetic
asU; (fern.) eighty energy)
MU (pronoun) he, she, that, yon atap;n energetic
asuc; impure, dirty. vile "u,a affiicted
'lI$ublla foul
lI$ua without .remainder, complete.
'·d' (I) or (Ill) take
Ulna"i taking
absolute U, (masc.) beginning. opening
a&samo hermitage 44r1l41JO disadvantage
a-(s)sas (I) breathe in 4411;pali (masc.) lord
assiJdo tasting, enjoyment 4411ipauyya"i lordship, supremacy
11$$410 reaseurance 4na1Jc""i infinity
all (only perfect) say cJnatUlo joy
alla"i (pronoun) I 4nisa"iso benefit
"IIa'a new anupubb" (fern. -I) eystematic
"IIi (masc.) snake ilnubA4110 power, magnificence, might
all'"isiJ harmlessness ,·patl (Ill) acquire, produce, get,
allicclJallallo mushroom, toadstool have (intransitive)
allita"i disadvantage, hardship ap""water
"M (ind.) ah I (poetic) 4-pueell (I) ask leave (of absence)
"Mlllallo non-harasser 1b4dllilla ill
aM (jnd.) ah I (expresses surprise- 46Ullo illness
approving-and delight) . ,·bAa, (only p.p.) bring, carry
4-bAuj (1-) fold the legs
a Ibllogo enjoyment
iI (prefix) to ilma (ind.) yel
iJ-IIanllll (I) wish '-man' (VII) address
iJII"ppo deportment, style ilmalalla"i embUc myrobalan (medl·
4114'0 feature, peculiarity cinal fruit)
411410 sky, space 4j1atana"i sphere
411iifcaififa"i nothingness 4yati"i (ind.) in future
4-IIul (VII) strike 'YII$matl' venerable
411111a confused, tangled '·yl (I) come, approach
IIfatiJgala"i (ind.) each time (it) came ,sylmo length
iI-gam (I) come (caus.-or (VII)- lyu (neut.) life, age
= wait) 4yul" full of (poetic)
4gamana"i coming 4rall4 (ind.) far from (abl.)
IIfamo coming, body of doctrine, l,af1ifalla forest, living in the forest
tradition ,s,atld"a (p. p. l.,abA (I) and I·,UII
ilg"mma (ger. • -g"m) depending on, (VII))
as a result of (acc.) [iJgaftlllil clrabblJa (ger. 4·,abA (I)) with reference
= having come, having returned] to, about (acc.)
Igllalllna"i death I.,,,bh (I) begin, Initiate
4-ca, (I) conduct oneself 4-,U" (VII) please, satilfy (acc.)
/ka,iyo teacher 4,ilmo park
ifc4,0 conduct '-,ue (VII) inform (dat.)
4-ci,."II (I) call, describe 1-'14" (1-) climb, mount (caUl.: put ·
iJj'lJin living by on top of, load, show, show up,
4jlIJ0 livelihood disprove)
4-(11)114 (V) learn, grasp (fig.) I,oga well (healthy)
iJtla (caus.) order, command ,s,ogya"i health
iltlatla (p. p. cJtla caus.) ordered "opitIJ disproved
PaU-English Vocabula,y 39 I
aJa10 home 14 (prefix) (= u(dj) up
aJumpa", bit. piece uiu 8traight, erect
410110 light (illumination) ulu (neut.) (the gender ftuctuatea)
allaratla", shelter season
a-lIas (I) dwell in. live In ullama higheat
allasatllllfara", reat houae. hoatel utlara northern, higher, further
(maintained by a local council) utlar4saftgo cloak
allasalllo room. cell. dwelling. "'IaN (ind.) beyond, further, more
residence utla_ .tretched out, lying down
-illlaM bringing utili_itA ahallow (and fig.: .. eaaily
411141$0 living in, dwelling understood," If simple ")
alii/a turbid. muddy utlll$O terror
a\IUSO (Ind.) air I (polite address "(d) (prefix) up
between equals) udara", belly, lap, bosom
4saftU appr~ension, doubt, fear u(d)-II-IIa' (I) apeak, say, promulgate
45a_", aeat u(d)-Itujj (1) eet upright
Isabha (fern. -.) bold u(dj-(I)lah (V) learn, memorize
asallo influx, influence u(dj-(I)gllar (I) ooze
a-sic (11) shower over, pour over u(d)-chid (Ill) annihilate (paalive
41-$'11 (I) practice = be annihilated)
a-han (I) strike "ccludo annihilation
!I-liar (1) bring, fetch u(d)-(mU (I) stand up, get up, riee
allaro food (incl. fisurative), up, arise, come out from, emi8'f&te
gathering; district u/lU_", rising
II-II'tI~ (I) wander u(dj-lar (I) crols
.Idalta", water
ullallamatl; (mase.) water-jar
i (1) go (poetic)
,"'''a (ind.) here I
ill (ind.) this, that, thus
uaatla lofty, elated
.,d4_", exalted utterance, joyful
ito (Ind.) from this, than this utterance (denom. "4i1,,,t' lpeak
with exaltation, speak with joy)
iltlla", (Ind.) thus, in this way
uailllu (ind.) or
itlhalla", this world
itthl (fem.) woman udillllllitar (masc.) looker at
udd4po foundations
ilia", (pronoun) it, this (ind. - here)
udde1to sickness, vomiting
iUIIa powerful
uadesilta referring to
iUII. (fem.) power (marvellous)
uddeso synopsis, summary, lum-
idlla (ind.) here, in this connection
marized description
itNlaltll.,o royal stake (see Vocab. 30)
u4dlla", (ind.) above. up, after,
itNlriya", faculty
beyond (ab1.)
ibblla domestic
u4dhagl'lta uplifting
My (1.) move, move about, go on (lit.
u4dhIJCca", pride. vanity
and fig.) (poetic)
uddllIJCcallullllucca", pride, vanity.
iliA (ind., enclitic) like
conceit
is (I) wi8h, desire (H isu ")
"(d)-liar (I) dig up, collect. raise
isi (masc.) sat', seer
upa (prefix) up to. towards
issaro lord, god
upa-i (I) go to (poetic)
ilia (ind.) here, in this caee
upa-(II)ltam (I) attack, faU upon, go
14 into
., (Ind.: emphatic enclitic particle "pallara'(la", resources
added to other indeclinable., upalllli/lSo corruption
poetic) "uPata going to
392 I nt,oauelion 10 Pali
upa-",," (I) go to ubluUo (iod.) in both W&)'I. on both
upaglllJlin harming sldea, both
upru,'a (p.p. upa-,' (V» accumulated ubluaYII (pronoun) both
upa-j'IJ (I) live by. live upon ubAo (numeral) both
upa-(1lI1k1 (I) serve. attend on/to u",,,,allta mad
(usually caUl.; dat.)
up!J#lkIko attendant. follower
U""'M,,.(I1)park(caUl. = diemlu)
u(d)~uj
uptl#lkIna". serving. attendin, on, "". bolOm, own (e.g. child)
audience ",4"0 miShty
upa441uJ (or neut.) half
upa#luJptJIlua". (ind.) halfway
"'""'PO boat, canoe
u ,,111>110 bull .
upa-dalt (I) torment. worry ussarlo abundance
upa-nam (I) (caus. = offer, serv_ "(d)-s." (I) try, undertake, take up
dat. of person and acc. of thin,) "{d)-lid (eauI. Im,u". = 11ft onto)
uP"""-U)jM (I) observe. think about ussuA. eaBer
upa.ni(")-IJall (I) derive fI"uAlra". eagerness, impatience
upanis,4ya (gerund of 141'.""-(')") (denom. ,,,,"AAali be eapr, be
dependlog 00 impatient)
upo.ptld (Ill) transmi,rate. be reborn
upapt,4 oppression, trouble
upom4 simile (fern.) thigh
UPM' (Ind.) on top (of) (precedn the 4Iru tUau. (,er. u(d)-lua" or o.luan) haviD,
word it reJatea to, which i. u.ua1ly
in the loc.) Imockedout
up.-nldlf (Ill) atop. cease, od
upa-labA (I) (paee.= exist)·
.... (1) come (poetic)
•
uplll4potfMII propaganda
up.]M (VIl)pJay (inatrumot. etc.), .Ju& (pronoun, numeral) ODe, a, pi.
sound tome
up.,II".-luar (I) visualize u, imqiDe .A."..II definite, decided, confident
as (two aces.) .A."..IIIII (ind.) for certain: certainly,
up.,o".-(")Ao", (I)
141'1110",0 calm
'A to, approach definitely
,Ad. (adj.) alooe, tlil,le
UpIINO",·ptld (Ill) enter ioto '~/lU1I (pronoun) someone, IOme
upllla",ptuU entrance thin,(s)
up.suM (I) appear beautiful, lhine ,AlaID (ind.) on one aide, to,ether, 011
upo-4-d. (Ill) be attached either Ilde
upadlna". attachment
upayaso misery. dnpair
upasalto lay disciple
.A.,.,.
.AaIIa". unity
extreme
,A.llliA._ (lad.) finally, conclullvely
upasi"IJ female lay diec.iple ,A.""lrll (pronoun) each one
uP'(If)AlWo detached 1111,,''';''0 burglar,bur,lary
up'{AI)AY equanimity. detachment .A4d1lS1I eleven
upolatAID observance day. sabbath "'t'JMtJlstJIi nineteen (,Ac2M == ..one
u(d).ptld (Ill) happen, OC:C:llr, ariM, less than ")
become ,1104...-61111 (I) conlist entirely of
upp4do occurrence. ariling. pro- _ter
duction "'odi conceotrated
u(d)-IJaA (I) (ubbalttJIi) carry 01 .AodiblullJo linsleness, concentration
ubbatllfan4 imprisonment .Ita(d) (pronoun) he, Ihe, It. this
t4bbiUtJiltJllta". elation, exUltation ,Ita"alti (Ind.) now. at preMnt
ubb"o apprehension, uxiety ,tUisll (ad;.) this sort (of)
Pali-English Vocabulary 393
,/liivalli (ind.) so far, to that extent, IIa""h4 doubt
to this extent lIa""11,,, doubting, in doubt
ell"a (ind:) here, in this case II",ct (ind.) perhaps 1. did 1. I doubt
mat?' (pronoun) him (ace. sg.. mase, whether 1,1 hope 1, aren't you 1
only, enclitic) 1Ia1l1l1a". bitterness
ella (ind. : enclitic; in close junction IIa1/ha". firewood
sometimes va or yeva) only, alone, IIat,Ji/I"a (or IIan-) younger, youngest
just, surely hatlO the tine red powder between the
61J4t?' (ind.) thus, 80, yes grain and husk of rice
evam eva (ind.) just so, likewise lIa'.l/alla". (U thorn ") subversive ele-
evat?' sanlat?' (ind,) in that case, in ment, rebel, bandit
such case liatsha black, dark
esikat?' pillar kalama (pronoun) which?, which
esilla£!"ilyin- firm as a pillar one?
eso this IIal' how many ? (Lesson Z6)
"'ipassilla verifiable halta, (masc.) maker
IIalla,asuppo old winnowing-basket
o IIalllla (ind.) where?
o (prefix) down, off lIalh (VII) relate. tell
o-(II)IIom (1) descend into, arise within IIalha". (ind.) how?, why?
oUassa (ger. of o-(II)IIas$ (VII»' IIalhii talk, story
having dragged down, having Ilad4 (ind.) when?
dragged away bdd ca (ind.) at any time, at some
01l4ro meanness, degradation, vanity time, ever
01l4so opportunity IIaddamo mud
o-gdll (I) plunge into IIanalla". gold
ollllav",iltallo a kind of bird kanto agreeable. lovely
o·Iar (I) pass down. collate (caus. = ha"lii,o wildernell, semi-desert
check) IIapp (VII) arrange. put in order.
oltappa". shame. fear of blame organize
odalla (fem. -.114) having water /lappo arrangement, order. rule, aeon
odano boiled rice llaea/i""4ro solid matter, lolid (food)
odlfla white kam (VII) love
o-dhcl (I) put down (/llham (I) walk; intensive = walk
onfta (p.p. 0-"') withdrawn, removed up and down, walk about, take
opanayilla fruitful exercise
ppaplflilla transmigrating /lamanlya lovely
oMaso radiance "amma". work, action
orasa own (cf. 14ra) kamman (neut.) action
orima nearer, this side /lamma,,'o work, undertakiDg.
o-ru" (I) descend business
=
o-lup (11) (caus. scrape off) hammliro smith
0-1011 (VII) look at har (VI) make, do, work
oJarilla coarse, gross. material -lIaratsa (fem. -I) making
O-Va4 (I) admonish "ara~fya". duty. business
o-sa"" (I) draw back. retire hara"a cj (ind.) at some time
ossall"a (p.p. o-(s)sai I (I» dispelled lIa,'sa". excrement
o-ha, (I) (caus. = shave off) karu~4 compassion
-"al'o doing. working
11 lIaro hand (poetic)
IIa- (lIi".) (pronoun) who?, which?, "alambuka a creeper: Convolvulus
what? ,~pens ?
"hudda". honey (of wild bees) gulta (pp. gllP) protected, guarded
"hllra". razor guilt (fern.) protection
liAelta". field, territory, land gllp (desid.: be disgusted. with)
hhema secure, safe galho dung
kho (ind., enclitic) indeed g"aRna". illness
lihoma". flax gella". house, building
go (mase. and fem.) cow, bull, cattle
g gocaro pasture, territory, proper place,
gatlako mathematician, treasurer range
gatlik/i courtesan, geisha gotla". clan
gatl.bhflla crowded together goPlJnasf (roof) bracket
gatlo group, aggregate gomaya". cow dllng
gatako goer goraklilllJ cattle breeding
gati (fern.) future career, destiny, gova/ilio bovine (ascetic), cow-vower
future course
galtatt' limb 811
galhita (p.p. gath (Ill) tied ghacclJ destruction
gadrabho donkey gllammo summer
gandho scent, perfume, odour ghara". house
gabbhin- pregnant ghas (I) devour (desid. deaire to eat, be
gabbho embryo hungry)
gam (I) go gha (Ill) smell (trans.)
gamanatt' going ghatla". = ghlJna".
-gamo going ghalela, (masc.) instigator to kill
gambhJra profound ghlllo attacking, destruction
gamma vulgar ghana". nose
garah (I) blame
garaha blame, reproof, threat c
gam heavy, troublesome ca (Ind., enclitic) and
8a'II-lIa, (VI) give respect to ca pana (ind., enclitic) moreover
ga/asa/ayali (onomatopoeic verb) pour callkavatli (masc.) emperor
down (rain) callka". wheel
gaves (1) look for, search for cakkh" (neut.) eye, sense of light
(g)gah (V) seize, grasp, take call1lhmnant- having eyes, bavln,
gahatlat!' seizing, keeping insight, intelligent
gahapati (masc.) householder catlt/a fierce, Irascible
gahapaliko householder catasso see callt(,)
gad" (I) be firm, stand fast, hold tight ca/14 (,) four
gamapadat!' site of a village ca/lIggutla fourfold, quadruple
gamin going caluIIha fourth, a quarter
gamo village call1ppado quadruped
ga,avo respect ca/u,IJsUi (fern.) eighty-four
gavI cow call/ha". four days
-(g)gaho seizing, eclipse catla (p.p. caj) abandoned, thrown
gimhika summer away
gil (1*) swallow catld,'slJ (fern.) or -a (neut.) forty
gilana ill call1J,o, calliiri see catu(,)
giMn house-dwelling, one living .. In cantlimli (masc.) moon
the world" cantlo moon
gllat!' singing ca, (I) proceed, live, conduct oneself,
gUtla". (sometimes masc.) atring, carry on, go on a mission
strand, quality -ca,a living
C4,.4t14". conduct, good conduct jati (fern.) birth
C4'4"4,,. foot (poetic) ·jdtika of the genus/kind/class/nature
ea,alli (ind.) therefore, then -jiUo become
ca,iyll conduct, way of life jeltUlPado country dweller
callatUl". passing away illn; (fern.) confiscation
eiigo abandoning ilUi,. net-like
ell,illl1 travel, journey, mission ji (I) conquer. win. defeat
-cllrin living, behaving, carrying on, ii (V) win
going on iivllel tongue
ei (V) (passive cfyali = be piled up, j'" (I) become old. age
be built up) jlll (I) live. be alive. make a living
cilia". thought, mind, .. heart .. j'lJa".i'lIallo a kind of partridge
ci,a long (time) i.villa livelihood
eira". (ind.) for a long time, after a j.vita". life
long time j'lIo life-principle, soul
ei,apta/illa (as ballubblM, or -1111 (fern.)) j, (ind., enclitic) you I (form of
since long, a long time back, long address by a master/mistress to a
cirassa". (ind.) at last, after a long slave woman; preceded by handa.
time kin. etc., or by gaccha)
elllara". robe iegu"IIa disgusting
eu (1) fall from, pass away (from a jel/ha elder. eldest. (most) senior
form of existence)
euddasa fourteen i"
ce (ind., enclitic) if (j)j1l4tUl". meditation
",as- mind (;);M (I) meditate
eltiya". shrine. pagoda (j)iM (I) bum (caus.: set tire to)
ell
A
clla(l) six
C1la!J1I4 sixth (n)fl4P (VII) (see pa-(fl)Rap)
da# (VII) throwaway, abandon (iI)ileI (V) know. learn. find out
ellatla(lIa)". sunshade flcl~a". knowledge
cllad (VII) be pleased Mt; (masc.) relative. kinsman
cllandas- will iliilo friend
,lIamcl earth. ground nayo method
,"id (11), (III) cut. cut down, cut oft ilella = ella (junction form sometimes
used after '71)
j
-ja born (of) 111
-j""4 (adj.) by birth (mM (I) stand. remain. stay (caus. :
ja,. (In) be born (caus .: produce) erect. establish ; except)
ja,.a/ll the people (/)/1I4"a'71 place. case
jatUl,.. bearer (birth) . producer -(llIl1iiyin staying, remaining
jatUlPado country (!lIMli (fem .) duration. persistence,
jaM person. people (collective sin- station
gular)
jayo victory
jar (Ill) grow old la(el) (pronoun) he, it, that
ja,a old la(el) ... ta(d) . . . that/the ... (is) the
ja,cI old age same thing as that/the .. ,
(jljal (I) blaze lad tIIge (ind.) since then
jiUa,apa". gold la(el) (pronoun) you (thou)
danta (p.p. dam) tamed, restrained dttggat, (fem,) a bad fate, evil destiny
damo taming, restraint dllccaritattJ bad conduct
damma trainable, educable dullha evil, vile; corrupt
daliddiyattJ poverty dutiya (numeral) second
da/ha strong, firm dubbaflfla discoloured, ugly
dasa ten dubbalfkara1,la weakening (making
-dasa seeing weak)
dassanattJ seeing dlltnmana depressed
dassanlya beautiful dullabha rare
dassaneyya beautiful (poetic) dllssattJ cloth
dassllvin seeing, who would see dt/ssl/o bad character
dassu (masc.) brigand, thief dtlhallo robbery
dahara young, baby duto messenger
dll (I) give dura/a (ind.) in the distance
dlJtar (masc.) giver durei (ind.) from far
diinattJ gift, donation, alms deyyattJ gift
dlini (ind.) now (enclitic) della/a deity, divine being, spirit (male
dayajjattJ inheritance as well as female)
dayado inheritor, heir devf queen
dayo gift devo god, king
diiraho boy deso point (topic)
daro (sometimes -d) wife domanassattJ depression, melancholy;
dasavyattJ slavery aversion
diisf slave-woman, slave girl doveirilla porter, doorkeeper
diiso slave daso aversion, anger
digllf1attJ double dvadasa twelve
dijo bird (poetic = " twice-born ") dvarattJ doorway, gateway (the
dillha visible opening, not the obstruction)
di!!ha (ind.) excellent I, splendid I, it's dlli (num.) two (nom. due)
lucky, it's wonderful dllikkhaltltttJ (ind.) twice
dillhi (fern.) opinion, theory dvigru;lattJ double
dillhin- seeing avidM (ind.) twofold, twice, in two
dibba divine, heavenly dulhattJ two days
dill (Ill) play, gamble
dillas- day dh
diva (ind.) by day
dilleiseyytl day-bed, siesta bed dhaiinattJ grain
dillo sky, heaven dhanattJ money, wealth
dis (VII) teach dhammika just
(d)dis (I > pass) see (caus .... show) dhamma (fern. -f) doctrinal
disa direction, region dhammo (basic meaning approx.
dlgha long .. nature", hence the following
dfghattJ (ind.) long usages:) (true, natural) doctrine;
dfgharattattJ (ind.) long (time) natural phenomenon, natural
dlpo island element, natural substance, natural
du(r)- (prefix) ill, bad, hard, difficult principle, phenomenon, element;
dukkarattJ ha.rd task custom, way, law of nature,
dllkkhattJ unhappiness, misery, quality, justice; world, nature;
suffering (denom. dllhkheti be un· mental object, mental phenomenon,
happy) idea; virtue; good mental
dukkhita afflicted object, good mental phenomenon,
dukkhin- unhappy good idea (when opposed to bad:
nillopo plunder paccatla individual, personal, in-

ni-ualt (I) go back (caus. = turn back, dependent
transitive) paccaltal1t individually, personally
nivarelar (masc.) keeper a way paccatthlko enemy
ni-vas (VII) dress paccantajo borderer, foreigner
nit.aso life, existence paccantima bordering, foreign
nivesallal1t house, building (p)paccayo condition, cause
ni-sidh (I) caus. :::-: prevent, prohibit (p)pali-a-gam (I) return
ni-.~Id (I) sit down paccajiila (p.p. (p)pa/i-ii-jatl (Ill))
nisldanal1t scat (on the ground) reborn
nistdho prevention, prohibition (p)pa.t.i-a-lIi(r)-ya (I) go back, return
lIissakkana •.n escaping, leaving (p)pafi-ii-vam (I) swallow back
tlissarat\al1t liberation (p)pali-a-sis (or -this) (11) hope for,
'~issiiya (ger. of ni-(5)sl (I)) depending expect
on, leaning on (P)Pali-u(d)-(flIha (I) (-lIheli) rise
nr (I) lead, draw (p)pafi-lI(d)-tar (I) come (back) out
nfca inferior, low (after bathing)
tdla blue (p)pafi-lI(d)-a-va/t (I) turn back again
nlvarat\al1t obstacle paccupa!!hita (p.p. (P)Pali-lIpa-(!)fhiiJ
ni(r)-har (I) (1Ilharati) take out, take set up
away (p)paccllppatlna present (time)
nil (ind., enclitic) ?, does? (see (p)pa/i-i (I) (pacceti) assume
Vocab. 12) (p)pali-o-rllh (I) get down, alight
nekkhammal1t renunciation pacchima last, western
negamo town dweller, bourgeois paceM (ind.) afterwards, back,
netti (fern.) leading, tendency behind, west
netvti (ger. nl) having led pacchaya shade
nemitto diviner, prognosticator, paja the creation, the created universe
astrologer, soothsayer (Brahmanical theory)
no (ind.) not (emphatic) pajiinallii understanding
nha (Ill) bathe pajjoto lamp
(p)pa-(j)ihe (I) be consumed with
p regret
(p)pa (prefix) out, away paiica five
pal1tsl' (masc.) dust, mud palicama fifth
(Plpa-kapp (VII) dispense pafbiatta authorized, customary
(p)pa-kli.s (I) (shine: poetic) caus. paiiiiatti (fern.) concept
= show (p)pa-(il)tiap (VII) prepare, declare
pakka ripe (p)pa-(tl)tia (V) understand, have
(p)pa-(k)kam (I) go away insight; passive = be discerned
pakkhandika dysentery patina understanding, wisdom
(p)pa-(k)khal (VII) wash paiiiidpanaJ?1 preparation
(p)pa-(k)khci (Ill) be clear to, be pailiiasa (fern.) (or -a ncut.) fifty
visible to, be apparent to (dat.) pailho question
(p)pa-(k)khiP (I·) put into (p)Pali (prefix) towards, back
pakkhin (masc.) bird (P)Pali-(k)klls (I) decry, criticize (in
pag eva (ind.) how much more so, let " bad " sense)
alone, still more, still less (P)Palikklila distasteful, disagreeable
(p)pa-(g)gah (V) apply pa/igacc' eva (ind.) as a precaution
(p)pa-(g)ghay (I) trickle, drip (p)pali-gam (I) go back
pac (1) cook, torture, torment (p)Pali-(g)gah (V) accept (caus. =
paccailga,?1 part make receive, accept)
pa!iggahetay (masc.) receiver. recipient pa!hama (numeral) first
(p)pa!igho repulsion. reacting. reac- pa!hamatJI (ind.) first, firstly
tion. resistance pa!havl earth
pa!icca (ger. (p)pali-i) conditioned by. pa~avo drum
because of (usually with acc.) pa~idhi (mase.) aspiration. deter-
palicchanna covered. concealed mination
pa/i-(iI)'iii (V) admit pa~iyatJI commodity
pa!inil/i. admission. assertion pa~ihita (p.p. (p)pa-ni-dha) held
pa!inissaggo rcjecting. renouncing patlfla cxcellent, delightful, delicious
(p)pa!i1lissa!!ha (p. p. pali-ni(r)-(s)sajl) pa~r/.ita wise. astute
rejected. renounced pa~tj.i'o wise man
pa!ipathatrl (ind.) the opposite way. in pa~Ir/.llyogo jaundice
the opposite direction. the other pa~tlarasa fifteen
way pati (masc.) lord
(p)pa!i-(p)pa-nam (I) abate (caus. palicca (= pa/icta)
= check) (P) pati (> patiH!l!ha (I) set up.
(p)pa!i-pad (Ill) engage in. follow. station oneself
practise. behave (habitually) patiUhii resting place, perch
pa!ipadii. way palisalliinarrt retirement, seclusion
(p)pa/i-(p)pa-(s)sambh (1) abate. be (sometimes spelt pa/i-)
allayed palisallfna retired, secluded (some-
pa!i/)iiho repulse. repelling times spelt patH
(p)/'afibhaym.n danger. terror palissali (fern.) recollectedness. mind-
(p)pa!i-bhii (I) he clear fulness
(p)pa!i/ll/unal!1 intuition. inspiration (p)palla (p.p. (p)pa-iip and -ap(p))
{p)pa!i-yat prepare (only cnus . form: attained
pa/iyildiipeti, except for p.p. palli (fern.) attainment
patiyatta) pat/iko pedestrian, infantryman
(P)pa/i-rajan (masG.) hostile king patto bowl
(p)pa!irripa proper (p)pa-(t)thar (I) spread out
(p)pa.li-lahh (I) ohtain , acquire patho road, way
pa!i/iibho acquisition pada'JI word
(P)Pa!i/omarrt (ind.) in rcverse order padakklti~la dextrous, skilful in, good
(p)pa!i-m!! (I) turn back at (Ioc.)
(f) fa/i-va s (I) dwcll padakkhi1'a. re~erencc. veneration.
(p)pa/i-vid (L) only caus.: inform. circumambulntion
announce (p)pa-dii (I) give to, hand over
(p)pa!i-I,idh (Ill) penetrate, com- padfPeyym.n lamp
prehend padll'o lamp
(p)pa/i-d-nl (I) dispel padrso placc, localitv. region
(p)pa!i-tJi-ra»l (1) abstain
(p)pa!i-vi-mh (1*) grow again padoso anger
(p)pativcdho penetration, compre- (p)pa-dhii (1) exC'rt
hension paahiiHal!1 exertion
(p)pa!i-sal!I-I,id (VII) feel, experience "(Ilia (ind., enclitic) hut, however.
pa/isarrtvcdana feeling, expcrirncing now
(p)pa!isaJJ'wdiH- fceling, exptlricncing pan'ho road
(f»pa!i -sarrt-cikkh (l) rcflcct, consider pappo!(,ko fungus
patissati = pati- (p)/,a-al'(!') (VI) attain, arrh'c (poetiG)
(p)pa!i-(s)SII (V) agree, n!;!;cnt to (dat.) (jJ)/'a-/'(lIItl/z (I) hiilcl
(f,)pa!i-sev (I) indulge in j'(Iha.!ha "inlent
pa!!hanatrl basis faM (I) thrivc, flourish
N
Pali-English Vocabulary
going, revolve, go on, continue, plllubhavo appearanc,e •. manifestation

proceed piilu(r)-hhu (I) appear (to: dat.l.
pavattal' (masc.) proclaimer be (come) manifest
(p)pa-vap (1) sow pii.lo (ind.) in the morning (in com-
(p)pa-vass (I) rain hea.vily pound before a vowel pii.lal')
(p)pavado debate -piilo dropping, offering. collecting
(p)pa-vid (1) (only caus.: make pado foot. basis
known) pana". drink
(p)pa-vis (1·) enter pan.yafll (drinking) water
pavutta". recitation piiPa bad. evil
(p)pa-vedh (1) tremble ~ii.paka bad
paveseta, (mase.) shower in, usher pii.Pfya worse
pasanna confident in. trusting (p)pa-ap (may also be considered as
(p)pa-(s)sambh I become calm (caus. oap) (V) attain (in figurative sense)
= make calm) piibhalafll present, gratuity. capital.
pasayha (gerund of (p)pa-sah (I)) grant -+
having forced pamokkha foremost
(p)pa-sa".s (I) praise pat'a". (ind.) thither. across. beyond
pasala (pp. (p)pa-sal') stretched out. paripari (fern:) perfection
frank, ,open parima further, other side
(p)pa-sal' (I) stretch out, intrans. parisajjo councillor, member of an
(caus. = stretch out. trans.) assembly
(p)Pa-(s)sas (1) breathe out pal'isuddhi (film.) purity
(p)pa-sas (1) govern pa-ii-vad (1) tell -+
(p)pa-su (I) generate pasadika lovely
pasu (masc.) animal (esp. domestic) pasado palace ,.
pasuta intent on pi (ind. enclitic) also. too, even
pass (1) (and (d)dis) see M/hilo (ind.) behind (gen.)
passaddhi (fern.) calmness, tranquillity pi#o alms
passena (ind.) on its side pilar (masc.) father
passo side pipasu thirsty, drunken, drunkard
(p)pa-ha, (1) hit, beat pipasita thirsty
(p)pa-ha (1) give up, renounce pipasin thirsty
pahanafll abandoning piya dear (to: dat.)
(p)pa-hi (V) send piyadassana lovable sight, whose
pahita (p.p. (p)pa-dha (I) exerted appearance inspires affection
(p)pa-hu (1) can piyayila (p.p. of denom.) held dear.
pahuta much. many beloved
pa (1) (pivati) drink, desid . be = pisl4'!1a malicious
thirsty pi" (VII) long for (dat.)
plilia ripe, ripened pIt' (1) please (only caus.)
Piiliiil'o city wall, ramparts pfta yellow
pakima fruitful; ripening pm (fern.) joy
piieariyo teacher's teacher pllggalo person
Ptilikankha probable p"eeh (1) ask
pii'!li (masc.) hand pucehitar (masc.) asker
pa'!lO breath, life, living (breathing) plliijo heap
being p"iiiia". merit, good, goodness,
palat'aso breakfast, morning meal meritorious action
palavyala indulgence Pl/!o bag, package (of merchandise)
piilimokkho liberation Pltlto son
pall/(t') (prefix) manifest puthu many, various
rukHo tree vac (1) say
rllci,a splendid vacanaJtl saying, speech, words (sing.
rlld (1*) weep collective)
rill! (1*) grow (caus . : plant) vac. speech
rllpaJtl form (usually as property of (v)vaj (1) go (poetic)
matter), matter, sight (object) vane (VII) deceive
-rllpa kind, sort vanjha barren, sterile
rllpabhavo existence in the im- valllmaJtl road
ponderable world (of the gods) vall (I) turn. roll. circle
r"pin- formed , material va!lattt rolling, circulation, cycle,
re (ind.) hey I, damn you I (con- cycling (of the universe)
. temptuous address) vaf;lijja commerce
re"" (masc.) pollen va"ippatho trade
rogo illness vatltlavanl- beautiful , handsome
vatltlO colour, beauty, praise, class
1 vala (ind., enclitic) surely, indeed I
lakkhat;taJtl mark, special quality. (emphatic and emotive: mild
excellence, shapeliness, definition expletive expressing a wish, regret,
laddha (p.p. laM (I)) reproach or surprise: cf. "alas 1",
labbhil (ind.) possible, conceivabie, is .. my word I ", .. 1 say I ", .. good
it conceivable 1 (see Vocab. 27) heavens I", and the like)
labl! (I) get, obtain , find (v)valattt vow
lahu light (weight) vall (I) proceed, conduct oneself, go
IlJbho gain on (doing)
(Mbha in the idiom lassa le ... va//attt conduct. duty, government
........ suladdhattt is taken by the valtal' (masc.) speaker
Commentary as plural: .. gains for -vattin setting going, deploying,
you ... "; some philologists main- operating, conducting, governing,
tain that it is an indeclinable; it is developing
in any case elevated or emotive) val/hattt garment (pI. clothes, dress)
U"h#a polished vallhu (neut.) thing, (building) site,
lingattt characteristic position, mode (of argument)
lip (11) smear vad (I) say, speak
lu/ita stirred up vadha (fern.) bride
Illna (p.p. la (V)) reaped, mown vadho execution
le44u (masc.) clod vatlattt a wood
loko world, people, universe van/a (p.p. vam) vomited
10canaJtl eye (poetic) vand (1) salute, pay respect
loma", h~ir (of the body) vayas- age, period of life
lola restless, fickle, wanton vayo 1055
loltila red va, (I) (or (VII) irreg.) choose
lobita", blood va, (VU) prevent, hinder, obstruct,
stop
v vara excellent, good (poetic)
va (= eva) (ind., enclitic) only, just, varattt boon
surely vas (I) live (caus. = make live with)
va (ind., enclitic) like (poetic: a vasana •.n wearing
variant for viya and iva occasionally vasavattin- wielding power
used in verse) vasin- master, authority
vaggu soft (especially of sounds) vaso control
vanka crooked vassattt rain, rainy season (plur.), year
vanka", hook vassika rainy (for the rainy season)
vivilla (p. p. vi-vie (VII» separated, ve,amatl' abstention
isolated veld bank, time, occasion
viveko separation, seclusion, dis- vdlita wavy
crimination velu,iyo lapis lazuli
visatfJ poison vtvatltlatcJ discolouration
visajja (ger. vi-sajj) getting over, vesso husbandman, farmer, merchant,
leaving behind bourgeois (member of the heredi-
visa!a (p. p. vi-sa,) spread, staring tary agricultural-mercantile class:
visaci (adj.) sidelong, furtive see footnote to Vocab. 20)
visa,ada confident (vo-: cf, vi-o)
visuddha pure, clear vokitl1,la (p. p. vi-o-ki,) mixed (with)
visuddhi (fern.) clarity, purification vi-o-(k)kam (I) pass away, break away
vi-sudh (Ill) become purified vi-o-cMd (Ill) cut off, separate from
vi-han (I) distress, trouble vi-o-Mid (11) shoot
vi-ha, (I) dwell. live vyanjana'1l expression, sentence
-viha,j" living, dwelling, being vyatta intelligent
vihiiro life, way of life, dwelling vyasanatfJ disaster
vihita (p. p. vi-dha) arranged vi-a-ka, (VI) explain
vi-helh (VII) harass vyiidhi (masc.) disease
vihesa trou ble, harassing vyiidhita diseased, i1J
vfj (I) fan vyapajjha violent, malevolent
vlla- without, removed vyapanna malevolent, violent
vi-ali-sa, (VII) converse, make (con- vytlplJ.do violence, malevolence
versation) vyavala concerned, busy, worried
v1matfJscJ investigation
vlmatfJsin- (as masc. noun = investi- s
gator, exegete, metaphysician) sa- with, possessing
vlsali (fern.) twenty sa- own
vullh- (see note on u-/vu- Vocab. 14) satfJ (prefix) together
vuttha (p.p. vas (I») spent (time) satJI-yam (1) control oneself
vuddha (sometimes written vu44ha or satJIyamo self-control, abstinence
bu44ha) old sa'1lyojanatfJ connection, union
vuddhi (fem.) increase salt\lJacchaf'alt\ year
vusitavant- having lived (properly), sa'!I-va!! (I) involve, dissolve
having (truly) lived (as a monk) satJIva!!a'1l dissolution, involution
vupaka!!ha withdrawn, secluded salt\va!!anika involved in, dissolved in
vupasamo calming satfJ-vall (1) lead to (dat.)
ve (ind., enclitic) surely (poetic) salt\valta1.ika leading to
veceta daft satJIlJu,o restraint
vejjo doctor, physician satfJ-vid (Ill) be, occur, be found
ve!h (VII) twist, wrap satfJ-vi-dhii (1) arrange, organize
vetanatfJ wages, pay satfJvidhiinatfJ arrangement, policy
vedana sensation satJI-lJj-bhaj (I) share
vedayitatJI sensation, experience satJI-vis (I·) go home (ca us, = take
vediya known (-4", as noun: thing home)
known, information) sa'1lVuta (p.p. satfJ-va, (I)) controlled
vedhin- shooter, archer satJIvejaniya (f.p.p, sa'1l-vij) emotional,
vcpullatJI prevalence inspiring, stirring
vepullata abundance satfJ-sa, (I) transmigrate (circulate
vemattatii difference, distinction indefinitely)
veyyakaratlatJI explanation, analysis satJIsiiro transmigration
ve,atJI hatred sa'1l-ha, (I) gather
Pali-English Vocabulary
saptlhi/a (p. p . saptl-dhii) joined, con- sajjhayo learning, studying, study

nected saHhu (neut.) silver
saka (adj .) own saptl-jan (Ill) be produced
sak(k) (VI) can, be able (= sak (IV» sailjila, (masc.) ordainer
saka!o (also -Iaptl) cart sailnata restrained
saki(d) (eva) (ind.) once sa'?l-(n)ilii (V) experience, perceive
sakiptl (ind.) once sanna perception
saku~o bird sanilin- having perception, sentient
sal-kar (VI) entertain sa!!hi (fern.) sixty
sakkil (ind.) it is possible, is it sa~4o cluster
possible? sa/a self-possessed, mindful
sa/l/liiro entertainment salaft! hundred
sakkhl (ind.) in person, personally (s)sali (fern.) self-possession, mind-
sakha (masc.) friend fulness
saggo heaven salimanl- self-possessed, mindful
saptl-ka#h (I) co\1ect sat/a seven
s(lptlkappo intention, object sallali (fern.) seventy
saptl-(k)kam (I) pass into sal/allaptl existence
saptlkiirakulo rubbish heap sallama seventh
saptl-kilis (Ill) become defiled sallarasa seventeen
saptlkileso defilement sal/iihaptl week
saptlkhala (p. p. saptl-kar) synthesized, sa/lo being, creature
activated saltha'?l sword
sankhadhanlo conch blower sal/har (masc.) teacher
saptlkha (= saptlkhyii) sallhavaho caravan-merchant
-sa'!lkhiUa known as, called (p. p. of satthiko caravan-mer<:,hant
saptl-(k)khii (I» sal/ho caravan
saptlkhiiro force, energy, activity, sada/lho the true (good) purpose, the
combination, process, instinct, true (good) objective
habit (see Vocab. 26) sadii (ind.) always
saft!khilla limited, narrow (instru- sadisa(adj.) like, of such sort
mental = briefly, in short) saddo noise, sound, report (rumour)
sankho conch saddha trusting, believing
saptlkhylJ enumeration, calculation, saddhii confidence, trust. conviction
denomination, classification saddhiptl (ind.) with (ins.)
saptlghiili (fern.) cloak san- (masc.) dog
saft!ghiisaptlghin in groups sant- existing, true (more rarely
saft!ghasaptlgMga~fbhula clustered in .. good ", particularly in com-
groups pounds)
saptlgho community santa (p.p . sam) calmed
sace (ind.) if saptl-tan (VI) stretch out, spread out
sacca true saptl-tapp (VII) gratify, please. satisfy
sacca,.n truth santlJnakat!' film, skin
saccaptl (ind.) it is true that; is it true san/ika (ind.) (directly) from (gen.) (at
that? first hand)
saccavajjaptl speaking the truth, truth- san/ille (inrl.) into the presence of
fulness (gen. or ace.)
sacchi-kar (VI) perceive, observe, saptl-tus be contented, be satisfied
experience, examine (only p.p.)
sacchikiriyii observation, experience saptl-(t)thar (I) strew, spread, carpet
(s)saj 1 (I) pour out (with temporary decorative floor
(s)saj I (I) embrace covering)
sand (I) flow sa".-anu-sas (I) install, appoint (as

sandiUhika visible Tuler)
sa'tl-(d)dis (passive = be seen, samanlii (ind.) on all sides, all round,
appear; caus. = instruct, review) anywhere, in any direction
sandhiilar (masc.) peacemaker samappita (p.p. sa~-app (VII) U to
sa'!,-dhiill (I) transmigrate (pass on) fix in ", to apply to ") presented
U
sandhi (masc.) junction, joint, breach with

sa~-dhu (V) shake salllayo time, occasion (any time,
sa~-nah (Il) tie lip time of an event)
sannidhi (masc.) store sa~n-a-dd (Ill) conform (to a rule or
sa~-ni-pat tI) assemble way of life) (caus. = exhort)
sannipiilo assembly samifdhi (masc.) concentration
sap (I) (not used in the Dfgha) curse samiipatli (fern.) attainment
sappi (neut.) ghee sa".-a-pad (Ill) attain
sClbba (pronoun) all, entire samat'alllbho IIndertaking. fa\1ing
sabbalo (ind.) all round upon, destroying
sabballalii non-discrimination (U all- samiihita (p.p. sa'tI-4-dflli) concen-
self-ness "), considering all beings trated
as like oneself, putting oneself in samihila". collection
the place of others samugghiita (p. p. of caus. of sa".-
sabbalhii (ind.) in all ways u(d)-han)
sabbadhi (ind.) everywhere sa".·u(d)-chid (11) abrogate, abolish
sabbasanlhari (adj.) entirely strewn, samucchinna (p.p. sa'tl-u(d)-chid (Ill))
completely carpeted utterly annihilated
sabbaso (ind.) completely sa';,a-u(d)-lij (VII) excite, fill with
sabballanl an-inclusive, whole enthusiasm
sabbena sabba'.n (ind.) completely, samlldayo origin, origination
thoroughly sa""II(d)-a-car (1) speak to, converse
sabhii assembly hall with
sama even, equal to, up to, like, samuddo ocean
impartial samuppanna (p.p. stl'tl·u(d)·pad (Ill))
sama~ (ind.) equally, like originated
samagga united, unanimous samuppado origination
samangJ-bhu (I) supply with, provide sa",-u(d)-hatl (1) (samuhanati) sup-
with press, abolish lalior
samath1a designation, agreed usage sampajafhla'tl consciousness: delibcr-
sama~o ascetic, wanderer, philosopher sampajatla conscious :dclibera le
(other than a brahman) sa'tl·pad (111) be endowed with,
sa~·tlti·(k)kam (1) pass beyond, have
transcend sampadii success
samalikkamo passing beyond, trans- sa'mpariki~~a (p.p. sa,.n -pari-ki,) sur-
cending rounded by, covered with
samal/a." (ind .) completely, perfectly sa'tI·(p)pa-lIar (VII) feast
sa~-atltl-ii-gtlm (1) be endowed with, stllllpasada114t,' serenity
acquire sa,.n·(p)pa-ha'tls (VII) delight
sa'tl-tl1Iu-(g)gah (V) (calls. = ask for (transitive)
reasons, cross-examine) sa~-piiy (1) maintain one's position,
sa~-anu-pass (1) envisage defend one's thesis
Satfl-anu-bhiis (1) criticize, refute samphaIJI frivolity, chatter
sa~-anl<-yuj (Il) take up, cross- salllphasso contact, union
question salllbahula many
Pali-English Vocabulary 41 3
sam/)adha confined sadhu (ind.) well, please
sambudillla enlightened sadhuka good
sambodhi (fern.) enlightenment, com- sadhuka'JI (ind.) well
plete enlightenment sapateyya'JI property
sambodho enlightenment sapekha wishing for, desiring, pre-
sambhauo origin, production ferring
sa'JI-bhii (VII) catch up with (acc.) Sama'JI (ind.) oneself, self
samma (ind.) my dear I (fam.) samanila'JI state of being a wanderer/
sammatta intoxicated, maddened ascetic/philosopher, profession of
sa'JI-man (VI) agree on, elect asceticism, etc.
samma (ind.) rightly, perfectly samisa sensual
sa'JI-iflj (I) (usually sammiilj-) draw samuklla'JIsaka exalted, sublime
in, bend samuddilla oceanic. ocean going
sammukha (ind.) in the presence of saya'JI (ind.) ill the evening
(gen.) saya~ho evening
sa",-mueeh (I) coagulate, form (in- sayamaso evening meal
trans.) sarathi (masc.) charioteer
sa'JI-mud (I) greet, exchange greetings sitritgo passion
with (saddlli'JI and instrumental) sarattlya polite
sammalha bewildered siit'o value (also the valuable/best
sammodanlya agreeable, pleasant part of anything)
saya'JI (ind.) oneself, self sala hall
sayana (pres. p. si) lying down sali (fern.) rice
sar (I) move sa/ilia myna
(s)sat' (I) remember sa/o a kind of tree: Shorea robusta
sara'JI lake salohilo blood relation
sara~a'JI protection, refuge sauako pupil
sarlra'JI body (pI. also" relics ") saue/ar (masc.) reciter
(s)saro sound, voice sas (1) rule
sa'JI-/akkh (VII) observe siisana"i instruction. doctrine
.allapo talk si (I) lie down
salayalana'JI the six spheres (of the sikk" (1) train, study. learn
senses: five senses + the mind) sikkha training
.avana'JI hearing sikkhiiPada'JI training. (moral) rule,
sassata eternal precept
sassati (fern.) eternal thing, eternity siKghalako crossroads. square
sassalisama'JI (ind.) eternally si, (11) sprinkle
saha (ind.) along with, according to sippa'JI craft, trade. profession
(ins.) siras- head
sallagala charged with, suffused with siri'JIsapo snake
sahavyata association, condition, sirlmanl beautiful. fortunate (poetic)
union (with gen.) sis (VII) leave
sahassa'JI ·thousand sfgha'JI (ind.) fast (repeated = very.
sahayako friend fast)
sahayo friend sfla cool
sahita'tl kindling block sl/a'JI virtue, good conduct
sa (Ill) taste sl/avanl virtuous. well conducted
sa (pronoun) she sfsa'JI lead
sakha branch sfsa'JI head
sii~a'JI hemp sfho lion
sala sweet su (I) crush, extract (liquids). pro-
sadhu good duce
4I4 Introduction to Pali
su- (prcfix) well, good (meaning sedaka sweating ~

" very", may be prefixed to adjec- seniisana~ abode, resting place
tives in poetry) seyya better
(s)m (V) (rarely (IV) hear, desid, seyyalhii (ind.) as, just liJce (intro-
= desire to hear ducing a simile)
(s)su (ind.) even, isn't it ? (or merely seyyalhfdatp (ind.) as, to wit, as follows
emphatic) seyya bed
sukara easy seyyo (ind.) better
sukumat'a delicate sev (1) indulge in, pursue
suko parrot so (pronoun) he
sllhka white, light coloured soko grief, sorrow
sukkha dry soce)'ya~ purity
sukha happy (denom. sukheti, be solat.n ear
happy) solar (masc.) hearer
sukha~ happincss sotapa1lna (solas- .. stream ") in the
sukhallikii pleasure, enjoyment stream, on the Way
sukhin- happy sot/hi (ind.) safety, safely (dat.)
sukhuma fine, subtle sotthinii (ind.) safely
sugati (fern.) good destiny sobbha~ pit
sugato well-gone (title of the Buddha) somanassa~ joy, elation
sue (I) grieve, sorrow solasa sixteen
sucarita~ good c.onduct sovaggika heavenly, leading to heaven
succhavi pleasant to the skin (chav; sviigalatp (ind.) welcome I (dat.)
fern.) svataniiya (ind.) for tomorrow
suMla empty
sUl!hu (ind.) well (done) h
SIl~Cl dog ha (ind.) indeed, truly
sutta'tl thread, (record of a) dialogue, hatthinikii she-elephant
collection of dialogues haltho hand
(s)slIdaJ?l (ind.) even han (1) kill
sudassatla beautiful (poetic) hanu (fern.) jaw(s)
suddo helot (member of the servile or hamar (rnasc.) killer
working class: see footnote to handa (ind.) well I
Vocab.20) handa je (ind.) you there I (cf. je)
sudh (II I) become pure, become clean har (1) take, desid. (irreg.) = desire to
supatittha having good beaches (for take, wish for
getting water to drink, etc.) hMitaka green, fresh
subh (1) make clear, shine, be glorious have (ind.) truly, surely (poetic)
subha lustrous, fair ha (1) abandon, diminish, be elimi-
subha~ lustre, glory nated
subhiisita well-spoken hi (ind., enclitic) for, because, though
sumedhasa very intelligent (poetic) hila~ benefit, welfare
sUl'iyo sun hiraiiiia'11 gold (money)
sut'o god (poetic) hit'; (fern.) modesty, self-respect,
suvti~~a~ gold conscience
susu (masc.) boy, young (of animals) his (Il) injure
sussasii desire to hear IiIna inferior
sukaro pig huta'tl oblation
se!!ha best ha (I) be
sellhi (fern. ?) ash he!h (VII) harass
setaka clear, clean hetu (masc.) cause
selu (masc.) causeway, dam, bridge hemanlika winter
ENGLISH-PALl VOCABULARY
The first apparent synonym given is generally the nearest to the English.
the most usual and the least" elevated". though the others may have special
shades of meaning appropriate for certain contexts. The Fali-English
Vocabulary will in many cases give a clearer idea of the meanings of t~e
various PaH words. but the precise meanings can be gleaned only from their
use in the texts.
The PaH parts of speech and genders are indicated as in the FaH-English
Vocabulary. Verbs are given first. The English parts of speech have not been
noticed.
a across parattJ (ind.)
action kamman (neut.), kiriya
a (usually no equivalent) annalara activated sattJkhala (pp. sa'!!-kar)
(pronoun), eka (pronoun, numeral: activity sa,!!khtiro (see Vocab. 26)
see Lesson ) 7) actually kira (ind., enclitic)
abandon ha (I), cha4ft (VII) address a-mant (VII)
abandoned calla (p. p. caj) adequate aIattJ (ind.)
abandoning pahana,!!, cago adhere to adhi-upa-gam (I)
abate (p)pa!i-(p)pa-(s)sambh (I) admit (P)pali-(iI)ila (V)
according to one's ability yalhabala,!! admission pa!iiiila
(ind.) admonish o-vad (I)
abode senasana,!! adornment aIailkiiro
abolish sattl-u(d)-han (I), satJI-u(d)- advance abhi-(k)kam (I)
ch id (11) in advance p"re (ind.)
about arabbha (acc., gcr. a-rabbh (I)), advise anu-siis1I)
abM (prefix) aeon kappo
above uddha,!! (ind .) aesthetic experience (or source of
abrogate satJI-u(d)-chid (11) aesthetic experience) raso
absolute aparisesa, asesa affair adhikara~a,!!, al/ho
absolutely aniiadatthu (ind.) whose appearance inspires affection
abstain (p)paji-vi-ram (I) piyadassana
abstention verama~t affiicted a/ura, dukkhi/a
abstinence salllyamo afraid bM/a (p. p. bM (I))
abundant vipuIa, bahuIa be afraid bM (I)
abundance ussado, vePIll/a/a after (as time relation often ex-
abuse a-(k}kus (I) pressed merely by the use of a
accept dhar (VII) (2 accs.: x as y), gerund) accayena (ind.: time
(p)Pa!i-(g)gah (V) or caus., adhi-vas = gen.), parat!l (ind., abJ.);
caus. (invitation to stay at = acc.) (space:) anvad eva (ind.), anu
accepted adhiuuttha (p. p. adhi-vas) (prefix), uddhattJ (ind.)
accomplish Ifreli (denom.) afterwards paccM (ind.)
according to sa ha (ind., ins.) again puna(d) (ind.)
accumulated upaci/a (p.p. IIpa-ci (V)) age jfr (I), vayas-, ayu (neut.)
accumulation rasiko aged jara
acknowledge (p)pali-(ii)iia (V) about the age of -vassudesilla (num.-)
with one's acquaintances yalhasan- aggregate ga1;lO
di!!ha,!! (ind.) agree on sat!l-man (VI)
acquire adhi-gam (I). a-pad (Ill), agree (p)Pa!i-(s)su (V)
(P)Pali-labh (I), sa,!!-anu-a-gam (I) agreed usage samanna
acquisition adhigamo, paliIiibho agreeable lian/a, sammodantya
acq uisitor nijigi,!!silar (masc.) (speech)
English-Pali Vocabulary 41 7
assent to (p)Pati-(s)slI (V) (dOlt.) badly micella (ind.)
assertion pa!ilili(i bad character dHssflo
association sahntl)'alti hatl conduct dll(Carilm!1
aS~lIme (p)pa!i-i (I) (parceli) bad luck kali (masc.)
assured aI/all/alia had thing adhallllllo
assuredly lar,gha (in{l.) bag pl/!o
a~tringent kastit'lU!1 bandit ka~Ilaka>!1
astrologer n~millo banish (p)pa-(v)vaj (I) cans.
astute pa~u!i'a banishment pabbiijallii.
asunder vi (prefix) bank IIra/!,. vclci
atom a~111 (masc.) bar paiigho (holtling a door)
atomic a~,u barbarian alla>iya
attachment lIPlidijlWI!' barley bread hU/JI/J/(iso
withollt attachment (through non- barren valljha
attachment) anupcidii (ind.) base", liIal!'
with no attachment remaining a''''- hasis pa!!/uilla'.n. peido
Piidisf,.,a· having bathed flalla/vii (ger. fllIii (Ill).
be attached upa-ti-dti (Ill) also written nha/vii)
be attached to pa>ii-lI1as (I) battle Yllddlla.!,
attacl( abhi-yti (I). IIpa-(k)ham (I) bc as (I) (exist). Jui (1) (happen, have,
attacking ghiilo becomc, cf. lI(d)-pad and Lcssons 5
attain PIlUS (1*). saIJ,-ii-pad (Ill). and 24). bhli (1). vid (Ill) (occur).
(p)pa-ap(p) (\"1) (poetic). (p)pa-ap saIJ,·vid (Ul)
(V) (fig.) bcach tit/lla>?,
attained (p)palla(p.p. (p)pa-ap(p) (VI) ha ving good beaches supa/illha
or (p)pa-iip (V)) hear fruit vi-pac (HI)
attainment sama.palli (fern.). patti beard lIIaSSI/ (ucut.)
(fern.) bearer (giving birth) janalll
attainment of lIibbeinal!l. esp. the beat (p)pa-har (I)
Parinibhanal]l of the Buddha in beast mi,1I0
4Rt> !l.C. pa>inibbiina,.n beauty va!qlO
attendant IIpa!lhako appear beautiful lIpa-suM (I)
attcnlling on lIpa!!hlilla'!I. payiru- beautiful "alycilla. t'a~I~lava/lt-, das-
P<lSCWClI!1 sallryet. :.ir/IIi<111t (poetic). das·
attention 1IlIIlIlISikli>o salleyva
. (poetic),
. wdassalla (poetic)
fiX one's attention on adhi-{!l!M (I) a beautiful girl kalyii~lf
a udicnce /I pail/lit 11 all' because yalo (ind.). hi (ind .. cnC\itic),
authorized palilialla )'asmii (ind.)
authorit~· t'asill- because of pa!icca (gerund: acc.)
a .... ersion doso. domallassa,!, become u(d)-pad (Ill). ·jiito
avoid ahhi-lIi-1'ajj (VII) bed st.yya. tllancako
be awarc of budl, (Ill). abhi·(ri),lti (V)
b ... fore p"ralo (ind.: space), pure
away apa (prefix). (p)pa (prefix)
(ind.: time). pubba (adj.)
axle akkho
begin ii·rabh (I)
b beginning adi (mase.)
baby daham (adj.) knowing the beginning aggall11a
back paccha (ind.). (P)Pali (prefix) behave (habitually) (p)pali·pad (Ill)
go baclt 1Ii·t'a It (I). (P) pa! i-lion i (r) ·)'ii behaving ·ciirill
(I). (p)pafi-gam (I) behind Pi!!hilo (ind.: space, gen.),
bad piipa. piipaka. akllsaia. dll(r)- am·ad tva (ind.: space, .. follow-
(prefix) ing "), paceM (ind.: time)
being satto (creature) (cf. .. exis- bordering paccantima
tence H, state," nature," " be ")
fl If born (of) -ja. ja/ika
future being bhalJYo be born jan (Ill) (eaus. = produce)
living being bMto bosom udaralfJ
believing saddha bosom (e.g. own child) ura
beloved piyayita (p.p. of denom.) both ubhaya (pronoun). uMo
below adho (ind., ab!,) (numeral). ubha/o (ind.)
belly udayalfJ in both ways ubha/o (ind.)
bend salfJ-inj (I) (usually sammiilj-) , on both sides ubhalo (ind.)
kujj (I), nam (1) boundary mariyada
benefice byahmadeyyal.n boundary stake kMlo
benefit anisalfJsO bourgeois negamo (town dweller),
benevolence metta 1J8SS0 (member of the hereditary
bent bhogga agricultural-mercantile class: see
best se!!ha footnote to Voeab. 20)
the best brahman- bovine (ascetic) govatiko
better seyya, seyyo (ind.) bowl patto
between antarena (ind., gen.), an/ara boy dtlrako, kumtiro (aristocratic).
(ind.) mtitlalJo (priestly). susu (masc.)
bewildered sammulha bracket (roof) goptinasf
beyond utlari (ind.), PayalfJ (ind.), brahrnan (member of the hereditary
uddhalfJ (ind., ab!,) priesthood) brtihmatlo
bind bandh (I), (p)pa·bandh (I) branch stikhii
bird pakkhin (masc.), saliutlo, dijo breach sandhi (masc.)
(poetic) bread (barley) kummiiso
birth jiiti (fern.) break away vi-o-(k)kam (I)
by birth -jaeea (ad i.) breakfast ptitarliso
class of birth abhijali (fern.) breast thanal!,
give birth vi-jan (Ill) breath patiO
bit (piece) alumpalfJ breathe in a-(s)sas (I)
bite khad (I) breathe out (p)pa-(s)sas (I)
bitterness lia!ulialfJ breeder posako
black lia1;lha, kala bride lJadha (fern.)
blame garah (1), garahiJ bridge setu (rnasc.)
blaze (j)ja/ (I) briefly salfJkhittena (ind.)
blood lohitalfJ brigand dassu (mase.)
blossomed phulla bright accha
blossoming phulla brilliance nibhti
blue nfla bring a-har (I). a-bhar (only p.p.)
board aMi-ruh (1*) bring up ni(r)-car (VII) (nicchiJreti)
boat nava (large, or ship), ulumpo (vomit)
(small) bringing -avaho
body sarfyalfJ, kayo (general and brother bhii/ay (masc.)
theoretical, "substance "), tanu brown klisa)'a
(neut.) build map (VII)
sentient body namarupalfJ building gehalfJ, nivesanalfJ
bold asabha (fern. -I) be built up ci (V) passive (clyati)
bond bandhanalfJ bull usabho. go (mase. and fern.)
bone a!!hilialfJ bundle halapo (bunch, quiver),
boon varalfJ bhatlq.ika (parcel)
bordered pariyanta burden bhliyo
borderer paccanta}o burgher (cf. bourgeois) negamo
be clear to (p)pa-(k)khii (Ill) (dat.) concealed pa!icchanna

make things clear suM (1) (intrans.) conceit mano, uddhaccakukkucca'!J
very clear vippasanna conceivable, is it conceivable? labbhci
climb a-ruh (1·) (ind.) (see Vocab. 27)
not clinging ana/ayo concentrated samcihila (p.p. sa'!J-a-
cloak utlarasango, sa1Jlghci1i (fern.) dhci), ekodi
clod le4rf,u (masc.) concentration samcidhi (masc.), ekodi-
cloth dussa1Jl bhcivo
cloud megho concept pafiiIalli (fern.)
cluster sat;ltjo concerned vyiiva!a
clustered in groups sa1Jlghasamghf- conch sankho
gat;lfbhuta conch blower satlkhadhamo
coach-house vahanagara1Jl conclusion nif.lhci (deduced), pari-
coagulate sa~n-mucch (I) yosana'!J (ending)
coalesce with anu-pa-i (I) (anupeti- conclusively ekan/ikena (ind.)
see Vocab. 28) (acc.) concoct ni(r)-pac (I)
coarse oJarika condition (p)Paccayo (basis), sahav-
cock (wild) kukku!ako yata (state)
coercion dCltltjo conditioned by paJicca (ger.: ace.)
colla te o-tar (1) conduct acaro, cariyci, valla'!J,
collect sa1Jl-katltlh (I), u(d)-har (I) carat;la'!J (good)
collecting -palo (good) conduct carat;la'!J
collection samihita,?!, (k)khandho conduct oneself a-car (I), car (I), lIa//
colour vat;lt;lO (1)
coloured rat/a well conducted sf/avanl
column Ihambho conducting -vallin
combination sa1Jlkhiif'o (see Vocab. 26) confidence saddhti, pasdclo
come a-gam (1). a-yd (1), d-i (I) confident visarada, ekamsa
(poetic) confident in pasanna .
having come agan/va (ger.) confined sambadha
each time it came aga/agala1Jl (ind.) confiscation jani (fern.)
coming agamana,?!, cigamo conform (to a rule or way of life)
come back out (p)pali-u(d)-lar (I) sa'!J-a-da (lII)
come out from u(d)-(!)fha (1) confound (it) I dhi(r) (ind., ace., or
comfortable phasu nom.)
command dt;la (caus.) confused akula
commerce vat;lijjii confusion vikkhepo
commodity pa1;iiya'!J congenial pes ala
common pOlhuJjanika connected sa'!Jhila (p.p.sa'!J-dha)
community sa'!Jgho connection sa,?!yojana'!J
compassion anukampii, karllt;la in this/that connection idha (ind.),
be compassionate, have compassion latlha (ind.), la lp-a (ind.)
(on = acc.) anu-kamp (I) conquer abhi-vi-ji (V), ji (I), aMi-
complain anu-(I)lhu (V) bhrl (1)
complete aparisesa, asesa conqueror abhibhrl (masc.)
completed ni!!hita conscience hiri (fern.)
completely sabbaso (ind.), samalta'!J conscious sampajana
(ind.). sabbena sabba'!J (ind.) be conscious of vi-(n)fia (V)
complexion pokkharala consciousness vififiat;la'!J, sampajall-
comprehend (p)pa!i-vidh (Ill) na,?,
comprehension pa!ivcdho consecrated abhisilla (p. p. abM-sic (Il))
with one's comrades yalhcisambhattal.n consecration abhiseko
held dearpiyayila (p.p. of denom.) descend into o-(k)kam (I)
my dear t (familiar) samma (ind.) describe 4-cilillh (1)
dead man peto description adhivutti (fern.)
death aghalana1ta deserve arah (1)
deathless ama/a designation adhillacanalT\, $amaihla
debate vada, (p)pavtIda desire pari-Ias (Ill), is(<<) (I), aMiJJh4,
decay (p)pa-Iui (Ill), paloko tatlhtl, rtIlo
deceive vane (VII) desiring stlpehha
decided eka1!lsa desirous atthiM,
declare (p)pa-(ii)iiap (VII), abhi-ni(r)- despair up4yaso
dis (1·) despise ati-man (Ill), pari-Ma (I)
decline pariJadni (fern .) destiny lati (fem.) (in general, any
decrease parihani (fern .) future existence)
decry (p)pa!i-(k)lius (I) Destiny niyati (fern.) (inevitable, in
deduced p(lriytIhata sense of determinists)
deducing lakkin- evil destiny duggati (fern.)
deducer talikin- (as masc. noun) good destiny sUlali (fern.)
deduction lallka destroying n4sana'1', samarambllo
deer migo destruction IIlniiso, ,hatea, ghalo
defame pari-bhas (1) detached upe(k)khaka
defeat ji (I) detachment upe(It)khll
defend one's thesis sa1!l-ptJy (I) determination pa,;lidhi (masc.)
become defiled sa1!l-liilis (Ill) develop blla (1) caus.
defilement sa'1'kileso developedparif./ala (p.p. parj-nam (I))
definite eka'1'sQ developing -lIalt,n
definitely eka'1'sena (ind .), lu eva development bMllana'1l
(ind. : follows a word to be devoted to -bahula (at end of com-
strongly emphasized) pound)
definition lakliha!;la1!l devour Makkh (VII), l1Ias (I)
degradation 01141'0 devoured gllasta (p.p. Ihas)
deity devatti dexterous padallkh1f./a
delicate sukumiJra dialogue sultalT\
delicious paf./.ta did? api (ind.), ka"i (ind.)
delight sa'1'-(p)pa-flalT\s . (VII) (tran- die (dice) akliho
sitive) die mar (II I)
delight in ram (I) (poetic) difference lIemallatcJ
be delighted rani (I) different: the ... is a different thing
delightful ramatl'ya, paf./fta, ramma from the... (Iihla ... aiina • , •
(poetic) (pronouns)
delusion moho difficult du(r) - (prefix)
demerit apunllalT\ difficulty IticchalT\, Itasira'1'
demon yakllho diffident allisdrada
denomination salT\khy4 diffuse vikkhitta
depending on parayana, upaniS$iiya dig up u(d)-har (I)
(ger. of upa-ni-(s)sf), nissdya (ger. of digest pari-nam caus. (parit\4m-)
ni-(s)s' (I)), agamma (ger. a-lam) digestion parit\cJmo
deploying -vattin diligence appam4do
deportment 4kappo diminish ha (I)
depressed dummana direction dis4, in any direction:
depression"domanassalT\ samanlcJ (ind.), intermediate: an"-
derive upa-ni(r)-vatl (1) disa, in all "directions: anudisa'1l
descend o-ruh (I) (ind.)
drinking water piinfya11t eighty-four ca/u,.iisfli (fern.)

drip (p)pa-(g)gha" (I) either vii (ind., enclitic)
drive pes (Vll) elated IIdagga
.. drive" (= desire) la~hd elation ubbilavilattalfl, somanassat!!
driving away apanildana11t (poetic) elder (monk) /he,o
drop ni-tal caus. elder jellha, maha/la/io
dropping -piilo eldest je!!ha
drug bhesajja11t elect salfl-man (VI)
drum pat)avo element dhlilu (fern.), mahaMalo,
drunk madhuraka, pipilsa dhammo
drunkard pipiisa elephant niigo
dry sukkha she-elephant naU/linill4
dry land Ihalat!! elevated mahaggala .
in due course anllpubbena (ind .) eleven ektidasa (Rum.)
dull mat/da eliminate pari-(k)hhf (Ill)
dullness mandatta11t having eliminated vineyya (ger.)
dung glltho be eliminated pari-ha (I) passive, ha
duration (!)!hili (fern.) (I)
dust pa1!lSl< (masc.), rajas- embrace pari(> pali)-(s)saj I (I),
duty karattfya11t, vattalfl (s)saj I (I)
dwell vi-har (I), (p)pa/i-vas (I) emigrate u(d)-(mha (I)
dwell in a-vas (I) emotional salflvejanfya
dwelling iivasa/ho (place, building). emperor cakkavalli (masc.)
iivaso (-- in), vihciro (mode of life) empty suiilla
dwelling place iJvasalho (building). encircled pariyanla
viiso (temporary camp, etc.) encompassing pariya (adj.), paricca
dye rajana11t (gerund)
dysentery pakkhandik4 end ni-rudh (Ill). upa-,udh (UI). anto
the end (future) apclrtsnto
e come to an end pal"i-hll (1) pass.
bring to an end pari-M (I) t<\us.
each one eIIameka (pronoun) ending pariyosiJna11t (conclusion)
eager ussuka be endowed with sa11t-anu-ll-gam (I).
be eager ussukka/i (denom.) salfl-pad (Ill)
eagerness ussukkalfl end quote ti (ind.), (emphasizing one
ear sola11t (esp. as sense of hearing) word or expression :) Iveva (ind.)
earlier purima enduring addhaniya
earth Palhavl (the -. the element -), enemy paccallhiko
bhumi (fern.) (ground). cnama. energy viriyalfl, sa11th/raro (see Vocab.
mah' (poetic) 26), alappo (ascetic energy which
east puratlhd (ind.) burns up defilements and purifies .
easy sukara the faculties), tejas-
eat khad (I), pa"j·bhuj (Il), bhakllh energetic d/apin (ascetic)
(VII) engage in (P)pali-pad (UI)
eating -Mak""a enjoy anu-Mu (I), pari-bhuj (11),
eclipse -(g)giJho abhi-ram (I) (elevated, with loc.)
educable damma enjoying bnogin. abhirata (p.p. abhi-
eight allha (num.) ram)
eighteen allhadasa (num.) enjoyment /iMogo. sukhallika, IIss/ido.
eight days allhahalfl raso
having eight factors tl/lnatlgilla enjoy oneself pal"i-car (I) caus.
eightyaslti (fern.) enlightened sambuddha, buddha
English-Pali Vocabulary 425
become enlightened abhi-satfl-budh examine sacchi-kar (VI)
(Ill) examination anuyogo
attain enlightenment abhi-satfl-budh exceedingly ati- (prefix to adjectives,
(1lI) poetic)
enlightenment bodhi (fem .), salnbodhi excellence lakkharza~
(fem.), sambodho excellent abhikkanta, parzlta, ariya,
complete enlightenment salnbodhi vara (poetic)
(fem.) excellent I di,l!hil (ind.)
enough (I) alatfl (ind.) except (I)!hii (I) caus.
enter (p)pa-vis (1-), vis (1-) except for annatra (ind., ins., dat., or
enter into upa-satfl -pad (Ill) ab!,)
entertain sal-Ilar (VI) exccss mado
entertainment sahkaro excessive a/ivela, ba/ha
entire keuala, sabba (pronoun) excessively ativelatfl (ind.)
entrance upasampadil exchange grectings with satfl-mud (I)
enumeration satflllhyil (preceded by ins. and ·saddhitfl)
envelop pari-o-nah (Il) (pariyonan- excite satfl-u(d)-tij (VII)
dhali) . be excited rani (I)
envisage satfl-anu-pass (I) exciting rajanfya
equal to sama excluded (false) mogha
equally samal!l (ind.) without excluding anyone abahira,.n
equanimity upe(k)khil (ind.)
equivocation vikkhepo excogitated vicarila (p.p. of caus.
erect (mhil (I) caus., uiu vi-car (I))
erratically ayoniso (ind.) excrement karfsatfl
erroneous mogha execution vadho
escape ati-va/l (I) exegete vlmatflsin- (as masc. noun)
escaping nissakkana'!I (not escaping: exercise vi-ii-yaln (I) (vilyama/i),
anatlta) viiyiimo
establish U)!hii. (I) caus. take exercise (walking) (k)kam (I)
etc. pe intensive
eternal sassata exert (p)pa-dhii (1)
eternal thing sassali (fem.) exertion padhiina'J'l
eternity sassati (fem.) exhaust (k)kM (Ill), pari-(k)k'" (Ill),
eternally sassatisama~1 (ind.) pari-ii-dil (III)
even antamaso (ind.: merely, mere), exhaustion (k)khayo
sama (adj.: not uneven, equal), pi exhausted by heat ahhitalla
(ind. : too), (s)su (ind.), (s)sudatfl exhort satfl-ii-dii (I) caus.
(ind .) exist upa-Iabh (I) pass., as (I), blla (1)
evening saya~lho existing san/-
in the evening sayatfl (ind.) existence sat/a/tatfl, bhavo, nivilso
evening meal sayamilso expand tan (VI)
ever Ilada ci (i nd.) expect (Plpafi-ii-sis (Il), cf. also
everywhere sabbadhi (ind .) labbhci (ind .) (Vocab. 27)
evil papa, du!!"a , apuiiliatfl expectation ape(k)khii
evil destiny duggati (fem .) experience (p)pa!i-satfl-vid (VU), anu-
evolve vi-va/! (I) bhu (1). sacchi-kar (VI), satfl-(iI)flii
evolution viva!!a~ (V), vedayila~. sacchikiriyii
speak with exaltation udiineti experiencing pa!isatflvedin-, pajisa'J'l-
(denom.) lJeda11a
exalted siimukka~saka, ariya expert abhiyogin
exalted utterance udanatfl explain lJi-ii-kar (VI) , ni(r)-velh (VII)
explanation veyycika,.at.taft\ father pitar (masc.)
exploit adhi-4-vas (I) fear bhayaft\ • . 4sankd. o/tappatfl (of
expression (verbal) akkharaft\. vyarl- blame)
janatfl. adhillutti (fern.) feast satfl-(p)pa-lIa, (VII) (transitive)
external bahi,a feature dUro
extinction atthagamo. nibbdnaft\ feeding on -bhakkha
attain extinction pari-ni(')-lId (I) or having fed bhojetlla (ger .• transitive)
(Ill) feel (P)Pali-satfl-lIid (VII). lIid (VII)
become extinguished ni(r)-va (Ill) feeling pajisaft\lIedin-. paJisatfllledana
extinguishing nibbuti (fern.) fellow -feeling muditd (joyful)
extract (liquids) su (1) ferry titthatfl
extreme an/o. ehan/a fetch d-ha, (1)
exultation ubbildvi/attaft\ fetter bandhanaft\
eye akkhi (neut.), cakkhu (neut.) (esp. fever cilariko
as sense of sight), nayanaft\ (poetic). fickle lola
loeanaft\ (poetic) fie I dlli(r) (ind .• ace .• or nom)
having eyes cakkhumant- fief bf'ahmadeyyaft\
field khettal!'
f fierce eat.tc!a
facing abhimuhha. purahhha/va (ger.). fifteen pa1;l1;larasa (num.)
purahhhata (p.p. pu,a(s)-ka,) fifth paiieama
in fact kira (ind., enclitic) fifty paiiiiasd (fem. or -a neut.)
factor ariga1.n filament kiiljallllhatfl
faculty indriyatfl fill with pari-bha (I) caus.
failed vipanna, apa,.addha film sanlilnakatfl
failure vipatti (fern .) finally ekanlikena (ind.)
fair subha find labh (1). vid (Il) (poetic)
fall down ni-pat (I) find out (rl)n4 (V)
fall from eu (1) fine sullhuma (subtle)
fall upon upa-(k)kam (1) finger anguli (fem.)
falling upon samarambho fingernail nallho
fallen into palipanna (p.p. pari-pad finish tlreti (denom.)
(Ill» finite anta, anlavant-. pamiJt.takala
false mogha fire aggi (masc.)
falsehood musd firewood "aI!hatfl
fame kitti (fern.) firm da/ha
fan vfj (1) be firm gddh (1)
as far · as ydva (ind.). yavatd (ind.). firm as a pillar esikallhdyin-
ycivataka (fern. -ikd) first tdva (ind.)
as . far as one wishes ydvatiecha//I",. . first (numeral) pa!hama
(ind.) firstly palhamatfl (ind.)
from far dard (ind.) at first pure (ind.)
far from arakd (ind .• ab!.) fist mu!!hi (mase.)
not far avid~,e (ind.) five paiiea (num.)
farmer lIesso fixed dhuva
fast sfghatfl (ind.. repeated - very fix in sam-app (VII)
fast) flax Moma",
fate gati (fern.) (in general. any future flee ni(r)-pat (1)
existence, result of actions) flesh maft\S4tf1
a bad fate duggati (fern.) flood at.tt.lavo
Fate niyati (fern.) (inevitable. in sense flourish pabb (1)
of determinists) flow sand (I)
English-Pali Vocabulary
fol4 kujj (1) foundations uddapo

fold the legs ii-bhuj W) four calu(r)
-fold -gUtl,,(~), -vidh" fourteen tuddasa (num.)
foliage p"ldso fourth catullha
follow "nu-bandh (I), "nu-p", (I), four days caluha~
(p)pa!i-pad (III) (fig.), "nu-c"r (I) frank pasa!a (p. p. (p)pa-sar)
(fig.) free mut (Il), abbholtdsa
follow about anu-(h)ham (I) intensive become free vi-muc (Ill)
follower uP"llhako (attendant), an- free from vigala-, apagal,,-
vayiho set free vi-muc (Ill) caus.
following anugali (fern.), anvaya (ger. freeing mutti (fern.)
anu-i), "nu (prefix) frequent bahula
as follows seyyathfda~ (ind.) frequently abhi~ha~ (ind.)
fond of -bahufa (at end of compound) fresh h"ritalia
food anna~, bhojana~, dhdro (inc\. friend sahiiyo, millo, iialo, sahh4
general a'nd fig.), bhojanfya~ (soft (masc.)
foods friendliness metta
foods (dishes) khild"nJy"~ frivolity sampha~
solid food kabaJiillldro from that, from these lalo (ind.)
fool bale from this ilo (ind.)
foolish bdla (directly) from sanliktl (ind.)
foot pado, c"ratla~ (poetic) in front purakkhala (p.p. pura(s)-liar).
forbearance tilikkhii parimuliha~ (ind.)
force datl40 (coercion), sa~hharo in front of puralo (ind., gen.)
(natural-see Vocab. 26) frui t ph"la~
having forced p"s"yha (gerund of bear fruit vi-pat (Ill)
(p)1'a-sah (I)) fruitful paliima, opanayika
foreign pa""nlim", bahira full pilra, p"riputltla (also fig.)
foreigner 1'accanlajo full of ayu/" (poetic)
foremost pamokkha fungus pappa!ako
forest araiiiia~, araiiiiaka further pari ma, ullara, utlari (ind.).
living in the forest iir"ii1ialia apara~ (ind.)
not-forgetting asatmnoso furtive visilci
forgivingness kh"ntl future anagala (also neg. p. p. of a-gam)
form sa~-mu"h (I) (intrans.), rupa~ (the) future aparanlo
formed , having form yupin- in future ayali~ (ind.)
former pubb" (adj.), pubbaka, purima future career or course gali (fem.) (in
formerly pubbe (ind.), bhulapubba~ present or subsequent lives)
(ind.). purattha (ind., poetic) (a) future or final state aparatlto
formless ayupin future state abhisamparayo
(good) fortune bhavo
(good) fortune (to you !) bhava~ (ind. g
with allhu and acc. of person) gable ku!o
fortnight a#hamaso gain labho
fortunate sirfmanl (poetic) gamble div (Ill)
the fortunate bhagavanl (masc.) (title gambler akkhadhtlllo
of the Buddha) garland milia
forty callaylsa (fern. or -a neut.) garment vatlh,,~
foul asubha gateway dvaya~
found vidila (p.p. vid (1I). f.p .p. gateway (arched) 10rajJa1t1
vedilabba also current) ; . gather sa~-har (I) .
be found vid (III), sa1tl-vid (III) gathering ilhdro
geisha ga1;liktJ go over to anu-pa-(k)khand (1)

gem ratana,?, go to upa-satr\-(h)liam (I). upa-gam (I),
generate (p)pa-su (1) upa-i (I)
get adhi-gam (I), a-pad (Il I), labh (I) go into upa-(k)kam (I)
getting adhigamo going round paricca (ger.)
get down (p)pa!i-o-ruh (I) goad lultal?'
get into abhi-ruh (1*) goat ajo
get going (p)pa-vall (I) god devo, yakkho, issaro, suro (poetic)
get up u(d)-(!)!hii (I) God brahman (masc.)
getting over visajja (ger.) goer galaka
ghee sappi (neut.) gold suvatltlatr\, jtltarapatr\, hira1inal?'
gift danatr\, deyyatr\, dakkhi1;la, dayo (money), kanakatr\
.. gift to God": i.e. grant of land/ good bhadda (= good of its kind •
villages to a priest of the Drah- repeated = very good). kusala
manical religion brahmadeyyatr\ (morally). sadhuka (proper, doing a
gift by the king rajadiiyo thing well: more often used as
girl kumarika, k .. marl (of the military- ind. : ,..., a,?,), kalya1;la (aesthetically
aristocratic class); a beautiful or morally or both). vara (poetic),
girl: lialya1;l' sant- (usually .. true", sometimes
give da (I) = .. good" in compounds), su-
giver datal' (masc.) (prefix)
give up (p)pa-hii (T) goodness, good (noun) punfia1?1,
give in charge of ni(r)-yat (VII) kusalatr\
(niyyadeti) good at kusala. padakkhi1;la (loc.)
glad muda goodbye (host speaking) yassa dani
be glad .railj (I) _ lIalatr\ mafiilasi (approximate equi-
gladness mudi/a (fellow-feeling) valent in certain circumstances, see
be glorious subh (I) Lesson 12)
glory sttbhatr\ good conduct st4Carita1!l. sflatr\
go gam (I), ya (I), i (I) (poetic), (v)vaj good fortune (see" fortune ")
(I) (poetic) good heavens! vala (ind., enclitic)
going gamanatr\, -gamo, giimin good luck bhaddatr\ (dat .)
go away (p)pa-(k)kam (I) goods bhatlq.atr\
go back ni-vall (I), (p)pa!i-ci-ni(r)-yci goodwill mel/a
(I), (p)pa!i-gam (I) gourd tU1;l4ikfro (pot)
go down to ava-sar (I) govern (p)Pa-siJs (1)
go forward abhi-(k)kam (I) governing -val/in
go on (p)pa -vall (I), iriy (1*) (lit .• and government val/atr\
fig., poetic) grain dhannatr\
go off apa-(k)kam (I) granary ko!!hiigayatr\
go out ni(r)-(k)kam (I) (I' + k > kkh). grant anu-(p)pa-da (I), pabhalatr\.
ni(r)-va (Ill) brahmadeyyru.n
go out to ni(r)-ya (I) grasp (g)gah (V), a-(1i)iia (V) (fig.)
go on (doing) vall (I) grasper (fig.) annatar (masc.)
go home satr\ -vis (I·) grass li1;latr\. babbajatr\ (a coarse
going to -upalJa, paricea (ger.) variety {or rope and slipper making)
going on -carin gratify satr\-Iapp (VII)
go forth ({rom ordinary life to gratuity pabhalatr\
wandering) (P)Pa -(u)vaj (1) great ",ahant-
going forth pabLajja green harilalla
one who has gone forth pabbajilo greet abhi-vad (VII). sa'?l-mud (I)
go on a mission car (I) (preceded by ins. and saddhitr\)
E nglish-Pali Vocabulary
greetings! (sec" (best) wishes! ") he la(d) (so), eta(d), idam-(ayat?!),

grief 50"0 (sorrow), paridcuo (lamenta- amu- (asu), na-, bhavant (his honour)
tion) head slsaJ?l, siras-, muddhan- (poetic)
grieve sue (1). pMi-dev (VII) health iirogyal.n
gross o!iirika heap pll11jo
ground clumlii, bl1l1mi (fern.) hear (s)su (V)
grpundsheet nisldanatrl desire to hear (s)su (desid.), sussusli
group ga!IO, (k)khandho hear of anll-(s)s1/ (V)
in groups sal!lghiisa'!lghin hearer solar (masc.)
grow ruh (I·) hearing savanat?! (action), so/at?!
grow again (p)pa!i-vi-ruh (1·) (sense)
grow old jar (l II) hear! yagghe
growth vira!hi (fern.) " heart" cittat?! (fig.)
guard pari-mkkh (I) heat tap (I), tejas-
guarded gHlla (p.p. guP) exhausted by heat abhilalla
guest a/ilki (masc.) heaven saggo, diva (poetic)
heavenly sovaggika, dibba
h leading to heaven souaggika
habit sat?,khiiro (see Vocab. 26) heavy garu
hail! lIamo (ind., dat.) heir dayado
hair (of the head) keso helot (member of the servile or
hair (of the body) lomatrl working class: see footnote to
half arf.t!.ho (or adj., also spelt addho), Vocab. 20) suddo
uparf.t!.ha (or neut.) hemp S(1)alll
halfway upa44hapa/hat?! (ind.) here el/ha (ind.), idha (ind.), iha (ind.)
hall saId here! ingha (ind.)
hand hat/ho, Pii1)i (masc.), karo hermitage assamo
(poetic) heron kofico
hand over (p)pa-dii (I), ni(r)-yal (VII) hey! re (ind.)
(niyyiideli) high priest purohito
handsome abhirapa, u(1)1)avanl- higher uttam
haphazardly ayoniso (ind.) highest uttama, parama
happen u(d)-pad (Ill) him (see" he ") ena.,. (pronoun, acc.,
happy sukha, sukhin- sg. masc. only, enclitic)
be happy sukheli (denom.) hinder var (VII)
happiness sukhat?! hit (p)pa-har (1)
harass he!h (VII) hither aparat?! (ind.)
be harassed vi-he!h (VII) hold dhar (VII)
harasser he!hako held pat;lihila (p.p. (p)pa-ni-dha)
harassing vihcsii holding -dharo
hard du(r)- (prefix) (difficult) hold on to para-mas (I)
hardship ahi/at?! hold tight gadh (1)
hard task dukkarat?! hole vivaraJ?l
harming upaghiilin home alayo, agaralfl. abbhan/ara
harmlessness avihit?!sii, ahit?!sii go home sat?l-vis (I·)
harsh pharusa, khara take home saJ?l-vis (1·) caus.
harvest apadiinat?! homelessness anagiiriyaJ?l
hatchet viisl your honour, his honour bhallant
hatred vera.!, honour puj (VII), man (VII)
have (often expressed by the gen. honey madhu (neut.), lihuddat?! (wild)
case + ha (I» ii-pad (Ill) (intrans.), hook vankatrl
dhat' (VII) elephant hook at?!ku50
beyond/defying the hook acca'tlkusa immeasurable appamill;la

hope for (p)pali-a-sis (11) immortality ama/a'tl
I hope? ka.cci (ind.) immovable as a peak ku!a!!ha
horizontally liriya1?l (ind.) impatience ussukka1?l
hostel (maintained by a local council) be impatient ussukkati (denom.)
avasalhiigat'a1?l imperishable apariMniya
hostile king pa!iriijan (masc.) imperturbable aneja
hot tal/a (p.p. lap) impossible akaratlfya
house ghara'tl. geha'tl. agara'tl. niv8- imprisonment ubbildhana
sana1?l impure asuei
house-dwelling gihin inaction akiriyatfl
householder gahapati (masc.). incapable abhabba (with dat. of the
gahapaliko action)
how ya/hii (ind.) incline nam (I)
how? kalha'tl (ind .) inconsequentially ayoniso (ind.)
however pana (= but: ind., enclitic). increase (p)pa-var/4h (I), abhi-lIa44h (I)
yalha yatha (-whatever way: ind.) incur ni-gam (I)
how much I (to what an extent) yava indeed kho (ind., enclitic), khalu (ind.,
(ind.) enclitic), u (ind., enclitic to other
how much more (so) pag 811a (ind .), indec1inables, poetic)
ko pana vado (ind.) indefinable anidassana
human manusaka independent paeealla
human being manusso. manujo indeterminate avyilka/a (neg. p.p. vi-
(poetic). manuso (poetic) a-har)
non-human being amanusso become indignant (k)khf (Ill)
hundred sata'tl individual paceatta
hundred thousand salasahassa1?l individually paeea/tatfl
be hungry ghas desid. indolent kusJla
husbandman V8SS0 indulge in (P)Pali-S8V (I), sev (I)
husk Ihuso indulgence patavyala
without husk alhusa inept manda
husked rice tatl4ula'tl ineptitude manda/tatfl
bymn mania inertia IMnalf' (mental), tMnamid-
dhatfl (mental)
infantryman pattiko
I ma(d)- (aha1?ll' - inference anvayo .
idea parivilakko. dhammo inferior appesakkha, Mna, nlea
i.e. yad ida1?l (ind.) infinite ananta
if sae8 (ind .), ee (ind., enclitic), yatfl infinity iinanca'tl
(ind.) influence tisavo
what (now) if ? yan nuna (ind.) influx iisavo
if so alha (ind.) inform a-rue (VII) (dat.), vid (I)
ignorance avijjii caus., (p)pa#i-vid (I) caus.
ignore a/i-sar (I) information vediyatfl
i11 abadhika, gilllna. vyiidhila, du(r)- inheritance diiyajja'tl
(prefix) inheritor dtlyado
illness abadho, gelailila'tl, rogo initiate a-rabh (1)
illuminated abhisambuddha (fig.) injure his (II)
i11umination avabhdso inner ajjhat/a
imagine as upa-sa1?l-har (I) (2 aces.) inscrutable viceyya
imitation anugati (fem.) insentient asailila
immaterial arupin insight abhisamayo, abhiililii. ailt/it
English-Pali Vocabulary 43 1
have insight (p)pa-(t1)i/a (V) jetty tittha'1l
having insight calilihumant- join adhi-upa-gam (1) (adhere to
inspiration pa!ibhdnatrl person/party), anu-pa-(k)kha"d (I)
inspiring satrlvejanfya (anupa.-) (go over to, be converted
instigate (use caus. or agent noun of to)
caus., e.g. : instigator to killghatela, joined sa'1lhita (p.p. s/J'1I-dhd)
(masc.)) joint sandhi (masc.)
instinct satrlkhdl'o (see Vocab. 26) journey eal'ika
instruct satrl-(d)dis caus., aUlI-sas (1) joy pm (fern.), anando, somanassa'1l,
instruction sasanatrl muditii (sympathetic-at well-being
intelligent vyalta, viyalla (alternative of others)
spelling of vya/la) , medhavin, speak with joy ud4neti (denom.)
calrkhumant- joyful muda
very intelligent sumtdhasa (poetic) joyful utterance uddna'1l
intent on pasuta, adhimulla junction sandhi (masc.)
intention satrlkappo, ape(Ir)lIha just dhammika (practising justice).
intermediate majjhima eva (ind., enclitic: 00 only tt), VII
intermediate direction anudisa (junction form of eva)
internal abbhantal'a just now adhuna (ind.)
internally ajjhattatrl just so evam eva (ind.)
intimidation pal'itajjana justice dhammo
intoxicant majjatrl just like seyyathiJ (ind., introducing a
intoxicated madhuraka, sammalla simile)
intoxicating madanfya
intoxicating drink mado k
intuition pa!ibhiitlatrl
invade abhi-ya (I) keeping gaha1)atrl
investigate vi-ci (V), man desid. keeper away niviireta, (masc.)
investigating vfmatrlsin- kill han (I), ati-pat caus.
investigation vfmatrlsQ killing alipato
investigator vlmatrlsin- (as masc. killer han/ar (masc.)
noun) kind (of) -rupa. -vidha
invisible anidassana kindling block sahilatrl
invite ni-m ant (VII) kindling stick a,at,li (fern.)
involve satrl-va/l (1) kindness mcllii
involved in satrlva!!anika king raja (masc.) (reljatl-), mah4reljo
involution satrlva!!atrl (00 great king tt). devo (used for polite
irascible ca1)t/.a address)
the iron age (that of misfortune)
00 00 kingdom ,.ajja'1l. viji/atrl
kali (masc.) kinsman fiilt' (masc.), bandhu (masc.)
irrelevantly al1nena ani/atrl (ind.) (as name of God, poetic)
island dfpO having knocked out !lhacca (ger.
isn't, isn't it ? nanu (ind.), (s)su (ind.) u(d)-han or o-han)
isolated vivilla (p.p. vi-vie (VII)) know (1J)i/ci(V). abhi-(i/)fiil (V). budh
having become isolated viuieea (ger. (Ill), (vid (I), present not used, is
vi-vie (VII) used in caus. = .. inform tt)
it la(d) (1(II.n/lad) , ela(d) , idatrl, amu- knower t,jda (masc.)
(adutJI) knowing thoroughly lIouida (poetic)
known vidita (p.p. vid (U): (f.p.p.
j veditabba also current). vediya (esp.
jaundice pa1)t/.ul'ogo that which is known: ,.., a'1l)
jaw(s) hanu (fern.) make known (p)pa-vid (I) (only caus.)
known as -satttkhiita (p. p. of sattt- leaving nissakkanattt
(k)khii (I)) leaving behind visajja (ger.)
knowledge iiiittattt. aiiiiii (the quality having led ne/vii (ger. Itl)
of. insight). vijjii (body of. science) left (hand. etc.) viima
having the triple knowledge tevijja be left over sis (VII).ava-sis (Ill)
(= the verses. music and prayers left over avasil!ha
of the Three Vedas) length ayamo
let alone (much less) kuto pana (ind.).
pag eva (ind.)
liberating nibbuti (fern.) (from ni(r)-
lacking vipanna va'(I))
lady! ayye (voc.) (polite or respectful liheration patimokkho
address. used also to nuns) liberation (from existcnce)· tlibbana'?l.
lake sara'l' nissarattattt. vimutti (fern.)
lament pari-dev (VII). anu-(t)/hu (V) attain liberation pari-ni(r)-va (I)
lamentation paridevo (or Ill)
lamp pad!peyya/1l. padlpo. pajjolo lie down ni-pad (Il I). si (I)
lance /omarat]'l life jfvitattt. Piil;lo (breath). ayu (neut.)
land khetlattt (field. territory. etc.). (length of. age). "ivtiso (kind of.
fhalat.n (dry land) sphere of. particular existence).
landing place lilthal!1 uiMro (way of)
land-sighting tlradassi all one's life yiivajlvat}1 (ind.)
language niru/fi (fern.) life principle jlvo
lap udarat!1 way of life vihciro
lapis lazuli ve!uriyo .. best" (celibate) lifc brahmacariyattt
large (cf ... great ") thUla. vipltla . lift onto u(d)-sld caus. (1lssiidcti)
last pacchima light (illumination) dloko
at last cirassa/11 (ind.) light (weight) la/m
law of nature dhammo light coloured sukka
lay disciple upiisako (masc.). uPiisikii like (k)kham (1). sadisa (adj.). sama
(fern.) (aclj.). sama,.n (incl.). viya (ind .•
lazy alasa. kl/sl/a enclitic). iva (ind.. enclitic). va
lead SiSal,! (ind .. enclitic. poctic)
lead HI (I) liking kiimo
lead away apa-n! (1) likewise cvam eva (ind.)
lead out tli(r)-vah (I) like what? kfdisa (adj.)
lead to Sal~-Vlltt (I) (dat.) as long as onc likcs yathiiblnrautal!l
leader pari~liiyako (ind.)
leading nrtli (fern.) limb gallattt. atiga'1'
leading to -yalliya. sa'1!vatlanika limited parivafllma. satttkhitla
league yojana •.n (about 4·5 miles) lion s!ho
leaning on nissiiya (ger. of ni-(s)sl (I)) liquor majjat.n
learn ii-(ii)tla (V) (grasp). u(d)-(g)gah litter (palanquin) mila/a.!,
(V) (memorize). (ii)iiii (V) (find out). little appa. appaka (poetic)
sikk" (1) (train) livejlv (1) (be alive). vi-har (I) (dwell).
learned abhitiila. kovida (poetic) vas (I) (dwell). car (1) (conduct
learning sajjhiiyo (studying) oneself. carry on)
learner a1it1dlar (masc.) live among pari-vas (1)
leave ni(r)-kam (1) (r + k > kkh) live in a-vas (I)
take leave abhi-vad (VII). apa-lok live on adhi-ii-vas (I)
(VII) (give notice) live upon. live by upa-jlv (I)
ask leave (of absence) a-pucch (1) make live with vas (1) caus.
Introduction 10 Pali
open vi-var (I) palace P4s4do. anlepura'1f. villlano (of

open apclruta (<1oor. etc.). abbhollcisa divine beings)
(air). pasala (frank gaze) palanquin mililla'1l
opening b/Jedana'1l (unpacking). cidi parcel bha1l4iktl
(masc.) (beginning) park lIyya1la",. dramo
open air abbhoka5a parrot suko
operating (something) -lIallin part paccangalll (of body). bIIago
opinion mata'1l. dil/1Ii (fern.) (share)
opportunity Oka50. k4/0 partridge jfva'1fj'~'uko
opposed milhu pass into sa'1f-(k)kam (I)
in the opposite direction. the opposite pass over ali-(h)kam (I), ali-Iar (I)
way paJipatJ,atfl (Ind.) (ignore)
oppression upap'/ll pass away lIi-o-(II)Aam (I)
or lIa (ind .• enclitic). "lIcillll (ind.) pass away (from a form of exlatence)
orange kllsaya eu (I)
order alia caus. (" command "). ',appo onc who has passed away Pelo
(arrangement) passing away ("vana'1l
in normal or natural order anuloma'1l pass beyond satJ,-ali-(k)kam (1)
(ind.) pass down o-Iar (I)
in reverse order pa/iloma", (ind.) not passing allalfla
ordered allalla (p.p. alia caus.) passing beyond samulihkamo
ordainer sailjila, (masc.) passion rago. kamo. siiriigo
organize kapp (VII). 5a'1l-vi-dhiJ (I) past atfla
origin samudayo. sambhallo. pubbanlo. pastime (p)pamado
abhinibballi (fern.). nid4na'1l. yoni pasture gocaro
(fern.) paternal pet/ika
originated samuppanna (p.p. satfl- path ayana",
u(d)-pad (UI» pay (p)pa-Ilapp (VII) (wages),
origination samuppiido. samudayo lIelana'1l
original aggatlila peace of mind nirodho ,
ornament alanktiro peacemaker satldhii/ar (masc.)
other side pdrima peacock mayuro
tlther lIil11a (pronoun). para (pronoun) peak ku!o
the other"way paJipalha'1l (ind.) peculiarity iikiiro
otherwise alh1alhif (ind.) pedestrian pal/iko
ought IIrah (I) penetrate (P)Pali-lIidh (Ill) (compre-
out ni(r) (prefix). (p)pa (prefix) hend)
ou t of doors IIbbhokasll penetrate with pari-bhl; (1) caus.
outside bahiddhii (ind .) penetration (P)palivedho (compre-
over adhi (prefix). al; (prefix) hension)
overheated abliilalla people lollo
overlord abhibhl1 (masc.) the people mahiijano. jana/a
overturned uikku}jila (p.p. ni(r)-kujj perceive sacchi-kar (VI), S"'1I-(11),la (V)
(I) ) perception sal1,1ol
own sa-. saka, (- child. etc.:) lira. having perception salhlin-
orala. allall (pronoun) perch palillhii
ox yogga", perfect paripIIl11la
perfectly sanllnii (ind.: .. rightly").
p samat/atll (ind.: .. completely")
package Plllo (of merchandise) perfected ala'1l (ind.)
pagoda Ill/Ipa. ccliyal.n perfected one arahant- (rnase.)
pair yalllaklllJt perfection piiripllri (fern.)
I nt,oduction to Pali
prepare (1')1'''-(")"''1' (VII). (p)pal'- prosperity al/Ao
yat (only caus. : pll/'ylJdap,,') leading to prosperity aparihlniya
in the presence of sClmmuua (ind., prosperous phlla
gen.) protect "bhi-pal (Vll). p"ri-IIar (1)
at present ,tara", (ind.) (watch over)
present plUJllata'1' (gratuity). 1'''''"1'- protected 8ulta (p.p. 8"1')
panna (time) protection 8"tli (fem.). sa,atta'1'
presented with sClmappita. (p.p. sa'1'- provide with slImIlHg.-bhll (I)
app (VII» punishment datt40
prevalence vep"lla'1' pupil savdo
prevent var (VU). n'-sidh (1) caus. pure visuddha. anc/alla
prevention n,sedho become pure pari-sudll (111). sudh (Ill)
pride mano. udd""cca'1'. uddhaccalt""- purgatory nirayo
1I"&&a'1' purification visuddlti (fern.)
priest b,ahmatfo become purified vi-sudh (Ill)
young priest m411avo purity parisuddhi (fem.). soceyya,,,
high priest p"~ohito purpose tUlho
priestess b~41tmall' (woman of the the true/good purpose sadallho
hereditary priest class) pursue sev (I) (indulge in)
prime minister purohilo put on top of a·rull (I) caus.
primeval aggaflifa put down o-dha (I); ni-(k)kllip (le).
prince ""ttltl~o. "ajaputlo ni-pat (I) caus.
princess "uma,. (girl of the military- put in order !lapp (VII)
aristocratic class) put out (to sea) adhi-o-gi11t (I)
principle (natural) dh""'ttlo put into (p)pa-(k)lI1tip (le)
in privacy ""hog"ta putting on top of accMh4ya (ger.
probable pd/illatlkha Clli-d-dM)
proceed car (I). vall (1). (p)pa-vatl (I)
process $a'1'IIharo (see Vocab. 26) q
proclaim abM-vad (I) quadruped caluppado
proclaimer pavat/ar (masc.) quadruple calug6u~CI
produce n'(~)-vall (VII). su (I). It-pad quake IIa",p (I)
(Ill) quality BUlla". (sometimes masc.),
be produced abhi-ni(r)-vat/ (1). sallf- dhammo
jan (Ill) special (peculiar) quality IllllllhllltClltt
produced from jdlilla quarrel viggaho
producer janan. (poetic) quarter &al"""abll4go, call1Ulrll
production abhinibballi (fern.), queen devl
IIPpIJdO. sambhavo question paAho
profession sippal1l quickly IIhippll".
proficient abhiyogin quiver phand (I). IIaldpo
profound gambhJra cnd quote Ii (ind .). (emphasir.ing one
prognosticator nenlillo word or expression :) Iv eva (Ind.)
prohibit ni-sidh (I) caus.
prohibition nisedho r
promulgate "(d)-a-"ar (I) radiance obhilso. pabhli
propaganda upalapanatJl radiant allgf,asa (fem. -I)
proper pa!iYtipa. kalla (sound). yalhd- raft kullo
bhucca (real) rain VIIssa'l'
proper time M/o rain down on abhi-(p)pa-vass (I)
property bhogo. siipaleYYlI!fJ. bhoggal1l rain heavily (p)pa-vass (I)
proprietary rights bhogga". rain on ablli-vass (J)
442 I nirodttction 10 Pali
sidelong visdci slander aMi-il-dkkh (I), parj-bhlJs (I),
siesta bed divllseyya paribhdsa
sight rapa", (object), cakk"u (neut.) slave diiso
(sense) slavery dllsavya",
sign nitllitlo slave girl dasf
silent, silently lu"hI (ind.) slave woman dcJsf
silver sajjhu (neut.), rajata'/l slay ati-pal c.aus.
simile upama slaying atiplito
simple ut/anaka slow matlda
simultaneously apubbal!1 acarima'/' small paritla, khudda
(ind.) smear makAh (VII), lip (11)
since a66' (ind. : time), )'410 (ind.: smell ghllna~ (sense of)
cause), yalll (ind.), yasltld (ind. : smith lIammcJro
cause) snake ahi (masc.), sil'iltlsapo
since then lad agge (ind.) snap po'h (VII) (fingers)
sing after anu-ge (I) so Iva", (Ind.), la", (Ind .), lad (Ind.)
singing gfta';' . If so atha (ind.)
single ekaka (adj.) so far ettlllJalll (Ind.)
singleness ekodibhdvo soft vaggl' (usually of beautiful
sir' (polite address to a monk) sounds)
bhante (ind.) soldier anfkal!ho
sir' (polite address by Buddhist solid matter AabaJinhdro
monks to the Buddha) bhadanle some cka (pI. pronoun)
(ind.) someone ekacca (pronoun)
sir! (not very respectful, may express some thing(s) ekacea (pronoun)
surprise) altlbho (ind.) son putlo
(dear) sir' (polite and affectionate my son! lala (ind.. affectionate
address between gods, or by gods to address)
men) mtJrisa (pI. mtJris4) (voc.) soon na eil'ass' el/a (ind.)
sir! (polite address between equals), soothsayer nemitto
bho (voc. of bhavant-lIsed also to sorrow sue (I). soko
a senior person), Ilvuso (ind.) (used sort -rapa
also to a junior person) this sort of Iddisa (adj.), etddisa (adj.)
sir (honorific pronoun) bhavanl of such sort sadisa (adj.)
sit down ni-sld (I) of what sort? krdisa (adj.)
sitting cross-legged pal/allko soul allan (masc.) . jlllo
site of a village gdmapadalll sonnd (audible) upa-!as (VII), $addo,
building site vatthu (neut.) (s)saro
six cha(l) (nu m.) sound (proper) kalla
the six spheres saldyatalla'/l (of the source nidilnal/l. YOlli (fern.)
senses: 5 senses + the mind) southern dakkhi,'a
six th challha sow (p)pa-vap (1)
sixteen solasa (num .) space akaso
sparkling aeeha
sixty sat/hi (fem.)
speak bhiis (I) , vad (I), u(d)-d-har (I)
size pallld"a", not to speak of ho pat/a vlldo (ind.)
skilful dakAlla speak with exaltation, with joy
skilful in padakAhi11a (Ioc.) udaneti (denom. of «dana",)
skin 'aco, chavi (fern.) speaker bhtlsital' (masc.), lJattar (mase.)
skin (film) sanldnaka", callser to speak lliice/al' (masc.)
sky antalikAha"" dkdso (space), divo speak to sa,?,-u(d)-d-ea, (I)
(poetic) speaking vtfdin-
English-Pali VOCablllalY 443
speech bhasila'll (saying), vacana,!, still greater bhiyyoso (ind.) .
(saying, words), vacii (language, still less pag eva (ind.)
action), vac' (language, action; still more pag eva (ind.)
used in compounds) still more so bhiyyoso (ind.)
spent (time) vullha (p.p. vas (1)) stirred up lu/ila
sphere tlyalana'l' stirring sa,!,vejan!ya (inspiring)
spirit deva/a (male as wen as female) stop! ala,!1 (ind.)
unhappy spirit vinipiitiko (reborn in stop ni-rudh (Ill), upa-rudh (llI),
purgatory, or as an animal, ghost va, (Ill) (trans.)
or demon) store sannidhi (masc.)
spiritual mallomaya (" consisting of stores bhatl4a,!,
mind ") storehOuse koUh4giJra'l'
splendid ~U{;ira story kalha
splendid! di!!hii (ind.) straight uju
splendour avabhiiso strand gUl;la'!' (sometimes masc.)
split bhid (11) (trans.), (p)phal (1) stranger anniito
(intrans.) straw palalaJtl
splitting up bhedo ·stream nadiktl
spontaneous adhicca street ralhiyii
spread sa'l'-(I)lhar (I) stretch lan (V I)
spread out (p)pa-(I)lhar (I), saJtl-lan stretch out (p)pa-sa, (1) (intrans.).
(VI) sa'l'-Ian (VI) (intrans.), (p)pa-sar
sprinkle abhi-u(d)-kir W), sic (11) (I) caus. (trans.)
square siilghii!ako strength bala'l'
squat down pari (> pali)-kujj (I) strew sa'l'-(I)lha, (I)
stable viihaniigiira,!, entirely strewn sabbasanlhayi
stake khllo (boundary) strike ii-kul (VII), a-han (I)
stamen kinjakkha,!, string gU1;la'!' (sometimes masc.)
stand (mna (I) strong balavanl, da!ha
stand up u(dH!)!hii (J) strongly vi (prefix)
stand fast geldh (I) study sikkh (I), sajjhiiyo
one of long standing rallallilu (masc.) studying sajjhiiyo
star liiyaka extremely stupid mon"iha
staring visa!a (adj., from p. p. vi-sarI stupidity thinamiddha,!" middhaJtl
start (p)pa-vatt (I) (mental derangement), thfnaJtl
state bhiivo (nature) (mental deficiency)
mental state dhammo extreme stupidity momilhalta,!,
statement veldo style allappo
state of being a wanderer (ascetic( sublime samukkat?l5aka, mahaggata
philosopher siimanila'l' submit anu-yuj (U)
station (!)!hili (fern.) subsist by adhi-ii-vas (I)
station oneself (p)pa!i{> pali)- substance kayo
(!)!hii (I) subtle nipu1;la (reasoning), suklluma
status bhtivo (matter)
stay (!l!hii (1) subversive element kal;lJakaJtl
staying (!)!hiiyin- success sampadii
sterile vaftj ha in succession anupubbena (ind.)
steward khaltar- (nom. sing. khallii, successively apa,tlpa,a'!' (ind.)
acc. khat/a,?I, voc. khatle) such as yad ida,!, (ind.)
stick datlf!o such and such amuka (acJj.)
to a still greater extent/degree suffering dukkha'l'
bhiyyoso malliiya (= ab!., ind.) sufficient ala,!, (ind.)
suffused with sahagala tamed dllnt/J (p.p. dllm)
suit (A)Aham (I) taming damg
summary uddeso tangled 411ula
summarized description tuldeso taste sif (Ill), raso (object), jilJlla
summer ghammo (noun), gimlliAa (sense)
(adJ.) tasting ass4do
sun suriyo tax (religious) bal; (maac.)
sunshade chalta(Aa)1tI teach dis (VII)
superior tfllJhtsakllha teacher iJ&ariyo, salthar (masc.)
supple mudu teacher's teacher p4,a,i,o
suppleness mudu/4 tell Aalll (VII), a-(A}kM (I), (p)pa-a-
supply with samClng'.bha (I) vad (I)
supplies bhatl4alfl ten dasa (num.)
suppose (usual equivalent is simply tend pa,i-'lIr (1)
use of the optative tense: for tendency nDtti (fern.)
.. suppose I were to ..... there is tender maddava
yan nana + opt.) I suppose; territory /llleltalfl, go,aro
",aRRe (ind.) , terror (P)palibhayaltl, ."Mso
supposing? yan "ana (ind.) than (expressed by the abl.)
suppress saltl-u(d)·IJan (1) than this ita (ind.)
supremacy Uhipaltyyalfl, allala that ta(d) (anaphorlc), .ta(d) (delctlc),
supreme anultarll idaltl (deictic), Clmu- (delctic and
the supreme aggo more remote). na-. ill (ind.), yalfl
surely tVIJ (ind., enclitic), l'a (ind., (ind.)
enclitic), villa (ind.), '" (ind., poetic), that III (I.e.) yad idClIfI (ind.)
have (ind., poetic) the (usually no equivalent: see
surpassing lJIi!l!lllnla Lesson 5) tCl(d)
surprising IJcchariya (cf. also labbhif theft tMyyalfl
(ind.), Vocab. 27) then tada (ind.), alha (ind.), at/,a 11110
surrounded by slI"'PII,illitltlll (p.p. (ind.), lalo (ind.), ,;a,all; (ind.), la",
SIIItI-PII,i -11 i,) (ind.) , tad (ind.)
survivor allastsako thence tato (ind.), atha (ind.)
swallow gil (1.) theory dillhi (fern.)
swallow back (P)Ptr/i-4-vam (I) theorizlDg anudill"in-
sweating sedallIJ there tattha (ind.), tatra (Ind.), amutra
sweet mOOhu (adj.), sllla (!od., more remote)
sword sallhaltl therefore lena (ind.), tasm4 (ind.).
sympathy mudilti (with happiness: ta,ahi (ind.) .
otherwise sec" compassion ") thief dassu (masc.)
synopsis uddtso thigh ayU (fern.)
synthesized 'saItlAlaa/a (p.p. 5alfl-II",) thing va/lhu (nellt.)
systematic anupubba (fem. -f) good thing dhClmfno
think gen. + ellaltl ha (1) followed by
t dircct speech, man (111)
take 4-d4 (I) or (m), har (I), I think IIIa/llle (ind.)
(g)gd (V) think about upa-ni(·j)jh~ (I)
taking /ld4naltl third tClliylJ
take away ni(,)-hClr (I) (nfharati) .. thirst" (fig.) tatlh4
take out ni{~)-har (I) (nlharali) be thirsty pu. desid.
take up u(d)-sall (I) (undertake), sa'/I- thirsty pipasila, pipiisin
tz"U-yuj (I1) (cross-question) thirteen le/asa (num.)
talk IIlItha, slIlIapo thirty (/)/i'1l5a (neu t.)
whether yad; (ind.)

whilst anlat''' (ind.)
woman ill'"
womb yoni (fem.). k"cchi (masc.)
who "a(d) (pronoun) wonderful abblauta
who 1 Ail1l (pronoun) it's wonderful dillhiJ (ind.)
which ya(d) (pronoun) a wood IIa"1I11I (" wood" - kaDha"..
which? kil1l (pronoun), kalart/a (pro- esp. firewood)
noun) word pada".
which one? Aalallla (pronoun) words (speech) lIacalla". (sing. col~
which way y~lIa (ind., nom.) lectlve)
white ,uAAa, od41a work AaI' (VI). 1Iamlllanlo. Aam,"a".
white water-lily kUllludal1l worldng -Itaro
w~ole 1t'lIala, sabbtJllaH' world 10110
why? "asmlJ (Ind.), ki'" (ind.), this world ayal1l lolto. iIIhalla'lt.
ltalhal1l (ind.) "PlJrattt (ind.)
wielding power lIosallattiH- living " in the world .. ,iAitS
wife dlJ"o (sometimes -IJ) worthy one arll1l""I- (mase.)
wlld animal 11410 worry "pa-dall (I). IIlIalla1ll1l"al4,
wllderneas lIanllJro llU1I1I uccattt
will ,laanda,- worried IIlIattamalla. lIylllla/a
1 won't alal1l (ind., dat.) worse pl1plYII
win ji (V). ji (1) wrap lie/A (VII)
wind 11410 wrong miecht!
old winnowing basket kattarasuppo wrongly micch4 (ind.)
winter laelllalllika (adJ.)
wisdom pafJfJlJ
wise patt!Jita. nipalta. medUllin
wise man patJ4ilo y
wish 4-"atlll}, (I), 's(u) (I)
as far as one wishes y411alicelaaklll1l year III1$SIlI1l. satttllllCchara".
(ind.) yearned for ablaipattlaila (p.p. abh.-
best wishes I blaallal1l (ind. with allAu patlA (VII»
and acc. of person) yellow plla
wherever one wishes "atthicchallal1l yes 4ma (ind.). ~lIattt (ind.)
(ind.) yoke "uj (Ill). yuga'11
whatever one wishes yad'cchallal1l yon amu-
(ind.) yonder ","ulra (ind.)
wishful a~tlsika you (sing. thou) la(d)- (/IIam). Mallalll
wishing for slJpellha. jigil1lsamIJlla (honorific)
(poetic) you there I handa j~ (ind .• cf. j,)
to wit yad idattt (ind.). ""yatlafdattt you (plur.:) la(d)- (Iumh,). blllwlln'
(ind.) (honorific)
with saddlsil1l (ind .• ins.), sa- you I j' (enclitic) (form of address by
withdraw apa-(k)kam (1) a master/mistress to ' • Ilave
withdrawn lIapakal/Aa (secluded), woman; preceded by handa. "ill.
onlla (removed) etc., or by laulla)
within IIl1tarlJ (ind.,. alltara (prefix) young dahara
without lIill4 (ind.. precedes in8.). young (of animals) susu (mase.)
a- (prefix). ni(r)- (prefix). 11;- (pre- younger. youngest katJiI/ha
Iix). apagata- (prefix). vigala- (pre- youth "ullan (mase.)
fix). vl(,,- (prefix). lIipanll4 (adJ.) . state of youth "obbana".
ABBREVIATIONS
acc. accusative ipv. imperative
abl. ablative lit. literal(ly)
adj. adjective loco locative
aor. aorist masc. masculine
caul. causative neut. neuter
con. conjugation neg. negative
CPI) C,itical PoIj DidUlJUUY Dom. nominative
dat. dative num. numeral
denom . denominative pall. paaaive
deald. desiderative PED PGli-Eflglisft DicliOMry
fem. feminine plur. plural
fig. figurative p.p. put participle
I.p.p. luture passive puticiple pres. present tenae
fut. future pres. p. present participle
gen. gen~tive PTS Pali Text Society
ger. gerund 54. StuUaflfli
ind. iodeclinable slog. slogular
ins. instrumental trans. transitive
intraD8. intransitive vOC . vocative
...
Grammatical Index 45 1
aI/hi 85 collective 61, 97, 160,274
allllo 320 collocation IBB
alt/m 35 commands 35, 87 f.
" attraction .. 87 comparative 123 ft., 252
attribute 7, 9, 14, 17,30,61, lOB, 211 comparison 44, 92, 108 f., 123 ff., 155,
augment 23,31,70, 156,315, 331 f. 1B9, 292
auxiliary verbs 54, 107, 233 ff. complex bahubblhis 155, IB9 f.
avayava 55 complex sentences 48, 'U f., 289, 299 f.
aVlIddll ika 12 compounds 33, ' 77 f., 122, 137 f.,
avyayfbhiiva compounds 255 f. 154 f., 169, 171, 187, 212, 252,
255 f., 270 ff., 335,371
bahubbfhi compounds 137 f., 155, compounding 289 f.
1B7 ff., 212 f., 231 f., 234, 255, 271, concession 291, 294
289 f., 300 conclusive 118
bhagavanl 153 concord 2B9 (see" agreement ")
bhii~lavam 287 condition 87 f., 294 f., 333
bha~le 168 conditional tense 331 ff.
bhan/e 170 conjugation 7, 21
bhiis 316 conjunct consonant 216
bhiiva 42 conjunction 289 f., 300
bhiivanapu,!!saka 116 conjunctive 121
bhavanl47, 170 conjunctive indeclinables 117 f., 289
bhavissantf 54 conjunctive particles (= prec.) 71
-bhi 357 consecutive 292
bhumma 100 consonant 93, 216 ff.
bhuviidi gat;la 10 consonant cluster 15 f.
bitransitivc 18 consonants liable to doubling 11
bound clause 291 context 53, 63, 74 f., 77, 136,237,254,
brahlllan IB4 2B7 ft., 299
briihmat;lo 358 continuing state 132
continuous action 233, 235 f.
candimil 158 contraction 12, 16,21,47,306
car 238 contrast 290
case 7 f, 13 f, 55, 71 convention 250
case-relation 7B conversation 29, 40
categorical 87 co-ordinate clauses 71
ca/u(1') 153 copula 14
ca/ullhf 67 correlative 71 f., 296 f., 301
causal 118 correlative demonstratives 291
causative 68, 87, 209 clmldi gat;la 21
causative conjugation 7B ff.
cause 291, 296 f. dajjii 357
ce 294 dammi 283
cerebral 218 dative case 67 ff., 134, 136, 138, 275
cercbralization 106, 21B, 310, 329 declension 7
certainty 55, 88, 295 deictic 29 f., 231
ch 332 demonstrative 71, 291
chaining 289 f., 300 demonstrative pronouns 29 f., 61,
cha(l) 269 71 f .• 115 f .• 231
chapter 287 denominative conjugation 316 f., 356,
cha!Jh! 55 367, 370
clause 48, 60, 70 ff., 299 ff. dependent words 92, 163, 252
GG·
454 . Introduction to Pali
kiriytlvisesana 116 mudd"an 154

kit 352 f. multiples 273
Aita 251
AitaAanama 251 na 31
A'yUi gat;la 96 t;la 251 ft.
(k)la 375 (t;I)aka 253 f.
IlVi 252 nart! 116
niima 5.60
labbhiJ 304 namarllpart! 333
lab" 316 narrative 26, 29, 71, 88, 170, 235,
It'Ibha 300 287
laAt'Ira 8 negation 31 f.
language 250, 287 negative 86, 88, 98, 106, 108, 135,
leading question 287 137 t .• 169. 189. 304
length of words 30 I neuter 212
lengthened 12. 252 f. neuter of state 116
lengthened final 355 neuters in -(I 113
lengthening of the vowel of a final neuters in -i and -in 121 f.
am 369 neuters in -u 134
lexical 6 nexus 14. 58. 61. 103
linga 6,8 t;leyya 253 f.
locative absolute 103 . ni 22
locative case 100 ff . nf 252
t;I'252
mii 31 f. nidiina 287
maiJ'l clause 71 niddesa 287 f.
man 107 niggahfta 217 f.
manner 292 (t;I)ika 253 f .• 273. 321
mant 252 ni-pad 240
mantu 252 nipata 7, 355
mill'isa 297 nir 22
marker 291 ni(r) 22
masculine nouns in -11 154 f. ni-sfd 239
masculine and neuter nouns in -a nissaAAa 88
113 f. (t;I)iya 253 f.
masculine and neuter nouns in -i niyamato pajiniddesa 71
and -in 121 f . nominal clause 295
masculine and neuter nouns in -u nominal sentences 9. 232, 234
134 nominative case 13 f., 40, 42, 79,
-matta- 45, 271 211,274
mat/a 216 nominativ~ plural 356
meaning 5 f., 250 f., 287 f. nouns 5, 7 ft., 41, 55, 57,60, 251 ft.
meaningful elements 250 f . nouns in -an 153 f., 184 f.
metaphor 155, 371 nouns in -ar 209 ft.
metonymy 330, 365 nouns in -as 154
metrical lengthening 342 nouns and adjectives compounded
metrical shortening 323 with verbs 156
middle 332, 356 noun stems 316
.. middle" conjugation 314 ff. nu 75
missa 46 number 7 f ., 14,60 f., 71, 186,211
missakil'iyIJ 46 numerals 116 f., 153,212, 268 ft.
-mu 356 (t;lJya 253 f.
prohibition 31, 35 rhythmically prominent positions 354
pronouns 7, 9, 13 f., 35, 47, 58, 70 ft ., root aoriat 353 f., 358
75,111,114 ft., 125, 171, 184 ft., 231. roots 6, 135, 218, 250 ft .• 316
234 rudW. gatIQ 122
pronoun atlan 185 f.
pronoun MallaHI 170
ril ", 250
pronouns: personal and demon, sa- 137, 187

strative 28 ft. sace 294
pronominal adjective 71, 74 sa1lassa", 117
pronoun of absence 29 sail 317
pronouns of presence 29 f . salla 186
pronunciation 357 f. sa"a",,,,alla 18, 314
prosodies 218 salli(1l) 255
pubba 48 sa"(") 136, 333
pubba"''',ytJ 48 sallll' 136
puccluJ 287 sa"lui 335
pucchana 118 sa(l) 269
pumaH 154 sa",a". 187
puna(d) 255 slJmdslJ 77
punctuation 288. 299 sa",asanta 92
pu,isa 8 sa",band"a SS; 57
purpose 292 sllmin 55
salflkiJ 118
qualification 291 sa""II"4 8
quantity of the syllable 216 sa",,,,a 329
question 287 stlmplUldna 67
quotation 35 f • . samucclJya 117
san 185
ra 252 sand 316
rajaH 153 sand", -213, 355
reason 292, 297 sanllll(y)a". la,,"III, 161
reduplication 16, 170,218,331.352 f.• san' 169
357 sal 169
reflexive 314 fI., 332 satalfl 117
reflexive pronouns 185 fI. sattam' 86. 100
regret 55 sat" 291
relation 55 ff sayalfl 187
relative 85 script 1
relative adjective 299 second conjugation 122 f.
relative, " bound ", clause 289 secondary derivation 252 ft.
relative clause 70 ff .• 87,291 ff. secondary nouns 252
relative indeclinable. 72 f. section 29, 237, 288
relative pronoun 63, 70 ft., 114 sentence I ft ., 8 t., 71, 73 I .• 112. 117.
remote 231 213, 232, 251, 287 ft.
repeated word 289 f. seventh conjugation 21 I., 35, 54. 79,
repetition 72, 121. 171, 212 I .• 255. 134
274,317 seyyalhd 293
requests 87 shortened 97, 216
respectful address (see .. polite shortened final 355
address ") sid 369
rhetorical 332 simile 189, 293
rhetorical inversion 301 simple sentence 289
460 APPENDIX
EXERCISE 1
The thus-gone speaks The minister sits down

The lay disciple asks The philosopher is th\,is-gone
The man says so The son who is a lay disciple sees
A god is a non-human being The priest approaches
I say so The person is alive
The noble goes away They say so
puriso bhasati mahamatto brahmat:lo hoti

samaQ.o tathagato hoti khattiyo upasaf!1kamati
brahmat:lo pakkamati devo cavati
devo evaqt vadati evaf!1 vadasi
samayo hoti evaf11 vadatha
putto nisidati evarpvadama
EXERCISE 2
The well-gone speaks the

doctrine
The lay disciple brings the
bowl
Human beings desire existence
We go to the village
The philosopher is coming
The thus-gone is well-gone
The priest asks the men
Gods die
They speak (state) an
argument
The sons go forth
The being stays
They ask the philosophers the
meanmg
mahiimattaf11 upasaf11kamanti
purisa mahamatte passanti
464 APPENDIX
EXERCISE 6
You must go, (my) man. Go to where the young priest

Jotipala is. Speak thus to the young priest Jotipala ...
'Yes, 0 King.' ... That man said this to the young priest
Jotipala: 'May there be good fortune to his honour the young
priest Jotipala. King Disampati addresses his honour the
young priest Jotipala ... ' The young priest Jotipala went
to where King Disampati was.
King Disampati said this to the young priest Jotipala. Let the
honourable young priest Jotipala advise He advises
those purposes (objectives) . n 231-2
You must go, Ananda 11 104
Take this I 67
Let the fortunate one come I 179
This is the philosopher Gotama coming I 179
Rebut (it) if you can I 8
Let the well-gone teach the doctrine II 37
Drink! Eat! II 147, 170
Go forward , Great King I 50
They make a pagoda I I 142
You go! I 2 11
nisidatu bhagava I 179

idarp. ahara I 67
etu so puriso I 60
tighatu brahmal.lo I 122
okasarp. karoti I 51
raja et ad avoca: mayalTl gacchama ti I 85
na n' atthi ayarp loko ti vadami I 55 + I 34
tarp. pajaha III 7
ma bhavarp. Govindo pabbaji 11 248
sajjhayarp. karotha II 238
etarp. attharp bhagavantarp pucchatha cf. I 236 and II 93
avam sankho sadd am karoti
J • •
cL II 337
APPENDIX 465
KEY TO ENGLISH SENTENCES
EXERCISE 7
cf. I 75 11 305 III 257

II 154 I 128 III 258
cf. I 71 III 255
EXERCISE 8
II 83 I 122 cf. III 255-6

I 50-1 11 249 II 110
II 84 cf. III 126, 257 III 225
11 284 II 237 I 53
III 6 cf. II 85 cf. 11 84, 87, 198
III 258 (use padeso)
EXERCISE 9
I 195 cf. III 81 II 307

II 352 11 215 cf. 1I 265
I 167
EXERCISE 10
III 71 III 76 11 141

I 60 III 95 11 142
I 69 II 231 II 164-5
EXERCISE 11
I 188 cf. II 146, I 211 III 173

I 63 I 18 ct. I 148 (Yin I 348)
III 255 III 39 II 198
II 16 cf. II 351, III 163
APPENDIX 467
KEY TO PASSAGES FOR READING AND PAll SENTENCES
(All rcfcrcnee~ arc tu Dl/(lIa Nikaya)
EXERCISE 4
11 85
11 230-- I
I 143
EXERCISE 5
11 231 11 252 I 50
11 7S " 233 I 50 I sic I
III 65 I 179 11 288
I 129 I 185 11 292
I 143 III 84 I 180
I 18 I 124
EXERCISE 6
I 231-2 I 179 (lie I 11 147.170

Il 104 III 117 1 50
I 67 11 38 11 142
I 119 I 211
EXERCISE 1
I 18 I 29 I 83
I 18 (sic I er. 111 28 and I 194 III 111
11 100 III 39 11 128
11\ 66 Il 357
EXERCISE 8
11 196 111 73 III 181

I 53 III 183 III 146
III 28 Il 231 11 238
cf. I 222 and 8S I 236 11 43
III 39-40 111 16 I 148
468 APPENDIX
EXI~RCISE 9
11221 III 53 III 266

I 124 111 54 11 93
11 310 I 21 III 6
11 354 11 51 cr. I 179 and III 38
1 214
EX~RClSE 10
11 114 1 8 I 105
I 10 1 137 11 7'3
III 81 11 139 III 255
I 54 11 16
EXERCISE 11
11 130 III 71 I 81
11 156 111 255 I 119
I 196 I 110 I 180
11 87 11 172 11 127
" 232 11 222 I 85
I 187 11/ 75 III 255
I 222 III 117 I 18
EXERCISE 12
11 337 11 185 111 146

11 89 11 216 I 50
11 28 I 55 I 51
III 285 11 356 11 ISO
11 162 III 61 III 43
III 84
EXERCISE 13
11 357-8 184 11 223

11 236 11 21 11 161
III 259 ) 71 1 49
I SO 11 140 I 50
470 APPENDIX
EXERCISE 20
I. 11 21-2 2. III 80.;..6
EXERCISE 21
\. I 52-3 2. III 86-93 3. I 215-6
EXERCISE 22
I 12-38
EXERCISE 23
1. I 220-3 1 238 11 124

2. 11 22···4 11 37 11 162
3. 1I\ 64-8 11 248 11 178
EXERCISE 24
1. 11 72-81 2. 11 2S-9 3. 111 2SS
EXERCISE 25
1. 11 81 - 8 2. 11 30-S
EXERCISE 26
1. 11 88-101 2. 11 41
EXERCISE 27
1. 11 102. 118-21 2. 11 290-313

473
The P~ili Alphabet in Burmese Characters
Initial Vowels
a a 1 I u ii e 0
0
3d 3d')
<;:Q g)] 2 2 18 GJJ'J
Consonants with vowel "a"

ka kha ga gha ila, -il-
e
m @ 0 w c, -
ca cha Ja jha fia,fifia
ID 00 @
Q:(J 2, ~
ta !ha, ~~ha da dha 1).a, J?~ha, 1).9a
~ £l' ~ ~ 0 CID , m , CID
orU"1
ta tha da dha na
0) co 3 G
~
pa pha ba bha ma
0 (9 ~ Y) ~
ya, -ya ra, -r la va, -va sa, ssa

()J , -J q, E CD 0 , 0 ::0 , :J.).)
ha, -ha la
. -m
Cf) , -J ~
-.
Vowels in Combination
ka ka ki Id ku kii ke ko
0 G
. m Gm GaY)
m aY) m 0( a;?
kha kha khi khI khu khii khe kho
0 G
Cl @l Cl Cl
1 ~ GCl GCll
a a 1 I u ii e 0
0
--0 , -1 - -" l Il
G- G--0 , G-1
Numerals
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
:)
J \l r; ~ G '7 Ol (3 0
475
CARACTimES SIAMOIS.
VOYELLES.
~ . q
Initiales. fl ou 11 III fl 11 ,
11 ,
11 LIl 111
Gomhinees. 11
...
-I
.. q
, L- L
"i"
. -.,- ,
.
a li
• i u U e 0
Signe de nasalisation (niggahita).
- 1fl
CONSONNES.
Gu tturales . . . . . fl 11 ~ '11
k kh (f (fh "
;1
Palatales ...... ., tl 11' ~ ~
c • ch J i" n
Linguales ...... ~ flJ N
I
Cl
,h "4 44 ~
Dentales ....... q') tl fI 11 U

, /h d dh
"
Lahiales ....... tl Cl l'i 11 JJ
P ph b bh m
Semi-·voyelles ... tJ 1 -a ~ '1
Y r I ! v
Spirantes ..... ~ ).1
s h

Introduction To Pali

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Introduction To Pali

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

INTRODUCTION TO

A.K. Warder, B.A., Ph.D.

yogad riidhir balfyasf

© Pali Text Society 2005

All rights reserved. Subject to statutory exceptions, no part of this

Printed in Great Britain by

dhammakathika vinayadhnra mnhapniiiin

who ill2.,strates, organ£zes and encourages the sttjdy of Pali

dhiraya mahnpannuya khippabhinnaya dhammakathikaya

heen chosen with idiomatic Pali versions-often to be found in

The reader is recommended at first to hurry through the

The study of early Buddhism will always be the objective of

specialized studies of other investigators. The merit of

Consonants (flyanjana) Vowels (s/I,.a) Pure Xasal

Cerebrals ' ! !h i 411 ~ r, #, J?I .~...

o is like English 0 in "note ", "ode (or, before a double

consonant, more like 0 in " not", " odd "),

In theory (elaborated by the ancient Indian grammarians and

1 .. Derived" here must not be taken to imply a historical process of

I Here" si " is a symbol for any inflection to be described as .. nominative

Zero I Strong Lengthened

the masculine -a declension all are formally distinct; elsewhere

First Conjugation Verbs with Irregular Stems

You ask the philosopher (about) the doctrine

bountiful ", .. the Master" {translations vary: "the blessed

1 J\·.n.-ExcC'pt in the masculine <leelenllion in a and in the present participle

The noun brahma", meaning" God" (the supreme being and

The noun rtijan! .. king ", is similarly inflected in these cases.

upasakaq1 brahmaQaq1 dhareti

differences in inflection also (they correspond only partially to

3rd person IIPasa~kami. " he approached .. IIPasa~kami~su

2nd person flpasaftlkami llpaSaftlkamittha

1st person upasaftlkamiftl lIpasaftlkamimha

The following verbs are inflected in the same way :-

A second form of aorist is taken by verbs of the seventh

3rd person deses;, .. he taught .. desesu",

2nd person desesi dcsitf/ra

1st person dests;", desimha

Similarly inflected are :-

changing irregularly to ka. Several verbs of this group take

3rd person aliasi, .. he made .. aliatfls u

2nd person akasi akaUha

1st person aliasi", akamhcl

Similarly inflected are :-

3rd person allosi, .. he was, .... there was .. allcstl/1t

2nd person ahosi ahlllJattha

1st person ahosi,!1 allllmha

The aorist is used for all kinds of past actions, including

precise demarcations of time relations are needed, participles

I have taught the doctrine

Nom. aha"., .. I " maya"., I I

Ace . ma'fl, ff me " anfhe, ,. us "

SECOND PERSON (stem ta(d))

Nom . tva'?l, I f thou ", u you"

Ace. la'?l }"..""... you"

THIRD PERSON (stem la (d))

Masculine Feminine Masculine Feminine

la,!" ,. her I'

1 The declension of pronouns is very irregular. The forms given as .. stems"

Masculine Femi- Mascu- Femi-

Nom. eso esa

Another demonstrative pronoun, also .. deictic" or

Femi- Mascu- Femi-